README.440-DDR-performance
1AMCC suggested to set the PMU bit to 0 for best performace on the
2PPC440 DDR controller. The 440er common DDR setup files (sdram.c &
3spd_sdram.c) are changed accordingly. So all 440er boards using
4these setup routines will automatically receive this performance
5increase.
6
7Please see below some benchmarks done by AMCC to demonstrate this
8performance changes:
9
10
11----------------------------------------
12SDRAM0_CFG0[PMU] = 1 (U-Boot default for Bamboo, Yosemite and Yellowstone)
13----------------------------------------
14Stream benchmark results
15-------------------------------------------------------------
16This system uses 8 bytes per DOUBLE PRECISION word.
17-------------------------------------------------------------
18Array size = 2000000, Offset = 0
19Total memory required = 45.8 MB.
20Each test is run 10 times, but only
21the *best* time for each is used.
22-------------------------------------------------------------
23Your clock granularity/precision appears to be 1 microseconds.
24Each test below will take on the order of 112345 microseconds.
25 (= 112345 clock ticks)
26Increase the size of the arrays if this shows that you are not getting
27at least 20 clock ticks per test.
28-------------------------------------------------------------
29WARNING -- The above is only a rough guideline.
30For best results, please be sure you know the precision of your system
31timer.
32-------------------------------------------------------------
33Function Rate (MB/s) RMS time Min time Max time
34Copy: 256.7683 0.1248 0.1246 0.1250
35Scale: 246.0157 0.1302 0.1301 0.1302
36Add: 255.0316 0.1883 0.1882 0.1885
37Triad: 253.1245 0.1897 0.1896 0.1899
38
39
40TTCP Benchmark Results
41ttcp-t: socket
42ttcp-t: connect
43ttcp-t: buflen=8192, nbuf=2048, align=16384/0, port=5000 tcp ->
44localhost
45ttcp-t: 16777216 bytes in 0.28 real seconds = 454.29 Mbit/sec +++
46ttcp-t: 2048 I/O calls, msec/call = 0.14, calls/sec = 7268.57
47ttcp-t: 0.0user 0.1sys 0:00real 60% 0i+0d 0maxrss 0+2pf 3+1506csw
48
49----------------------------------------
50SDRAM0_CFG0[PMU] = 0 (Suggested modification)
51Setting PMU = 0 provides a noticeable performance improvement *2% to
525% improvement in memory performance.
53*Improves the Mbit/sec for TTCP benchmark by almost 76%.
54----------------------------------------
55Stream benchmark results
56-------------------------------------------------------------
57This system uses 8 bytes per DOUBLE PRECISION word.
58-------------------------------------------------------------
59Array size = 2000000, Offset = 0
60Total memory required = 45.8 MB.
61Each test is run 10 times, but only
62the *best* time for each is used.
63-------------------------------------------------------------
64Your clock granularity/precision appears to be 1 microseconds.
65Each test below will take on the order of 120066 microseconds.
66 (= 120066 clock ticks)
67Increase the size of the arrays if this shows that you are not getting
68at least 20 clock ticks per test.
69-------------------------------------------------------------
70WARNING -- The above is only a rough guideline.
71For best results, please be sure you know the precision of your system
72timer.
73-------------------------------------------------------------
74Function Rate (MB/s) RMS time Min time Max time
75Copy: 262.5167 0.1221 0.1219 0.1223
76Scale: 258.4856 0.1238 0.1238 0.1240
77Add: 262.5404 0.1829 0.1828 0.1831
78Triad: 266.8594 0.1800 0.1799 0.1802
79
80TTCP Benchmark Results
81ttcp-t: socket
82ttcp-t: connect
83ttcp-t: buflen=8192, nbuf=2048, align=16384/0, port=5000 tcp ->
84localhost
85ttcp-t: 16777216 bytes in 0.16 real seconds = 804.06 Mbit/sec +++
86ttcp-t: 2048 I/O calls, msec/call = 0.08, calls/sec = 12864.89
87ttcp-t: 0.0user 0.0sys 0:00real 46% 0i+0d 0maxrss 0+2pf 120+1csw
88
89
902006-07-28, Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>
91
README.AMCC-eval-boards-cleanup
1---------------------------------------------------------------------
2Cleanup of AMCC eval boards (Walnut/Sycamore, Bubinga, Ebony, Ocotea)
3---------------------------------------------------------------------
4
5Changes to all AMCC eval boards:
6--------------------------------
7
8o Changed u-boot image size to 256 kBytes instead of 512 kBytes on most
9 boards.
10
11o Use 115200 baud as default console baudrate.
12
13o Added config option to use redundant environment in flash. This is also
14 the default setting. Option for environment in nvram is still available
15 for backward compatibility.
16
17o Merged board specific flash drivers to common flash driver:
18 board/amcc/common/flash.c
19
20
21Sycamore/Walnut (one port supporting both eval boards):
22-------------------------------------------------------
23
24o Cleanup to allow easier "cloning" for different (custom) boards:
25
26 o Moved EBC configuration from board specific asm-file "init.S"
27 using defines in board configuration file. No board specific
28 asm file needed anymore.
29
30
31August 01 2005, Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>
32
README.Heterogeneous-SoCs
1DSP side awareness for Freescale heterogeneous multicore chips based on
2StarCore and Power Architecture
3===============================================================
4powerpc/mpc85xx code ve APIs and function to get the number,
5configuration and frequencies of all PowerPC cores and devices
6connected to them, but it didnt have the similar code ofr HEterogeneous
7SC3900/DSP cores and such devices like CPRI, MAPLE, MAPLE-ULB etc.
8
9Code for DSP side awareness provides such functionality for Freescale
10Heterogeneous SoCs which are chasis-2 compliant like B4860 and B4420
11
12As part of this feature, following changes have been made:
13==========================================================
14
151. Changed files:
16=================
17- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc85xx/cpu.c
18
19Code added in this file to print the DSP cores and other device's(CPRI,
20MAPLE etc) frequencies
21
22- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc85xx/speed.c
23
24Added Defines and code to extract the frequncy information for all
25required cores and devices from RCW and System frequency
26
27- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xxx/cpu.c
28
29Added API to get the number of SC cores in running system and Their BIT
30MASK, similar to the code written for PowerPC
31
32- arch/powerpc/include/asm/config_mpc85xx.h
33
34Added top level CONFIG to identify presence of HETEROGENUOUS clusters
35in the system and CONFIGS for SC3900/DSP components
36
37- arch/powerpc/include/asm/processor.h
38- include/common.h
39
40Added newly added Functions Declaration
41
42- include/e500.h
43
44Global structure updated for dsp cores and other components
45
462. CONFIGs ADDED
47================
48
49CONFIG_HETROGENOUS_CLUSTERS - Define for checking the presence of
50 DSP/SC3900 core clusters
51
52CONFIG_SYS_FSL_NUM_CC_PLLS - Define for number of PLLs
53
54Though there are only 4 PLLs in B4, but in sequence of PLLs from PLL1 -
55PLL5, PLL3 is Reserved(as mentioned in RM), so this define contains the
56value as 5 not 4, to iterate over all PLLs while coding
57
58CONFIG_SYS_MAPLE - Define for MAPLE Baseband Accelerator
59CONFIG_SYS_CPRI - Define for CPRI Interface
60CONFIG_PPC_CLUSTER_START - Start index of ppc clusters
61CONFIG_DSP_CLUSTER_START - Start index of dsp clusters
62
63Following are the defines for PLL's index that provide the Clocking to
64CPRI, ULB and ETVE components
65
66CONFIG_SYS_CPRI_CLK - Define PLL index for CPRI clock
67CONFIG_SYS_ULB_CLK - Define PLL index for ULB clock
68CONFIG_SYS_ETVPE_CLK - Define PLL index for ETVPE clock
69
703. Changes in MPC85xx_SYS_INFO Global structure
71===============================================
72
73DSP cores and other device's components have been added in this structure.
74
75freq_processor_dsp[CONFIG_MAX_DSP_CPUS] - Array to contain the DSP core's frequencies
76freq_cpri - To store CPRI frequency
77freq_maple - To store MAPLE frequency
78freq_maple_ulb - To store MAPLE-ULB frequency
79freq_maple_etvpe - To store MAPLE-eTVPE frequency
80
814. U-BOOT LOGS
82==============
834.1 B4860QDS board
84 Boot from NOR flash
85
86U-Boot 2014.07-00222-g70587a8-dirty (Aug 07 2014 - 13:15:47)
87
88CPU0: B4860E, Version: 2.0, (0x86880020)
89Core: e6500, Version: 2.0, (0x80400020) Clock Configuration:
90 CPU0:1600 MHz, CPU1:1600 MHz, CPU2:1600 MHz, CPU3:1600 MHz,
91 DSP CPU0:1200 MHz, DSP CPU1:1200 MHz, DSP CPU2:1200 MHz, DSP CPU3:1200 MHz,
92 DSP CPU4:1200 MHz, DSP CPU5:1200 MHz,
93 CCB:666.667 MHz,
94 DDR:933.333 MHz (1866.667 MT/s data rate) (Asynchronous), IFC:166.667 MHz
95 CPRI:600 MHz
96 MAPLE:600 MHz, MAPLE-ULB:800 MHz, MAPLE-eTVPE:1000 MHz
97 FMAN1: 666.667 MHz
98 QMAN: 333.333 MHz
99
100CPUn - PowerPC core
101DSP CPUn - SC3900 core
102
103Shaveta Leekha(shaveta@freescale.com)
104Created August 7, 2014
105===========================================
106
README.JFFS2
1JFFS2 options and usage.
2-----------------------
3
4JFFS2 in U-Boot is a read only implementation of the file system in
5Linux with the same name. To use JFFS2 define CONFIG_CMD_JFFS2.
6
7The module adds three new commands.
8fsload - load binary file from a file system image
9fsinfo - print information about file systems
10ls - list files in a directory
11chpart - change active partition
12
13If you do now need the commands, you can enable the filesystem separately
14with CONFIG_FS_JFFS2 and call the jffs2 functions yourself.
15
16If you boot from a partition which is mounted writable, and you
17update your boot environment by replacing single files on that
18partition, you should also define CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_SORT_FRAGMENTS. Scanning
19the JFFS2 filesystem takes *much* longer with this feature, though.
20Sorting is done while inserting into the fragment list, which is
21more or less a bubble sort. That algorithm is known to be O(n^2),
22thus you should really consider if you can avoid it!
23
24
25There only one way for JFFS2 to find the disk. It uses the flash_info
26structure to find the start of a JFFS2 disk (called partition in the code)
27and you can change where the partition is with two defines.
28
29CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_BANK
30 defined the first flash bank to use
31
32CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_SECTOR
33 defines the first sector to use
34---
35
36TODO.
37
38 Remove the assumption that JFFS can dereference a pointer
39 into the disk. The current code do not work with memory holes
40 or hardware with a sliding window (PCMCIA).
41
README.JFFS2_NAND
1JFFS2 NAND support:
2
3To enable, use the following #define in the board configuration file:
4
5#define CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND
6
7Configuration of partitions is similar to how this is done in U-Boot
8for JFFS2 on top NOR flash.
9
README.LED
1Status LED
2========================================
3
4This README describes the status LED API.
5
6The API is defined by the include file include/status_led.h
7
8The first step is to enable CONFIG_LED_STATUS in menuconfig:
9> Device Drivers > LED Support.
10
11If the LED support is only for specific board, enable
12CONFIG_LED_STATUS_BOARD_SPECIFIC in the menuconfig.
13
14Status LEDS 0 to 5 are enabled by the following configurations at menuconfig:
15CONFIG_STATUS_LED0, CONFIG_STATUS_LED1, ... CONFIG_STATUS_LED5
16
17The following should be configured for each of the enabled LEDs:
18CONFIG_STATUS_LED_BIT<n>
19CONFIG_STATUS_LED_STATE<n>
20CONFIG_STATUS_LED_FREQ<n>
21Where <n> is an integer 1 through 5 (empty for 0).
22
23CONFIG_STATUS_LED_BIT is passed into the __led_* functions to identify which LED
24is being acted on. As such, the value choose must be unique with with respect to
25the other CONFIG_STATUS_LED_BIT's. Mapping the value to a physical LED is the
26reponsiblity of the __led_* function.
27
28CONFIG_STATUS_LED_STATE is the initial state of the LED. It should be set to one
29of these values: CONFIG_LED_STATUS_OFF or CONFIG_LED_STATUS_ON.
30
31CONFIG_STATUS_LED_FREQ determines the LED blink frequency.
32Values range from 2 to 10.
33
34Some other LED macros
35---------------------
36
37CONFIG_STATUS_LED_BOOT is the LED to light when the board is booting.
38This must be a valid LED number (0-5).
39
40CONFIG_STATUS_LED_RED is the red LED. It is used to signal errors. This must be
41a valid LED number (0-5). Other similar color LED's macros are
42CONFIG_STATUS_LED_GREEN, CONFIG_STATUS_LED_YELLOW and CONFIG_STATUS_LED_BLUE.
43
44General LED functions
45---------------------
46The following functions should be defined:
47
48__led_init is called once to initialize the LED to CONFIG_STATUS_LED_STATE.
49One time start up code should be placed here.
50
51__led_set is called to change the state of the LED.
52
53__led_toggle is called to toggle the current state of the LED.
54
55Colour LED
56========================================
57
58Colour LED's are at present only used by ARM.
59
60The functions names explain their purpose.
61
62coloured_LED_init
63red_LED_on
64red_LED_off
65green_LED_on
66green_LED_off
67yellow_LED_on
68yellow_LED_off
69blue_LED_on
70blue_LED_off
71
72These are weakly defined in arch/arm/lib/board.c to noops. Where applicable, define
73these functions in the board specific source.
74
75TBD : Describe older board dependent macros similar to what is done for
76
77TBD : Describe general support via asm/status_led.h
78
README.NetConsole
1
2In U-Boot, we implemented the networked console via the standard
3"devices" mechanism, which means that you can switch between the
4serial and network input/output devices by adjusting the 'stdin' and
5'stdout' environment variables. To switch to the networked console,
6set either of these variables to "nc". Input and output can be
7switched independently.
8
9CONFIG_NETCONSOLE_BUFFER_SIZE - Override the default buffer size
10
11We use an environment variable 'ncip' to set the IP address and the
12port of the destination. The format is <ip_addr>:<port>. If <port> is
13omitted, the value of 6666 is used. If the env var doesn't exist, the
14broadcast address and port 6666 are used. If it is set to an IP
15address of 0 (or 0.0.0.0) then no messages are sent to the network.
16The source / listening port can be configured separately by setting
17the 'ncinport' environment variable and the destination port can be
18configured by setting the 'ncoutport' environment variable.
19
20For example, if your server IP is 192.168.1.1, you could use:
21
22 => setenv nc 'setenv stdout nc;setenv stdin nc'
23 => setenv ncip 192.168.1.1
24 => saveenv
25 => run nc
26
27
28On the host side, please use this script to access the console:
29
30 tools/netconsole <ip> [port]
31
32The script uses netcat to talk to the board over UDP. It requires you to
33specify the target IP address (or host name, assuming DNS is working). The
34script can be interrupted by pressing ^T (CTRL-T).
35
36Be aware that in some distributives (Fedora Core 5 at least)
37usage of nc has been changed and -l and -p options are considered
38as mutually exclusive. If nc complains about options provided,
39you can just remove the -p option from the script.
40
41It turns out that 'netcat' cannot be used to listen to broadcast
42packets. We developed our own tool 'ncb' (see tools directory) that
43listens to broadcast packets on a given port and dumps them to the
44standard output. It will be built when compiling for a board which
45has CONFIG_NETCONSOLE defined. If the netconsole script can find it
46in PATH or in the same directory, it will be used instead.
47
48For Linux, the network-based console needs special configuration.
49Minimally, the host IP address needs to be specified. This can be
50done either via the kernel command line, or by passing parameters
51while loading the netconsole.o module (when used in a loadable module
52configuration). Please refer to Documentation/networking/logging.txt
53file for the original Ingo Molnar's documentation on how to pass
54parameters to the loadable module.
55
56The format of the kernel command line parameter (for the static
57configuration) is as follows:
58
59 netconsole=[src-port]@[src-ip]/[<dev>],[tgt-port]@<tgt-ip>/[tgt-macaddr]
60
61where
62
63 src-port source for UDP packets
64 (defaults to 6665)
65 src-ip source IP to use
66 (defaults to the interface's address)
67 dev network interface
68 (defaults to eth0)
69 tgt-port port for logging agent
70 (defaults to 6666)
71 tgt-ip IP address for logging agent
72 (this is the required parameter)
73 tgt-macaddr ethernet MAC address for logging agent
74 (defaults to broadcast)
75
76Examples:
77
78 netconsole=4444@10.0.0.1/eth1,9353@10.0.0.2/12:34:56:78:9a:bc
79
80or
81
82 netconsole=@/,@192.168.3.1/
83
84Please note that for the Linux networked console to work, the
85ethernet interface has to be up by the time the netconsole driver is
86initialized. This means that in case of static kernel configuration,
87the respective Ethernet interface has to be brought up using the "IP
88Autoconfiguration" kernel feature, which is usually done by defaults
89in the ELDK-NFS-based environment.
90
91To browse the Linux network console output, use the 'netcat' tool invoked
92as follows:
93
94 nc -u -l -p 6666
95
96Note that unlike the U-Boot implementation the Linux netconsole is
97unidirectional, i. e. you have console output only in Linux.
98
README.OFT
README.POST
1Power-On-Self-Test support in U-Boot
2------------------------------------
3
4This project is to support Power-On-Self-Test (POST) in U-Boot.
5
61. High-level requirements
7
8The key requirements for this project are as follows:
9
101) The project shall develop a flexible framework for implementing
11 and running Power-On-Self-Test in U-Boot. This framework shall
12 possess the following features:
13
14 o) Extensibility
15
16 The framework shall allow adding/removing/replacing POST tests.
17 Also, standalone POST tests shall be supported.
18
19 o) Configurability
20
21 The framework shall allow run-time configuration of the lists
22 of tests running on normal/power-fail booting.
23
24 o) Controllability
25
26 The framework shall support manual running of the POST tests.
27
282) The results of tests shall be saved so that it will be possible to
29 retrieve them from Linux.
30
313) The following POST tests shall be developed for MPC823E-based
32 boards:
33
34 o) CPU test
35 o) Cache test
36 o) Memory test
37 o) Ethernet test
38 o) Serial channels test
39 o) Watchdog timer test
40 o) RTC test
41 o) I2C test
42 o) SPI test
43 o) USB test
44
454) The LWMON board shall be used for reference.
46
472. Design
48
49This section details the key points of the design for the project.
50The whole project can be divided into two independent tasks:
51enhancing U-Boot/Linux to provide a common framework for running POST
52tests and developing such tests for particular hardware.
53
542.1. Hardware-independent POST layer
55
56A new optional module will be added to U-Boot, which will run POST
57tests and collect their results at boot time. Also, U-Boot will
58support running POST tests manually at any time by executing a
59special command from the system console.
60
61The list of available POST tests will be configured at U-Boot build
62time. The POST layer will allow the developer to add any custom POST
63tests. All POST tests will be divided into the following groups:
64
65 1) Tests running on power-on booting only
66
67 This group will contain those tests that run only once on
68 power-on reset (e.g. watchdog test)
69
70 2) Tests running on normal booting only
71
72 This group will contain those tests that do not take much
73 time and can be run on the regular basis (e.g. CPU test)
74
75 3) Tests running in special "slow test mode" only
76
77 This group will contain POST tests that consume much time
78 and cannot be run regularly (e.g. strong memory test, I2C test)
79
80 4) Manually executed tests
81
82 This group will contain those tests that can be run manually.
83
84If necessary, some tests may belong to several groups simultaneously.
85For example, SDRAM test may run in both normal and "slow test" mode.
86In normal mode, SDRAM test may perform a fast superficial memory test
87only, while running in slow test mode it may perform a full memory
88check-up.
89
90Also, all tests will be discriminated by the moment they run at.
91Specifically, the following groups will be singled out:
92
93 1) Tests running before relocating to RAM
94
95 These tests will run immediately after initializing RAM
96 as to enable modifying it without taking care of its
97 contents. Basically, this group will contain memory tests
98 only.
99
100 2) Tests running after relocating to RAM
101
102 These tests will run immediately before entering the main
103 loop as to guarantee full hardware initialization.
104
105The POST layer will also distinguish a special group of tests that
106may cause system rebooting (e.g. watchdog test). For such tests, the
107layer will automatically detect rebooting and will notify the test
108about it.
109
1102.1.1. POST layer interfaces
111
112This section details the interfaces between the POST layer and the
113rest of U-Boot.
114
115The following flags will be defined:
116
117#define POST_POWERON 0x01 /* test runs on power-on booting */
118#define POST_NORMAL 0x02 /* test runs on normal booting */
119#define POST_SLOWTEST 0x04 /* test is slow, enabled by key press */
120#define POST_POWERTEST 0x08 /* test runs after watchdog reset */
121#define POST_ROM 0x100 /* test runs in ROM */
122#define POST_RAM 0x200 /* test runs in RAM */
123#define POST_MANUAL 0x400 /* test can be executed manually */
124#define POST_REBOOT 0x800 /* test may cause rebooting */
125#define POST_PREREL 0x1000 /* test runs before relocation */
126
127The POST layer will export the following interface routines:
128
129 o) int post_run(bd_t *bd, char *name, int flags);
130
131 This routine will run the test (or the group of tests) specified
132 by the name and flag arguments. More specifically, if the name
133 argument is not NULL, the test with this name will be performed,
134 otherwise all tests running in ROM/RAM (depending on the flag
135 argument) will be executed. This routine will be called at least
136 twice with name set to NULL, once from board_init_f() and once
137 from board_init_r(). The flags argument will also specify the
138 mode the test is executed in (power-on, normal, power-fail,
139 manual).
140
141 o) void post_reloc(ulong offset);
142
143 This routine will be called from board_init_r() and will
144 relocate the POST test table.
145
146 o) int post_info(char *name);
147
148 This routine will print the list of all POST tests that can be
149 executed manually if name is NULL, and the description of a
150 particular test if name is not NULL.
151
152 o) int post_log(char *format, ...);
153
154 This routine will be called from POST tests to log their
155 results. Basically, this routine will print the results to
156 stderr. The format of the arguments and the return value
157 will be identical to the printf() routine.
158
159Also, the following board-specific routines will be called from the
160U-Boot common code:
161
162 o) int post_hotkeys_pressed(gd_t *gd)
163
164 This routine will scan the keyboard to detect if a magic key
165 combination has been pressed, or otherwise detect if the
166 power-on long-running tests shall be executed or not ("normal"
167 versus "slow" test mode).
168
169The list of available POST tests be kept in the post_tests array
170filled at U-Boot build time. The format of entry in this array will
171be as follows:
172
173struct post_test {
174 char *name;
175 char *cmd;
176 char *desc;
177 int flags;
178 int (*test)(bd_t *bd, int flags);
179};
180
181 o) name
182
183 This field will contain a short name of the test, which will be
184 used in logs and on listing POST tests (e.g. CPU test).
185
186 o) cmd
187
188 This field will keep a name for identifying the test on manual
189 testing (e.g. cpu). For more information, refer to section
190 "Command line interface".
191
192 o) desc
193
194 This field will contain a detailed description of the test,
195 which will be printed on user request. For more information, see
196 section "Command line interface".
197
198 o) flags
199
200 This field will contain a combination of the bit flags described
201 above, which will specify the mode the test is running in
202 (power-on, normal, power-fail or manual mode), the moment it
203 should be run at (before or after relocating to RAM), whether it
204 can cause system rebooting or not.
205
206 o) test
207
208 This field will contain a pointer to the routine that will
209 perform the test, which will take 2 arguments. The first
210 argument will be a pointer to the board info structure, while
211 the second will be a combination of bit flags specifying the
212 mode the test is running in (POST_POWERON, POST_NORMAL,
213 POST_SLOWTEST, POST_MANUAL) and whether the last execution of
214 the test caused system rebooting (POST_REBOOT). The routine will
215 return 0 on successful execution of the test, and 1 if the test
216 failed.
217
218The lists of the POST tests that should be run at power-on/normal/
219power-fail booting will be kept in the environment. Namely, the
220following environment variables will be used: post_poweron,
221powet_normal, post_slowtest.
222
2232.1.2. Test results
224
225The results of tests will be collected by the POST layer. The POST
226log will have the following format:
227
228...
229--------------------------------------------
230START <name>
231<test-specific output>
232[PASSED|FAILED]
233--------------------------------------------
234...
235
236Basically, the results of tests will be printed to stderr. This
237feature may be enhanced in future to spool the log to a serial line,
238save it in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM), transfer it to a dedicated
239storage server and etc.
240
2412.1.3. Integration issues
242
243All POST-related code will be #ifdef'ed with the CONFIG_POST macro.
244This macro will be defined in the config_<board>.h file for those
245boards that need POST. The CONFIG_POST macro will contain the list of
246POST tests for the board. The macro will have the format of array
247composed of post_test structures:
248
249#define CONFIG_POST \
250 {
251 "On-board peripherals test", "board", \
252 " This test performs full check-up of the " \
253 "on-board hardware.", \
254 POST_RAM | POST_SLOWTEST, \
255 &board_post_test \
256 }
257
258A new file, post.h, will be created in the include/ directory. This
259file will contain common POST declarations and will define a set of
260macros that will be reused for defining CONFIG_POST. As an example,
261the following macro may be defined:
262
263#define POST_CACHE \
264 {
265 "Cache test", "cache", \
266 " This test verifies the CPU cache operation.", \
267 POST_RAM | POST_NORMAL, \
268 &cache_post_test \
269 }
270
271A new subdirectory will be created in the U-Boot root directory. It
272will contain the source code of the POST layer and most of POST
273tests. Each POST test in this directory will be placed into a
274separate file (it will be needed for building standalone tests). Some
275POST tests (mainly those for testing peripheral devices) will be
276located in the source files of the drivers for those devices. This
277way will be used only if the test subtantially uses the driver.
278
2792.1.4. Standalone tests
280
281The POST framework will allow to develop and run standalone tests. A
282user-space library will be developed to provide the POST interface
283functions to standalone tests.
284
2852.1.5. Command line interface
286
287A new command, diag, will be added to U-Boot. This command will be
288used for listing all available hardware tests, getting detailed
289descriptions of them and running these tests.
290
291More specifically, being run without any arguments, this command will
292print the list of all available hardware tests:
293
294=> diag
295Available hardware tests:
296 cache - cache test
297 cpu - CPU test
298 enet - SCC/FCC ethernet test
299Use 'diag [<test1> [<test2>]] ... ' to get more info.
300Use 'diag run [<test1> [<test2>]] ... ' to run tests.
301=>
302
303If the first argument to the diag command is not 'run', detailed
304descriptions of the specified tests will be printed:
305
306=> diag cpu cache
307cpu - CPU test
308 This test verifies the arithmetic logic unit of CPU.
309cache - cache test
310 This test verifies the CPU cache operation.
311=>
312
313If the first argument to diag is 'run', the specified tests will be
314executed. If no tests are specified, all available tests will be
315executed.
316
317It will be prohibited to execute tests running in ROM manually. The
318'diag' command will not display such tests and/or run them.
319
3202.1.6. Power failure handling
321
322The Linux kernel will be modified to detect power failures and
323automatically reboot the system in such cases. It will be assumed
324that the power failure causes a system interrupt.
325
326To perform correct system shutdown, the kernel will register a
327handler of the power-fail IRQ on booting. Being called, the handler
328will run /sbin/reboot using the call_usermodehelper() routine.
329/sbin/reboot will automatically bring the system down in a secure
330way. This feature will be configured in/out from the kernel
331configuration file.
332
333The POST layer of U-Boot will check whether the system runs in
334power-fail mode. If it does, the system will be powered off after
335executing all hardware tests.
336
3372.1.7. Hazardous tests
338
339Some tests may cause system rebooting during their execution. For
340some tests, this will indicate a failure, while for the Watchdog
341test, this means successful operation of the timer.
342
343In order to support such tests, the following scheme will be
344implemented. All the tests that may cause system rebooting will have
345the POST_REBOOT bit flag set in the flag field of the correspondent
346post_test structure. Before starting tests marked with this bit flag,
347the POST layer will store an identification number of the test in a
348location in IMMR. On booting, the POST layer will check the value of
349this variable and if it is set will skip over the tests preceding the
350failed one. On second execution of the failed test, the POST_REBOOT
351bit flag will be set in the flag argument to the test routine. This
352will allow to detect system rebooting on the previous iteration. For
353example, the watchdog timer test may have the following
354declaration/body:
355
356...
357#define POST_WATCHDOG \
358 {
359 "Watchdog timer test", "watchdog", \
360 " This test checks the watchdog timer.", \
361 POST_RAM | POST_POWERON | POST_REBOOT, \
362 &watchdog_post_test \
363 }
364...
365
366...
367int watchdog_post_test(bd_t *bd, int flags)
368{
369 unsigned long start_time;
370
371 if (flags & POST_REBOOT) {
372 /* Test passed */
373 return 0;
374 } else {
375 /* disable interrupts */
376 disable_interrupts();
377 /* 10-second delay */
378 ...
379 /* if we've reached this, the watchdog timer does not work */
380 enable_interrupts();
381 return 1;
382 }
383}
384...
385
3862.2. Hardware-specific details
387
388This project will also develop a set of POST tests for MPC8xx- based
389systems. This section provides technical details of how it will be
390done.
391
3922.2.1. Generic PPC tests
393
394The following generic POST tests will be developed:
395
396 o) CPU test
397
398 This test will check the arithmetic logic unit (ALU) of CPU. The
399 test will take several milliseconds and will run on normal
400 booting.
401
402 o) Cache test
403
404 This test will verify the CPU cache (L1 cache). The test will
405 run on normal booting.
406
407 o) Memory test
408
409 This test will examine RAM and check it for errors. The test
410 will always run on booting. On normal booting, only a limited
411 amount of RAM will be checked. On power-fail booting a fool
412 memory check-up will be performed.
413
4142.2.1.1. CPU test
415
416This test will verify the following ALU instructions:
417
418 o) Condition register istructions
419
420 This group will contain: mtcrf, mfcr, mcrxr, crand, crandc,
421 cror, crorc, crxor, crnand, crnor, creqv, mcrf.
422
423 The mtcrf/mfcr instructions will be tested by loading different
424 values into the condition register (mtcrf), moving its value to
425 a general-purpose register (mfcr) and comparing this value with
426 the expected one. The mcrxr instruction will be tested by
427 loading a fixed value into the XER register (mtspr), moving XER
428 value to the condition register (mcrxr), moving it to a
429 general-purpose register (mfcr) and comparing the value of this
430 register with the expected one. The rest of instructions will be
431 tested by loading a fixed value into the condition register
432 (mtcrf), executing each instruction several times to modify all
433 4-bit condition fields, moving the value of the conditional
434 register to a general-purpose register (mfcr) and comparing it
435 with the expected one.
436
437 o) Integer compare instructions
438
439 This group will contain: cmp, cmpi, cmpl, cmpli.
440
441 To verify these instructions the test will run them with
442 different combinations of operands, read the condition register
443 value and compare it with the expected one. More specifically,
444 the test will contain a pre-built table containing the
445 description of each test case: the instruction, the values of
446 the operands, the condition field to save the result in and the
447 expected result.
448
449 o) Arithmetic instructions
450
451 This group will contain: add, addc, adde, addme, addze, subf,
452 subfc, subfe, subme, subze, mullw, mulhw, mulhwu, divw, divwu,
453 extsb, extsh.
454
455 The test will contain a pre-built table of instructions,
456 operands, expected results and expected states of the condition
457 register. For each table entry, the test will cyclically use
458 different sets of operand registers and result registers. For
459 example, for instructions that use 3 registers on the first
460 iteration r0/r1 will be used as operands and r2 for result. On
461 the second iteration, r1/r2 will be used as operands and r3 as
462 for result and so on. This will enable to verify all
463 general-purpose registers.
464
465 o) Logic instructions
466
467 This group will contain: and, andc, andi, andis, or, orc, ori,
468 oris, xor, xori, xoris, nand, nor, neg, eqv, cntlzw.
469
470 The test scheme will be identical to that from the previous
471 point.
472
473 o) Shift instructions
474
475 This group will contain: slw, srw, sraw, srawi, rlwinm, rlwnm,
476 rlwimi
477
478 The test scheme will be identical to that from the previous
479 point.
480
481 o) Branch instructions
482
483 This group will contain: b, bl, bc.
484
485 The first 2 instructions (b, bl) will be verified by jumping to
486 a fixed address and checking whether control was transferred to
487 that very point. For the bl instruction the value of the link
488 register will be checked as well (using mfspr). To verify the bc
489 instruction various combinations of the BI/BO fields, the CTR
490 and the condition register values will be checked. The list of
491 such combinations will be pre-built and linked in U-Boot at
492 build time.
493
494 o) Load/store instructions
495
496 This group will contain: lbz(x)(u), lhz(x)(u), lha(x)(u),
497 lwz(x)(u), stb(x)(u), sth(x)(u), stw(x)(u).
498
499 All operations will be performed on a 16-byte array. The array
500 will be 4-byte aligned. The base register will point to offset
501 8. The immediate offset (index register) will range in [-8 ...
502 +7]. The test cases will be composed so that they will not cause
503 alignment exceptions. The test will contain a pre-built table
504 describing all test cases. For store instructions, the table
505 entry will contain: the instruction opcode, the value of the
506 index register and the value of the source register. After
507 executing the instruction, the test will verify the contents of
508 the array and the value of the base register (it must change for
509 "store with update" instructions). For load instructions, the
510 table entry will contain: the instruction opcode, the array
511 contents, the value of the index register and the expected value
512 of the destination register. After executing the instruction,
513 the test will verify the value of the destination register and
514 the value of the base register (it must change for "load with
515 update" instructions).
516
517 o) Load/store multiple/string instructions
518
519
520The CPU test will run in RAM in order to allow run-time modification
521of the code to reduce the memory footprint.
522
5232.2.1.2 Special-Purpose Registers Tests
524
525TBD.
526
5272.2.1.3. Cache test
528
529To verify the data cache operation the following test scenarios will
530be used:
531
532 1) Basic test #1
533
534 - turn on the data cache
535 - switch the data cache to write-back or write-through mode
536 - invalidate the data cache
537 - write the negative pattern to a cached area
538 - read the area
539
540 The negative pattern must be read at the last step
541
542 2) Basic test #2
543
544 - turn on the data cache
545 - switch the data cache to write-back or write-through mode
546 - invalidate the data cache
547 - write the zero pattern to a cached area
548 - turn off the data cache
549 - write the negative pattern to the area
550 - turn on the data cache
551 - read the area
552
553 The negative pattern must be read at the last step
554
555 3) Write-through mode test
556
557 - turn on the data cache
558 - switch the data cache to write-through mode
559 - invalidate the data cache
560 - write the zero pattern to a cached area
561 - flush the data cache
562 - write the negative pattern to the area
563 - turn off the data cache
564 - read the area
565
566 The negative pattern must be read at the last step
567
568 4) Write-back mode test
569
570 - turn on the data cache
571 - switch the data cache to write-back mode
572 - invalidate the data cache
573 - write the negative pattern to a cached area
574 - flush the data cache
575 - write the zero pattern to the area
576 - invalidate the data cache
577 - read the area
578
579 The negative pattern must be read at the last step
580
581To verify the instruction cache operation the following test
582scenarios will be used:
583
584 1) Basic test #1
585
586 - turn on the instruction cache
587 - unlock the entire instruction cache
588 - invalidate the instruction cache
589 - lock a branch instruction in the instruction cache
590 - replace the branch instruction with "nop"
591 - jump to the branch instruction
592 - check that the branch instruction was executed
593
594 2) Basic test #2
595
596 - turn on the instruction cache
597 - unlock the entire instruction cache
598 - invalidate the instruction cache
599 - jump to a branch instruction
600 - check that the branch instruction was executed
601 - replace the branch instruction with "nop"
602 - invalidate the instruction cache
603 - jump to the branch instruction
604 - check that the "nop" instruction was executed
605
606The CPU test will run in RAM in order to allow run-time modification
607of the code.
608
6092.2.1.4. Memory test
610
611The memory test will verify RAM using sequential writes and reads
612to/from RAM. Specifically, there will be several test cases that will
613use different patterns to verify RAM. Each test case will first fill
614a region of RAM with one pattern and then read the region back and
615compare its contents with the pattern. The following patterns will be
616used:
617
618 1) zero pattern (0x00000000)
619 2) negative pattern (0xffffffff)
620 3) checkerboard pattern (0x55555555, 0xaaaaaaaa)
621 4) bit-flip pattern ((1 << (offset % 32)), ~(1 << (offset % 32)))
622 5) address pattern (offset, ~offset)
623
624Patterns #1, #2 will help to find unstable bits. Patterns #3, #4 will
625be used to detect adherent bits, i.e. bits whose state may randomly
626change if adjacent bits are modified. The last pattern will be used
627to detect far-located errors, i.e. situations when writing to one
628location modifies an area located far from it. Also, usage of the
629last pattern will help to detect memory controller misconfigurations
630when RAM represents a cyclically repeated portion of a smaller size.
631
632Being run in normal mode, the test will verify only small 4Kb regions
633of RAM around each 1Mb boundary. For example, for 64Mb RAM the
634following areas will be verified: 0x00000000-0x00000800,
6350x000ff800-0x00100800, 0x001ff800-0x00200800, ..., 0x03fff800-
6360x04000000. If the test is run in power-fail mode, it will verify the
637whole RAM.
638
639The memory test will run in ROM before relocating U-Boot to RAM in
640order to allow RAM modification without saving its contents.
641
6422.2.2. Common tests
643
644This section describes tests that are not based on any hardware
645peculiarities and use common U-Boot interfaces only. These tests do
646not need any modifications for porting them to another board/CPU.
647
6482.2.2.1. I2C test
649
650For verifying the I2C bus, a full I2C bus scanning will be performed
651using the i2c_probe() routine. If a board defines
652CONFIG_SYS_POST_I2C_ADDRS the I2C test will pass if all devices
653listed in CONFIG_SYS_POST_I2C_ADDRS are found, and no additional
654devices are detected. If CONFIG_SYS_POST_I2C_ADDRS is not defined
655the test will pass if any I2C device is found.
656
657The CONFIG_SYS_POST_I2C_IGNORES define can be used to list I2C
658devices which may or may not be present when using
659CONFIG_SYS_POST_I2C_ADDRS. The I2C POST test will pass regardless
660if the devices in CONFIG_SYS_POST_I2C_IGNORES are found or not.
661This is useful in cases when I2C devices are optional (eg on a
662daughtercard that may or may not be present) or not critical
663to board operation.
664
6652.2.2.2. Watchdog timer test
666
667To test the watchdog timer the scheme mentioned above (refer to
668section "Hazardous tests") will be used. Namely, this test will be
669marked with the POST_REBOOT bit flag. On the first iteration, the
670test routine will make a 10-second delay. If the system does not
671reboot during this delay, the watchdog timer is not operational and
672the test fails. If the system reboots, on the second iteration the
673POST_REBOOT bit will be set in the flag argument to the test routine.
674The test routine will check this bit and report a success if it is
675set.
676
6772.2.2.3. RTC test
678
679The RTC test will use the rtc_get()/rtc_set() routines. The following
680features will be verified:
681
682 o) Time uniformity
683
684 This will be verified by reading RTC in polling within a short
685 period of time (5-10 seconds).
686
687 o) Passing month boundaries
688
689 This will be checked by setting RTC to a second before a month
690 boundary and reading it after its passing the boundary. The test
691 will be performed for both leap- and nonleap-years.
692
6932.2.3. MPC8xx peripherals tests
694
695This project will develop a set of tests verifying the peripheral
696units of MPC8xx processors. Namely, the following controllers of the
697MPC8xx communication processor module (CPM) will be tested:
698
699 o) Serial Management Controllers (SMC)
700
701 o) Serial Communication Controllers (SCC)
702
7032.2.3.1. Ethernet tests (SCC)
704
705The internal (local) loopback mode will be used to test SCC. To do
706that the controllers will be configured accordingly and several
707packets will be transmitted. These tests may be enhanced in future to
708use external loopback for testing. That will need appropriate
709reconfiguration of the physical interface chip.
710
711The test routines for the SCC ethernet tests will be located in
712arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/scc.c.
713
7142.2.3.2. UART tests (SMC/SCC)
715
716To perform these tests the internal (local) loopback mode will be
717used. The SMC/SCC controllers will be configured to connect the
718transmitter output to the receiver input. After that, several bytes
719will be transmitted. These tests may be enhanced to make to perform
720"external" loopback test using a loopback cable. In this case, the
721test will be executed manually.
722
723The test routine for the SMC/SCC UART tests will be located in
724arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/serial.c.
725
7262.2.3.3. USB test
727
728TBD
729
7302.2.3.4. SPI test
731
732TBD
733
README.SNTP
1To use SNTP support, add define CONFIG_CMD_SNTP to the
2configuration file of the board.
3
4The "sntp" command gets network time from NTP time server and
5syncronize RTC of the board. This command needs the command line
6parameter of server's IP address or environment variable
7"ntpserverip". The network time is sent as UTC. So if you want to
8set local time to RTC, set the offset in second from UTC to the
9environment variable "time offset".
10
11If the DHCP server provides time server's IP or time offset, you
12don't need to set the above environment variables yourself.
13
14Current limitations of SNTP support:
151. The roundtrip time is ignored.
162. Only the 1st NTP server IP, in the option ntp-servers of DHCP, will
17 be used.
18
README.SPL
1Generic SPL framework
2=====================
3
4Overview
5--------
6
7To unify all existing implementations for a secondary program loader (SPL)
8and to allow simply adding of new implementations this generic SPL framework
9has been created. With this framework almost all source files for a board
10can be reused. No code duplication or symlinking is necessary anymore.
11
12
13How it works
14------------
15
16The object files for SPL are built separately and placed in the "spl" directory.
17The final binaries which are generated are u-boot-spl, u-boot-spl.bin and
18u-boot-spl.map.
19
20A config option named CONFIG_SPL_BUILD is enabled by Kconfig for SPL.
21Source files can therefore be compiled for SPL with different settings.
22
23For example:
24
25ifeq ($(CONFIG_SPL_BUILD),y)
26obj-y += board_spl.o
27else
28obj-y += board.o
29endif
30
31obj-$(CONFIG_SPL_BUILD) += foo.o
32
33#ifdef CONFIG_SPL_BUILD
34 foo();
35#endif
36
37
38The building of SPL images can be enabled by CONFIG_SPL option in Kconfig.
39
40Because SPL images normally have a different text base, one has to be
41configured by defining CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE. The linker script has to be
42defined with CONFIG_SPL_LDSCRIPT.
43
44To support generic U-Boot libraries and drivers in the SPL binary one can
45optionally define CONFIG_SPL_XXX_SUPPORT. Currently following options
46are supported:
47
48CONFIG_SPL_LIBCOMMON_SUPPORT (common/libcommon.o)
49CONFIG_SPL_LIBDISK_SUPPORT (disk/libdisk.o)
50CONFIG_SPL_I2C_SUPPORT (drivers/i2c/libi2c.o)
51CONFIG_SPL_GPIO_SUPPORT (drivers/gpio/libgpio.o)
52CONFIG_SPL_MMC_SUPPORT (drivers/mmc/libmmc.o)
53CONFIG_SPL_SERIAL_SUPPORT (drivers/serial/libserial.o)
54CONFIG_SPL_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT (drivers/mtd/spi/libspi_flash.o)
55CONFIG_SPL_SPI_SUPPORT (drivers/spi/libspi.o)
56CONFIG_SPL_FS_FAT (fs/fat/libfat.o)
57CONFIG_SPL_FS_EXT4
58CONFIG_SPL_LIBGENERIC_SUPPORT (lib/libgeneric.o)
59CONFIG_SPL_POWER_SUPPORT (drivers/power/libpower.o)
60CONFIG_SPL_NAND_SUPPORT (drivers/mtd/nand/raw/libnand.o)
61CONFIG_SPL_DRIVERS_MISC_SUPPORT (drivers/misc)
62CONFIG_SPL_DMA (drivers/dma/libdma.o)
63CONFIG_SPL_POST_MEM_SUPPORT (post/drivers/memory.o)
64CONFIG_SPL_NAND_LOAD (drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand_spl_load.o)
65CONFIG_SPL_SPI_LOAD (drivers/mtd/spi/spi_spl_load.o)
66CONFIG_SPL_RAM_DEVICE (common/spl/spl.c)
67CONFIG_SPL_WATCHDOG_SUPPORT (drivers/watchdog/libwatchdog.o)
68
69Device tree
70-----------
71The U-Boot device tree is filtered by the fdtgrep tools during the build
72process to generate a much smaller device tree used in SPL (spl/u-boot-spl.dtb)
73with:
74- the mandatory nodes (/alias, /chosen, /config)
75- the nodes with one pre-relocation property:
76 'u-boot,dm-pre-reloc' or 'u-boot,dm-spl'
77
78fdtgrep is also used to remove:
79- the properties defined in CONFIG_OF_SPL_REMOVE_PROPS
80- all the pre-relocation properties
81 ('u-boot,dm-pre-reloc', 'u-boot,dm-spl' and 'u-boot,dm-tpl')
82
83All the nodes remaining in the SPL devicetree are bound
84(see doc/driver-model/design.rst).
85
86Debugging
87---------
88
89When building SPL with DEBUG set you may also need to set CONFIG_PANIC_HANG
90as in most cases do_reset is not defined within SPL.
91
92
93Estimating stack usage
94----------------------
95
96With gcc 4.6 (and later) and the use of GNU cflow it is possible to estimate
97stack usage at various points in run sequence of SPL. The -fstack-usage option
98to gcc will produce '.su' files (such as arch/arm/cpu/armv7/syslib.su) that
99will give stack usage information and cflow can construct program flow.
100
101Must have gcc 4.6 or later, which supports -fstack-usage
102
1031) Build normally
1042) Perform the following shell command to generate a list of C files used in
105SPL:
106$ find spl -name '*.su' | sed -e 's:^spl/::' -e 's:[.]su$:.c:' > used-spl.list
1073) Execute cflow:
108$ cflow --main=board_init_r `cat used-spl.list` 2>&1 | $PAGER
109
110cflow will spit out a number of warnings as it does not parse
111the config files and picks functions based on #ifdef. Parsing the '.i'
112files instead introduces another set of headaches. These warnings are
113not usually important to understanding the flow, however.
114
README.TPL
1Generic TPL framework
2=====================
3
4Overview
5--------
6
7TPL---Third Program Loader.
8
9Due to the SPL on some boards(powerpc mpc85xx) has a size limit and cannot
10be compatible with all the external device(e.g. DDR). So add a tertiary
11program loader (TPL) to enable a loader stub loaded by the code from the
12SPL. It loads the final uboot image into DDR, then jump to it to begin
13execution. Now, only the powerpc mpc85xx has this requirement and will
14implemente it.
15
16Keep consistent with SPL, with this framework almost all source files for a
17board can be reused. No code duplication or symlinking is necessary anymore.
18
19How it works
20------------
21
22There has been a directory $(srctree)/spl which contains only a Makefile. The
23Makefile is shared by SPL and TPL.
24
25The object files are built separately for SPL/TPL and placed in the
26directory spl/tpl. The final binaries which are generated are
27u-boot-{spl|tpl}, u-boot-{spl|tpl}.bin and u-boot-{spl|tpl}.map.
28
29During the TPL build a variable named CONFIG_TPL_BUILD is exported in the
30make environment and also appended to CPPFLAGS with -DCONFIG_TPL_BUILD.
31
32The SPL options are shared by SPL and TPL, the board config file should
33determine which SPL options to choose based on whether CONFIG_TPL_BUILD
34is set. Source files can be compiled for TPL with options chosen in the
35board config file.
36
37TPL use a small device tree (u-boot-tpl.dtb), containing only the nodes with
38the pre-relocation properties: 'u-boot,dm-pre-reloc' and 'u-boot,dm-tpl'
39(see README.SPL for details).
40
41For example:
42
43spl/Makefile:
44LIBS-$(CONFIG_SPL_LIBCOMMON_SUPPORT) += common/libcommon.o
45
46CONFIG_SPL_LIBCOMMON_SUPPORT is defined in board config file:
47#ifdef CONFIG_TPL_BUILD
48#define CONFIG_SPL_LIBCOMMON_SUPPORT
49#endif
50
README.VLAN
1U-Boot has networking support for VLANs (802.1q), and CDP (Cisco
2Discovery Protocol).
3
4You control the sending/receiving of VLAN tagged packets with the
5"vlan" environmental variable. When not present no tagging is
6performed.
7
8CDP is used mainly to discover your device VLAN(s) when connected to
9a Cisco switch.
10
11Note: In order to enable CDP support a small change is needed in the
12networking driver. You have to enable reception of the
1301:00:0c:cc:cc:cc MAC address which is a multicast address.
14
15Various defines control CDP; see the README section.
16
README.VSC3316-3308
1This file contains API information of the initialization code written for
2Vitesse cross-point devices, VSC3316 and VSC3308 for board B4860QDS
3
4Author: Shaveta Leekha <shaveta@freescale.com>
5
6About Device:
7=============
8VSC 3316/3308 is a low-power, low-cost asynchronous crosspoint switch capable of data rates upto 11.5Gbps.
9
10VSC3316 has 16 input and 16 output ports whereas VSC3308 has 8 input and 8 output ports. Programming of these devices are performed by two-wire or four-wire serial interface.
11
12Initialization:
13===============
14On reset, VSC devices are in low-power state with all inputs, outputs and connections in an off state.
15First thing required is to program it to interface with either two-wire or four-wire interface.
16In our case the interface is two-wire I2C serial interface. So the value in Interface mode register at address 79.h to be written is 0x02 for two-wire interface. Also for crosspoint connections to be activated, 01.h value need to be written in 75.h (core configuration register).
17
18API Overview:
19=============
20
21 vsc_if_enable(u8 vsc_addr):
22 --------------------------
23 This API programs VSC to interface with either two-wire or four-wire interface. In our case the interface is two-wire I2C serial interface. So the value in Interface mode register at address 79.h to be written is 0x02 for two-wire interface.
24 Parameters:
25 vsc_addr - Address of the VSC device on board.
26
27
28 vsc3316_config(u8 vsc_addr, int con_arr[][2], u8 num_con):
29 ---------------------------------------------------------
30 This API configures the VSC3316 device for required connections. Connection through the VSC device requires the inputs and outputs to be properly configured.
31 Connection registers are on page 00. It Configures the selected input and output correctly and join them to make a connection. It also program Input state register, Global input ISE, Global input LOS, Global core control, Output mode register and core control registers etc.
32 vsc3308_config(u8 vsc_addr, int con_arr[][2], u8 num_con) does the essential configurations for VSC3308.
33
34 Parameters:
35 vsc_addr - Address of the VSC device on board.
36 con_arr - connection array
37 num_con - number of connections to be configured
38
39 vsc_wp_config(u8 vsc_addr):
40 --------------------------
41 For crosspoint connections to be activated, 01.h value need to be written in 75.h (core configuration register), which is done by this API.
42 Parameters:
43 vsc_addr - Address of the VSC device on board.
44
README.arm-caches
1Disabling I-cache:
2- Set CONFIG_SYS_ICACHE_OFF
3
4Disabling D-cache:
5- Set CONFIG_SYS_DCACHE_OFF
6
7Enabling I-cache:
8- Make sure CONFIG_SYS_ICACHE_OFF is not set and call icache_enable().
9
10Enabling D-cache:
11- Make sure CONFIG_SYS_DCACHE_OFF is not set and call dcache_enable().
12
13Enabling Caches at System Startup:
14- Implement enable_caches() for your platform and enable the I-cache and
15 D-cache from this function. This function is called immediately
16 after relocation.
17
18Guidelines for Working with D-cache:
19
20Memory to Peripheral DMA:
21- Flush the buffer after the MPU writes the data and before the DMA is
22 initiated.
23
24Peripheral to Memory DMA:
25- Invalidate the buffer before starting the DMA. In case there are any dirty
26 lines from the DMA buffer in the cache, subsequent cache-line replacements
27 may corrupt the buffer in memory while the DMA is still going on. Cache-line
28 replacement can happen if the CPU tries to bring some other memory locations
29 into the cache while the DMA is going on.
30- Invalidate the buffer after the DMA is complete and before the MPU reads
31 it. This may be needed in addition to the invalidation before the DMA
32 mentioned above, because in some processors memory contents can spontaneously
33 come to the cache due to speculative memory access by the CPU. If this
34 happens with the DMA buffer while DMA is going on we have a coherency problem.
35
36Buffer Requirements:
37- Any buffer that is invalidated(that is, typically the peripheral to
38 memory DMA buffer) should be aligned to cache-line boundary both at
39 at the beginning and at the end of the buffer.
40- If the buffer is not cache-line aligned invalidation will be restricted
41 to the aligned part. That is, one cache-line at the respective boundary
42 may be left out while doing invalidation.
43- A suitable buffer can be alloced on the stack using the
44 ALLOC_CACHE_ALIGN_BUFFER macro.
45
46Cleanup Before Linux:
47- cleanup_before_linux() should flush the D-cache, invalidate I-cache, and
48 disable MMU and caches.
49- The following sequence is advisable while disabling d-cache:
50 1. dcache_disable() - flushes and disables d-cache
51 2. invalidate_dcache_all() - invalid any entry that came to the cache
52 in the short period after the cache was flushed but before the
53 cache got disabled.
54
README.arm-relocation
1To make relocation on arm working, the following changes are done:
2
3At arch level: add linker flag -pie
4
5 This causes the linker to generate fixup tables .rel.dyn and .dynsym,
6 which must be applied to the relocated image before transferring
7 control to it.
8
9 These fixups are described in the ARM ELF documentation as type 23
10 (program-base-relative) and 2 (symbol-relative)
11
12At cpu level: modify linker file and add a relocation and fixup loop
13
14 the linker file must be modified to include the .rel.dyn and .dynsym
15 tables in the binary image, and to provide symbols for the relocation
16 code to access these tables
17
18 The relocation and fixup loop must be executed after executing
19 board_init_f at initial location and before executing board_init_r
20 at final location.
21
22At board level:
23
24 dram_init(): bd pointer is now at this point not accessible, so only
25 detect the real dramsize, and store it in gd->ram_size. Bst detected
26 with get_ram_size().
27
28TODO: move also dram initialization there on boards where it is possible.
29
30 Setup of the the bd_t dram bank info is done in the new function
31 dram_init_banksize() called after bd is accessible.
32
33At lib level:
34
35 Board.c code is adapted from ppc code
36
37* WARNING ** WARNING ** WARNING ** WARNING ** WARNING ** WARNING ** WARNING *
38
39Boards which are not fixed to support relocation will be REMOVED!
40
41-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
42
43For boards which boot from spl, it is possible to save one copy
44if CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE == relocation address! This prevents that uboot code
45is copied again in relocate_code().
46
47example for the tx25 board booting from NAND Flash:
48
49a) cpu starts
50b) it copies the first page in nand to internal ram
51 (spl code)
52c) end executes this code
53d) this initialize CPU, RAM, ... and copy itself to RAM
54 (this bin must fit in one page, so board_init_f()
55 don;t fit in it ... )
56e) there it copy u-boot to CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST and
57 starts this image @ CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START
58f) u-boot code steps through board_init_f() and calculates
59 the relocation address and copy itself to it
60
61If CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE == relocation address, the copying of u-boot
62in f) could be saved.
63
64-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
65
66TODO
67
68- fill in bd_t infos (check)
69- adapt all boards
70
71- maybe adapt CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE (this must be checked from board maintainers)
72 This *must* be done for boards, which boot from NOR flash
73
74 on other boards if CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE = relocation baseaddr, this saves
75 one copying from u-boot code.
76
77- new function dram_init_banksize() is actual board specific. Maybe
78 we make a weak default function in arch/arm/lib/board.c ?
79
80-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
81
82Relocation with SPL (example for the tx25 booting from NAND Flash):
83
84- cpu copies the first page from NAND to 0xbb000000 (IMX_NFC_BASE)
85 and start with code execution on this address.
86
87- The First page contains u-boot code from drivers/mtd/nand/raw/mxc_nand_spl.c
88 which inits the dram, cpu registers, reloacte itself to CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE and loads
89 the "real" u-boot to CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST and starts execution
90 @CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START
91
92- This u-boot does no RAM init, nor CPU register setup. Just look
93 where it has to copy and relocate itself to this address. If
94 relocate address = CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE (not the same, as the
95 CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE from the spl code), then there is no need
96 to copy, just go on with bss clear and jump to board_init_r.
97
98-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
99
100How ELF relocations 23 and 2 work.
101
102TBC
103
104-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
105
106Debugging u-boot in RAM:
107(example on the qong board)
108
109-----------------
110
111a) start debugger
112
113arm-linux-gdb u-boot
114
115[hs@pollux u-boot]$ arm-linux-gdb u-boot
116GNU gdb Red Hat Linux (6.7-2rh)
117Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
118License GPLv3+: GNU GPL version 3 or later <http://gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html>
119This is free software: you are free to change and redistribute it.
120There is NO WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law. Type "show copying"
121and "show warranty" for details.
122This GDB was configured as "--host=i686-pc-linux-gnu --target=arm-linux".
123The target architecture is set automatically (currently arm)
124..
125(gdb)
126
127-----------------
128
129b) connect to target
130
131target remote bdi10:2001
132
133(gdb) target remote bdi10:2001
134Remote debugging using bdi10:2001
1350x8ff17f10 in ?? ()
136(gdb)
137
138-----------------
139
140c) discard symbol-file
141
142(gdb) symbol-file
143Discard symbol table from `/home/hs/celf/u-boot/u-boot'? (y or n) y
144No symbol file now.
145(gdb)
146
147-----------------
148
149d) load new symbol table:
150
151(gdb) add-symbol-file u-boot 0x8ff08000
152add symbol table from file "u-boot" at
153 .text_addr = 0x8ff08000
154(y or n) y
155Reading symbols from /home/hs/celf/u-boot/u-boot...done.
156(gdb) c
157Continuing.
158^C
159Program received signal SIGSTOP, Stopped (signal).
1600x8ff17f18 in serial_getc () at serial_mxc.c:192
161192 while (__REG(UART_PHYS + UTS) & UTS_RXEMPTY);
162(gdb)
163
164add-symbol-file u-boot 0x8ff08000
165 ^^^^^^^^^^
166 get this address from u-boot bdinfo command
167 or get it from gd->relocaddr in gdb
168
169 => bdinfo
170rch_number = XXXXXXXXXX
171boot_params = XXXXXXXXXX
172DRAM bank = XXXXXXXXXX
173-> start = XXXXXXXXXX
174-> size = XXXXXXXXXX
175ethaddr = XXXXXXXXXX
176ip_addr = XXXXXXXXXX
177baudrate = XXXXXXXXXX
178TLB addr = XXXXXXXXXX
179relocaddr = 0x8ff08000
180 ^^^^^^^^^^
181reloc off = XXXXXXXXXX
182irq_sp = XXXXXXXXXX
183sp start = XXXXXXXXXX
184FB base = XXXXXXXXXX
185
186or interrupt execution by any means and re-load the symbols at the location
187specified by gd->relocaddr -- this is only valid after board_init_f.
188
189(gdb) set $s = gd->relocaddr
190(gdb) symbol-file
191(gdb) add-symbol-file u-boot $s
192
193Now you can use gdb as usual :-)
194
README.armada-secureboot
1The trusted boot framework on Marvell Armada 38x
2================================================
3
4Contents:
5
61. Overview of the trusted boot
72. Terminology
83. Boot image layout
94. The secured header
105. The secured boot flow
116. Usage example
127. Work to be done
138. Bibliography
14
151. Overview of the trusted boot
16-------------------------------
17
18The Armada's trusted boot framework enables the SoC to cryptographically verify
19a specially prepared boot image. This can be used to establish a chain of trust
20from the boot firmware all the way to the OS.
21
22To achieve this, the Armada SoC requires a specially prepared boot image, which
23contains the relevant cryptographic data, as well as other information
24pertaining to the boot process. Furthermore, a eFuse structure (a
25one-time-writeable memory) need to be configured in the correct way.
26
27Roughly, the secure boot process works as follows:
28
29* Load the header block of the boot image, extract a special "root" public RSA
30 key from it, and verify its SHA-256 hash against a SHA-256 stored in a eFuse
31 field.
32* Load an array of code signing public RSA keys from the header block, and
33 verify its RSA signature (contained in the header block as well) using the
34 "root" RSA key.
35* Choose a code signing key, and use it to verify the header block (excluding
36 the key array).
37* Verify the binary image's signature (contained in the header block) using the
38 code signing key.
39* If all checks pass successfully, boot the image.
40
41The chain of trust is thus as follows:
42
43* The SHA-256 value in the eFuse field verifies the "root" public key.
44* The "root" public key verifies the code signing key array.
45* The selected code signing key verifies the header block and the binary image.
46
47In the special case of building a boot image containing U-Boot as the binary
48image, which employs this trusted boot framework, the following tasks need to
49be addressed:
50
511. Creation of the needed cryptographic key material.
522. Creation of a conforming boot image containing the U-Boot image as binary
53 image.
543. Burning the necessary eFuse values.
55
56(1) will be addressed later, (2) will be taken care of by U-Boot's build
57system (some user configuration is required, though), and for (3) the necessary
58data (essentially a series of U-Boot commands to be entered at the U-Boot
59command prompt) will be created by the build system as well.
60
61The documentation of the trusted boot mode is contained in part 1, chapter
627.2.5 in the functional specification [1], and in application note [2].
63
642. Terminology
65--------------
66
67 CSK - Code Signing Key(s): An array of RSA key pairs, which
68 are used to sign and verify the secured header and the
69 boot loader image.
70 KAK - Key Authentication Key: A RSA key pair, which is used
71 to sign and verify the array of CSKs.
72 Header block - The first part of the boot image, which contains the
73 image's headers (also known as "headers block", "boot
74 header", and "image header")
75 eFuse - A one-time-writeable memory.
76 BootROM - The Armada's built-in boot firmware, which is
77 responsible for verifying and starting secure images.
78 Boot image - The complete image the SoC's boot firmware loads
79 (contains the header block and the binary image)
80 Main header - The header in the header block containing information
81 and data pertaining to the boot process (used for both
82 the regular and secured boot processes)
83 Binary image - The binary code payload of the boot image; in this
84 case the U-Boot's code (also known as "source image",
85 or just "image")
86 Secured header - The specialized header in the header block that
87 contains information and data pertaining to the
88 trusted boot (also known as "security header")
89 Secured boot mode - A special boot mode of the Armada SoC in which secured
90 images are verified (non-secure images won't boot);
91 the mode is activated by setting a eFuse field.
92 Trusted debug mode - A special mode for the trusted boot that allows
93 debugging of devices employing the trusted boot
94 framework in a secure manner (untested in the current
95 implementation).
96Trusted boot framework - The ARMADA SoC's implementation of a secure verified
97 boot process.
98
993. Boot image layout
100--------------------
101
102+-- Boot image --------------------------------------------+
103| |
104| +-- Header block --------------------------------------+ |
105| | Main header | |
106| +------------------------------------------------------+ |
107| | Secured header | |
108| +------------------------------------------------------+ |
109| | BIN header(s) | |
110| +------------------------------------------------------+ |
111| | REG header(s) | |
112| +------------------------------------------------------+ |
113| | Padding | |
114| +------------------------------------------------------+ |
115| |
116| +------------------------------------------------------+ |
117| | Binary image + checksum | |
118| +------------------------------------------------------+ |
119+----------------------------------------------------------+
120
1214. The secured header
122---------------------
123
124For the trusted boot framework, a additional header is added to the boot image.
125The following data are relevant for the secure boot:
126
127 KAK: The KAK is contained in the secured header in the form
128 of a RSA-2048 public key in DER format with a length of
129 524 bytes.
130Header block signature: The RSA signature of the header block (excluding the
131 CSK array), created using the selected CSK.
132Binary image signature: The RSA signature of the binary image, created using
133 the selected CSK.
134 CSK array: The array of the 16 CSKs as RSA-2048 public keys in DER
135 format with a length of 8384 = 16 * 524 bytes.
136 CSK block signature: The RSA signature of the CSK array, created using the
137 KAK.
138
139NOTE: The JTAG delay, Box ID, and Flash ID header fields do play a role in the
140trusted boot process to enable and configure secure debugging, but they were
141not tested in the current implementation of the trusted boot in U-Boot.
142
1435. The secured boot flow
144------------------------
145
146The steps in the boot flow that are relevant for the trusted boot framework
147proceed as follows:
148
1491) Check if trusted boot is enabled, and perform regular boot if it is not.
1502) Load the secured header, and verify its checksum.
1513) Select the lowest valid CSK from CSK0 to CSK15.
1524) Verify the SHA-256 hash of the KAK embedded in the secured header.
1535) Verify the RSA signature of the CSK block from the secured header with the
154 KAK.
1556) Verify the header block signature (which excludes the CSK block) from the
156 secured header with the selected CSK.
1577) Load the binary image to the main memory and verify its checksum.
1588) Verify the binary image's RSA signature from the secured header with the
159 selected CSK.
1609) Continue the boot process as in the case of the regular boot.
161
162NOTE: All RSA signatures are verified according to the PKCS #1 v2.1 standard
163described in [3].
164
165NOTE: The Box ID and Flash ID are checked after step 6, and the trusted debug
166mode may be entered there, but since this mode is untested in the current
167implementation, it is not described further.
168
1696. Usage example
170----------------
171
172### Create key material
173
174To employ the trusted boot framework, cryptographic key material needs to be
175created. In the current implementation, two keys are needed to build a valid
176secured boot image: The KAK private key and a CSK private key (both have to be
1772048 bit RSA keys in PEM format). Note that the usage of more than one CSK is
178currently not supported.
179
180NOTE: Since the public key can be generated from the private key, it is
181sufficient to store the private key for each key pair.
182
183OpenSSL can be used to generate the needed files kwb_kak.key and kwb_csk.key
184(the names of these files have to be configured, see the next section on
185kwbimage.cfg settings):
186
187openssl genrsa -out kwb_kak.key 2048
188openssl genrsa -out kwb_csk.key 2048
189
190The generated files have to be placed in the U-Boot root directory.
191
192Alternatively, instead of copying the files, symlinks to the private keys can
193be placed in the U-Boot root directory.
194
195WARNING: Knowledge of the KAK or CSK private key would enable an attacker to
196generate secured boot images containing arbitrary code. Hence, the private keys
197should be carefully guarded.
198
199### Create/Modifiy kwbimage.cfg
200
201The Kirkwook architecture in U-Boot employs a special board-specific
202configuration file (kwbimage.cfg), which controls various boot image settings
203that are interpreted by the BootROM, such as the boot medium. The support the
204trusted boot framework, several new options were added to faciliate
205configuration of the secured boot.
206
207The configuration file's layout has been retained, only the following new
208options were added:
209
210 KAK - The name of the KAK RSA private key file in the U-Boot
211 root directory, without the trailing extension of ".key".
212 CSK - The name of the (active) CSK RSA private key file in the
213 U-Boot root directory, without the trailing extension of
214 ".key".
215 BOX_ID - The BoxID to be used for trusted debugging (a integer
216 value).
217 FLASH_ID - The FlashID to be used for trusted debugging (a integer
218 value).
219 JTAG_DELAY - The JTAG delay to be used for trusted debugging (a
220 integer value).
221 CSK_INDEX - The index of the active CSK (a integer value).
222SEC_SPECIALIZED_IMG - Flag to indicate whether to include the BoxID and FlashID
223 in the image (that is, whether to use the trusted debug
224 mode or not); no parameters.
225 SEC_BOOT_DEV - The boot device from which the trusted boot is allowed to
226 proceed, identified via a numeric ID. The tested values
227 are 0x34 = NOR flash, 0x31 = SDIO/MMC card; for
228 additional ID values, consult the documentation in [1].
229 SEC_FUSE_DUMP - Dump the "fuse prog" commands necessary for writing the
230 correct eFuse values to a text file in the U-Boot root
231 directory. The parameter is the architecture for which to
232 dump the commands (currently only "a38x" is supported).
233
234The parameter values may be hardcoded into the file, but it is also possible to
235employ a dynamic approach of creating a Autoconf-like kwbimage.cfg.in, then
236reading configuration values from Kconfig options or from the board config
237file, and generating the actual kwbimage.cfg from this template using Makefile
238mechanisms (see board/gdsys/a38x/Makefile as an example for this approach).
239
240### Set config options
241
242To enable the generation of trusted boot images, the corresponding support
243needs to be activated, and a index for the active CSK needs to be selected as
244well.
245
246Furthermore, eFuse writing support has to be activated in order to burn the
247eFuse structure's values (this option is just needed for programming the eFuse
248structure; production boot images may disable it).
249
250ARM architecture
251 -> [*] Build image for trusted boot
252 (0) Index of active CSK
253 -> [*] Enable eFuse support
254 [ ] Fake eFuse access (dry run)
255
256### Build and test boot image
257
258The creation of the boot image is done via the usual invocation of make (with a
259suitably set CROSS_COMPILE environment variable, of course). The resulting boot
260image u-boot-spl.kwb can then be tested, if so desired. The hdrparser from [5]
261can be used for this purpose. To build the tool, invoke make in the
262'tools/marvell/doimage_mv' directory of [5], which builds a stand-alone
263hdrparser executable. A test can be conducted by calling hdrparser with the
264produced boot image and the following (mandatory) parameters:
265
266./hdrparser -k 0 -t u-boot-spl.kwb
267
268Here we assume that the CSK index is 0 and the boot image file resides in the
269same directory (adapt accordingly if needed). The tool should report that all
270checksums are valid ("GOOD"), that all signature verifications succeed
271("PASSED"), and, finally, that the overall test was successful
272("T E S T S U C C E E D E D" in the last line of output).
273
274### Burn eFuse structure
275
276+----------------------------------------------------------+
277| WARNING: Burning the eFuse structure is a irreversible |
278| operation! Should wrong or corrupted values be used, the |
279| board won't boot anymore, and recovery is likely |
280| impossible! |
281+----------------------------------------------------------+
282
283After the build process has finished, and the SEC_FUSE_DUMP option was set in
284the kwbimage.cfg was set, a text file kwb_fuses_a38x.txt should be present in
285the U-Boot top-level directory. It contains all the necessary commands to set
286the eFuse structure to the values needed for the used KAK digest, as well as
287the CSK index, Flash ID and Box ID that were selected in kwbimage.cfg.
288
289Sequentially executing the commands in this file at the U-Boot command prompt
290will write these values to the eFuse structure.
291
292If the SEC_FUSE_DUMP option was not set, the commands needed to burn the fuses
293have to be crafted by hand. The needed fuse lines can be looked up in [1]; a
294rough overview of the process is:
295
296* Burn the KAK public key hash. The hash itself can be found in the file
297 pub_kak_hash.txt in the U-Boot top-level directory; be careful to account for
298 the endianness!
299* Burn the CSK selection, BoxID, and FlashID
300* Enable trusted boot by burning the corresponding fuse (WARNING: this must be
301 the last fuse line written!)
302* Lock the unused fuse lines
303
304The command to employ is the "fuse prog" command previously enabled by setting
305the corresponding configuration option.
306
307For the trusted boot, the fuse prog command has a special syntax, since the
308ARMADA SoC demands that whole fuse lines (64 bit values) have to be written as
309a whole. The fuse prog command itself allows lists of 32 bit words to be
310written at a time, but this is translated to a series of single 32 bit write
311operations to the fuse line, where the individual 32 bit words are identified
312by a "word" counter that is increased for each write.
313
314To work around this restriction, we interpret each line to have three "words"
315(0-2): The first and second words are the values to be written to the fuse
316line, and the third is a lock flag, which is supposed to lock the fuse line
317when set to 1. Writes to the first and second words are memoized between
318function calls, and the fuse line is only really written and locked (on writing
319the third word) if both words were previously set, so that "incomplete" writes
320are prevented. An exception to this is a single write to the third word (index
3212) without previously writing neither the first nor the second word, which
322locks the fuse line without setting any value; this is needed to lock the
323unused fuse lines.
324
325As an example, to write the value 0011223344556677 to fuse line 10, we would
326use the following command:
327
328fuse prog -y 10 0 00112233 44556677 1
329
330Here 10 is the fuse line number, 0 is the index of the first word to be
331written, 00112233 and 44556677 are the values to be written to the fuse line
332(first and second word) and the trailing 1 is the value for the third word
333responsible for locking the line.
334
335A "lock-only" command would look like this:
336
337fuse prog -y 11 2 1
338
339Here 11 is the fuse number, 2 is the index of the first word to be written
340(notice that we only write to word 2 here; the third word for fuse line
341locking), and the 1 is the value for the word we are writing to.
342
343WARNING: According to application note [4], the VHV pin of the SoC must be
344connected to a 1.8V source during eFuse programming, but *must* be disconnected
345for normal operation. The AN [4] describes a software-controlled circuit (based
346on a N-channel or P-channel FET and a free GPIO pin of the SoC) to achieve
347this, but a jumper-based circuit should suffice as well. Regardless of the
348chosen circuit, the issue needs to be addressed accordingly!
349
3507. Work to be done
351------------------
352
353* Add the ability to populate more than one CSK
354* Test secure debug
355* Test on Armada XP
356
3578. Bibliography
358---------------
359
360[1] ARMADA(R) 38x Family High-Performance Single/Dual CPU System on Chip
361 Functional Specification; MV-S109094-00, Rev. C; August 2, 2015,
362 Preliminary
363[2] AN-383: ARMADA(R) 38x Families Secure Boot Mode Support; MV-S302501-00
364 Rev. A; March 11, 2015, Preliminary
365[3] Public-Key Cryptography Standards (PKCS) #1: RSA Cryptography
366 Specifications Version 2.1; February 2003;
367 https://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3447.txt
368[4] AN-389: ARMADA(R) VHV Power; MV-S302545-00 Rev. B; January 28, 2016,
369 Released
370[5] Marvell Armada 38x U-Boot support; November 25, 2015;
371 https://github.com/MarvellEmbeddedProcessors/u-boot-marvell
372
3732017-01-05, Mario Six <mario.six@gdsys.cc>
374
README.asn1
1ASN1
2====
3
4Abstract Syntax Notation One (or ASN1) is a standard by ITU-T and ISO/IEC
5and used as a description language for defining data structure in
6an independent manner.
7Any data described in ASN1 notation can be serialized (or encoded) and
8de-serialized (or decoded) with well-defined encoding rules.
9
10A combination of ASN1 compiler and ASN1 decoder library function will
11provide a function interface for parsing encoded binary into specific
12data structure:
131) define data structure in a text file (*.asn1)
142) define "action" routines for specific "tags" defined in (1)
153) generate bytecode as a C file (*.asn1.[ch]) from *.asn1 file
16 with ASN1 compiler (tools/asn1_compiler)
174) call a ASN1 decoder (asn1_ber_decoder()) with bytecode and data
18
19Usage of ASN1 compiler
20----------------------
21 asn1_compiler [-v] [-d] <grammar-file> <c-file> <hdr-file>
22
23 <grammar-file>: ASN1 input file
24 <c-file>: generated C file
25 <hdr-file>: generated include file
26
27Usage of ASN1 decoder
28---------------------
29 int asn1_ber_decoder(const struct asn1_decoder *decoder, void *context,
30 const unsigned char *data, size_t datalen);
31
32 @decoder: bytecode binary
33 @context: context for decoder
34 @data: data to be parsed
35 @datalen: size of data
36
37
38As of writing this, ASN1 compiler and decoder are used to implement
39X509 certificate parser, pcks7 message parser and RSA public key parser
40for UEFI secure boot.
41
README.atmel_mci
1How to use SD/MMC cards with Atmel SoCs having MCI hardware
2-----------------------------------------------------------
32010-08-16 Reinhard Meyer <reinhard.meyer@emk-elektronik.de>
4
5This is a new approach to use Atmel MCI hardware with the
6general MMC framework. Therefore it benefits from that
7framework's abilities to handle SDHC Cards and the ability
8to write blocks.
9
10- AT91SAM9XE512 (tested, will definitely work with XE128 and XE256)
11- AT91SAM9260 (not tested, but MCI is to AT91SAM9XE)
12- AT91SAM9G20 (not tested, should work)
13
14It should work with all other ATMEL devices that have MCI.
15
16The generic driver does NOT assign port pins to the MCI block
17nor does it start the MCI clock. This has to be handled in a
18board/SoC specific manner before the driver is initialized:
19
20example: this is added to at91sam9260_devices.c:
21
22#if defined(CONFIG_GENERIC_ATMEL_MCI)
23void at91_mci_hw_init(void)
24{
25 at91_set_a_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 8, PUP); /* MCCK */
26#if defined(CONFIG_ATMEL_MCI_PORTB)
27 at91_set_b_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 1, PUP); /* MCCDB */
28 at91_set_b_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 0, PUP); /* MCDB0 */
29 at91_set_b_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 5, PUP); /* MCDB1 */
30 at91_set_b_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 4, PUP); /* MCDB2 */
31 at91_set_b_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 3, PUP); /* MCDB3 */
32#else
33 at91_set_a_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 7, PUP); /* MCCDA */
34 at91_set_a_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 6, PUP); /* MCDA0 */
35 at91_set_a_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 9, PUP); /* MCDA1 */
36 at91_set_a_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 10, PUP); /* MCDA2 */
37 at91_set_a_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 11, PUP); /* MCDA3 */
38#endif
39}
40#endif
41
42the board specific file need added:
43...
44#ifdef CONFIG_GENERIC_ATMEL_MCI
45# include <mmc.h>
46#endif
47...
48#ifdef CONFIG_GENERIC_ATMEL_MCI
49/* this is a weak define that we are overriding */
50int board_mmc_init(bd_t *bd)
51{
52 /* Enable clock */
53 at91_sys_write(AT91_PMC_PCER, 1 << AT91SAM9260_ID_MCI);
54 at91_mci_hw_init();
55
56 /* This calls the atmel_mci_init in gen_atmel_mci.c */
57 return atmel_mci_init((void *)AT91_BASE_MCI);
58}
59
60/* this is a weak define that we are overriding */
61int board_mmc_getcd(struct mmc *mmc)
62{
63 return !at91_get_gpio_value(CONFIG_SYS_MMC_CD_PIN);
64}
65
66#endif
67
68and the board definition files needs:
69
70/* SD/MMC card */
71#define CONFIG_GENERIC_ATMEL_MCI 1
72#define CONFIG_ATMEL_MCI_PORTB 1 /* Atmel XE-EK uses port B */
73#define CONFIG_SYS_MMC_CD_PIN AT91_PIN_PC9
74#define CONFIG_CMD_MMC 1
75
README.atmel_pmecc
1How to enable PMECC(Programmable Multibit ECC) for nand on Atmel SoCs
2-----------------------------------------------------------
32012-08-22 Josh Wu <josh.wu@atmel.com>
4
5The Programmable Multibit ECC (PMECC) controller is a programmable binary
6BCH(Bose, Chaudhuri and Hocquenghem) encoder and decoder. This controller
7can be used to support both SLC and MLC NAND Flash devices. It supports to
8generate ECC to correct 2, 4, 8, 12 or 24 bits of error per sector (512 or
91024 bytes) of data.
10
11Following Atmel AT91 products support PMECC.
12- AT91SAM9X25, X35, G25, G15, G35 (tested)
13- AT91SAM9N12 (not tested, Should work)
14
15As soon as your nand flash software ECC works, you can enable PMECC.
16
17To use PMECC in this driver, the user needs to set:
18 1. the PMECC correction error bits capability: CONFIG_PMECC_CAP.
19 It can be 2, 4, 8, 12 or 24.
20 2. The PMECC sector size: CONFIG_PMECC_SECTOR_SIZE.
21 It only can be 512 or 1024.
22
23Take 'configs/at91sam9x5ek_nandflash_defconfig' as an example, the board
24configuration file has the following entries:
25
26 CONFIG_PMECC_CAP=2
27 CONFIG_PMECC_SECTOR_SIZE=512
28 CONFIG_SPL_GENERATE_ATMEL_PMECC_HEADER=y
29
30How to enable PMECC header for direct programmable boot.bin
31-----------------------------------------------------------
322014-05-19 Andreas Bießmann <andreas@biessmann.org>
33
34The usual way to program SPL into NAND flash is to use the SAM-BA Atmel tool.
35This however is often not usable when doing field updates. To be able to
36program a SPL binary into NAND flash we need to add the PMECC header to the
37binary before. Chapter '12.4.4.1 NAND Flash Boot: NAND Flash Detection' in
38sama5d3 SoC spec (as of 03. April 2014) defines how this PMECC header has to
39look like. In order to do so we have a new image type added to mkimage to
40generate this PMECC header and integrated this into the build process of SPL.
41
42To enable the generation of atmel PMECC header for SPL one needs to define
43CONFIG_SPL_GENERATE_ATMEL_PMECC_HEADER. The required parameters are taken from
44board configuration and compiled into the host tools atmel_pmecc_params. This
45tool will be called in build process to parametrize mkimage for atmelimage
46type. The mkimage tool has intentionally _not_ compiled in those parameters.
47
48The mkimage image type atmelimage also set the 6'th interrupt vector to the
49correct value. This feature can also be used to setup a boot.bin for MMC boot.
50
README.autoboot
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2/*
3 * (C) Copyright 2001
4 * Dave Ellis, SIXNET, dge@sixnetio.com
5 *
6 */
7
8Using autoboot configuration options
9====================================
10
11The basic autoboot configuration options are documented in the main
12U-Boot README. See it for details. They are:
13
14 bootdelay
15 bootcmd
16 CONFIG_BOOTDELAY
17 CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND
18
19Some additional options that make autoboot safer in a production
20product are documented here.
21
22Why use them?
23-------------
24
25The basic autoboot feature allows a system to automatically boot to
26the real application (such as Linux) without a user having to enter
27any commands. If any key is pressed before the boot delay time
28expires, U-Boot stops the autoboot process, gives a U-Boot prompt
29and waits forever for a command. That's a good thing if you pressed a
30key because you wanted to get the prompt.
31
32It's not so good if the key press was a stray character on the
33console serial port, say because a user who knows nothing about
34U-Boot pressed a key before the system had time to boot. It's even
35worse on an embedded product that doesn't have a console during
36normal use. The modem plugged into that console port sends a
37character at the wrong time and the system hangs, with no clue as to
38why it isn't working.
39
40You might want the system to autoboot to recover after an external
41configuration program stops autoboot. If the configuration program
42dies or loses its connection (modems can disconnect at the worst
43time) U-Boot will patiently wait forever for it to finish.
44
45These additional configuration options can help provide a system that
46boots when it should, but still allows access to U-Boot.
47
48What they do
49------------
50
51 CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME
52 CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_MIN
53
54 "bootretry" environment variable
55
56 These options determine what happens after autoboot is
57 stopped and U-Boot is waiting for commands.
58
59 CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME must be defined to enable the boot
60 retry feature. If the environment variable "bootretry" is
61 found then its value is used, otherwise the retry timeout is
62 CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME. CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_MIN is optional and
63 defaults to CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME. All times are in seconds.
64
65 If the retry timeout is negative, the U-Boot command prompt
66 never times out. Otherwise it is forced to be at least
67 CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_MIN seconds. If no valid U-Boot command is
68 entered before the specified time the boot delay sequence is
69 restarted. Each command that U-Boot executes restarts the
70 timeout.
71
72 If CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME < 0 the feature is there, but
73 doesn't do anything unless the environment variable
74 "bootretry" is >= 0.
75
76 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_KEYED
77 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_KEYED_CTRLC
78 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_PROMPT
79 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR
80 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR
81
82 "bootdelaykey" environment variable
83 "bootstopkey" environment variable
84
85 These options give more control over stopping autoboot. When
86 they are used a specific character or string is required to
87 stop or delay autoboot.
88
89 Define CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_KEYED (no value required) to enable
90 this group of options. CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR,
91 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR or both should be specified (or
92 specified by the corresponding environment variable),
93 otherwise there is no way to stop autoboot.
94
95 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_PROMPT is displayed before the boot delay
96 selected by CONFIG_BOOTDELAY starts. If it is not defined
97 there is no output indicating that autoboot is in progress.
98
99 Note that CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_PROMPT is used as the (only)
100 argument to a printf() call, so it may contain '%' format
101 specifications, provided that it also includes, sepearated by
102 commas exactly like in a printf statement, the required
103 arguments. It is the responsibility of the user to select only
104 such arguments that are valid in the given context. A
105 reasonable prompt could be defined as
106
107 #define CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_PROMPT \
108 "autoboot in %d seconds\n",bootdelay
109
110 If CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR or "bootdelaykey" is specified
111 and this string is received from console input before
112 autoboot starts booting, U-Boot gives a command prompt. The
113 U-Boot prompt will time out if CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME is
114 used, otherwise it never times out.
115
116 If CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR or "bootstopkey" is specified and
117 this string is received from console input before autoboot
118 starts booting, U-Boot gives a command prompt. The U-Boot
119 prompt never times out, even if CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME is
120 used.
121
122 The string recognition is not very sophisticated. If a
123 partial match is detected, the first non-matching character
124 is checked to see if starts a new match. There is no check
125 for a shorter partial match, so it's best if the first
126 character of a key string does not appear in the rest of the
127 string.
128
129 The CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_KEYED_CTRLC #define allows for the boot
130 sequence to be interrupted by ctrl-c, in addition to the
131 "bootdelaykey" and "bootstopkey". Setting this variable
132 provides an escape sequence from the limited "password"
133 strings.
134
135 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_ENCRYPTION
136
137 "bootstopkeysha256" environment variable
138
139 - Hash value of the input which unlocks the device and
140 stops autoboot.
141
142 This option allows a string to be entered into U-Boot to stop the
143 autoboot. The string itself is hashed and compared against the hash
144 in the environment variable 'bootstopkeysha256'. If it matches then
145 boot stops and a command-line prompt is presented.
146
147 This provides a way to ship a secure production device which can also
148 be accessed at the U-Boot command line.
149
150 CONFIG_RESET_TO_RETRY
151
152 (Only effective when CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME is also set)
153 After the countdown timed out, the board will be reset to restart
154 again.
155
156 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_USE_MENUKEY
157 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_MENUKEY
158
159 If this key is pressed to stop autoboot, then the commands in the
160 environment variable 'menucmd' will be executed before boot starts.
161 For example, 33 means "!" in ASCII, so pressing ! at boot would take
162 this action.
163
README.bcm7xxx
1Summary
2=======
3
4This document describes how to use U-Boot on the Broadcom 7445 SoC, as
5a third stage bootloader loaded by Broadcom's BOLT bootloader.
6
7BOLT loads U-Boot as a generic ELF binary. Some U-Boot features such
8as networking are not yet available but other important features are,
9including:
10
11 - ext4 file system traversal
12
13 - support for loading FIT images
14
15 - advanced scripting
16
17 - support for FIT-provided DTBs instead of relying on the
18 BOLT-provided DTB
19
20A customized version of this port has been used in production. The
21same approach may work on other BCM7xxx boards, with some
22configuration adjustments and memory layout experimentation.
23
24Build
25=====
26
27make bcm7445_defconfig
28make
29${CROSS_COMPILE}strip u-boot
30
31Run
32===
33
34Flash the u-boot binary into board storage, then invoke it from BOLT.
35For example:
36
37BOLT> boot -bsu -elf flash0.u-boot1
38
39This port assumes that I-cache and D-cache are already enabled when
40U-Boot is entered.
41
42Flattened Image Tree Support
43============================
44
45What follows is an example FIT image source file. Build it with:
46
47mkimage -f image.its image.itb
48
49Booting the resulting image.itb was tested on BOLT v1.20, with the
50following kernels:
51
52https://github.com/Broadcom/stblinux-3.14
53https://github.com/Broadcom/stblinux-4.1
54https://github.com/Broadcom/stblinux-4.9
55
56and with a generic ARMv7 root file system.
57
58image.its:
59/dts-v1/;
60/ {
61 description = "BCM7445 FIT";
62 images {
63 kernel@1 {
64 description = "Linux kernel";
65 /*
66 * This kernel image output format can be
67 * generated with:
68 *
69 * make vmlinux
70 * ${CROSS_COMPILE}objcopy -O binary -S vmlinux vmlinux.bin
71 * gzip -9 vmlinux.bin
72 *
73 * For stblinux-3.14, the specific Broadcom
74 * board type should be configured in the
75 * kernel, for example CONFIG_BCM7445D0=y.
76 */
77 data = /incbin/("<vmlinux.bin.gz>");
78 type = "kernel";
79 arch = "arm";
80 os = "linux";
81 compression = "gzip";
82 load = <0x8000>;
83 entry = <0x8000>;
84 hash@1 {
85 algo = "sha256";
86 };
87 };
88 ramdisk@1 {
89 description = "Initramfs root file system";
90 data = /incbin/("<initramfs.cpio.gz>");
91 type = "ramdisk";
92 arch = "arm";
93 os = "linux";
94 compression = "gzip";
95 /*
96 * Set the environment variable initrd_high to
97 * 0xffffffff, and set "load" and "entry" here
98 * to 0x0 to keep initramfs in-place and to
99 * accommodate stblinux bmem/CMA reservations.
100 */
101 load = <0x0>;
102 entry = <0x0>;
103 hash@1 {
104 algo = "sha256";
105 };
106 };
107 fdt@1 {
108 description = "Device tree dumped from BOLT";
109 /*
110 * This DTB should be similar to the
111 * BOLT-generated device tree, after BOLT has
112 * done its runtime modifications to it. For
113 * example, it can be dumped from within
114 * U-Boot (at ${fdtcontroladdr}), after BOLT
115 * has loaded U-Boot. The result can be added
116 * to the Linux source tree as a .dts file.
117 *
118 * To support modifications to the device tree
119 * in-place in U-Boot, add to Linux's
120 * arch/arm/boot/dts/Makefile:
121 *
122 * DTC_FLAGS ?= -p 4096
123 *
124 * This will leave some padding in the DTB and
125 * thus reserve room for node additions.
126 *
127 * Also, set the environment variable fdt_high
128 * to 0xffffffff to keep the DTB in-place and
129 * to accommodate stblinux bmem/CMA
130 * reservations.
131 */
132 data = /incbin/("<bolt-<version>.dtb");
133 type = "flat_dt";
134 arch = "arm";
135 compression = "none";
136 hash@1 {
137 algo = "sha256";
138 };
139 };
140 };
141 configurations {
142 default = "conf@bcm7445";
143 conf@bcm7445 {
144 description = "BCM7445 configuration";
145 kernel = "kernel@1";
146 ramdisk = "ramdisk@1";
147 fdt = "fdt@1";
148 };
149 };
150};
151
README.bedbug
README.bitbangMII
1This patch rewrites the miiphybb ( Bit-banged MII bus driver ) in order to
2support an arbitrary number of mii buses. This feature is useful when your
3board uses different mii buses for different phys and all (or a part) of these
4buses are implemented via bit-banging mode.
5
6The driver requires that the following macros should be defined into the board
7configuration file:
8
9CONFIG_BITBANGMII - Enable the miiphybb driver
10CONFIG_BITBANGMII_MULTI - Enable the multi bus support
11
12If the CONFIG_BITBANGMII_MULTI is not defined, the board's config file needs
13to define at least the following macros:
14
15MII_INIT - Generic code to enable the MII bus (optional)
16MDIO_DECLARE - Declaration needed to access to the MDIO pin (optional)
17MDIO_ACTIVE - Activate the MDIO pin as out pin
18MDIO_TRISTATE - Activate the MDIO pin as input/tristate pin
19MDIO_READ - Read the MDIO pin
20MDIO(v) - Write v on the MDIO pin
21MDC_DECLARE - Declaration needed to access to the MDC pin (optional)
22MDC(v) - Write v on the MDC pin
23
24The previous macros make the driver compatible with the previous version
25(that didn't support the multi-bus).
26
27When the CONFIG_BITBANGMII_MULTI is also defined, the board code needs to fill
28the bb_miiphy_buses[] array with a record for each required bus and declare
29the bb_miiphy_buses_num variable with the number of mii buses.
30The record (struct bb_miiphy_bus) has the following fields/callbacks (see
31miiphy.h for details):
32
33char name[] - The symbolic name that must be equal to the MII bus
34 registered name
35int (*init)() - Initialization function called at startup time (just
36 before the Ethernet initialization)
37int (*mdio_active)() - Activate the MDIO pin as output
38int (*mdio_tristate)() - Activate the MDIO pin as input/tristate pin
39int (*set_mdio)() - Write the MDIO pin
40int (*get_mdio)() - Read the MDIO pin
41int (*set_mdc)() - Write the MDC pin
42int (*delay)() - Delay function
43void *priv - Private data used by board specific code
44
45The board code will look like:
46
47struct bb_miiphy_bus bb_miiphy_buses[] = {
48 { .name = "miibus#1", .init = b1_init, .mdio_active = b1_mdio_active, ... },
49 { .name = "miibus#2", .init = b2_init, .mdio_active = b2_mdio_active, ... },
50 ...
51};
52int bb_miiphy_buses_num = sizeof(bb_miiphy_buses) /
53 sizeof(bb_miiphy_buses[0]);
54
552009 Industrie Dial Face S.p.A.
56 Luigi 'Comio' Mantellini <luigi.mantellini@idf-hit.com>
57
README.bloblist
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2
3Blob Lists - bloblist
4=====================
5
6Introduction
7------------
8
9A bloblist provides a way to store collections of binary information (blobs) in
10a central structure. Each record of information is assigned a tag so that its
11owner can find it and update it. Each record is generally described by a C
12structure defined by the code that owns it.
13
14
15Passing state through the boot process
16--------------------------------------
17
18The bloblist is created when the first U-Boot component runs (often SPL,
19sometimes TPL). It is passed through to each successive part of the boot and
20can be accessed as needed. This provides a way to transfer state from one part
21to the next. For example, TPL may determine that a watchdog reset occurred by
22reading an SoC register. Reading the register may reset the value, so that it
23cannot be read a second time. So TPL can store that in a bloblist record which
24can be passed through to SPL and U-Boot proper, which can print a message
25indicating that something went wrong and the watchdog fired.
26
27
28Blobs
29-----
30
31While each blob in the bloblist can be of any length, bloblists are designed to
32hold small amounts of data, typically a few KB at most. It is not possible to
33change the length of a blob once it has been written. Each blob is normally
34created from a C structure which can beused to access its fields.
35
36
37Blob tags
38---------
39
40Each blob has a tag which is a 32-bit number. This uniquely identifies the
41owner of the blob. Blob tags are listed in enum blob_tag_t and are named
42with a BLOBT_ prefix.
43
44
45Single structure
46----------------
47
48There is normally only one bloblist in U-Boot. Since a bloblist can store
49multiple blobs it does not seem useful to allow multiple bloblists. Of course
50there could be reasons for this, such as needing to spread the blobs around in
51different memory areas due to fragmented memory, but it is simpler to just have
52a single bloblist.
53
54
55API
56---
57
58Bloblist provides a fairly simple API which allows blobs to be created and
59found. All access is via the blob's tag. Blob records are zeroed when added.
60
61
62Finishing the bloblist
63----------------------
64
65When a part of U-Boot is about to jump to the next part, it can 'finish' the
66bloblist in preparation for the next stage. This involves adding a checksum so
67that the next stage can make sure that the data arrived safely. While the
68bloblist is in use, changes can be made which will affect the checksum, so it
69is easier to calculate the checksum at the end after all changes are made.
70
71
72Future work
73-----------
74
75Bootstage has a mechanism to 'stash' its records for passing to the next part.
76This should move to using bloblist, to avoid having its own mechanism for
77passing information between U-Boot parts.
78
79
80Simon Glass
81sjg@chromium.org
8212-Aug-2018
83
README.bootcount
1.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2
3Boot Count Limit
4================
5
6This allows to detect multiple failed attempts to boot Linux.
7
8After a power-on reset, "bootcount" variable will be initialized with 1, and
9each reboot will increment the value by 1.
10
11If, after a reboot, the new value of "bootcount" exceeds the value of
12"bootlimit", then instead of the standard boot action (executing the contents of
13"bootcmd") an alternate boot action will be performed, and the contents of
14"altbootcmd" will be executed.
15
16If the variable "bootlimit" is not defined in the environment, the Boot Count
17Limit feature is disabled. If it is enabled, but "altbootcmd" is not defined,
18then U-Boot will drop into interactive mode and remain there.
19
20It is the responsibility of some application code (typically a Linux
21application) to reset the variable "bootcount", thus allowing for more boot
22cycles.
23
24BOOTCOUNT_EXT
25-------------
26
27This adds support for maintaining boot count in a file on an EXT filesystem.
28The file to use is define by:
29
30SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_INTERFACE
31SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_DEVPART
32SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_NAME
33
34The format of the file is:
35
36==== =================
37type entry
38==== =================
39u8 magic
40u8 version
41u8 bootcount
42u8 upgrade_available
43==== =================
44
45To prevent unattended usage of "altbootcmd" the "upgrade_available" variable is
46used.
47If "upgrade_available" is 0, "bootcount" is not saved, if "upgrade_available" is
481 "bootcount" is save.
49So the Userspace Application must set the "upgrade_available" and "bootcount"
50variables to 0, if a boot was successfully.
51This also prevents writes on all reboots.
52
README.bootmenu
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2/*
3 * (C) Copyright 2011-2012 Pali Rohár <pali@kernel.org>
4 */
5
6ANSI terminal bootmenu command
7
8The "bootmenu" command uses U-Boot menu interfaces and provides
9a simple mechanism for creating menus with different boot items.
10The cursor keys "Up" and "Down" are used for navigation through
11the items. Current active menu item is highlighted and can be
12selected using the "Enter" key. The selection of the highlighted
13menu entry invokes an U-Boot command (or a list of commands)
14associated with this menu entry.
15
16The "bootmenu" command interprets ANSI escape sequencies, so
17an ANSI terminal is required for proper menu rendering and item
18selection.
19
20The assembling of the menu is done via a set of environment variables
21"bootmenu_<num>" and "bootmenu_delay", i.e.:
22
23 bootmenu_delay=<delay>
24 bootmenu_<num>="<title>=<commands>"
25
26 <delay> is the autoboot delay in seconds, after which the first
27 menu entry will be selected automatically
28
29 <num> is the boot menu entry number, starting from zero
30
31 <title> is the text of the menu entry shown on the console
32 or on the boot screen
33
34 <commands> are commands which will be executed when a menu
35 entry is selected
36
37 (title and commands are separated by first appearance of '='
38 character in the environment variable)
39
40First (optional) argument of the "bootmenu" command is a delay specifier
41and it overrides the delay value defined by "bootmenu_delay" environment
42variable. If the environment variable "bootmenu_delay" is not set or if
43the argument of the "bootmenu" command is not specified, the default delay
44will be CONFIG_BOOTDELAY. If delay is 0, no menu entries will be shown on
45the console (or on the screen) and the command of the first menu entry will
46be called immediately. If delay is less then 0, bootmenu will be shown and
47autoboot will be disabled.
48
49Bootmenu always adds menu entry "U-Boot console" at the end of all menu
50entries specified by environment variables. When selecting this entry
51the bootmenu terminates and the usual U-Boot command prompt is presented
52to the user.
53
54Example environment:
55
56 setenv bootmenu_0 Boot 1. kernel=bootm 0x82000000 # Set first menu entry
57 setenv bootmenu_1 Boot 2. kernel=bootm 0x83000000 # Set second menu entry
58 setenv bootmenu_2 Reset board=reset # Set third menu entry
59 setenv bootmenu_3 U-Boot boot order=boot # Set fourth menu entry
60 bootmenu 20 # Run bootmenu with autoboot delay 20s
61
62
63The above example will be rendered as below
64(without decorating rectangle):
65
66┌──────────────────────────────────────────┐
67│ │
68│ *** U-Boot Boot Menu *** │
69│ │
70│ Boot 1. kernel │
71│ Boot 2. kernel │
72│ Reset board │
73│ U-Boot boot order │
74│ U-Boot console │
75│ │
76│ Hit any key to stop autoboot: 20 │
77│ Press UP/DOWN to move, ENTER to select │
78│ │
79└──────────────────────────────────────────┘
80
81Selected menu entry will be highlighted - it will have inverted
82background and text colors.
83
84To enable the "bootmenu" command add following definitions to the
85board config file:
86
87 #define CONFIG_CMD_BOOTMENU
88 #define CONFIG_MENU
89
90To run the bootmenu at startup add these additional definitions:
91
92 #define CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_KEYED
93 #define CONFIG_BOOTDELAY 30
94 #define CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_MENU_SHOW
95
96When you intend to use the bootmenu on color frame buffer console,
97make sure to additionally define CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE_ANSI in the
98board config file.
99
README.boston
1MIPS Boston Development Board
2
3---------
4 About
5---------
6
7The MIPS Boston development board is built around an FPGA & 3 PCIe controllers,
8one of which is connected to an Intel EG20T Platform Controller Hub which
9provides most connectivity to the board. It is used during the development &
10testing of both new CPUs and the software support for them. It is essentially
11the successor of the older MIPS Malta board.
12
13--------
14 QEMU
15--------
16
17U-Boot can be run on a currently out-of-tree branch of QEMU with support for
18the Boston board added. This QEMU code can currently be found in the "boston"
19branch of git://git.linux-mips.org/pub/scm/paul/qemu.git and used like so:
20
21 $ git clone git://git.linux-mips.org/pub/scm/paul/qemu.git -b boston
22 $ cd qemu
23 $ ./configure --target-list=mips64el-softmmu
24 $ make
25 $ ./mips64el-softmmu/qemu-system-mips64el -M boston -m 2G \
26 -bios u-boot.bin -serial stdio
27
28Please note that QEMU will default to emulating the I6400 CPU which implements
29the MIPS64r6 ISA, and at the time of writing doesn't implement any earlier CPUs
30with support for the CPS features the Boston board relies upon. You will
31therefore need to configure U-Boot to build for MIPSr6 in order to obtain a
32binary that will work in QEMU.
33
34-------------
35 Toolchain
36-------------
37
38If building for MIPSr6 then you will need a toolchain including GCC 5.x or
39newer, or the Codescape toolchain available for download from Imagination
40Technologies:
41
42 http://codescape-mips-sdk.imgtec.com/components/toolchain/2015.06-05/
43
44The "IMG GNU Linux Toolchain" is capable of building for all current MIPS ISAs,
45architecture revisions & both endiannesses.
46
47--------
48 TODO
49--------
50
51 - AHCI support
52 - CPU driver
53 - Exception handling (+UHI?)
54 - Flash support
55 - IOCU support
56 - L2 cache support
57 - More general LCD display driver
58 - Multi-arch-variant multi-endian fat binary
59
README.bus_vcxk
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2/*
3 * (C) Copyright 2008-2009
4 * BuS Elektronik GmbH & Co. KG <www.bus-elektronik.de>
5 * Jens Scharsig <esw@bus-elektronik.de>
6 */
7
8U-Boot vcxk video controller driver
9======================================
10
11By defining CONFIG_VIDEO_VCXK this driver can be used with VC2K, VC4K and
12VC8K devices on following boards:
13
14board | ARCH | Vendor
15-----------------------------------------------------------------------
16EB+CPU5282-T1 | MCF5282 | BuS Elektronik GmbH & Co. KG
17EB+MCF-EVB123 | MCF5282 | BuS Elektronik GmbH & Co. KG
18EB+CPUx9K2 | AT91RM9200 | BuS Elektronik GmbH & Co. KG
19ZLSA | AT91RM9200 | Ruf Telematik AG
20
21Driver configuration
22--------------------
23
24The driver needs some defines to describe the target hardware:
25
26CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_BASE
27
28 base address of VCxK hardware memory
29
30CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_DEFAULT_LINEALIGN
31
32 defines the physical alignment of a pixel row
33
34CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_DOUBLEBUFFERED
35
36 some boards that use vcxk prevent read from framebuffer memory.
37 define this option to enable double buffering (needs 16KiB RAM)
38
39CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_<xxxx>_PIN
40
41 defines the number of the I/O line PIN in the port
42 valid values for <xxxx> are:
43
44 ACKNOWLEDGE
45 describes the acknowledge line from vcxk hardware
46
47 ENABLE
48 describes the enable line to vcxk hardware
49
50 INVERT
51 describes the invert line to vcxk hardware
52
53 RESET
54 describes the reset line to vcxk hardware
55
56 REQUEST
57 describes the request line to vcxk hardware
58
59CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_<xxxx>_PORT
60
61 defines the I/O port which is connected with the line
62 for valid values for <xxxx> see CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_<xxxx>_PIN
63
64CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_<xxxx>_DDR
65
66 defines the register which configures the direction
67 for valid values for <xxxx> see CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_<xxxx>_PIN
68
README.cfi
1The common CFI driver provides this weak default implementation for
2flash_cmd_reset():
3
4static void __flash_cmd_reset(flash_info_t *info)
5{
6 /*
7 * We do not yet know what kind of commandset to use, so we issue
8 * the reset command in both Intel and AMD variants, in the hope
9 * that AMD flash roms ignore the Intel command.
10 */
11 flash_write_cmd(info, 0, 0, AMD_CMD_RESET);
12 udelay(1);
13 flash_write_cmd(info, 0, 0, FLASH_CMD_RESET);
14}
15void flash_cmd_reset(flash_info_t *info)
16 __attribute__((weak,alias("__flash_cmd_reset")));
17
18Some flash chips seem to have trouble with this reset sequence.
19In this case, board-specific code can override this weak default
20version with a board-specific function.
21
22At the time of writing, there are two boards that define their own
23routine for this.
24
25First, the digsy_mtc board equipped with the M29W128GH from Numonyx
26needs this version to function properly:
27
28void flash_cmd_reset(flash_info_t *info)
29{
30 flash_write_cmd(info, 0, 0, AMD_CMD_RESET);
31}
32
33In addition, the t3corp board defines the routine thusly:
34
35void flash_cmd_reset(flash_info_t *info)
36{
37 /*
38 * FLASH at address CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE is a Spansion chip and
39 * needs the Spansion type reset commands. The other flash chip
40 * is located behind a FPGA (Xilinx DS617) and needs the Intel type
41 * reset command.
42 */
43 if (info->start[0] == CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE)
44 flash_write_cmd(info, 0, 0, AMD_CMD_RESET);
45 else
46 flash_write_cmd(info, 0, 0, FLASH_CMD_RESET);
47}
48
49see also:
50http://www.mail-archive.com/u-boot@lists.denx.de/msg24368.html
51
52
53Config Option
54
55 CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_SECT: Number of sectors available on Flash device
56
57 CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_CFI_WIDTH: Data-width of the flash device
58
59 CONFIG_CMD_FLASH: Enables Flash command library
60
61 CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_DRIVER: Enables CFI Flash driver
62
63 CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_MTD: Enables MTD frame work for NOR Flash devices
64
README.chromium
1Chromium OS Support in U-Boot
2=============================
3
4Introduction
5------------
6
7This describes how to use U-Boot with Chromium OS. Several options are
8available:
9
10 - Running U-Boot from the 'altfw' feature, which is available on selected
11 Chromebooks from 2019 onwards (initially Grunt). Press '1' from the
12 developer-mode screen to get into U-Boot. See here for details:
13 https://sites.google.com/a/chromium.org/dev/chromium-os/poking-around-your-chrome-os-device?pli=1
14
15 - Running U-Boot from the disk partition. This involves signing U-Boot and
16 placing it on the disk, for booting as a 'kernel'. See
17 README.chromium-chainload for information on this. This is the only
18 option on non-U-Boot Chromebooks from 2013 to 2018 and is somewhat
19 more involved.
20
21 - Running U-Boot with Chromium OS verified boot. This allows U-Boot to be
22 used instead of either or both of depthcharge (a bootloader which forked
23 from U-Boot in 2013) and coreboot. See below for more information on
24 this.
25
26
27U-Boot with Chromium OS verified boot
28-------------------------------------
29
30To obtain:
31
32 git clone https://github.com/sglass68/u-boot.git
33 cd u-boot
34 git checkout cros-master
35
36 cd ..
37 git clone https://chromium.googlesource.com/chromiumos/platform/vboot_reference
38 cd vboot_reference
39 git checkout 45964294
40 # futility: updater: Correct output version for Snow
41
42To build for sandbox:
43
44 UB=/tmp/b/chromeos_sandbox # U-Boot build directory
45 cd u-boot
46 make O=$UB chromeos_sandbox_defconfig
47 make O=$UB -j20 -s VBOOT_SOURCE=/path/to/vboot_reference \
48 MAKEFLAGS_VBOOT=DEBUG=1 QUIET=1
49
50Replace sandbox with another supported target.
51
52This produces $UB/image.bin which contains the firmware binaries in a SPI
53flash image.
54
55To run on sandbox:
56
57 $UB/tpl/u-boot-tpl -d $UB/u-boot.dtb.out \
58 -L6 -c "host bind 0 $CROS/src/build/images/cheza/latest/chromiumos_image.bin; vboot go auto" \
59 -l -w -s state.dtb -r
60
61To run on other boards:
62 Install image.bin in the SPI flash of your device
63 Boot your system
64
65
66Sandbox
67-------
68
69Most Chromium OS development with U-Boot is undertaken using sandbox. There is
70a sandbox target available (chromeos_sandbox) which allows running U-Boot on
71a Linux machine completion with emulations of the display, TPM, disk, etc.
72
73Running sandbox starts TPL, which contains the first phase of vboot, providing
74a device tree and binding a Chromium OS disk image for use to find kernels
75(any Chromium OS image will do). It also saves driver state between U-Boot
76phases into state.dtb and will automatically ensure that memory is shared
77between all phases. TPL will jump to SPL and then on to U-Boot proper.
78
79It is possible to run with debugging on, e.g.
80
81 gdb --args $UB/tpl/u-boot-tpl -d ....
82
83Breakpoints can be set in any U-Boot phase. Overall this is a good debugging
84environment for new verified-boot features.
85
86
87Samus
88-----
89
90Basic support is available for samus, using the chromeos_samus target. If you
91have an em100, use:
92
93 sudo em100 -s -c W25Q128FW -d $UB/image.bin -t -r
94
95to write the image and then boot samus (Power-Refresh).
96
97
98Boot flow
99---------
100
101Verified boot starts in TPL, which selects the A or B SPL, which in turn selects
102the A or B U-Boot. Then this jumps to the selected kernel. If anything goes
103wrong, the device reboots and the recovery SPL and U-Boot are used instead.
104
105More details are available here:
106
107 https://www.chromium.org/chromium-os/chromiumos-design-docs/firmware-boot-and-recovery
108
109
110New uclasses
111------------
112
113Several uclasses are provided in cros/:
114
115 UCLASS_CROS_AUX_FW Chrome OS auxiliary firmware
116 UCLASS_CROS_FWSTORE Chrome OS firmware storage
117 UCLASS_CROS_NVDATA Chrome OS non-volatile data device
118 UCLASS_CROS_VBOOT_EC Chrome OS vboot EC operations
119 UCLASS_CROS_VBOOT_FLAG Chrome OS verified boot flag
120
121The existing UCLASS_CROS_EC is also used.
122
123
124Commands
125--------
126
127A new 'vboot' command is provided to run particular vboot stages. The most
128useful command is 'vboot go auto', which continues where the last stage left
129off.
130
131Note that TPL and SPL do not supports commands as yet, so the vboot code is
132called directly from the SPL boot devices (BOOT_DEVICE_CROS_VBOOT). See
133cros_load_image_tpl() and cros_load_image_spl() which both call
134vboot_run_auto().
135
136
137Config options
138--------------
139
140The main option is CONFIG_CHROMEOS, which enables a wide array of other options
141so that the required features are present.
142
143
144Device-tree config
145------------------
146
147Various options are available which control the operation of verified boot.
148See cros/dts/bindings/config.txt for details. Most config is handled at run-
149time, although build-time config (with Kconfig) could also be added fairly
150easily.
151
152
153Porting to other hardware
154-------------------------
155
156A basic port to samus (Chromebook Pixel 2015) is in a basic working state,
157using the chromeos_samus target. Patches will likely be forthcoming in early
1582019. Ports to an ARM board and coreboot (for x86 Chromebooks) are in the
159dreaming state.
160
161
162Tests
163-----
164
165Chromium OS firmware has a very limited set of tests. The tests that originally
166existed in U-Boot were not brought over to coreboot or depthcharge.
167
168The U-Boot tests ('make check') do operate, but at present there are no
169Chromium OS tests available. These will hopefully come together over time. Of
170course the above sandbox feature provides a sort of functional test and can
171detecte problems that affect the flow or particular vboot features.
172
173
174TO DO
175-----
176
177- Support for booting from coreboot (patches expected March 2019)
178- Support for booting from an ARM board, e.g. bob
179
180
181Simon Glass
182sjg@chromium.org
1837 October 2018
184
README.chromium-chainload
1Running U-Boot from coreboot on Chromebooks
2===========================================
3
4U-Boot can be used as a secondary boot loader in a few situations such as from
5UEFI and coreboot (see README.x86). Recent Chromebooks use coreboot even on
6ARM platforms to start up the machine.
7
8This document aims to provide a guide to booting U-Boot on a Chromebook. It
9is only a starting point, and there are many guides on the interwebs. But
10placing this information in the U-Boot tree should make it easier to find for
11those who use U-Boot habitually.
12
13Most of these platforms are supported by U-Boot natively, but it is risky to
14replace the ROM unless you have a servo board and cable to restore it with.
15
16
17For all of these the standard U-Boot build instructions apply. For example on
18ARM:
19
20 sudo apt install gcc-arm-linux-gnueabi
21 mkdir b
22 make O=b/nyan_big CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-gnueabi- nyan-big_defconfig all
23
24You can obtain the vbutil_kernel utility here:
25
26 https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B7WYZbZ9zd-3dHlVVXo4VXE2T0U
27
28
29Snow (Samsung ARM Chromebook)
30-----------------------------
31
32See here:
33
34https://www.chromium.org/chromium-os/firmware-porting-guide/using-nv-u-boot-on-the-samsung-arm-chromebook
35
36
37Nyan-big
38--------
39
40Compiled based on information here:
41https://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot/2015-March/209530.html
42https://git.collabora.com/cgit/user/tomeu/u-boot.git/commit/?h=nyan-big
43https://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot/2017-May/289491.html
44https://github.com/chromeos-nvidia-androidtv/gnu-linux-on-acer-chromebook-13#copy-data-to-the-sd-card
45
461. Build U-Boot
47
48 mkdir b
49 make -j8 O=b/nyan-big CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-gnueabi- nyan-big_defconfig all
50
51
522. Select a .its file
53
54Select something from doc/chromium which matches your board, or create your
55own.
56
57Note that the device tree node is required, even though it is not actually
58used by U-Boot. This is because the Chromebook expects to pass it to the
59kernel, and crashes if it is not present.
60
61
623. Build and sign an image
63
64 ./b/nyan-big/tools/mkimage -f doc/chromium/nyan-big.its u-boot-chromium.fit
65 echo test >dummy.txt
66 vbutil_kernel --arch arm --keyblock doc/chromium/devkeys/kernel.keyblock \
67 --signprivate doc/chromium/devkeys/kernel_data_key.vbprivk \
68 --version 1 --config dummy.txt --vmlinuz u-boot-chromium.fit \
69 --bootloader dummy.txt --pack u-boot.kpart
70
71
724. Prepare an SD card
73
74 DISK=/dev/sdc # Replace with your actual SD card device
75 sudo cgpt create $DISK
76 sudo cgpt add -b 34 -s 32768 -P 1 -S 1 -t kernel $DISK
77 sudo cgpt add -b 32802 -s 2000000 -t rootfs $DISK
78 sudo gdisk $DISK # Enter command 'w' to write a protective MBR to the disk
79
80
815. Write U-Boot to the SD card
82
83 sudo dd if=u-boot.kpart of=/dev/sdc1; sync
84
85
866. Start it up
87
88Reboot the device in dev mode. Make sure that you have USB booting enabled. To
89do this, login as root (via Ctrl-Alt-forward_arrow) and type
90'enable_dev_usb_boot'. You only need to do this once.
91
92Reboot the device with the SD card inserted. Press Clrl-U at the developer
93mode screen. It should show something like the following on the display:
94
95 U-Boot 2017.07-00637-g242eb42-dirty (May 22 2017 - 06:14:21 -0600)
96
97 Model: Acer Chromebook 13 CB5-311
98 Board: Google/NVIDIA Nyan-big, ID: 1
99
100 Net: No ethernet found.
101 Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
102 Tegra124 (Nyan-big) #
103
104
1057. Known problems
106
107On the serial console the word MMC is chopped at the start of the line:
108
109C: sdhci@700b0000: 2, sdhci@700b0400: 1, sdhci@700b0600: 0
110
111This is likely due to some problem with change-over of the serial driver
112during relocation (or perhaps updating the clock setup in board_init()).
113
114
1159. Notes
116
117To check that you copied the u-boot.its file correctly, use these commands.
118You should see that the data at 0x100 in u-boot-chromium.fit is the first few
119bytes of U-Boot:
120
121 hd u-boot-chromium.fit |head -20
122 ...
123 00000100 b8 00 00 ea 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 |................|
124
125 hd b/nyan-big/u-boot.bin |head
126 00000000 b8 00 00 ea 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 |................|
127
128
129The 'data' property of the FIT is set up to start at offset 0x100 bytes into
130the file. The change to CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE is also an offset of 0x100 bytes
131from the load address. If this changes, you either need to modify U-Boot to be
132fully relocatable, or expect it to hang.
133
134
135chromebook_jerry
136----------------
137
138The instruction are similar to those for Nyan with changes as noted below:
139
1401. Patch U-Boot
141
142Open include/configs/rk3288_common.h
143
144Change:
145
146#define CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE 0x00100000
147
148to:
149
150#define CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE 0x02000100
151
152
153
1542. Build U-Boot
155
156 mkdir b
157 make -j8 O=b/chromebook_jerry CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-gnueabi- \
158 chromebook_jerry_defconfig all
159
160
1613. See above
162
1634. Build and sign an image
164
165 ./b/chromebook_jerry/tools/mkimage -f doc/chromium/chromebook_jerry.its \
166 u-boot-chromium.fit
167 echo test >dummy.txt
168 vbutil_kernel --arch arm --keyblock doc/chromium/devkeys/kernel.keyblock \
169 --signprivate doc/chromium/devkeys/kernel_data_key.vbprivk \
170 --version 1 --config dummy.txt --vmlinuz u-boot-chromium.fit \
171 --bootloader dummy.txt --pack u-boot.kpart
172
173
1745. See above
175
1766. See above
177
1787. Start it up
179
180Reboot the device in dev mode. Make sure that you have USB booting enabled. To
181do this, login as root (via Ctrl-Alt-forward_arrow) and type
182'enable_dev_usb_boot'. You only need to do this once.
183
184Reboot the device with the SD card inserted. Press Clrl-U at the developer
185mode screen. It should show something like the following on the display:
186
187 U-Boot 2017.05-00649-g72acdbf-dirty (May 29 2017 - 14:57:05 -0600)
188
189 Model: Google Jerry
190 Net: Net Initialization Skipped
191 No ethernet found.
192 Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
193
194
1958. Known problems
196
197None as yet.
198
199
2009. Notes
201
202None as yet.
203
204
205Other notes
206===========
207
208flashrom
209--------
210
211 Used to make a backup of your firmware, or to replace it.
212
213 See: https://www.chromium.org/chromium-os/packages/cros-flashrom
214
215
216coreboot
217--------
218
219Coreboot itself is not designed to actually boot an OS. Instead, a program
220called Depthcharge is used. This originally came out of U-Boot and was then
221heavily hacked and modified such that is is almost unrecognisable. It does
222include a very small part of the U-Boot command-line interface but is not
223usable as a general-purpose boot loader.
224
225In addition, it has a very unusual design in that it does not do device init
226itself, but instead relies on coreboot. This is similar to (in U-Boot) having
227a SPI driver with an empty probe() method, relying on whatever was set up
228beforehand. It can be quite hard to figure out between these two code bases
229what settings are actually used. When chain-loading into U-Boot we must be
230careful to reinit anything that U-Boot expects. If not, some peripherals (or
231the whole machine) may not work. This makes the process of chainloading more
232complicated than it could be on some platforms.
233
234Finally, it supports only a subset of the U-Boot's FIT format. In particular
235it uses a fixed address to load the FIT and does not support load/exec
236addresses. This means that U-Boot must be able to boot from whatever
237address Depthcharge happens to use (it is the CONFIG_KERNEL_START setting
238in Depthcharge). In practice this means that the data in the kernel@1 FIT node
239(see above) must start at the same address as U-Boot's CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE.
240
README.clang
1The biggest problem when trying to compile U-Boot with clang is that
2almost all archs rely on storing gd in a global register and clang user
3manual states: "clang does not support global register variables; this
4is unlikely to be implemented soon because it requires additional LLVM
5backend support."
6
7Since version 3.4 the ARM backend can be instructed to leave r9 alone.
8Global registers themselves are not supported so some inline assembly is
9used to get its value. This does lead to larger code then strictly
10necessary, but at least works.
11
12NOTE: target compilation only work for _some_ ARM boards at the moment.
13Also AArch64 is not supported currently due to a lack of private libgcc
14support. Boards which reassign gd in c will also fail to compile, but there is
15in no strict reason to do so in the ARM world, since crt0.S takes care of this.
16These assignments can be avoided by changing the init calls but this is not in
17mainline yet.
18
19Debian (based)
20--------------
21Binary packages can be installed as usual, e.g.:
22sudo apt-get install clang
23
24Note that we still use binutils for some tools so we must continue to set
25CROSS_COMPILE. To compile U-Boot with clang on linux without IAS use e.g.:
26make HOSTCC=clang rpi_2_defconfig
27make HOSTCC=clang CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-gnueabi- \
28 CC="clang -target arm-linux-gnueabi" -j8
29
30It can also be used to compile sandbox:
31make HOSTCC=clang sandbox_defconfig
32make HOSTCC=clang CC=clang -j8
33
34FreeBSD 11 (Current):
35--------------------
36Since llvm 3.4 is currently in the base system, the integrated as is
37incapable of building U-Boot. Therefore gas from devel/arm-gnueabi-binutils
38is used instead. It needs a symlinks to be picked up correctly though:
39
40ln -s /usr/local/bin/arm-gnueabi-freebsd-as /usr/bin/arm-freebsd-eabi-as
41
42# The following commands compile U-Boot using the clang xdev toolchain.
43# NOTE: CROSS_COMPILE and target differ on purpose!
44export CROSS_COMPILE=arm-gnueabi-freebsd-
45gmake rpi_2_defconfig
46gmake CC="clang -target arm-freebsd-eabi --sysroot /usr/arm-freebsd" -j8
47
48Given that U-Boot will default to gcc, above commands can be
49simplified with a simple wrapper script, listed below.
50
51/usr/local/bin/arm-gnueabi-freebsd-gcc
52---
53#!/bin/sh
54
55exec clang -target arm-freebsd-eabi --sysroot /usr/arm-freebsd "$@"
56
README.coccinelle
1.. Copyright 2010 Nicolas Palix <npalix@diku.dk>
2.. Copyright 2010 Julia Lawall <julia@diku.dk>
3.. Copyright 2010 Gilles Muller <Gilles.Muller@lip6.fr>
4
5.. highlight:: none
6
7Coccinelle
8==========
9
10Coccinelle is a tool for pattern matching and text transformation that has
11many uses in kernel development, including the application of complex,
12tree-wide patches and detection of problematic programming patterns.
13
14Getting Coccinelle
15-------------------
16
17The semantic patches included in the kernel use features and options
18which are provided by Coccinelle version 1.0.0-rc11 and above.
19Using earlier versions will fail as the option names used by
20the Coccinelle files and coccicheck have been updated.
21
22Coccinelle is available through the package manager
23of many distributions, e.g. :
24
25 - Debian
26 - Fedora
27 - Ubuntu
28 - OpenSUSE
29 - Arch Linux
30 - NetBSD
31 - FreeBSD
32
33You can get the latest version released from the Coccinelle homepage at
34http://coccinelle.lip6.fr/
35
36Information and tips about Coccinelle are also provided on the wiki
37pages at http://cocci.ekstranet.diku.dk/wiki/doku.php
38
39Once you have it, run the following command::
40
41 ./configure
42 make
43
44as a regular user, and install it with::
45
46 sudo make install
47
48Supplemental documentation
49---------------------------
50
51For supplemental documentation refer to the wiki:
52
53https://bottest.wiki.kernel.org/coccicheck
54
55The wiki documentation always refers to the linux-next version of the script.
56
57Using Coccinelle on the Linux kernel
58------------------------------------
59
60A Coccinelle-specific target is defined in the top level
61Makefile. This target is named ``coccicheck`` and calls the ``coccicheck``
62front-end in the ``scripts`` directory.
63
64Four basic modes are defined: ``patch``, ``report``, ``context``, and
65``org``. The mode to use is specified by setting the MODE variable with
66``MODE=<mode>``.
67
68- ``patch`` proposes a fix, when possible.
69
70- ``report`` generates a list in the following format:
71 file:line:column-column: message
72
73- ``context`` highlights lines of interest and their context in a
74 diff-like style.Lines of interest are indicated with ``-``.
75
76- ``org`` generates a report in the Org mode format of Emacs.
77
78Note that not all semantic patches implement all modes. For easy use
79of Coccinelle, the default mode is "report".
80
81Two other modes provide some common combinations of these modes.
82
83- ``chain`` tries the previous modes in the order above until one succeeds.
84
85- ``rep+ctxt`` runs successively the report mode and the context mode.
86 It should be used with the C option (described later)
87 which checks the code on a file basis.
88
89Examples
90~~~~~~~~
91
92To make a report for every semantic patch, run the following command::
93
94 make coccicheck MODE=report
95
96To produce patches, run::
97
98 make coccicheck MODE=patch
99
100
101The coccicheck target applies every semantic patch available in the
102sub-directories of ``scripts/coccinelle`` to the entire Linux kernel.
103
104For each semantic patch, a commit message is proposed. It gives a
105description of the problem being checked by the semantic patch, and
106includes a reference to Coccinelle.
107
108As any static code analyzer, Coccinelle produces false
109positives. Thus, reports must be carefully checked, and patches
110reviewed.
111
112To enable verbose messages set the V= variable, for example::
113
114 make coccicheck MODE=report V=1
115
116Coccinelle parallelization
117---------------------------
118
119By default, coccicheck tries to run as parallel as possible. To change
120the parallelism, set the J= variable. For example, to run across 4 CPUs::
121
122 make coccicheck MODE=report J=4
123
124As of Coccinelle 1.0.2 Coccinelle uses Ocaml parmap for parallelization,
125if support for this is detected you will benefit from parmap parallelization.
126
127When parmap is enabled coccicheck will enable dynamic load balancing by using
128``--chunksize 1`` argument, this ensures we keep feeding threads with work
129one by one, so that we avoid the situation where most work gets done by only
130a few threads. With dynamic load balancing, if a thread finishes early we keep
131feeding it more work.
132
133When parmap is enabled, if an error occurs in Coccinelle, this error
134value is propagated back, the return value of the ``make coccicheck``
135captures this return value.
136
137Using Coccinelle with a single semantic patch
138---------------------------------------------
139
140The optional make variable COCCI can be used to check a single
141semantic patch. In that case, the variable must be initialized with
142the name of the semantic patch to apply.
143
144For instance::
145
146 make coccicheck COCCI=<my_SP.cocci> MODE=patch
147
148or::
149
150 make coccicheck COCCI=<my_SP.cocci> MODE=report
151
152
153Controlling Which Files are Processed by Coccinelle
154---------------------------------------------------
155
156By default the entire kernel source tree is checked.
157
158To apply Coccinelle to a specific directory, ``M=`` can be used.
159For example, to check drivers/net/wireless/ one may write::
160
161 make coccicheck M=drivers/net/wireless/
162
163To apply Coccinelle on a file basis, instead of a directory basis, the
164following command may be used::
165
166 make C=1 CHECK="scripts/coccicheck"
167
168To check only newly edited code, use the value 2 for the C flag, i.e.::
169
170 make C=2 CHECK="scripts/coccicheck"
171
172In these modes, which works on a file basis, there is no information
173about semantic patches displayed, and no commit message proposed.
174
175This runs every semantic patch in scripts/coccinelle by default. The
176COCCI variable may additionally be used to only apply a single
177semantic patch as shown in the previous section.
178
179The "report" mode is the default. You can select another one with the
180MODE variable explained above.
181
182Debugging Coccinelle SmPL patches
183---------------------------------
184
185Using coccicheck is best as it provides in the spatch command line
186include options matching the options used when we compile the kernel.
187You can learn what these options are by using V=1, you could then
188manually run Coccinelle with debug options added.
189
190Alternatively you can debug running Coccinelle against SmPL patches
191by asking for stderr to be redirected to stderr, by default stderr
192is redirected to /dev/null, if you'd like to capture stderr you
193can specify the ``DEBUG_FILE="file.txt"`` option to coccicheck. For
194instance::
195
196 rm -f cocci.err
197 make coccicheck COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/free/kfree.cocci MODE=report DEBUG_FILE=cocci.err
198 cat cocci.err
199
200You can use SPFLAGS to add debugging flags, for instance you may want to
201add both --profile --show-trying to SPFLAGS when debugging. For instance
202you may want to use::
203
204 rm -f err.log
205 export COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/misc/irqf_oneshot.cocci
206 make coccicheck DEBUG_FILE="err.log" MODE=report SPFLAGS="--profile --show-trying" M=./drivers/mfd/arizona-irq.c
207
208err.log will now have the profiling information, while stdout will
209provide some progress information as Coccinelle moves forward with
210work.
211
212DEBUG_FILE support is only supported when using coccinelle >= 1.2.
213
214.cocciconfig support
215--------------------
216
217Coccinelle supports reading .cocciconfig for default Coccinelle options that
218should be used every time spatch is spawned, the order of precedence for
219variables for .cocciconfig is as follows:
220
221- Your current user's home directory is processed first
222- Your directory from which spatch is called is processed next
223- The directory provided with the --dir option is processed last, if used
224
225Since coccicheck runs through make, it naturally runs from the kernel
226proper dir, as such the second rule above would be implied for picking up a
227.cocciconfig when using ``make coccicheck``.
228
229``make coccicheck`` also supports using M= targets.If you do not supply
230any M= target, it is assumed you want to target the entire kernel.
231The kernel coccicheck script has::
232
233 if [ "$KBUILD_EXTMOD" = "" ] ; then
234 OPTIONS="--dir $srctree $COCCIINCLUDE"
235 else
236 OPTIONS="--dir $KBUILD_EXTMOD $COCCIINCLUDE"
237 fi
238
239KBUILD_EXTMOD is set when an explicit target with M= is used. For both cases
240the spatch --dir argument is used, as such third rule applies when whether M=
241is used or not, and when M= is used the target directory can have its own
242.cocciconfig file. When M= is not passed as an argument to coccicheck the
243target directory is the same as the directory from where spatch was called.
244
245If not using the kernel's coccicheck target, keep the above precedence
246order logic of .cocciconfig reading. If using the kernel's coccicheck target,
247override any of the kernel's .coccicheck's settings using SPFLAGS.
248
249We help Coccinelle when used against Linux with a set of sensible defaults
250options for Linux with our own Linux .cocciconfig. This hints to coccinelle
251git can be used for ``git grep`` queries over coccigrep. A timeout of 200
252seconds should suffice for now.
253
254The options picked up by coccinelle when reading a .cocciconfig do not appear
255as arguments to spatch processes running on your system, to confirm what
256options will be used by Coccinelle run::
257
258 spatch --print-options-only
259
260You can override with your own preferred index option by using SPFLAGS. Take
261note that when there are conflicting options Coccinelle takes precedence for
262the last options passed. Using .cocciconfig is possible to use idutils, however
263given the order of precedence followed by Coccinelle, since the kernel now
264carries its own .cocciconfig, you will need to use SPFLAGS to use idutils if
265desired. See below section "Additional flags" for more details on how to use
266idutils.
267
268Additional flags
269----------------
270
271Additional flags can be passed to spatch through the SPFLAGS
272variable. This works as Coccinelle respects the last flags
273given to it when options are in conflict. ::
274
275 make SPFLAGS=--use-glimpse coccicheck
276
277Coccinelle supports idutils as well but requires coccinelle >= 1.0.6.
278When no ID file is specified coccinelle assumes your ID database file
279is in the file .id-utils.index on the top level of the kernel, coccinelle
280carries a script scripts/idutils_index.sh which creates the database with::
281
282 mkid -i C --output .id-utils.index
283
284If you have another database filename you can also just symlink with this
285name. ::
286
287 make SPFLAGS=--use-idutils coccicheck
288
289Alternatively you can specify the database filename explicitly, for
290instance::
291
292 make SPFLAGS="--use-idutils /full-path/to/ID" coccicheck
293
294See ``spatch --help`` to learn more about spatch options.
295
296Note that the ``--use-glimpse`` and ``--use-idutils`` options
297require external tools for indexing the code. None of them is
298thus active by default. However, by indexing the code with
299one of these tools, and according to the cocci file used,
300spatch could proceed the entire code base more quickly.
301
302SmPL patch specific options
303---------------------------
304
305SmPL patches can have their own requirements for options passed
306to Coccinelle. SmPL patch specific options can be provided by
307providing them at the top of the SmPL patch, for instance::
308
309 // Options: --no-includes --include-headers
310
311SmPL patch Coccinelle requirements
312----------------------------------
313
314As Coccinelle features get added some more advanced SmPL patches
315may require newer versions of Coccinelle. If an SmPL patch requires
316at least a version of Coccinelle, this can be specified as follows,
317as an example if requiring at least Coccinelle >= 1.0.5::
318
319 // Requires: 1.0.5
320
321Proposing new semantic patches
322-------------------------------
323
324New semantic patches can be proposed and submitted by kernel
325developers. For sake of clarity, they should be organized in the
326sub-directories of ``scripts/coccinelle/``.
327
328
329Detailed description of the ``report`` mode
330-------------------------------------------
331
332``report`` generates a list in the following format::
333
334 file:line:column-column: message
335
336Example
337~~~~~~~
338
339Running::
340
341 make coccicheck MODE=report COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci
342
343will execute the following part of the SmPL script::
344
345 <smpl>
346 @r depends on !context && !patch && (org || report)@
347 expression x;
348 position p;
349 @@
350
351 ERR_PTR@p(PTR_ERR(x))
352
353 @script:python depends on report@
354 p << r.p;
355 x << r.x;
356 @@
357
358 msg="ERR_CAST can be used with %s" % (x)
359 coccilib.report.print_report(p[0], msg)
360 </smpl>
361
362This SmPL excerpt generates entries on the standard output, as
363illustrated below::
364
365 /home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c:188:9-16: ERR_CAST can be used with alg
366 /home/user/linux/crypto/authenc.c:619:9-16: ERR_CAST can be used with auth
367 /home/user/linux/crypto/xts.c:227:9-16: ERR_CAST can be used with alg
368
369
370Detailed description of the ``patch`` mode
371------------------------------------------
372
373When the ``patch`` mode is available, it proposes a fix for each problem
374identified.
375
376Example
377~~~~~~~
378
379Running::
380
381 make coccicheck MODE=patch COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci
382
383will execute the following part of the SmPL script::
384
385 <smpl>
386 @ depends on !context && patch && !org && !report @
387 expression x;
388 @@
389
390 - ERR_PTR(PTR_ERR(x))
391 + ERR_CAST(x)
392 </smpl>
393
394This SmPL excerpt generates patch hunks on the standard output, as
395illustrated below::
396
397 diff -u -p a/crypto/ctr.c b/crypto/ctr.c
398 --- a/crypto/ctr.c 2010-05-26 10:49:38.000000000 +0200
399 +++ b/crypto/ctr.c 2010-06-03 23:44:49.000000000 +0200
400 @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ static struct crypto_instance *crypto_ct
401 alg = crypto_attr_alg(tb[1], CRYPTO_ALG_TYPE_CIPHER,
402 CRYPTO_ALG_TYPE_MASK);
403 if (IS_ERR(alg))
404 - return ERR_PTR(PTR_ERR(alg));
405 + return ERR_CAST(alg);
406
407 /* Block size must be >= 4 bytes. */
408 err = -EINVAL;
409
410Detailed description of the ``context`` mode
411--------------------------------------------
412
413``context`` highlights lines of interest and their context
414in a diff-like style.
415
416 **NOTE**: The diff-like output generated is NOT an applicable patch. The
417 intent of the ``context`` mode is to highlight the important lines
418 (annotated with minus, ``-``) and gives some surrounding context
419 lines around. This output can be used with the diff mode of
420 Emacs to review the code.
421
422Example
423~~~~~~~
424
425Running::
426
427 make coccicheck MODE=context COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci
428
429will execute the following part of the SmPL script::
430
431 <smpl>
432 @ depends on context && !patch && !org && !report@
433 expression x;
434 @@
435
436 * ERR_PTR(PTR_ERR(x))
437 </smpl>
438
439This SmPL excerpt generates diff hunks on the standard output, as
440illustrated below::
441
442 diff -u -p /home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c /tmp/nothing
443 --- /home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c 2010-05-26 10:49:38.000000000 +0200
444 +++ /tmp/nothing
445 @@ -185,7 +185,6 @@ static struct crypto_instance *crypto_ct
446 alg = crypto_attr_alg(tb[1], CRYPTO_ALG_TYPE_CIPHER,
447 CRYPTO_ALG_TYPE_MASK);
448 if (IS_ERR(alg))
449 - return ERR_PTR(PTR_ERR(alg));
450
451 /* Block size must be >= 4 bytes. */
452 err = -EINVAL;
453
454Detailed description of the ``org`` mode
455----------------------------------------
456
457``org`` generates a report in the Org mode format of Emacs.
458
459Example
460~~~~~~~
461
462Running::
463
464 make coccicheck MODE=org COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci
465
466will execute the following part of the SmPL script::
467
468 <smpl>
469 @r depends on !context && !patch && (org || report)@
470 expression x;
471 position p;
472 @@
473
474 ERR_PTR@p(PTR_ERR(x))
475
476 @script:python depends on org@
477 p << r.p;
478 x << r.x;
479 @@
480
481 msg="ERR_CAST can be used with %s" % (x)
482 msg_safe=msg.replace("[","@(").replace("]",")")
483 coccilib.org.print_todo(p[0], msg_safe)
484 </smpl>
485
486This SmPL excerpt generates Org entries on the standard output, as
487illustrated below::
488
489 * TODO [[view:/home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c::face=ovl-face1::linb=188::colb=9::cole=16][ERR_CAST can be used with alg]]
490 * TODO [[view:/home/user/linux/crypto/authenc.c::face=ovl-face1::linb=619::colb=9::cole=16][ERR_CAST can be used with auth]]
491 * TODO [[view:/home/user/linux/crypto/xts.c::face=ovl-face1::linb=227::colb=9::cole=16][ERR_CAST can be used with alg]]
492
README.commands
1Command definition
2------------------
3
4Commands are added to U-Boot by creating a new command structure.
5This is done by first including command.h, then using the U_BOOT_CMD() or the
6U_BOOT_CMD_COMPLETE macro to fill in a struct cmd_tbl struct.
7
8U_BOOT_CMD(name, maxargs, repeatable, command, "usage", "help")
9U_BOOT_CMD_COMPLETE(name, maxargs, repeatable, command, "usage, "help", comp)
10
11name: The name of the command. THIS IS NOT a string.
12
13maxargs: The maximum number of arguments this function takes including
14 the command itself.
15
16repeatable: Either 0 or 1 to indicate if autorepeat is allowed.
17
18command: Pointer to the command function. This is the function that is
19 called when the command is issued.
20
21usage: Short description. This is a string.
22
23help: Long description. This is a string. The long description is
24 only available if CONFIG_SYS_LONGHELP is defined.
25
26comp: Pointer to the completion function. May be NULL.
27 This function is called if the user hits the TAB key while
28 entering the command arguments to complete the entry. Command
29 completion is only available if CONFIG_AUTO_COMPLETE is defined.
30
31Sub-command definition
32----------------------
33
34Likewise an array of struct cmd_tbl holding sub-commands can be created using either
35of the following macros:
36
37* U_BOOT_CMD_MKENT(name, maxargs, repeatable, command, "usage", "help")
38* U_BOOT_CMD_MKENTCOMPLETE(name, maxargs, repeatable, command, "usage, "help",
39 comp)
40
41This table has to be evaluated in the command function of the main command, e.g.
42
43 static struct cmd_tbl cmd_sub[] = {
44 U_BOOT_CMD_MKENT(foo, CONFIG_SYS_MAXARGS, 1, do_foo, "", ""),
45 U_BOOT_CMD_MKENT(bar, CONFIG_SYS_MAXARGS, 1, do_bar, "", ""),
46 };
47
48 static int do_cmd(struct cmd_tbl *cmdtp, int flag, int argc, char *const argv[])
49 {
50 struct cmd_tbl *cp;
51
52 if (argc < 2)
53 return CMD_RET_USAGE;
54
55 /* drop sub-command argument */
56 argc--;
57 argv++;
58
59 cp = find_cmd_tbl(argv[0], cmd_ut_sub, ARRAY_SIZE(cmd_sub));
60
61 if (cp)
62 return cp->cmd(cmdtp, flag, argc, argv);
63
64 return CMD_RET_USAGE;
65 }
66
67Command function
68----------------
69
70The command function pointer has to be of type
71int (*cmd)(struct cmd_tbl *cmdtp, int flag, int argc, const char *argv[]);
72
73cmdtp: Table entry describing the command (see above).
74
75flag: A bitmap which may contain the following bit:
76 CMD_FLAG_REPEAT - The last command is repeated.
77 CMD_FLAG_BOOTD - The command is called by the bootd command.
78 CMD_FLAG_ENV - The command is called by the run command.
79
80argc: Number of arguments including the command.
81
82argv: Arguments.
83
84Allowable return value are:
85
86CMD_RET_SUCCESS The command was successfully executed.
87
88CMD_RET_FAILURE The command failed.
89
90CMD_RET_USAGE The command was called with invalid parameters. This value
91 leads to the display of the usage string.
92
93Completion function
94-------------------
95
96The completion function pointer has to be of type
97int (*complete)(int argc, char *const argv[], char last_char,
98 int maxv, char *cmdv[]);
99
100argc: Number of arguments including the command.
101
102argv: Arguments.
103
104last_char: The last character in the command line buffer.
105
106maxv: Maximum number of possible completions that may be returned by
107 the function.
108
109cmdv: Used to return possible values for the last argument. The last
110 possible completion must be followed by NULL.
111
112The function returns the number of possible completions (without the terminating
113NULL value).
114
115Behind the scene
116----------------
117
118The structure created is named with a special prefix and placed by
119the linker in a special section using the linker lists mechanism
120(see include/linker_lists.h)
121
122This makes it possible for the final link to extract all commands
123compiled into any object code and construct a static array so the
124command array can be iterated over using the linker lists macros.
125
126The linker lists feature ensures that the linker does not discard
127these symbols when linking full U-Boot even though they are not
128referenced in the source code as such.
129
130If a new board is defined do not forget to define the command section
131by writing in u-boot.lds ($(srctree)/board/boardname/u-boot.lds) these
1323 lines:
133
134 .u_boot_list : {
135 KEEP(*(SORT(.u_boot_list*)));
136 }
137
138Writing tests
139-------------
140
141All new commands should have tests. Tests for existing commands are very
142welcome.
143
144It is fairly easy to write a test for a command. Enable it in sandbox, and
145then add code that runs the command and checks the output.
146
147Here is an example:
148
149/* Test 'acpi items' command */
150static int dm_test_acpi_cmd_items(struct unit_test_state *uts)
151{
152 struct acpi_ctx ctx;
153 void *buf;
154
155 buf = malloc(BUF_SIZE);
156 ut_assertnonnull(buf);
157
158 ctx.current = buf;
159 ut_assertok(acpi_fill_ssdt(&ctx));
160 console_record_reset();
161 run_command("acpi items", 0);
162 ut_assert_nextline("dev 'acpi-test', type 1, size 2");
163 ut_assert_nextline("dev 'acpi-test2', type 1, size 2");
164 ut_assert_console_end();
165
166 ctx.current = buf;
167 ut_assertok(acpi_inject_dsdt(&ctx));
168 console_record_reset();
169 run_command("acpi items", 0);
170 ut_assert_nextline("dev 'acpi-test', type 2, size 2");
171 ut_assert_nextline("dev 'acpi-test2', type 2, size 2");
172 ut_assert_console_end();
173
174 console_record_reset();
175 run_command("acpi items -d", 0);
176 ut_assert_nextline("dev 'acpi-test', type 2, size 2");
177 ut_assert_nextlines_are_dump(2);
178 ut_assert_nextline("%s", "");
179 ut_assert_nextline("dev 'acpi-test2', type 2, size 2");
180 ut_assert_nextlines_are_dump(2);
181 ut_assert_nextline("%s", "");
182 ut_assert_console_end();
183
184 return 0;
185}
186DM_TEST(dm_test_acpi_cmd_items, DM_TESTF_SCAN_PDATA | DM_TESTF_SCAN_FDT);
187
README.commands.itest
1A slow day today so here is a revised itest command with provisional
2support for comparing strings as well :-))
3
4Now table driven to allow the operators
5-eq, -ne, -lt, -gt, -le, -ge, ==, !=, <>, <, >, <=, >=
6
7Uses the expected command modifier for integer compares of width 1, 2 or
84 bytes of .b, .w, .l and the new modifer of .s for a string compare.
9String comparison is over the length of the shorter, this hopefully
10avoids missing terminators when using an indirect pointer.
11
12eg.
13if itest.l *40000 == 12345678 then; ....
14if itest.w *40000 != 1234 then; ....
15if itest.b *40000 >= 12 then; ....
16if itest.s *40000 -eq hello then; ....
17
README.commands.spl
1The spl command is used to export a boot parameter image to RAM. Later
2it may implement more functions connected to the SPL.
3
4SUBCOMMAND EXPORT
5To execute the command everything has to be in place as if bootm should be
6used. (kernel image, initrd-image, fdt-image etc.)
7
8export has two subcommands:
9 atags: exports the ATAGS
10 fdt: exports the FDT
11
12Call is:
13spl export <fdt|atags> [kernel_addr] [initrd_addr] [fdt_addr if fdt]
14
15
16TYPICAL CALL
17
18on OMAP3:
19nandecc hw
20nand read 0x82000000 0x280000 0x400000 /* Read kernel image from NAND*/
21spl export atags /* export ATAGS */
22nand erase 0x680000 0x20000 /* erase - one page */
23nand write 0x80000100 0x680000 0x20000 /* write the image - one page */
24
25call with FDT:
26nandecc hw
27nand read 0x82000000 0x280000 0x400000 /* Read kernel image from NAND*/
28tftpboot 0x80000100 devkit8000.dtb /* Read fdt */
29spl export fdt 0x82000000 - 0x80000100 /* export FDT */
30nand erase 0x680000 0x20000 /* erase - one page */
31nand write <adress shown by spl export> 0x680000 0x20000
32
README.console
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2/*
3 * (C) Copyright 2000
4 * Paolo Scaffardi, AIRVENT SAM s.p.a - RIMINI(ITALY), arsenio@tin.it
5 */
6
7U-Boot console handling
8========================
9
10HOW THE CONSOLE WORKS?
11----------------------
12
13At system startup U-Boot initializes a serial console. When U-Boot
14relocates itself to RAM, all console drivers are initialized (they
15will register all detected console devices to the system for further
16use).
17
18If not defined in the environment, the first input device is assigned
19to the 'stdin' file, the first output one to 'stdout' and 'stderr'.
20
21You can use the command "coninfo" to see all registered console
22devices and their flags. You can assign a standard file (stdin,
23stdout or stderr) to any device you see in that list simply by
24assigning its name to the corresponding environment variable. For
25example:
26
27 setenv stdin serial <- To use the serial input
28 setenv stdout video <- To use the video console
29
30Do a simple "saveenv" to save the console settings in the environment
31and get them working on the next startup, too.
32
33HOW CAN I USE STANDARD FILE INTO THE SOURCES?
34---------------------------------------------
35
36You can use the following functions to access the console:
37
38* STDOUT:
39 putc (to put a char to stdout)
40 puts (to put a string to stdout)
41 printf (to format and put a string to stdout)
42
43* STDIN:
44 tstc (to test for the presence of a char in stdin)
45 getc (to get a char from stdin)
46
47* STDERR:
48 eputc (to put a char to stderr)
49 eputs (to put a string to stderr)
50 eprintf (to format and put a string to stderr)
51
52* FILE (can be 'stdin', 'stdout', 'stderr'):
53 fputc (like putc but redirected to a file)
54 fputs (like puts but redirected to a file)
55 fprintf (like printf but redirected to a file)
56 ftstc (like tstc but redirected to a file)
57 fgetc (like getc but redirected to a file)
58
59Remember that all FILE-related functions CANNOT be used before
60U-Boot relocation (done in 'board_init_r' in arch/*/lib/board.c).
61
62HOW CAN I USE STANDARD FILE INTO APPLICATIONS?
63----------------------------------------------
64
65Use the 'bd_mon_fnc' field of the bd_t structure passed to the
66application to do everything you want with the console.
67
68But REMEMBER that that will work only if you have not overwritten any
69U-Boot code while loading (or uncompressing) the image of your
70application.
71
72For example, you won't get the console stuff running in the Linux
73kernel because the kernel overwrites U-Boot before running. Only
74some parameters like the framebuffer descriptors are passed to the
75kernel in the high memory area to let the applications (the kernel)
76use the framebuffers initialized by U-Boot.
77
78SUPPORTED DRIVERS
79-----------------
80
81Working drivers:
82
83 serial (architecture dependent serial stuff)
84 video (mpc8xx video controller)
85
86Work in progress:
87
88 wl_kbd (Wireless 4PPM keyboard)
89
90Waiting for volounteers:
91
92 lcd (mpc8xx lcd controller; to )
93
94TESTED CONFIGURATIONS
95---------------------
96
97The driver has been tested with the following configurations (see
98CREDITS for other contact informations):
99
100- MPC823FADS with AD7176 on a PAL TV (YCbYCr) - arsenio@tin.it
101
README.davinci
1Summary
2=======
3
4Note: this document used to be about the entire family of DaVinci SOCs but the
5support for the DM* family and DA830 has since been dropped.
6
7This README is about U-Boot support for TI's DA850 SoC. This SOC has an OMAP
8part number but is very similar to the DaVinci series.
9
10Currently the following boards are supported:
11
12* TI DA850 EVM
13
14* TI OMAP-L138 LCDK
15
16* Lego EV3
17
18Build
19=====
20
21* TI DA850 EVM:
22
23make da850evm_config
24make
25
26* TI OMAP-L138 LCDK
27
28make omapl138_lcdk_defconfig
29make
30
31* Lego EV3
32
33make legoev3_defconfig
34make
35
36Bootloaders
37===============
38
39For DA850 an SPL (secondary program loader, see doc/README.SPL) is provided
40to load U-Boot directly from SPI flash. The SPL takes care of the low level
41initialization.
42
43The SPL is built as u-boot.ais for all DA850 defconfigs. The resulting
44image file can be programmed to the SPI flash of the DA850 EVM/LCDK.
45
46Environment Variables
47=====================
48
49The DA850 EVM allows the user to specify the maximum cpu clock allowed by the
50silicon, in Hz, via an environment variable "maxcpuclk".
51
52The maximum clock rate allowed depends on the silicon populated on the EVM.
53Please make sure you understand the restrictions placed on this clock in the
54device specific datasheet before setting up this variable. This information is
55passed to the Linux kernel using the ATAG_REVISION atag.
56
57If "maxcpuclk" is not defined, the configuration CONFIG_DA850_EVM_MAX_CPU_CLK
58is used to obtain this information.
59
60Links
61=====
62
631) TI DA850 EVM
64http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/omap-l138.html
65http://www.logicpd.com/products/development-kits/zoom-omap-l138-evm-development-kit
66
672) TI OMAP-L138 LCDK
68http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/omap-l138.html
69http://www.ti.com/tool/TMDXLCDK138
70
71Davinci special defines
72=======================
73
74CONFIG_SYS_DV_NOR_BOOT_CFG: AM18xx based boards, booting in NOR Boot mode
75 need a "NOR Boot Configuration Word" stored
76 in the NOR Flash. This define adds this.
77 More Info about this, see:
78 spraba5a.pdf chapter 3.1
79
README.davinci.nand_spl
1With this approach, we don't need the UBL any more on DaVinci boards.
2A "make boardname" will compile a u-boot.ubl, with UBL Header, which is
3needed for the RBL to find the "UBL", which actually is a UBL-compatible
4header, nand spl code and u-boot code.
5
6
7As the RBL uses another read function as the "standard" u-boot,
8we need a command, which switches between this two read/write
9functions, so we can write the UBL header and the spl
10code in a format, which the RBL can read. This is realize
11(at the moment in board specific code) in the u-boot command
12nandrbl
13
14nandrbl without arguments returns actual mode (rbl or uboot).
15with nandrbl mode (mode = "rbl" or "uboot") you can switch
16between the two NAND read/write modes.
17
18
19To set up mkimage you need a config file for mkimage, example:
20board/ait/cam_enc_4xx/ublimage.cfg
21
22For information about the configuration please see:
23doc/README.ublimage
24
25Example for the cam_enc_4xx board:
26On the cam_enc_4xx board we have a NAND flash with blocksize = 0x20000 and
27pagesize = 0x800, so the u-boot.ubl image (which you get with:
28"make cam_enc_4xx") looks like this:
29
3000000000 00 ed ac a1 20 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 |.... ...........|
3100000010 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff |.... ...........|
3200000020 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff |................|
33*
3400000800 14 00 00 ea 14 f0 9f e5 10 f0 9f e5 0c f0 9f e5 |................|
3500000810 08 f0 9f e5 04 f0 9f e5 00 f0 9f e5 04 f0 1f e5 |................|
3600000820 00 01 00 00 78 56 34 12 78 56 34 12 78 56 34 12 |....xV4.xV4.xV4.|
37[...]
38*
3900001fe0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff |................|
4000001ff0 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff |................|
41*
4200003800 14 00 00 ea 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 |................|
4300003810 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 |................|
4400003820 80 01 08 81 e0 01 08 81 40 02 08 81 a0 02 08 81 |........@.......|
45
46In the first "page" of the image, we have the UBL Header, needed for
47the RBL to find the spl code.
48
49The spl code starts in the second "page" of the image, with a size
50defined by:
51
52#define CONFIG_SYS_NROF_PAGES_NAND_SPL 6
53
54After the spl code, there comes the "real" u-boot code
55@ (6 + 1) * pagesize = 0x3800
56
57------------------------------------------------------------------------
58Setting up spl code:
59
60/*
61 * RBL searches from Block n (n = 1..24)
62 * so we can define, how many UBL Headers
63 * we write before the real spl code
64 */
65#define CONFIG_SYS_NROF_UBL_HEADER 5
66#define CONFIG_SYS_NROF_PAGES_NAND_SPL 6
67
68#define CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS ((CONFIG_SYS_NROF_UBL_HEADER * \
69 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE) + \
70 (CONFIG_SYS_NROF_PAGES_NAND_SPL) * \
71 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_SIZE)
72------------------------------------------------------------------------
73
74Burning into NAND:
75
76step 1:
77The RBL searches from Block n ( n = 1..24) on page 0 for valid UBL
78Headers, so you have to burn the UBL header page from the u-boot.ubl
79image to the blocks, you want to have the UBL header.
80!! Don;t forget to switch to rbl nand read/write functions with
81 "nandrbl rbl"
82
83step 2:
84You need to setup in the ublimage.cfg, where the RBL can find the spl
85code, and how big it is.
86
87!! RBL always starts reading from page 0 !!
88
89For the AIT board, we have:
90PAGES 6
91START_BLOCK 5
92
93So we need to copy the spl code to block 5 page 0
94!! Don;t forget to switch to rbl nand read/write functions with
95 "nandrbl rbl"
96
97step 3:
98You need to copy the u-boot image to the block/page
99where the spl code reads it (CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS)
100!! Don;t forget to switch to rbl nand read/write functions with
101 "nandrbl uboot", which is default.
102
103On the cam_enc_4xx board it is:
104#define CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS (0xc0000)
105
106-> this results in following NAND usage on the cam_enc_4xx board:
107
108addr
109
11020000 possible UBL Header
11140000 possible UBL Header
11260000 possible UBL Header
11380000 possilbe UBL Header
114a0000 spl code
115c0000 u-boot code
116
117The above steps are executeed through the following environment vars:
118(using 80000 as address for the UBL header)
119
120pagesz=800
121uboot=/tftpboot/cam_enc_4xx/u-boot.ubl
122load=tftp 80000000 ${uboot}
123writeheader nandrbl rbl;nand erase 80000 ${pagesz};nand write 80000000 80000 ${pagesz};nandrbl uboot
124writenand_spl nandrbl rbl;nand erase a0000 3000;nand write 80000800 a0000 3000;nandrbl uboot
125writeuboot nandrbl uboot;nand erase c0000 5d000;nand write 80003800 c0000 5d000
126update=run load writeheader writenand_spl writeuboot
127
128If you do a "run load update" u-boot, spl + ubl header
129are magically updated ;-)
130
131Note:
132- There seem to be a bug in the RBL code (at least on my HW),
133 In the UBL block, I can set the page to values != 0, so it
134 is possible to burn step 1 and step 2 in one step into the
135 flash, but the RBL ignores the page settings, so I have to
136 burn the UBL Header to a page 0 and the spl code to
137 a page 0 ... :-(
138- If we make the nand read/write functions in the RBL equal to
139 the functions in u-boot (as I have no RBL code, it is only
140 possible in u-boot), we could burn the complete image in
141 one step ... that would be nice ...
142
README.dfu
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2
3Device Firmware Upgrade (DFU)
4
5Overview:
6
7 The Device Firmware Upgrade (DFU) allows to download and upload firmware
8 to/from U-Boot connected over USB.
9
10 U-boot follows the Universal Serial Bus Device Class Specification for
11 Device Firmware Upgrade Version 1.1 the USB forum (DFU v1.1 in www.usb.org).
12
13 U-Boot implements this DFU capability (CONFIG_DFU) with the command dfu
14 (cmd/dfu.c / CONFIG_CMD_DFU) based on:
15 - the DFU stack (common/dfu.c and common/spl/spl_dfu.c), based on the
16 USB DFU download gadget (drivers/usb/gadget/f_dfu.c)
17 - The access to mediums is done in DFU backends (driver/dfu)
18
19 Today the supported DFU backends are:
20 - MMC (RAW or FAT / EXT2 / EXT3 / EXT4 file system)
21 - NAND
22 - RAM
23 - SF (serial flash)
24 - MTD (all MTD device: NAND, SPI-NOR, SPI-NAND,...)
25 - virtual
26
27 These DFU backends are also used by
28 - the dfutftp (see README.dfutftp)
29 - the thordown command (cmd/thordown.c and gadget/f_thor.c)
30
31 The "virtual" backend is a generic DFU backend to support a board specific
32 target (for example OTP), only based on the weak functions:
33 - dfu_write_medium_virt
34 - dfu_get_medium_size_virt
35 - dfu_read_medium_virt
36
37Configuration Options:
38 CONFIG_DFU
39 CONFIG_DFU_OVER_USB
40 CONFIG_DFU_MMC
41 CONFIG_DFU_MTD
42 CONFIG_DFU_NAND
43 CONFIG_DFU_RAM
44 CONFIG_DFU_SF
45 CONFIG_DFU_SF_PART
46 CONFIG_DFU_TIMEOUT
47 CONFIG_DFU_VIRTUAL
48 CONFIG_CMD_DFU
49
50Environment variables:
51 the dfu command uses 3 environments variables:
52 "dfu_alt_info" : the DFU setting for the USB download gadget with a semicolon
53 separated string of information on each alternate:
54 dfu_alt_info="<alt1>;<alt2>;....;<altN>"
55
56 when several devices are used, the format is:
57 - <interface> <dev>'='alternate list (';' separated)
58 - each interface is separated by '&'
59 dfu_alt_info=\
60 "<interface1> <dev1>=<alt1>;....;<altN>&"\
61 "<interface2> <dev2>=<altN+1>;....;<altM>&"\
62 ...\
63 "<interfaceI> <devI>=<altY+1>;....;<altZ>&"
64
65 "dfu_bufsiz" : size of the DFU buffer, when absent, use
66 CONFIG_SYS_DFU_DATA_BUF_SIZE (8 MiB by default)
67
68 "dfu_hash_algo" : name of the hash algorithm to use
69
70Commands:
71 dfu <USB_controller> [<interface> <dev>] list
72 list the alternate device defined in "dfu_alt_info"
73
74 dfu <USB_controller> [<interface> <dev>] [<timeout>]
75 start the dfu stack on the USB instance with the selected medium
76 backend and use the "dfu_alt_info" variable to configure the
77 alternate setting and link each one with the medium
78 The dfu command continue until receive a ^C in console or
79 a DFU detach transaction from HOST. If CONFIG_DFU_TIMEOUT option
80 is enabled and <timeout> parameter is present in the command line,
81 the DFU operation will be aborted automatically after <timeout>
82 seconds of waiting remote to initiate DFU session.
83
84 The possible values of <interface> are :
85 (with <USB controller> = 0 in the dfu command example)
86
87 "mmc" (for eMMC and SD card)
88 cmd: dfu 0 mmc <dev>
89 each element in "dfu_alt_info" =
90 <name> raw <offset> <size> [mmcpart <num>] raw access to mmc device
91 <name> part <dev> <part_id> [mmcpart <num>] raw access to partition
92 <name> fat <dev> <part_id> [mmcpart <num>] file in FAT partition
93 <name> ext4 <dev> <part_id> [mmcpart <num>] file in EXT4 partition
94
95 with <partid> being the GPT or DOS partition index,
96 with <num> being the eMMC hardware partition number.
97
98 A value of environment variable dfu_alt_info for eMMC could be:
99
100 "u-boot raw 0x3e 0x800 mmcpart 1;bl2 raw 0x1e 0x1d mmcpart 1"
101
102 A value of environment variable dfu_alt_info for SD card could be:
103
104 "u-boot raw 0x80 0x800;uImage ext4 0 2"
105
106 "nand" (raw slc nand device)
107 cmd: dfu 0 nand <dev>
108 each element in "dfu_alt_info" =
109 <name> raw <offset> <size> raw access to mmc device
110 <name> part <dev> <part_id> raw acces to partition
111 <name> partubi <dev> <part_id> raw acces to ubi partition
112
113 with <partid> is the MTD partition index
114
115 "ram"
116 cmd: dfu 0 ram <dev>
117 (<dev> is not used for RAM target)
118 each element in "dfu_alt_info" =
119 <name> ram <offset> <size> raw access to ram
120
121 "sf" (serial flash : NOR)
122 cmd: dfu 0 sf <dev>
123 each element in "dfu_alt_info" =
124 <name> ram <offset> <size> raw access to sf device
125 <name> part <dev> <part_id> raw acces to partition
126 <name> partubi <dev> <part_id> raw acces to ubi partition
127
128 with <partid> is the MTD partition index
129
130 "mtd" (all MTD device: NAND, SPI-NOR, SPI-NAND,...)
131 cmd: dfu 0 mtd <dev>
132 with <dev> the mtd identifier as defined in mtd command
133 (nand0, nor0, spi-nand0,...)
134 each element in "dfu_alt_info" =
135 <name> raw <offset> <size> raw access to mtd device
136 <name> part <dev> <part_id> raw acces to partition
137 <name> partubi <dev> <part_id> raw acces to ubi partition
138
139 with <partid> is the MTD partition index
140
141 "virt"
142 cmd: dfu 0 virt <dev>
143 each element in "dfu_alt_info" =
144 <name>
145
146 <interface> and <dev> are absent:
147 the dfu command to use multiple devices
148 cmd: dfu 0 list
149 cmd: dfu 0
150 "dfu_alt_info" variable provides the list of <interface> <dev> with
151 alternate list separated by '&' with the same format for each <alt>
152 mmc <dev>=<alt1>;....;<altN>
153 nand <dev>=<alt1>;....;<altN>
154 ram <dev>=<alt1>;....;<altN>
155 sf <dev>=<alt1>;....;<altN>
156 mtd <dev>=<alt1>;....;<altN>
157 virt <dev>=<alt1>;....;<altN>
158
159Callbacks:
160 The weak callback functions can be implemented to manage specific behavior
161 - dfu_initiated_callback : called when the DFU transaction is started,
162 used to initiase the device
163 - dfu_flush_callback : called at the end of the DFU write after DFU
164 manifestation, used to manage the device when
165 DFU transaction is closed
166
167Host tools:
168 When U-Boot runs the dfu stack, the DFU host tools can be used
169 to send/receive firmwares on each configurated alternate.
170
171 For example dfu-util is a host side implementation of the DFU 1.1
172 specifications(http://dfu-util.sourceforge.net/) which works with U-Boot.
173
174Usage:
175 Example 1: firmware located in eMMC or SD card, with:
176 - alternate 1 (alt=1) for SPL partition (GPT partition 1)
177 - alternate 2 (alt=2) for U-Boot partition (GPT partition 2)
178
179 The U-Boot configuration is:
180
181 U-Boot> env set dfu_alt_info "spl part 0 1;u-boot part 0 2"
182
183 U-Boot> dfu 0 mmc 0 list
184 DFU alt settings list:
185 dev: eMMC alt: 0 name: spl layout: RAW_ADDR
186 dev: eMMC alt: 1 name: u-boot layout: RAW_ADDR
187
188 Boot> dfu 0 mmc 0
189
190 On the Host side:
191
192 list the available alternate setting:
193
194 $> dfu-util -l
195 dfu-util 0.9
196
197 Copyright 2005-2009 Weston Schmidt, Harald Welte and OpenMoko Inc.
198 Copyright 2010-2016 Tormod Volden and Stefan Schmidt
199 This program is Free Software and has ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY
200 Please report bugs to http://sourceforge.net/p/dfu-util/tickets/
201
202 Found DFU: [0483:5720] ver=0200, devnum=45, cfg=1, intf=0, path="3-1.3.1", \
203 alt=1, name="u-boot", serial="003A00203438510D36383238"
204 Found DFU: [0483:5720] ver=0200, devnum=45, cfg=1, intf=0, path="3-1.3.1", \
205 alt=0, name="spl", serial="003A00203438510D36383238"
206
207 To download to U-Boot, use -D option
208
209 $> dfu-util -a 0 -D u-boot-spl.bin
210 $> dfu-util -a 1 -D u-boot.bin
211
212 To upload from U-Boot, use -U option
213
214 $> dfu-util -a 0 -U u-boot-spl.bin
215 $> dfu-util -a 1 -U u-boot.bin
216
217 To request a DFU detach and reset the USB connection:
218 $> dfu-util -a 0 -e -R
219
220
221 Example 2: firmware located in NOR (sf) and NAND, with:
222 - alternate 1 (alt=1) for SPL partition (NOR GPT partition 1)
223 - alternate 2 (alt=2) for U-Boot partition (NOR GPT partition 2)
224 - alternate 3 (alt=3) for U-Boot-env partition (NOR GPT partition 3)
225 - alternate 4 (alt=4) for UBI partition (NAND GPT partition 1)
226
227 U-Boot> env set dfu_alt_info \
228 "sf 0:0:10000000:0=spl part 0 1;u-boot part 0 2; \
229 u-boot-env part 0 3&nand 0=UBI partubi 0,1"
230
231 U-Boot> dfu 0 list
232
233 DFU alt settings list:
234 dev: SF alt: 0 name: spl layout: RAW_ADDR
235 dev: SF alt: 1 name: ssbl layout: RAW_ADDR
236 dev: SF alt: 2 name: u-boot-env layout: RAW_ADDR
237 dev: NAND alt: 3 name: UBI layout: RAW_ADDR
238
239 U-Boot> dfu 0
240
241 $> dfu-util -l
242 Found DFU: [0483:5720] ver=9999, devnum=96, cfg=1,\
243 intf=0, alt=3, name="UBI", serial="002700333338511934383330"
244 Found DFU: [0483:5720] ver=9999, devnum=96, cfg=1,\
245 intf=0, alt=2, name="u-boot-env", serial="002700333338511934383330"
246 Found DFU: [0483:5720] ver=9999, devnum=96, cfg=1,\
247 intf=0, alt=1, name="u-boot", serial="002700333338511934383330"
248 Found DFU: [0483:5720] ver=9999, devnum=96, cfg=1,\
249 intf=0, alt=0, name="spl", serial="002700333338511934383330"
250
251 Same example with MTD backend
252
253 U-Boot> env set dfu_alt_info \
254 "mtd nor0=spl part 1;u-boot part 2;u-boot-env part 3&"\
255 "mtd nand0=UBI partubi 1"
256
257 U-Boot> dfu 0 list
258 using id 'nor0,0'
259 using id 'nor0,1'
260 using id 'nor0,2'
261 using id 'nand0,0'
262 DFU alt settings list:
263 dev: MTD alt: 0 name: spl layout: RAW_ADDR
264 dev: MTD alt: 1 name: u-boot layout: RAW_ADDR
265 dev: MTD alt: 2 name: u-boot-env layout: RAW_ADDR
266 dev: MTD alt: 3 name: UBI layout: RAW_ADDR
267
268 Example 3: firmware located in SD Card (mmc) and virtual partition on
269 OTP and PMIC not volatile memory
270 - alternate 1 (alt=1) for scard
271 - alternate 2 (alt=2) for OTP (virtual)
272 - alternate 3 (alt=3) for PMIC NVM (virtual)
273
274 U-Boot> env set dfu_alt_info \
275 "mmc 0=sdcard raw 0 0x100000&"\
276 "virt 0=otp" \
277 "virt 1=pmic"
278
279 U-Boot> dfu 0 list
280 DFU alt settings list:
281 dev: eMMC alt: 0 name: sdcard layout: RAW_ADDR
282 dev: VIRT alt: 1 name: otp layout: RAW_ADDR
283 dev: VIRT alt: 2 name: pmic layout: RAW_ADDR
284
README.dfutftp
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2#
3# Copyright (C) 2015
4#
5# Lukasz Majewski <l.majewski@majess.pl>
6
7Device Firmware Upgrade (DFU) - extension to use TFTP
8=====================================================
9
10Why?
11----
12
13* Update TFTP (CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP) only supports writing
14code to NAND memory via TFTP.
15* DFU supports writing data to the variety of mediums (NAND,
16eMMC, SD, partitions, RAM, etc) via USB.
17
18Combination of both solves their shortcomings!
19
20
21Overview
22--------
23
24This document briefly describes how to use DFU for
25upgrading firmware (e.g. kernel, u-boot, rootfs, etc.)
26via TFTP protocol.
27
28By using Ethernet (TFTP protocol to be precise) it is
29possible to overcome the major problem of USB based DFU -
30the relatively low transfer speed for large files.
31This was caused by DFU standard, which imposed utilization
32of only EP0 for transfer. By using Ethernet we can circumvent
33this shortcoming.
34
35Beagle Bone Black rev. C (BBB) powered by TI's am335x CPU has
36been used as a demo board.
37
38To utilize this feature, one needs to first enable support
39for USB based DFU (CONFIG_DFU_*) and DFU TFTP update
40(CONFIG_DFU_TFTP) described in ./doc/README.update.
41
42The "dfu" command has been extended to support transfer via TFTP - one
43needs to type for example "dfu tftp 0 mmc 0"
44
45This feature does not depend on "fitupd" command enabled.
46
47As of this writing (SHA1:8d77576371381ade83de475bb639949b44941e8c v2015.10-rc2)
48the update.c code is not enabled (CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP) by any board in the
49contemporary u-boot tree.
50
51
52Environment variables
53---------------------
54
55The "dfu tftp" command can be used in the "preboot" environment variable
56(when it is enabled by defining CONFIG_PREBOOT).
57This is the preferable way of using this command in the early boot stage
58as opposed to legacy update_tftp() function invocation.
59
60
61Beagle Bone Black (BBB) setup
62-----------------------------
63
641. Setup tftp env variables:
65 * select desired eth device - 'ethact' variable ["ethact=cpsw"]
66 (use "bdinfo" to check current setting)
67 * setup "serverip" and "ipaddr" variables
68 * set "loadaddr" as a fixed buffer where incoming data is placed
69 ["loadaddr=0x81000000"]
70
71#########
72# BONUS #
73#########
74It is possible to use USB interface to emulate ETH connection by setting
75"ethact=usb_ether". In this way one can have very fast DFU transfer via USB.
76
77For 33MiB test image the transfer rate was 1MiB/s for ETH over USB and 200KiB/s
78for pure DFU USB transfer.
79
802. Setup update_tftp variables:
81 * set "updatefile" - the file name to be downloaded via TFTP (stored on
82 the HOST at e.g. /srv/tftp)
83
843. If required, to update firmware on boot, put the "dfu tftp 0 mmc 0" in the
85 "preboot" env variable. Otherwise use this command from u-boot prompt.
86
874. Inspect "dfu" specific variables:
88 * "dfu_alt_info" - information about available DFU entities
89 * "dfu_bufsiz" - variable to set buffer size [in bytes] - when it is not
90 possible to set large enough default buffer (8 MiB @ BBB)
91
92
93
94FIT image format for download
95-----------------------------
96
97To create FIT image for download one should follow the update tftp README file
98(./doc/README.update) with one notable difference:
99
100The original snippet of ./doc/uImage.FIT/update_uboot.its
101
102 images {
103 update@1 {
104 description = "U-Boot binary";
105
106should look like
107
108 images {
109 u-boot.bin@1 {
110 description = "U-Boot binary";
111
112where "u-boot.bin" is the DFU entity name to be stored.
113
114
115
116To do
117-----
118
119* Extend dfu-util command to support TFTP based transfers
120* Upload support (via TFTP)
121
README.displaying-bmps
1If you are experiencing hangups/data-aborts when trying to display a BMP image,
2the following might be relevant to your situation...
3
4Some architectures cannot handle unaligned memory accesses, and an attempt to
5perform one will lead to a data abort. On such architectures it is necessary to
6make sure all data is properly aligned, and in many situations simply choosing
7a 32 bit aligned address is enough to ensure proper alignment. This is not
8always the case when dealing with data that has an internal layout such as a
9BMP image:
10
11BMP images have a header that starts with 2 byte-size fields followed by mostly
1232 bit fields. The packed struct that represents this header can be seen below:
13
14typedef struct bmp_header {
15 /* Header */
16 char signature[2];
17 __u32 file_size;
18 __u32 reserved;
19 __u32 data_offset;
20 ... etc
21} __attribute__ ((packed)) bmp_header_t;
22
23When placed in an aligned address such as 0x80a00000, char signature offsets
24the __u32 fields into unaligned addresses (in our example 0x80a00002,
250x80a00006, and so on...). When these fields are accessed by U-Boot, a 32 bit
26access is generated at a non-32-bit-aligned address, causing a data abort.
27The proper alignment for BMP images is therefore: 32-bit-aligned-address + 2.
28
README.distro
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2/*
3 * (C) Copyright 2014 Red Hat Inc.
4 * Copyright (c) 2014-2015, NVIDIA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
5 * Copyright (C) 2015 K. Merker <merker@debian.org>
6 */
7
8Generic Distro Configuration Concept
9====================================
10
11Linux distributions are faced with supporting a variety of boot mechanisms,
12environments or bootloaders (PC BIOS, EFI, U-Boot, Barebox, ...). This makes
13life complicated. Worse, bootloaders such as U-Boot have a configurable set
14of features, and each board chooses to enable a different set of features.
15Hence, distros typically need to have board-specific knowledge in order to
16set up a bootable system.
17
18This document defines a common set of U-Boot features that are required for
19a distro to support the board in a generic fashion. Any board wishing to
20allow distros to install and boot in an out-of-the-box fashion should enable
21all these features. Linux distros can then create a single set of boot
22support/install logic that targets these features. This will allow distros
23to install on many boards without the need for board-specific logic.
24
25In fact, some of these features can be implemented by any bootloader, thus
26decoupling distro install/boot logic from any knowledge of the bootloader.
27
28This model assumes that boards will load boot configuration files from a
29regular storage mechanism (eMMC, SD card, USB Disk, SATA disk, etc.) with
30a standard partitioning scheme (MBR, GPT). Boards that cannot support this
31storage model are outside the scope of this document, and may still need
32board-specific installer/boot-configuration support in a distro.
33
34To some extent, this model assumes that a board has a separate boot flash
35that contains U-Boot, and that the user has somehow installed U-Boot to this
36flash before running the distro installer. Even on boards that do not conform
37to this aspect of the model, the extent of the board-specific support in the
38distro installer logic would be to install a board-specific U-Boot package to
39the boot partition during installation. This distro-supplied U-Boot can still
40implement the same features as on any other board, and hence the distro's boot
41configuration file generation logic can still be board-agnostic.
42
43Locating Bootable Disks
44-----------------------
45
46Typical desktop/server PCs search all (or a user-defined subset of) attached
47storage devices for a bootable partition, then load the bootloader or boot
48configuration files from there. A U-Boot board port that enables the features
49mentioned in this document will search for boot configuration files in the
50same way.
51
52Thus, distros do not need to manipulate any kind of bootloader-specific
53configuration data to indicate which storage device the system should boot
54from.
55
56Distros simply need to install the boot configuration files (see next
57section) in an ext2/3/4 or FAT partition, mark the partition bootable (via
58the MBR bootable flag, or GPT legacy_bios_bootable attribute), and U-Boot (or
59any other bootloader) will find those boot files and execute them. This is
60conceptually identical to creating a grub2 configuration file on a desktop
61PC.
62
63Note that in the absence of any partition that is explicitly marked bootable,
64U-Boot falls back to searching the first valid partition of a disk for boot
65configuration files. Other bootloaders are recommended to do the same, since
66I believe that partition table bootable flags aren't so commonly used outside
67the realm of x86 PCs.
68
69U-Boot can also search for boot configuration files from a TFTP server.
70
71Boot Configuration Files
72------------------------
73
74The standard format for boot configuration files is that of extlinux.conf, as
75handled by U-Boot's "syslinux" (disk) or "pxe boot" (network). This is roughly
76as specified at:
77
78http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/BootLoaderSpec/
79
80... with the exceptions that the BootLoaderSpec document:
81
82* Prescribes a separate configuration per boot menu option, whereas U-Boot
83 lumps all options into a single extlinux.conf file. Hence, U-Boot searches
84 for /extlinux/extlinux.conf then /boot/extlinux/extlinux.conf on disk, or
85 pxelinux.cfg/default over the network.
86
87* Does not document the fdtdir option, which automatically selects the DTB to
88 pass to the kernel.
89
90One example extlinux.conf generated by the Fedora installer is:
91
92------------------------------------------------------------
93# extlinux.conf generated by anaconda
94
95ui menu.c32
96
97menu autoboot Welcome to Fedora. Automatic boot in # second{,s}. Press a key for options.
98menu title Fedora Boot Options.
99menu hidden
100
101timeout 50
102#totaltimeout 9000
103
104default Fedora (3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl+lpae) 22 (Rawhide)
105
106label Fedora (3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl) 22 (Rawhide)
107 kernel /boot/vmlinuz-3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl
108 append ro root=UUID=8eac677f-8ea8-4270-8479-d5ddbb797450 console=ttyS0,115200n8 LANG=en_US.UTF-8 drm.debug=0xf
109 fdtdir /boot/dtb-3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl
110 initrd /boot/initramfs-3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl.img
111
112label Fedora (3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl+lpae) 22 (Rawhide)
113 kernel /boot/vmlinuz-3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl+lpae
114 append ro root=UUID=8eac677f-8ea8-4270-8479-d5ddbb797450 console=ttyS0,115200n8 LANG=en_US.UTF-8 drm.debug=0xf
115 fdtdir /boot/dtb-3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl+lpae
116 initrd /boot/initramfs-3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl+lpae.img
117
118label Fedora-0-rescue-8f6ba7b039524e0eb957d2c9203f04bc (0-rescue-8f6ba7b039524e0eb957d2c9203f04bc)
119 kernel /boot/vmlinuz-0-rescue-8f6ba7b039524e0eb957d2c9203f04bc
120 initrd /boot/initramfs-0-rescue-8f6ba7b039524e0eb957d2c9203f04bc.img
121 append ro root=UUID=8eac677f-8ea8-4270-8479-d5ddbb797450 console=ttyS0,115200n8
122 fdtdir /boot/dtb-3.16.0-0.rc6.git1.1.fc22.armv7hl+lpae
123------------------------------------------------------------
124
125Another hand-crafted network boot configuration file is:
126
127------------------------------------------------------------
128TIMEOUT 100
129
130MENU TITLE TFTP boot options
131
132LABEL jetson-tk1-emmc
133 MENU LABEL ../zImage root on Jetson TK1 eMMC
134 LINUX ../zImage
135 FDTDIR ../
136 APPEND console=ttyS0,115200n8 console=tty1 loglevel=8 rootwait rw earlyprintk root=PARTUUID=80a5a8e9-c744-491a-93c1-4f4194fd690b
137
138LABEL venice2-emmc
139 MENU LABEL ../zImage root on Venice2 eMMC
140 LINUX ../zImage
141 FDTDIR ../
142 APPEND console=ttyS0,115200n8 console=tty1 loglevel=8 rootwait rw earlyprintk root=PARTUUID=5f71e06f-be08-48ed-b1ef-ee4800cc860f
143
144LABEL sdcard
145 MENU LABEL ../zImage, root on 2GB sdcard
146 LINUX ../zImage
147 FDTDIR ../
148 APPEND console=ttyS0,115200n8 console=tty1 loglevel=8 rootwait rw earlyprintk root=PARTUUID=b2f82cda-2535-4779-b467-094a210fbae7
149
150LABEL fedora-installer-fk
151 MENU LABEL Fedora installer w/ Fedora kernel
152 LINUX fedora-installer/vmlinuz
153 INITRD fedora-installer/initrd.img.orig
154 FDTDIR fedora-installer/dtb
155 APPEND loglevel=8 ip=dhcp inst.repo=http://10.0.0.2/mirrors/fedora/linux/development/rawhide/armhfp/os/ rd.shell cma=64M
156------------------------------------------------------------
157
158U-Boot Implementation
159=====================
160
161Enabling the distro options
162---------------------------
163
164In your board's defconfig, enable the DISTRO_DEFAULTS option by adding
165a line with "CONFIG_DISTRO_DEFAULTS=y". If you want to enable this
166from Kconfig itself, for e.g. all boards using a specific SoC then
167add a "imply DISTRO_DEFAULTS" to your SoC CONFIG option.
168
169In your board configuration file, include the following:
170
171------------------------------------------------------------
172#ifndef CONFIG_SPL_BUILD
173#include <config_distro_bootcmd.h>
174#endif
175------------------------------------------------------------
176
177The first of those headers primarily enables a core set of U-Boot features,
178such as support for MBR and GPT partitions, ext* and FAT filesystems, booting
179raw zImage and initrd (rather than FIT- or uImage-wrapped files), etc. Network
180boot support is also enabled here, which is useful in order to boot distro
181installers given that distros do not commonly distribute bootable install
182media for non-PC targets at present.
183
184Finally, a few options that are mostly relevant only when using U-Boot-
185specific boot.scr scripts are enabled. This enables distros to generate a
186U-Boot-specific boot.scr script rather than extlinux.conf as the boot
187configuration file. While doing so is fully supported, and
188CONFIG_DISTRO_DEFAULTS exposes enough parameterization to boot.scr to
189allow for board-agnostic boot.scr content, this document recommends that
190distros generate extlinux.conf rather than boot.scr. extlinux.conf is intended
191to work across multiple bootloaders, whereas boot.scr will only work with
192U-Boot. TODO: document the contract between U-Boot and boot.scr re: which
193environment variables a generic boot.scr may rely upon.
194
195The second of those headers sets up the default environment so that $bootcmd
196is defined in a way that searches attached disks for boot configuration files,
197and executes them if found.
198
199Required Environment Variables
200------------------------------
201
202The U-Boot "syslinux" and "pxe boot" commands require a number of environment
203variables be set. Default values for these variables are often hard-coded into
204CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS in the board's U-Boot configuration file, so that
205the user doesn't have to configure them.
206
207fdt_addr:
208
209 Mandatory for any system that provides the DTB in HW (e.g. ROM) and wishes
210 to pass that DTB to Linux, rather than loading a DTB from the boot
211 filesystem. Prohibited for any other system.
212
213 If specified a DTB to boot the system must be available at the given
214 address.
215
216fdt_addr_r:
217
218 Mandatory. The location in RAM where the DTB will be loaded or copied to when
219 processing the fdtdir/devicetreedir or fdt/devicetree options in
220 extlinux.conf.
221
222 This is mandatory even when fdt_addr is provided, since extlinux.conf must
223 always be able to provide a DTB which overrides any copy provided by the HW.
224
225 A size of 1MB for the FDT/DTB seems reasonable.
226
227ramdisk_addr_r:
228
229 Mandatory. The location in RAM where the initial ramdisk will be loaded to
230 when processing the initrd option in extlinux.conf.
231
232 It is recommended that this location be highest in RAM out of fdt_addr_,
233 kernel_addr_r, and ramdisk_addr_r, so that the RAM disk can vary in size
234 and use any available RAM.
235
236kernel_addr_r:
237
238 Mandatory. The location in RAM where the kernel will be loaded to when
239 processing the kernel option in the extlinux.conf.
240
241 The kernel should be located within the first 128M of RAM in order for the
242 kernel CONFIG_AUTO_ZRELADDR option to work, which is likely enabled on any
243 distro kernel. Since the kernel will decompress itself to 0x8000 after the
244 start of RAM, kernel_addr_r should not overlap that area, or the kernel will
245 have to copy itself somewhere else first before decompression.
246
247 A size of 16MB for the kernel is likely adequate.
248
249kernel_comp_addr_r:
250 Optional. This is only required if user wants to boot Linux from a compressed
251 Image(.gz, .bz2, .lzma, .lzo) using booti command. It represents the location
252 in RAM where the compressed Image will be decompressed temporarily. Once the
253 decompression is complete, decompressed data will be moved kernel_addr_r for
254 booting.
255
256kernel_comp_size:
257 Optional. This is only required if user wants to boot Linux from a compressed
258 Image using booti command. It represents the size of the compressed file. The
259 size has to at least the size of loaded image for decompression to succeed.
260
261pxefile_addr_r:
262
263 Mandatory. The location in RAM where extlinux.conf will be loaded to prior
264 to processing.
265
266 A size of 1MB for extlinux.conf is more than adequate.
267
268scriptaddr:
269
270 Mandatory, if the boot script is boot.scr rather than extlinux.conf. The
271 location in RAM where boot.scr will be loaded to prior to execution.
272
273 A size of 1MB for extlinux.conf is more than adequate.
274
275For suggestions on memory locations for ARM systems, you must follow the
276guidelines specified in Documentation/arm/Booting in the Linux kernel tree.
277
278For a commented example of setting these values, please see the definition of
279MEM_LAYOUT_ENV_SETTINGS in include/configs/tegra124-common.h.
280
281Boot Target Configuration
282-------------------------
283
284<config_distro_bootcmd.h> defines $bootcmd and many helper command variables
285that automatically search attached disks for boot configuration files and
286execute them. Boards must provide configure <config_distro_bootcmd.h> so that
287it supports the correct set of possible boot device types. To provide this
288configuration, simply define macro BOOT_TARGET_DEVICES prior to including
289<config_distro_bootcmd.h>. For example:
290
291------------------------------------------------------------
292#ifndef CONFIG_SPL_BUILD
293#define BOOT_TARGET_DEVICES(func) \
294 func(MMC, mmc, 1) \
295 func(MMC, mmc, 0) \
296 func(USB, usb, 0) \
297 func(PXE, pxe, na) \
298 func(DHCP, dhcp, na)
299#include <config_distro_bootcmd.h>
300#endif
301------------------------------------------------------------
302
303Each entry in the macro defines a single boot device (e.g. a specific eMMC
304device or SD card) or type of boot device (e.g. USB disk). The parameters to
305the func macro (passed in by the internal implementation of the header) are:
306
307- Upper-case disk type (MMC, SATA, SCSI, IDE, USB, DHCP, PXE, VIRTIO).
308- Lower-case disk type (same options as above).
309- ID of the specific disk (MMC only) or ignored for other types.
310
311User Configuration
312==================
313
314Once the user has installed U-Boot, it is expected that the environment will
315be reset to the default values in order to enable $bootcmd and friends, as set
316up by <config_distro_bootcmd.h>. After this, various environment variables may
317be altered to influence the boot process:
318
319boot_targets:
320
321 The list of boot locations searched.
322
323 Example: mmc0, mmc1, usb, pxe
324
325 Entries may be removed or re-ordered in this list to affect the boot order.
326
327boot_prefixes:
328
329 For disk-based booting, the list of directories within a partition that are
330 searched for boot configuration files (extlinux.conf, boot.scr).
331
332 Example: / /boot/
333
334 Entries may be removed or re-ordered in this list to affect the set of
335 directories which are searched.
336
337boot_scripts:
338
339 The name of U-Boot style boot.scr files that $bootcmd searches for.
340
341 Example: boot.scr.uimg boot.scr
342
343 (Typically we expect extlinux.conf to be used, but execution of boot.scr is
344 maintained for backwards-compatibility.)
345
346 Entries may be removed or re-ordered in this list to affect the set of
347 filenames which are supported.
348
349scan_dev_for_extlinux:
350
351 If you want to disable extlinux.conf on all disks, set the value to something
352 innocuous, e.g. setenv scan_dev_for_extlinux true.
353
354scan_dev_for_scripts:
355
356 If you want to disable boot.scr on all disks, set the value to something
357 innocuous, e.g. setenv scan_dev_for_scripts true.
358
359boot_net_usb_start:
360
361 If you want to prevent USB enumeration by distro boot commands which execute
362 network operations, set the value to something innocuous, e.g. setenv
363 boot_net_usb_start true. This would be useful if you know your Ethernet
364 device is not attached to USB, and you wish to increase boot speed by
365 avoiding unnecessary actions.
366
367boot_net_pci_enum:
368
369 If you want to prevent PCI enumeration by distro boot commands which execute
370 network operations, set the value to something innocuous, e.g. setenv
371 boot_net_pci_enum true. This would be useful if you know your Ethernet
372 device is not attached to PCI, and you wish to increase boot speed by
373 avoiding unnecessary actions.
374
375Interactively booting from a specific device at the u-boot prompt
376=================================================================
377
378For interactively booting from a user-selected device at the u-boot command
379prompt, the environment provides predefined bootcmd_<target> variables for
380every target defined in boot_targets, which can be run be the user.
381
382If the target is a storage device, the format of the target is always
383<device type><device number>, e.g. mmc0. Specifying the device number is
384mandatory for storage devices, even if only support for a single instance
385of the storage device is actually implemented.
386
387For network targets (dhcp, pxe), only the device type gets specified;
388they do not have a device number.
389
390Examples:
391
392 - run bootcmd_usb0
393 boots from the first USB mass storage device
394
395 - run bootcmd_mmc1
396 boots from the second MMC device
397
398 - run bootcmd_pxe
399 boots by tftp using a pxelinux.cfg
400
401The list of possible targets consists of:
402
403- network targets
404 * dhcp
405 * pxe
406
407- storage targets (to which a device number must be appended)
408 * mmc
409 * sata
410 * scsi
411 * ide
412 * usb
413 * virtio
414
415Other *boot* variables than the ones defined above are only for internal use
416of the boot environment and are not guaranteed to exist or work in the same
417way in future u-boot versions. In particular the <device type>_boot
418variables (e.g. mmc_boot, usb_boot) are a strictly internal implementation
419detail and must not be used as a public interface.
420
README.dns
1Domain Name System
2-------------------------------------------
3
4The Domain Name System (DNS) is a hierarchical naming system for computers,
5services, or any resource participating in the Internet. It associates various
6information with domain names assigned to each of the participants. Most
7importantly, it translates domain names meaningful to humans into the numerical
8(binary) identifiers associated with networking equipment for the purpose of
9locating and addressing these devices world-wide. An often used analogy to
10explain the Domain Name System is that it serves as the "phone book" for the
11Internet by translating human-friendly computer hostnames into IP addresses.
12For example, www.example.com translates to 208.77.188.166.
13
14For more information on DNS - http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Domain_Name_System
15
16U-Boot and DNS
17------------------------------------------
18
19CONFIG_CMD_DNS - controls if the 'dns' command is compiled in. If it is, it
20 will send name lookups to the dns server (env var 'dnsip')
21 Turning this option on will about abou 1k to U-Boot's size.
22
23 Example:
24
25bfin> print dnsip
26dnsip=192.168.0.1
27
28bfin> dns www.google.com
2966.102.1.104
30
31 By default, dns does nothing except print the IP number on
32 the default console - which by itself, would be pretty
33 useless. Adding a third argument to the dns command will
34 use that as the environment variable to be set.
35
36 Example:
37
38bfin> print googleip
39## Error: "googleip" not defined
40bfin> dns www.google.com googleip
4164.233.161.104
42bfin> print googleip
43googleip=64.233.161.104
44bfin> ping ${googleip}
45Using Blackfin EMAC device
46host 64.233.161.104 is alive
47
48 In this way, you can lookup, and set many more meaningful
49 things.
50
51bfin> sntp
52ntpserverip not set
53bfin> dns pool.ntp.org ntpserverip
5472.18.205.156
55bfin> sntp
56Date: 2009-07-18 Time: 4:06:57
57
58 For some helpful things that can be related to DNS in U-Boot,
59 look at the top level README for these config options:
60 CONFIG_CMD_DHCP
61 CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS
62 CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2
63
README.enetaddr
1---------------------------------
2 Ethernet Address (MAC) Handling
3---------------------------------
4
5There are a variety of places in U-Boot where the MAC address is used, parsed,
6and stored. This document covers proper usage of each location and the moving
7of data between them.
8
9-----------
10 Locations
11-----------
12
13Here are the places where MAC addresses might be stored:
14
15 - board-specific location (eeprom, dedicated flash, ...)
16 Note: only used when mandatory due to hardware design etc...
17
18 - environment ("ethaddr", "eth1addr", ...)
19 Note: this is the preferred way to permanently store MAC addresses
20
21 - ethernet data (struct eth_device -> enetaddr)
22 Note: these are temporary copies of the MAC address which exist only
23 after the respective init steps have run and only to make usage
24 in other places easier (to avoid constant env lookup/parsing)
25
26 - struct bd_info and/or device tree
27 Note: these are temporary copies of the MAC address only for the
28 purpose of passing this information to an OS kernel we are about
29 to boot
30
31Correct flow of setting up the MAC address (summarized):
32
331. Read from hardware in initialize() function
342. Read from environment in net/eth.c after initialize()
353. The environment variable will be compared to the driver initialized
36 struct eth_device->enetaddr. If they differ, a warning is printed, and the
37 environment variable will be used unchanged.
38 If the environment variable is not set, it will be initialized from
39 eth_device->enetaddr, and a warning will be printed.
40 If both are invalid and CONFIG_NET_RANDOM_ETHADDR is defined, a random,
41 locally-assigned MAC is written to eth_device->enetaddr.
424. Program the address into hardware if the following conditions are met:
43 a) The relevant driver has a 'write_addr' function
44 b) The user hasn't set an 'ethmacskip' environment variable
45 c) The address is valid (unicast, not all-zeros)
46
47Previous behavior had the MAC address always being programmed into hardware
48in the device's init() function.
49
50-------
51 Usage
52-------
53
54If the hardware design mandates that the MAC address is stored in some special
55place (like EEPROM etc...), then the board specific init code (such as the
56board-specific misc_init_r() function) is responsible for locating the MAC
57address(es) and initializing the respective environment variable(s) from it.
58Note that this shall be done if, and only if, the environment does not already
59contain these environment variables, i.e. existing variable definitions must
60not be overwritten.
61
62During runtime, the ethernet layer will use the environment variables to sync
63the MAC addresses to the ethernet structures. All ethernet driver code should
64then only use the enetaddr member of the eth_device structure. This is done
65on every network command, so the ethernet copies will stay in sync.
66
67Any other code that wishes to access the MAC address should query the
68environment directly. The helper functions documented below should make
69working with this storage much smoother.
70
71---------
72 Helpers
73---------
74
75To assist in the management of these layers, a few helper functions exist. You
76should use these rather than attempt to do any kind of parsing/manipulation
77yourself as many common errors have arisen in the past.
78
79 * void string_to_enetaddr(const char *addr, uchar *enetaddr);
80
81Convert a string representation of a MAC address to the binary version.
82char *addr = "00:11:22:33:44:55";
83uchar enetaddr[6];
84string_to_enetaddr(addr, enetaddr);
85/* enetaddr now equals { 0x00, 0x11, 0x22, 0x33, 0x44, 0x55 } */
86
87 * int eth_env_get_enetaddr(char *name, uchar *enetaddr);
88
89Look up an environment variable and convert the stored address. If the address
90is valid, then the function returns 1. Otherwise, the function returns 0. In
91all cases, the enetaddr memory is initialized. If the env var is not found,
92then it is set to all zeros. The common function is_valid_ethaddr() is used
93to determine address validity.
94uchar enetaddr[6];
95if (!eth_env_get_enetaddr("ethaddr", enetaddr)) {
96 /* "ethaddr" is not set in the environment */
97 ... try and setup "ethaddr" in the env ...
98}
99/* enetaddr is now set to the value stored in the ethaddr env var */
100
101 * int eth_env_set_enetaddr(char *name, const uchar *enetaddr);
102
103Store the MAC address into the named environment variable. The return value is
104the same as the env_set() function.
105uchar enetaddr[6] = { 0x00, 0x11, 0x22, 0x33, 0x44, 0x55 };
106eth_env_set_enetaddr("ethaddr", enetaddr);
107/* the "ethaddr" env var should now be set to "00:11:22:33:44:55" */
108
109 * the %pM format modifier
110
111The %pM format modifier can be used with any standard printf function to format
112the binary 6 byte array representation of a MAC address.
113uchar enetaddr[6] = { 0x00, 0x11, 0x22, 0x33, 0x44, 0x55 };
114printf("The MAC is %pM\n", enetaddr);
115
116char buf[20];
117sprintf(buf, "%pM", enetaddr);
118/* the buf variable is now set to "00:11:22:33:44:55" */
119
README.esbc_validate
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2/*
3 * (C) Copyright 2015
4 */
5
6esbc_validate command
7========================================
8
91. esbc_validate command is meant for validating header and
10 signature of images (Boot Script and ESBC uboot client).
11 SHA-256 and RSA operations are performed using SEC block in HW.
12 This command works on both PBL based and Non PBL based Freescale
13 platforms.
14 Command usage:
15 esbc_validate img_hdr_addr [pub_key_hash]
16 esbc_validate hdr_addr <hash_val>
17 Validates signature using RSA verification.
18 $hdr_addr Address of header of the image to be validated.
19 $hash_val -Optional. It provides Hash of public/srk key to be
20 used to verify signature.
21
222. ESBC uboot client can be linux. Additionally, rootfs and device
23 tree blob can also be signed.
243. In the event of header or signature failure in validation,
25 ITS and ITF bits determine further course of action.
264. In case of soft failure, appropriate error is dumped on console.
275. In case of hard failure, SoC is issued RESET REQUEST after
28 dumping error on the console.
296. KEY REVOCATION Feature:
30 QorIQ platforms like B4/T4 have support of srk key table and key
31 revocation in ISBC code in Silicon.
32 The srk key table allows the user to have a key table with multiple
33 keys and revoke any key in case of particular key gets compromised.
34 In case the ISBC code uses the key revocation and srk key table to
35 verify the u-boot code, the subsequent chain of trust should also
36 use the same.
376. ISBC KEY EXTENSION Feature:
38 This feature allows large number of keys to be used for esbc validation
39 of images. A set of public keys is being signed and validated by ISBC
40 which can be further used for esbc validation of images.
41
README.ext4
1U-Boot supports access of both ext2 and ext4 filesystems, either in read-only
2mode or in read-write mode.
3
4First, to enable support for both ext4 (and, automatically, ext2 as well),
5but without selecting the corresponding commands, enable one of the following:
6
7 CONFIG_FS_EXT4 (for read-only)
8 CONFIG_EXT4_WRITE (for read-write)
9
10Next, to select the ext2-related commands:
11
12 * ext2ls
13 * ext2load
14
15or ext4-related commands:
16
17 * ext4size
18 * ext4ls
19 * ext4load
20
21use one or both of:
22
23 CONFIG_CMD_EXT2
24 CONFIG_CMD_EXT4
25
26Selecting either of the above automatically selects CONFIG_FS_EXT4 if it
27wasn't enabled already.
28
29In addition, to get the write access command "ext4write", enable:
30
31 CONFIG_CMD_EXT4_WRITE
32
33which automatically selects CONFIG_EXT4_WRITE if it wasn't defined
34already.
35
36Also relevant are the generic filesystem commands, selected by:
37
38 CONFIG_CMD_FS_GENERIC
39
40This does not automatically enable EXT4 support for you, you still need
41to do that yourself.
42
43Some sample commands to test ext4 support:
44
451. Check that the commands can be seen in the output of U-Boot help:
46
47 UBOOT #help
48 ...
49 ext4load- load binary file from a Ext4 file system
50 ext4ls - list files in a directory (default /)
51 ext4size - determine a file's size
52 ext4write- create a file in ext4 formatted partition
53 ...
54
552. To list the files in an ext4-formatted partition, run:
56
57 ext4ls <interface> <dev[:part]> [directory]
58
59 For example:
60 UBOOT #ext4ls mmc 0:5 /usr/lib
61
623. To read and load a file from an ext4-formatted partition to RAM, run:
63
64 ext4load <interface> <dev[:part]> [addr] [filename] [bytes]
65
66 For example:
67 UBOOT #ext4load mmc 2:2 0x30007fc0 uImage
68
694. To write a file to an ext4-formatted partition.
70
71 a) First load a file to RAM at a particular address for example 0x30007fc0.
72 Now execute ext4write command:
73 ext4write <interface> <dev[:part]> [filename] [Address] [sizebytes]
74
75 For example:
76 UBOOT #ext4write mmc 2:2 /boot/uImage 0x30007fc0 6183120
77 (here 6183120 is the size of the file to be written)
78 Note: Absolute path is required for the file to be written
79
80References :
81 -- ext4 implementation in Linux Kernel
82 -- Uboot existing ext2 load and ls implementation
83 -- Journaling block device JBD2 implementation in linux Kernel
84
README.falcon
1U-Boot Falcon Mode
2====================
3
4Introduction
5------------
6
7This document provides an overview of how to add support for Falcon Mode
8to a board.
9
10Falcon Mode is introduced to speed up the booting process, allowing
11to boot a Linux kernel (or whatever image) without a full blown U-Boot.
12
13Falcon Mode relies on the SPL framework. In fact, to make booting faster,
14U-Boot is split into two parts: the SPL (Secondary Program Loader) and U-Boot
15image. In most implementations, SPL is used to start U-Boot when booting from
16a mass storage, such as NAND or SD-Card. SPL has now support for other media,
17and can generally be seen as a way to start an image performing the minimum
18required initialization. SPL mainly initializes the RAM controller, and then
19copies U-Boot image into the memory.
20
21The Falcon Mode extends this way allowing to start the Linux kernel directly
22from SPL. A new command is added to U-Boot to prepare the parameters that SPL
23must pass to the kernel, using ATAGS or Device Tree.
24
25In normal mode, these parameters are generated each time before
26loading the kernel, passing to Linux the address in memory where
27the parameters can be read.
28With Falcon Mode, this snapshot can be saved into persistent storage and SPL is
29informed to load it before running the kernel.
30
31To boot the kernel, these steps under a Falcon-aware U-Boot are required:
32
331. Boot the board into U-Boot.
34After loading the desired legacy-format kernel image into memory (and DT as
35well, if used), use the "spl export" command to generate the kernel parameters
36area or the DT. U-Boot runs as when it boots the kernel, but stops before
37passing the control to the kernel.
38
392. Save the prepared snapshot into persistent media.
40The address where to save it must be configured into board configuration
41file (CONFIG_CMD_SPL_NAND_OFS for NAND).
42
433. Boot the board into Falcon Mode. SPL will load the kernel and copy
44the parameters which are saved in the persistent area to the required address.
45If a valid uImage is not found at the defined location, U-Boot will be
46booted instead.
47
48It is required to implement a custom mechanism to select if SPL loads U-Boot
49or another image.
50
51The value of a GPIO is a simple way to operate the selection, as well as
52reading a character from the SPL console if CONFIG_SPL_CONSOLE is set.
53
54Falcon Mode is generally activated by setting CONFIG_SPL_OS_BOOT. This tells
55SPL that U-Boot is not the only available image that SPL is able to start.
56
57Configuration
58----------------------------
59CONFIG_CMD_SPL Enable the "spl export" command.
60 The command "spl export" is then available in U-Boot
61 mode
62CONFIG_SYS_SPL_ARGS_ADDR Address in RAM where the parameters must be
63 copied by SPL.
64 In most cases, it is <start_of_ram> + 0x100
65
66CONFIG_SYS_NAND_SPL_KERNEL_OFFS Offset in NAND where the kernel is stored
67
68CONFIG_CMD_SPL_NAND_OFS Offset in NAND where the parameters area was saved.
69
70CONFIG_CMD_SPL_NOR_OFS Offset in NOR where the parameters area was saved.
71
72CONFIG_CMD_SPL_WRITE_SIZE Size of the parameters area to be copied
73
74CONFIG_SPL_OS_BOOT Activate Falcon Mode.
75
76Function that a board must implement
77------------------------------------
78
79void spl_board_prepare_for_linux(void) : optional
80 Called from SPL before starting the kernel
81
82spl_start_uboot() : required
83 Returns "0" if SPL should start the kernel, "1" if U-Boot
84 must be started.
85
86Environment variables
87---------------------
88
89A board may chose to look at the environment for decisions about falcon
90mode. In this case the following variables may be supported:
91
92boot_os : Set to yes/Yes/true/True/1 to enable booting to OS,
93 any other value to fall back to U-Boot (including
94 unset)
95falcon_args_file : Filename to load as the 'args' portion of falcon mode
96 rather than the hard-coded value.
97falcon_image_file : Filename to load as the OS image portion of falcon
98 mode rather than the hard-coded value.
99
100Using spl command
101-----------------
102
103spl - SPL configuration
104
105Usage:
106
107spl export <img=atags|fdt> [kernel_addr] [initrd_addr] [fdt_addr ]
108
109img : "atags" or "fdt"
110kernel_addr : kernel is loaded as part of the boot process, but it is not started.
111 This is the address where a kernel image is stored.
112initrd_addr : Address of initial ramdisk
113 can be set to "-" if fdt_addr without initrd_addr is used
114fdt_addr : in case of fdt, the address of the device tree.
115
116The spl export command does not write to a storage media. The user is
117responsible to transfer the gathered information (assembled ATAGS list
118or prepared FDT) from temporary storage in RAM into persistant storage
119after each run of 'spl export'. Unfortunately the position of temporary
120storage can not be predicted nor provided at commandline, it depends
121highly on your system setup and your provided data (ATAGS or FDT).
122However at the end of an succesful 'spl export' run it will print the
123RAM address of temporary storage. The RAM address of FDT will also be
124set in the environment variable 'fdtargsaddr', the new length of the
125prepared FDT will be set in the environment variable 'fdtargslen'.
126These environment variables can be used in scripts for writing updated
127FDT to persistent storage.
128
129Now the user have to save the generated BLOB from that printed address
130to the pre-defined address in persistent storage
131(CONFIG_CMD_SPL_NAND_OFS in case of NAND).
132The following example shows how to prepare the data for Falcon Mode on
133twister board with ATAGS BLOB.
134
135The "spl export" command is prepared to work with ATAGS and FDT. However,
136using FDT is at the moment untested. The ppc port (see a3m071 example
137later) prepares the fdt blob with the fdt command instead.
138
139
140Usage on the twister board:
141--------------------------------
142
143Using mtd names with the following (default) configuration
144for mtdparts:
145
146device nand0 <omap2-nand.0>, # parts = 9
147 #: name size offset mask_flags
148 0: MLO 0x00080000 0x00000000 0
149 1: u-boot 0x00100000 0x00080000 0
150 2: env1 0x00040000 0x00180000 0
151 3: env2 0x00040000 0x001c0000 0
152 4: kernel 0x00600000 0x00200000 0
153 5: bootparms 0x00040000 0x00800000 0
154 6: splashimg 0x00200000 0x00840000 0
155 7: mini 0x02800000 0x00a40000 0
156 8: rootfs 0x1cdc0000 0x03240000 0
157
158
159twister => nand read 82000000 kernel
160
161NAND read: device 0 offset 0x200000, size 0x600000
162 6291456 bytes read: OK
163
164Now the kernel is in RAM at address 0x82000000
165
166twister => spl export atags 0x82000000
167## Booting kernel from Legacy Image at 82000000 ...
168 Image Name: Linux-3.5.0-rc4-14089-gda0b7f4
169 Image Type: ARM Linux Kernel Image (uncompressed)
170 Data Size: 3654808 Bytes = 3.5 MiB
171 Load Address: 80008000
172 Entry Point: 80008000
173 Verifying Checksum ... OK
174 Loading Kernel Image ... OK
175OK
176cmdline subcommand not supported
177bdt subcommand not supported
178Argument image is now in RAM at: 0x80000100
179
180The result can be checked at address 0x80000100:
181
182twister => md 0x80000100
18380000100: 00000005 54410001 00000000 00000000 ......AT........
18480000110: 00000000 00000067 54410009 746f6f72 ....g.....ATroot
18580000120: 65642f3d 666e2f76 77722073 73666e20 =/dev/nfs rw nfs
186
187The parameters generated with this step can be saved into NAND at the offset
1880x800000 (value for twister for CONFIG_CMD_SPL_NAND_OFS)
189
190nand erase.part bootparms
191nand write 0x80000100 bootparms 0x4000
192
193Now the parameters are stored into the NAND flash at the address
194CONFIG_CMD_SPL_NAND_OFS (=0x800000).
195
196Next time, the board can be started into Falcon Mode moving the
197setting the gpio (on twister gpio 55 is used) to kernel mode.
198
199The kernel is loaded directly by the SPL without passing through U-Boot.
200
201Example with FDT: a3m071 board
202-------------------------------
203
204To boot the Linux kernel from the SPL, the DT blob (fdt) needs to get
205prepard/patched first. U-Boot usually inserts some dynamic values into
206the DT binary (blob), e.g. autodetected memory size, MAC addresses,
207clocks speeds etc. To generate this patched DT blob, you can use
208the following command:
209
2101. Load fdt blob to SDRAM:
211=> tftp 1800000 a3m071/a3m071.dtb
212
2132. Set bootargs as desired for Linux booting (e.g. flash_mtd):
214=> run mtdargs addip2 addtty
215
2163. Use "fdt" commands to patch the DT blob:
217=> fdt addr 1800000
218=> fdt boardsetup
219=> fdt chosen
220
2214. Display patched DT blob (optional):
222=> fdt print
223
2245. Save fdt to NOR flash:
225=> erase fc060000 fc07ffff
226=> cp.b 1800000 fc060000 10000
227...
228
229
230Falcon Mode was presented at the RMLL 2012. Slides are available at:
231
232http://schedule2012.rmll.info/IMG/pdf/LSM2012_UbootFalconMode_Babic.pdf
233
README.fdt-control
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2#
3# Copyright (c) 2011 The Chromium OS Authors.
4
5Device Tree Control in U-Boot
6=============================
7
8This feature provides for run-time configuration of U-Boot via a flat
9device tree (fdt). U-Boot configuration has traditionally been done
10using CONFIG options in the board config file. This feature aims to
11make it possible for a single U-Boot binary to support multiple boards,
12with the exact configuration of each board controlled by a flat device
13tree (fdt). This is the approach recently taken by the ARM Linux kernel
14and has been used by PowerPC for some time.
15
16The fdt is a convenient vehicle for implementing run-time configuration
17for three reasons. Firstly it is easy to use, being a simple text file.
18It is extensible since it consists of nodes and properties in a nice
19hierarchical format.
20
21Finally, there is already excellent infrastructure for the fdt: a
22compiler checks the text file and converts it to a compact binary
23format, and a library is already available in U-Boot (libfdt) for
24handling this format.
25
26The dts directory contains a Makefile for building the device tree blob
27and embedding it in your U-Boot image. This is useful since it allows
28U-Boot to configure itself according to what it finds there. If you have
29a number of similar boards with different peripherals, you can describe
30the features of each board in the device tree file, and have a single
31generic source base.
32
33To enable this feature, add CONFIG_OF_CONTROL to your board config file.
34
35
36What is a Flat Device Tree?
37---------------------------
38
39An fdt can be specified in source format as a text file. To read about
40the fdt syntax, take a look at the specification here:
41
42https://www.power.org/resources/downloads/Power_ePAPR_APPROVED_v1.0.pdf
43
44You also might find this section of the Linux kernel documentation
45useful: (access this in the Linux kernel source code)
46
47 Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt
48
49There is also a mailing list:
50
51 http://lists.ozlabs.org/listinfo/devicetree-discuss
52
53In case you are wondering, OF stands for Open Firmware.
54
55
56Tools
57-----
58
59To use this feature you will need to get the device tree compiler. This is
60provided by U-Boot automatically. If you have a system version of dtc
61(typically in the 'device-tree-compiler' package), it is currently not used.
62
63If you want to build your own dtc, it is kept here:
64
65 git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/dtc/dtc.git
66
67For example:
68
69 $ git clone git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/dtc/dtc.git
70 $ cd dtc
71 $ make
72 $ sudo make install
73
74Then run the compiler (your version will vary):
75
76 $ dtc -v
77 Version: DTC 1.2.0-g2cb4b51f
78 $ make tests
79 $ cd tests
80 $ ./run_tests.sh
81 ********** TEST SUMMARY
82 * Total testcases: 1371
83 * PASS: 1371
84 * FAIL: 0
85 * Bad configuration: 0
86 * Strange test result: 0
87
88You will also find a useful fdtdump utility for decoding a binary file, as
89well as fdtget/fdtput for reading and writing properties in a binary file.
90
91
92Where do I get an fdt file for my board?
93----------------------------------------
94
95You may find that the Linux kernel has a suitable file. Look in the
96kernel source in arch/<arch>/boot/dts.
97
98If not you might find other boards with suitable files that you can
99modify to your needs. Look in the board directories for files with a
100.dts extension.
101
102Failing that, you could write one from scratch yourself!
103
104
105Configuration
106-------------
107
108Use:
109
110#define CONFIG_DEFAULT_DEVICE_TREE "<name>"
111
112to set the filename of the device tree source. Then put your device tree
113file into
114
115 board/<vendor>/dts/<name>.dts
116
117This should include your CPU or SOC's device tree file, placed in
118arch/<arch>/dts, and then make any adjustments required.
119
120If CONFIG_OF_EMBED is defined, then it will be picked up and built into
121the U-Boot image (including u-boot.bin). This is suitable for debugging
122and development only and is not recommended for production devices.
123
124If CONFIG_OF_SEPARATE is defined, then it will be built and placed in
125a u-boot.dtb file alongside u-boot-nodtb.bin. A common approach is then to
126join the two:
127
128 cat u-boot-nodtb.bin u-boot.dtb >image.bin
129
130and then flash image.bin onto your board. Note that U-Boot creates
131u-boot-dtb.bin which does the above step for you also. Resulting
132u-boot.bin is a copy of u-boot-dtb.bin in this case. If you are using
133CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK, then u-boot.img will be built to include the device
134tree binary.
135
136If CONFIG_OF_BOARD is defined, a board-specific routine will provide the
137device tree at runtime, for example if an earlier bootloader stage creates
138it and passes it to U-Boot.
139
140If CONFIG_OF_HOSTFILE is defined, then it will be read from a file on
141startup. This is only useful for sandbox. Use the -d flag to U-Boot to
142specify the file to read.
143
144You cannot use more than one of these options at the same time.
145
146To use a device tree file that you have compiled yourself, pass
147EXT_DTB=<filename> to 'make', as in:
148
149 make EXT_DTB=boot/am335x-boneblack-pubkey.dtb
150
151Then U-Boot will copy that file to u-boot.dtb, put it in the .img file
152if used, and u-boot-dtb.bin.
153
154If you wish to put the fdt at a different address in memory, you can
155define the "fdtcontroladdr" environment variable. This is the hex
156address of the fdt binary blob, and will override either of the options.
157Be aware that this environment variable is checked prior to relocation,
158when only the compiled-in environment is available. Therefore it is not
159possible to define this variable in the saved SPI/NAND flash
160environment, for example (it will be ignored). After relocation, this
161variable will be set to the address of the newly relocated fdt blob.
162It is read-only and cannot be changed. It can optionally be used to
163control the boot process of Linux with bootm/bootz commands.
164
165To use this, put something like this in your board header file:
166
167#define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS "fdtcontroladdr=10000\0"
168
169Build:
170
171After board configuration is done, fdt supported u-boot can be build in two ways:
1721) build the default dts which is defined from CONFIG_DEFAULT_DEVICE_TREE
173 $ make
1742) build the user specified dts file
175 $ make DEVICE_TREE=<dts-file-name>
176
177
178Relocation, SPL and TPL
179-----------------------
180
181U-Boot can be divided into three phases: TPL, SPL and U-Boot proper.
182
183The full device tree is available to U-Boot proper, but normally only a subset
184(or none at all) is available to TPL and SPL. See 'Pre-Relocation Support' and
185'SPL Support' in doc/driver-model/design.rst for more details.
186
187
188Using several DTBs in the SPL (CONFIG_SPL_MULTI_DTB)
189----------------------------------------------------
190In some rare cases it is desirable to let SPL be able to select one DTB among
191many. This usually not very useful as the DTB for the SPL is small and usually
192fits several platforms. However the DTB sometimes include information that do
193work on several platforms (like IO tuning parameters).
194In this case it is possible to use CONFIG_SPL_MULTI_DTB. This option appends to
195the SPL a FIT image containing several DTBs listed in SPL_OF_LIST.
196board_fit_config_name_match() is called to select the right DTB.
197
198If board_fit_config_name_match() relies on DM (DM driver to access an EEPROM
199containing the board ID for example), it possible to start with a generic DTB
200and then switch over to the right DTB after the detection. For this purpose,
201the platform code must call fdtdec_resetup(). Based on the returned flag, the
202platform may have to re-initiliaze the DM subusystem using dm_uninit() and
203dm_init_and_scan().
204
205
206Limitations
207-----------
208
209U-Boot is designed to build with a single architecture type and CPU
210type. So for example it is not possible to build a single ARM binary
211which runs on your AT91 and OMAP boards, relying on an fdt to configure
212the various features. This is because you must select one of
213the CPU families within arch/arm/cpu/arm926ejs (omap or at91) at build
214time. Similarly you cannot build for multiple cpu types or
215architectures.
216
217That said the complexity reduction by using fdt to support variants of
218boards which use the same SOC / CPU can be substantial.
219
220It is important to understand that the fdt only selects options
221available in the platform / drivers. It cannot add new drivers (yet). So
222you must still have the CONFIG option to enable the driver. For example,
223you need to define CONFIG_SYS_NS16550 to bring in the NS16550 driver,
224but can use the fdt to specific the UART clock, peripheral address, etc.
225In very broad terms, the CONFIG options in general control *what* driver
226files are pulled in, and the fdt controls *how* those files work.
227
228--
229Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org>
2301-Sep-11
231
README.fdt-overlays
1U-Boot FDT Overlay usage
2=============================================
3
4Overlays Syntax
5---------------
6
7Overlays require slightly different syntax compared to traditional overlays.
8Please refer to dt-object-internal.txt in the dtc sources for information
9regarding the internal format of overlays:
10https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/dtc/dtc.git/tree/Documentation/dt-object-internal.txt
11
12Building Overlays
13-----------------
14
15In a nutshell overlays provides a means to manipulate a symbol a previous dtb
16or overlay has defined. It requires both the base and all the overlays
17to be compiled with the -@ command line switch so that symbol information is
18included.
19
20Note support for -@ option can only be found in dtc version 1.4.4 or newer.
21Only version 4.14 or higher of the Linux kernel includes a built in version
22of dtc that meets this requirement.
23
24Building an overlay follows the same process as building a traditional dtb.
25
26For example:
27
28base.dts
29--------
30
31 /dts-v1/;
32 / {
33 foo: foonode {
34 foo-property;
35 };
36 };
37
38 $ dtc -@ -I dts -O dtb -o base.dtb base.dts
39
40bar.dts
41-------
42
43 /dts-v1/;
44 /plugin/;
45 / {
46 fragment@1 {
47 target = <&foo>;
48 __overlay__ {
49 overlay-1-property;
50 bar: barnode {
51 bar-property;
52 };
53 };
54 };
55 };
56
57 $ dtc -@ -I dts -O dtb -o bar.dtb bar.dts
58
59Ways to Utilize Overlays in U-boot
60----------------------------------
61
62There are two ways to apply overlays in U-boot.
631. Include and define overlays within a FIT image and have overlays
64 automatically applied.
65
662. Manually load and apply overlays
67
68The remainder of this document will discuss using overlays via the manual
69approach. For information on using overlays as part of a FIT image please see:
70doc/uImage.FIT/overlay-fdt-boot.txt
71
72Manually Loading and Applying Overlays
73--------------------------------------
74
751. Figure out where to place both the base device tree blob and the
76overlay. Make sure you have enough space to grow the base tree without
77overlapping anything.
78
79=> setenv fdtaddr 0x87f00000
80=> setenv fdtovaddr 0x87fc0000
81
822. Load the base blob and overlay blobs
83
84=> load ${devtype} ${bootpart} ${fdtaddr} ${bootdir}/base.dtb
85=> load ${devtype} ${bootpart} ${fdtovaddr} ${bootdir}/overlay.dtb
86
873. Set it as the working fdt tree.
88
89=> fdtaddr $fdtaddr
90
914. Grow it enough so it can 'fit' all the applied overlays
92
93=> fdt resize 8192
94
955. You are now ready to apply the overlay.
96
97=> fdt apply $fdtovaddr
98
996. Boot system like you would do with a traditional dtb.
100
101For bootm:
102
103=> bootm ${kerneladdr} - ${fdtaddr}
104
105For bootz:
106
107=> bootz ${kerneladdr} - ${fdtaddr}
108
109Please note that in case of an error, both the base and overlays are going
110to be invalidated, so keep copies to avoid reloading.
111
112Pantelis Antoniou
113pantelis.antoniou@konsulko.com
11411/7/2017
115
README.fec_mxc
1U-Boot config options used in fec_mxc.c
2
3CONFIG_FEC_MXC
4 Selects fec_mxc.c to be compiled into u-boot. Can read out the
5 ethaddr from the SoC eFuses (see below).
6
7CONFIG_MII
8 Must be defined if CONFIG_FEC_MXC is defined.
9
10CONFIG_FEC_XCV_TYPE
11 Defaults to MII100 for 100 Base-tx.
12 RGMII selects 1000 Base-tx reduced pin count interface.
13 RMII selects 100 Base-tx reduced pin count interface.
14
15CONFIG_FEC_MXC_SWAP_PACKET
16 Forced on iff MX28.
17 Swaps the bytes order of all words(4 byte units) in the packet.
18 This should not be specified by a board file. It is cpu specific.
19
20CONFIG_PHYLIB
21 fec_mxc supports PHYLIB and should be used for new boards.
22
23CONFIG_FEC_MXC_NO_ANEG
24 Relevant only if PHYLIB not used. Skips auto-negotiation restart.
25
26CONFIG_FEC_MXC_PHYADDR
27 Optional, selects the exact phy address that should be connected
28 and function fecmxc_initialize will try to initialize it.
29
30CONFIG_FEC_FIXED_SPEED
31 Optional, selects a fixed speed on the MAC interface without asking some
32 phy. This is usefull if there is a direct MAC <-> MAC connection, for
33 example if the CPU is connected directly via the RGMII interface to a
34 ethernet-switch.
35
36Reading the ethaddr from the SoC eFuses:
37if CONFIG_FEC_MXC is defined and the U-Boot environment does not contain the
38ethaddr variable, then its value gets read from the corresponding eFuses in
39the SoC. See the README files of the specific SoC for details.
40
README.fsl-clk
1Freescale system clock options
2
3 - CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CLK
4 Enable to call get_clocks() in board_init_f() for
5 non-PPC platforms.
6
README.fsl-ddr
1Table of interleaving 2-4 controllers
2=====================================
3 +--------------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
4 |Configuration | Memory Controller |
5 | | 1 2 3 4 |
6 |--------------+--------------+--------------+-----------------------------+
7 | Two memory | Not Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed | |
8 | complexes +--------------+--------------+ |
9 | | 2-way Intlv'ed | |
10 |--------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+ |
11 | | Not Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed | |
12 | Three memory +--------------+--------------+--------------+ |
13 | complexes | 2-way Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed | |
14 | +-----------------------------+--------------+ |
15 | | 3-way Intlv'ed | |
16 +--------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
17 | | Not Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed |
18 | Four memory +--------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
19 | complexes | 2-way Intlv'ed | 2-way Intlv'ed |
20 | +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
21 | | 4-way Intlv'ed |
22 +--------------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
23
24
25Table of 2-way interleaving modes supported in cpu/8xxx/ddr/
26======================================================
27 +-------------+---------------------------------------------------------+
28 | | Rank Interleaving |
29 | +--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+
30 |Memory | | | | 2x2 | 4x1 |
31 |Controller | None | 2x1 lower | 2x1 upper | {CS0+CS1}, | {CS0+CS1+ |
32 |Interleaving | | {CS0+CS1} | {CS2+CS3} | {CS2+CS3} | CS2+CS3} |
33 +-------------+--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+
34 |None | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
35 +-------------+--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+
36 |Cacheline | Yes | Yes | No | No, Only(*)| Yes |
37 | |CS0 Only| | | {CS0+CS1} | |
38 +-------------+--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+
39 |Page | Yes | Yes | No | No, Only(*)| Yes |
40 | |CS0 Only| | | {CS0+CS1} | |
41 +-------------+--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+
42 |Bank | Yes | Yes | No | No, Only(*)| Yes |
43 | |CS0 Only| | | {CS0+CS1} | |
44 +-------------+--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+
45 |Superbank | No | Yes | No | No, Only(*)| Yes |
46 | | | | | {CS0+CS1} | |
47 +-------------+--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+
48 (*) Although the hardware can be configured with memory controller
49 interleaving using "2x2" rank interleaving, it only interleaves {CS0+CS1}
50 from each controller. {CS2+CS3} on each controller are only rank
51 interleaved on that controller.
52
53 For memory controller interleaving, identical DIMMs are suggested. Software
54 doesn't check the size or organization of interleaved DIMMs.
55
56The ways to configure the ddr interleaving mode
57==============================================
581. In board header file(e.g.MPC8572DS.h), add default interleaving setting
59 under "CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS", like:
60 #define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \
61 "hwconfig=fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=bank" \
62 ......
63
642. Run U-Boot "setenv" command to configure the memory interleaving mode.
65 Either numerical or string value is accepted.
66
67 # disable memory controller interleaving
68 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=null"
69
70 # cacheline interleaving
71 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=cacheline"
72
73 # page interleaving
74 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=page"
75
76 # bank interleaving
77 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=bank"
78
79 # superbank
80 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=superbank"
81
82 # 1KB 3-way interleaving
83 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=3way_1KB"
84
85 # 4KB 3-way interleaving
86 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=3way_4KB"
87
88 # 8KB 3-way interleaving
89 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=3way_8KB"
90
91 # disable bank (chip-select) interleaving
92 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:bank_intlv=null"
93
94 # bank(chip-select) interleaving cs0+cs1
95 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:bank_intlv=cs0_cs1"
96
97 # bank(chip-select) interleaving cs2+cs3
98 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:bank_intlv=cs2_cs3"
99
100 # bank(chip-select) interleaving (cs0+cs1) and (cs2+cs3) (2x2)
101 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:bank_intlv=cs0_cs1_and_cs2_cs3"
102
103 # bank(chip-select) interleaving (cs0+cs1+cs2+cs3) (4x1)
104 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:bank_intlv=cs0_cs1_cs2_cs3"
105
106 # bank(chip-select) interleaving (auto)
107 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:bank_intlv=auto"
108 This auto mode only select from cs0_cs1_cs2_cs3, cs0_cs1, null dependings
109 on DIMMs.
110
111Memory controller address hashing
112==================================
113If the DDR controller supports address hashing, it can be enabled by hwconfig.
114
115Syntax is:
116hwconfig=fsl_ddr:addr_hash=true
117
118Memory controller ECC on/off
119============================
120If ECC is enabled in board configuratoin file, i.e. #define CONFIG_DDR_ECC,
121ECC can be turned on/off by hwconfig.
122
123Syntax is
124hwconfig=fsl_ddr:ecc=off
125
126
127Memory address parity on/off
128============================
129address parity can be turned on/off by hwconfig.
130Syntax is:
131hwconfig=fsl_ddr:parity=on
132
133
134Memory testing options for mpc85xx
135==================================
1361. Memory test can be done once U-Boot prompt comes up using mtest, or
1372. Memory test can be done with Power-On-Self-Test function, activated at
138 compile time.
139
140 In order to enable the POST memory test, CONFIG_POST needs to be
141 defined in board configuraiton header file. By default, POST memory test
142 performs a fast test. A slow test can be enabled by changing the flag at
143 compiling time. To test memory bigger than 2GB, 36BIT support is needed.
144 Memory is tested within a 2GB window. TLBs are used to map the virtual 2GB
145 window to physical address so that all physical memory can be tested.
146
147Combination of hwconfig
148=======================
149Hwconfig can be combined with multiple parameters, for example, on a supported
150platform
151
152hwconfig=fsl_ddr:addr_hash=true,ctlr_intlv=cacheline,bank_intlv=cs0_cs1_cs2_cs3,ecc=on
153
154
155Table for dynamic ODT for DDR3
156==============================
157For single-slot system with quad-rank DIMM and dual-slot system, dynamic ODT may
158be needed, depending on the configuration. The numbers in the following tables are
159in Ohms.
160
161* denotes dynamic ODT
162
163Two slots system
164+-----------------------+----------+---------------+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
165| Configuration | |DRAM controller| Slot 1 | Slot 2 |
166+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+--------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
167| | | | | | Rank 1 | Rank 2 | Rank 1 | Rank 2 |
168+ Slot 1 | Slot 2 |Write/Read| Write | Read |-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
169| | | | | | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read |
170+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
171| | | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 120 | off | off | off | off | off | 30 | 30 |
172| Dual Rank | Dual Rank |----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
173| | | Slot 2 | off | 75 | off | off | 30 | 30 | 120 | off | off | off |
174+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
175| | | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 120 | off | off | off | 20 | 20 | | |
176| Dual Rank |Single Rank|----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
177| | | Slot 2 | off | 75 | off | off | 20 | 20 | 120 *| off | | |
178+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
179| | | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 120 *| off | | | off | off | 20 | 20 |
180|Single Rank| Dual Rank |----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
181| | | Slot 2 | off | 75 | 20 | 20 | | | 120 | off | off | off |
182+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
183| | | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 120 *| off | | | 30 | 30 | | |
184|Single Rank|Single Rank|----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
185| | | Slot 2 | off | 75 | 30 | 30 | | | 120 *| off | | |
186+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
187| Dual Rank | Empty | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 40 | off | off | off | | | | |
188+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
189| Empty | Dual Rank | Slot 2 | off | 75 | | | | | 40 | off | off | off |
190+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
191|Single Rank| Empty | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 40 | off | | | | | | |
192+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
193| Empty |Single Rank| Slot 2 | off | 75 | | | | | 40 | off | | |
194+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
195
196Single slot system
197+-------------+------------+---------------+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
198| | |DRAM controller| Rank 1 | Rank 2 | Rank 3 | Rank 4 |
199|Configuration| Write/Read |-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
200| | | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read |
201+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
202| | R1 | off | 75 | 120 *| off | off | off | 20 | 20 | off | off |
203| |------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
204| | R2 | off | 75 | off | 20 | 120 | off | 20 | 20 | off | off |
205| Quad Rank |------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
206| | R3 | off | 75 | 20 | 20 | off | off | 120 *| off | off | off |
207| |------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
208| | R4 | off | 75 | 20 | 20 | off | off | off | 20 | 120 | off |
209+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
210| | R1 | off | 75 | 40 | off | off | off |
211| Dual Rank |------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+
212| | R2 | off | 75 | 40 | off | off | off |
213+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+
214| Single Rank | R1 | off | 75 | 40 | off |
215+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+
216
217Reference http://www.xrosstalkmag.com/mag_issues/xrosstalk_oct08_final.pdf
218 http://download.micron.com/pdf/technotes/ddr3/tn4108_ddr3_design_guide.pdf
219
220
221Table for ODT for DDR2
222======================
223Two slots system
224+-----------------------+----------+---------------+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
225| Configuration | |DRAM controller| Slot 1 | Slot 2 |
226+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+--------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
227| | | | | | Rank 1 | Rank 2 | Rank 1 | Rank 2 |
228+ Slot 1 | Slot 2 |Write/Read| Write | Read |-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
229| | | | | | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read |
230+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
231| | | Slot 1 | off | 150 | off | off | off | off | 75 | 75 | off | off |
232| Dual Rank | Dual Rank |----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
233| | | Slot 2 | off | 150 | 75 | 75 | off | off | off | off | off | off |
234+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
235| | | Slot 1 | off | 150 | off | off | off | off | 75 | 75 | | |
236| Dual Rank |Single Rank|----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
237| | | Slot 2 | off | 150 | 75 | 75 | off | off | off | off | | |
238+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
239| | | Slot 1 | off | 150 | off | off | | | 75 | 75 | off | off |
240|Single Rank| Dual Rank |----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
241| | | Slot 2 | off | 150 | 75 | 75 | | | off | off | off | off |
242+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
243| | | Slot 1 | off | 150 | off | off | | | 75 | 75 | | |
244|Single Rank|Single Rank|----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
245| | | Slot 2 | off | 150 | 75 | 75 | | | off | off | | |
246+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
247| Dual Rank | Empty | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 150 | off | off | off | | | | |
248+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
249| Empty | Dual Rank | Slot 2 | off | 75 | | | | | 150 | off | off | off |
250+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
251|Single Rank| Empty | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 150 | off | | | | | | |
252+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
253| Empty |Single Rank| Slot 2 | off | 75 | | | | | 150 | off | | |
254+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+
255
256Single slot system
257+-------------+------------+---------------+-----------------------------+
258| | |DRAM controller| Rank 1 | Rank 2 |
259|Configuration| Write/Read |-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+
260| | | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read |
261+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+
262| | R1 | off | 75 | 150 | off | off | off |
263| Dual Rank |------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+
264| | R2 | off | 75 | 150 | off | off | off |
265+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+
266| Single Rank | R1 | off | 75 | 150 | off |
267+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+
268
269Reference http://www.samsung.com/global/business/semiconductor/products/dram/downloads/applicationnote/ddr2_odt_control_200603.pdf
270
271
272Interactive DDR debugging
273===========================
274
275For DDR parameter tuning up and debugging, the interactive DDR debugger can
276be activated by setting the environment variable "ddr_interactive" to any
277value. (The value of ddr_interactive may have a meaning in the future, but,
278for now, the presence of the variable will cause the debugger to run.) Once
279activated, U-Boot will show the prompt "FSL DDR>" before enabling the DDR
280controller. The available commands are printed by typing "help".
281
282Another way to enter the interactive DDR debugger without setting the
283environment variable is to send the 'd' character early during the boot
284process. To save booting time, no additional delay is added, so the window
285to send the key press is very short -- basically, it is the time before the
286memory controller code starts to run. For example, when rebooting from
287within U-Boot, the user must press 'd' IMMEDIATELY after hitting enter to
288initiate a 'reset' command. In case of power on/reset, the user can hold
289down the 'd' key while applying power or hitting the board's reset button.
290
291The example flow of using interactive debugging is
292type command "compute" to calculate the parameters from the default
293type command "print" with arguments to show SPD, options, registers
294type command "edit" with arguments to change any if desired
295type command "copy" with arguments to copy controller/dimm settings
296type command "go" to continue calculation and enable DDR controller
297
298Additional commands to restart the debugging are:
299type command "reset" to reset the board
300type command "recompute" to reload SPD and start over
301
302Note, check "next_step" to show the flow. For example, after edit opts, the
303next_step is STEP_ASSIGN_ADDRESSES. After editing registers, the next_step is
304STEP_PROGRAM_REGS. Upon issuing command "go", the debugger will program the
305DDR controller with the current setting without further calculation and then
306exit to resume the booting of the machine.
307
308The detail syntax for each commands are
309
310print [c<n>] [d<n>] [spd] [dimmparms] [commonparms] [opts] [addresses] [regs]
311 c<n> - the controller number, eg. c0, c1
312 d<n> - the DIMM number, eg. d0, d1
313 spd - print SPD data
314 dimmparms - DIMM parameters, calculated from SPD
315 commonparms - lowest common parameters for all DIMMs
316 opts - options
317 addresses - address assignment (not implemented yet)
318 regs - controller registers
319
320edit <c#> <d#> <spd|dimmparms|commonparms|opts|addresses|regs> <element> <value>
321 c<n> - the controller number, eg. c0, c1
322 d<n> - the DIMM number, eg. d0, d1
323 spd - print SPD data
324 dimmparms - DIMM parameters, calculated from SPD
325 commonparms - lowest common parameters for all DIMMs
326 opts - options
327 addresses - address assignment (not implemented yet)
328 regs - controller registers
329 <element> - name of the modified element
330 byte number if the object is SPD
331 <value> - decimal or heximal (prefixed with 0x) numbers
332
333copy <src c#> <src d#> <spd|dimmparms|commonparms|opts|addresses|regs> <dst c#> <dst d#>
334 same as for "edit" command
335 DIMM numbers ignored for commonparms, opts, and regs
336
337reset
338 no arguement - reset the board
339
340recompute
341 no argument - reload SPD and start over
342
343compute
344 no argument - recompute from current next_step
345
346next_step
347 no argument - show current next_step
348
349help
350 no argument - print a list of all commands
351
352go
353 no argument - program memory controller(s) and continue with U-Boot
354
355Examples of debugging flow
356
357 FSL DDR>compute
358 Detected UDIMM UG51U6400N8SU-ACF
359 FSL DDR>print
360 print [c<n>] [d<n>] [spd] [dimmparms] [commonparms] [opts] [addresses] [regs]
361 FSL DDR>print dimmparms
362 DIMM parameters: Controller=0 DIMM=0
363 DIMM organization parameters:
364 module part name = UG51U6400N8SU-ACF
365 rank_density = 2147483648 bytes (2048 megabytes)
366 capacity = 4294967296 bytes (4096 megabytes)
367 burst_lengths_bitmask = 0C
368 base_addresss = 0 (00000000 00000000)
369 n_ranks = 2
370 data_width = 64
371 primary_sdram_width = 64
372 ec_sdram_width = 0
373 registered_dimm = 0
374 n_row_addr = 15
375 n_col_addr = 10
376 edc_config = 0
377 n_banks_per_sdram_device = 8
378 tCKmin_X_ps = 1500
379 tCKmin_X_minus_1_ps = 0
380 tCKmin_X_minus_2_ps = 0
381 tCKmax_ps = 0
382 caslat_X = 960
383 tAA_ps = 13125
384 caslat_X_minus_1 = 0
385 caslat_X_minus_2 = 0
386 caslat_lowest_derated = 0
387 tRCD_ps = 13125
388 tRP_ps = 13125
389 tRAS_ps = 36000
390 tWR_ps = 15000
391 tWTR_ps = 7500
392 tRFC_ps = 160000
393 tRRD_ps = 6000
394 tRC_ps = 49125
395 refresh_rate_ps = 7800000
396 tIS_ps = 0
397 tIH_ps = 0
398 tDS_ps = 0
399 tDH_ps = 0
400 tRTP_ps = 7500
401 tDQSQ_max_ps = 0
402 tQHS_ps = 0
403 FSL DDR>edit c0 opts ECC_mode 0
404 FSL DDR>edit c0 regs cs0_bnds 0x000000FF
405 FSL DDR>go
406 2 GiB left unmapped
407 4 GiB (DDR3, 64-bit, CL=9, ECC off)
408 DDR Chip-Select Interleaving Mode: CS0+CS1
409 Testing 0x00000000 - 0x7fffffff
410 Testing 0x80000000 - 0xffffffff
411 Remap DDR 2 GiB left unmapped
412
413 POST memory PASSED
414 Flash: 128 MiB
415 L2: 128 KB enabled
416 Corenet Platform Cache: 1024 KB enabled
417 SERDES: timeout resetting bank 3
418 SRIO1: disabled
419 SRIO2: disabled
420 MMC: FSL_ESDHC: 0
421 EEPROM: Invalid ID (ff ff ff ff)
422 PCIe1: disabled
423 PCIe2: Root Complex, x1, regs @ 0xfe201000
424 01:00.0 - 8086:10d3 - Network controller
425 PCIe2: Bus 00 - 01
426 PCIe3: disabled
427 In: serial
428 Out: serial
429 Err: serial
430 Net: Initializing Fman
431 Fman1: Uploading microcode version 101.8.0
432 e1000: 00:1b:21:81:d2:e0
433 FM1@DTSEC1, FM1@DTSEC2, FM1@DTSEC3, FM1@DTSEC4, FM1@DTSEC5, e1000#0 [PRIME]
434 Warning: e1000#0 MAC addresses don't match:
435 Address in SROM is 00:1b:21:81:d2:e0
436 Address in environment is 00:e0:0c:00:ea:05
437
438 Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
439 =>
440
README.fsl-dpaa
1This file documents Freescale DPAA-specific options.
2
3FMan (Frame Manager)
4 - CONFIG_FSL_FM_10GEC_REGULAR_NOTATION
5 on SoCs T4240, T2080, LS1043A, etc, the notation between 10GEC and MAC as below:
6 10GEC1->MAC9, 10GEC2->MAC10, 10GEC3->MAC1, 10GEC4->MAC2
7 on SoCs T1024, etc, the notation between 10GEC and MAC as below:
8 10GEC1->MAC1, 10GEC2->MAC2
9 so we introduce CONFIG_FSL_FM_10GEC_REGULAR_NOTATION to identify the new SoCs on
10 which 10GEC enumeration is consistent with MAC enumeration.
11
README.fsl-esdhc
1Freescale esdhc-specific options
2
3 - CONFIG_FSL_ESDHC_ADAPTER_IDENT
4 Support Freescale adapter card type identification. This is implemented by
5 operating Qixis FPGA relevant registers. The STAT_PRES1 register has SDHC
6 Card ID[0:2] bits showing the type of card installed in the SDHC Adapter Slot.
7
8 SDHC Card ID[0:2] Adapter Card Type
9 0b000 reserved
10 0b001 eMMC Card Rev4.5
11 0b010 SD/MMC Legacy Card
12 0b011 eMMC Card Rev4.4
13 0b100 reserved
14 0b101 MMC Card
15 0b110 SD Card Rev2.0/3.0
16 0b111 No card is present
17 - CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ESDHC_LE
18 ESDHC IP is in little-endian mode. Accessing ESDHC registers can be
19 determined by ESDHC IP's endian mode or processor's endian mode.
20 - CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ESDHC_BE
21 ESDHC IP is in big-endian mode. Accessing ESDHC registers can be determined
22 by ESDHC IP's endian mode or processor's endian mode.
23
README.fsl-hwconfig
1Freescale-specific 'hwconfig' options.
2
3This file documents Freescale-specific key:value pairs for the 'hwconfig'
4option. See README.hwconfig for general information about 'hwconfig'.
5
6audclk
7 Specific to the P1022DS reference board.
8
9 This option specifies which of the two oscillator frequencies should be
10 routed to the Wolfson WM8776 codec. The ngPIXIS can be programmed to
11 route either a 11.2896MHz or a 12.288MHz clock. The default is
12 12.288MHz. This option has two effects. First, the MUX on the board
13 will be programmed accordingly. Second, the clock-frequency property
14 in the codec node in the device tree will be updated to the correct
15 value.
16
17 'audclk:11'
18 Select the 11.2896MHz clock
19
20 'audclk:12'
21 Select the 12.288MHz clock
22
23usb
24 Specific to boards have USB controller
25
26 This option specifies the following for a USB controller:
27
28 - which controller mode to use
29 - which USB PHY to use
30
31 This is used by generic USB device-tree fixup function to update
32 modified values of phy type and controller mode.
33
34 Also used for configuring multiple USB controllers such that
35 'usbN' (where N is 1, 2, etc. refers to controller no.)
36
37 'phy_type'
38 Select USB phy type: 'utmi' OR 'ulpi'
39
40 'dr_mode'
41 Select USB controller mode: 'host', 'peripheral' OR 'otg'
42
43 Examples:
44 usb1:dr_mode=host;usb2:dr_mode=peripheral'
45
46 usb1:dr_mode=host,phy_type=utmi;usb2:dr_mode=host'
47
README.fsl-trustzone-components
1Freescale ARM64 SoCs like LS2080A have ARM TrustZone components like
2TZPC-BP147 (TrustZone Protection Controller) and TZASC-400 (TrustZone
3Address Space Controller).
4
5While most of the configuration related programming of these peripherals
6is left to a root-of-trust security software layer (running in EL3
7privilege mode), but still some configurations of these peripherals
8might be required while the bootloader is executing in EL3 privilege
9mode. The following sections define how to turn on these features for
10LS2080A like SoCs.
11
12TZPC-BP147 (TrustZone Protection Controller)
13============================================
14- Depends on CONFIG_FSL_TZPC_BP147 configuration flag.
15- Separates Secure World and Normal World on-chip RAM (OCRAM) spaces.
16- Provides a programming model to set access control policy via the TZPC
17 TZDECPROT Registers.
18
19TZASC-400 (TrustZone Address Space Controller)
20==============================================
21- Depends on CONFIG_FSL_TZASC_400 configuration flag.
22- Separates Secure World and Normal World external memory spaces for bus masters
23 such as processors and DMA-equipped peripherals.
24- Supports 8 fully programmable address regions, initially inactive at reset,
25 and one base region, always active, that covers the remaining address space.
26
README.fsl_iim
1Driver implementing the fuse API for Freescale's IC Identification Module (IIM)
2
3This IP can be found on the following SoCs:
4 - MPC512x,
5 - i.MX25,
6 - i.MX27,
7 - i.MX31,
8 - i.MX35,
9 - i.MX51,
10 - i.MX53.
11
12The section numbers in this file refer to the i.MX25 Reference Manual.
13
14A fuse word contains 8 fuse bit slots, as explained in 30.4.2.2.1.
15
16A bank contains 256 fuse word slots, as shown by the memory map in 30.3.1.
17
18Some fuse bit or word slots may not have the corresponding fuses actually
19implemented in the fusebox.
20
21See the README files of the SoCs using this driver in order to know the
22conventions used by U-Boot to store some specific data in the fuses, e.g. MAC
23addresses.
24
25Fuse operations:
26
27 Read
28 Read operations are implemented as read accesses to the shadow registers,
29 using "Word y of Bank x" from the register summary in 30.3.2. This is
30 explained in detail in 30.4.5.1.
31
32 Sense
33 Sense operations are implemented as explained in 30.4.5.2.
34
35 Program
36 Program operations are implemented as explained in 30.4.5.3. Following
37 this operation, the shadow registers are reloaded by the hardware (not
38 immediately, but this does not make any difference for a user reading
39 these registers).
40
41 Override
42 Override operations are implemented as write accesses to the shadow
43 registers, as explained in 30.4.5.4.
44
45Configuration:
46
47 CONFIG_FSL_IIM
48 Define this to enable the fsl_iim driver.
49
README.fuse
1Fuse API functions and commands
2
3The fuse API allows to control a fusebox and how it is used by the upper
4hardware layers.
5
6A fuse corresponds to a single non-volatile memory bit that can be programmed
7(i.e. blown, set to 1) only once. The programming operation is irreversible. A
8fuse that has not been programmed reads 0.
9
10Fuses can be used by SoCs to store various permanent configuration and data,
11e.g. boot configuration, security configuration, MAC addresses, etc.
12
13A fuse word is the smallest group of fuses that can be read at once from the
14fusebox control IP registers. This is limited to 32 bits with the current API.
15
16A fuse bank is the smallest group of fuse words having a common ID, as defined
17by each SoC.
18
19Upon startup, the fusebox control IP reads the fuse values and stores them to a
20volatile shadow cache.
21
22See the README files of the drivers implementing this API in order to know the
23SoC- and implementation-specific details.
24
25Functions / commands:
26
27 int fuse_read(u32 bank, u32 word, u32 *val);
28 fuse read <bank> <word> [<cnt>]
29 Read fuse words from the shadow cache.
30
31 int fuse_sense(u32 bank, u32 word, u32 *val);
32 fuse sense <bank> <word> [<cnt>]
33 Sense - i.e. read directly from the fusebox, skipping the shadow cache -
34 fuse words. This operation does not update the shadow cache.
35
36 This is useful to know the true value of fuses if an override has been
37 performed (see below).
38
39 int fuse_prog(u32 bank, u32 word, u32 val);
40 fuse prog [-y] <bank> <word> <hexval> [<hexval>...]
41 Program fuse words. This operation directly affects the fusebox and is
42 irreversible. The shadow cache is updated accordingly or not, depending on
43 each IP.
44
45 Only the bits to be programmed should be set in the input value (i.e. for
46 fuse bits that have already been programmed and hence should be left
47 unchanged by a further programming, it is preferable to clear the
48 corresponding bits in the input value in order not to perform a new
49 hardware programming operation on these fuse bits).
50
51 int fuse_override(u32 bank, u32 word, u32 val);
52 fuse override <bank> <word> <hexval> [<hexval>...]
53 Override fuse words in the shadow cache.
54
55 The fusebox is unaffected, so following this operation, the shadow cache
56 may differ from the fusebox values. Read or sense operations can then be
57 used to get the values from the shadow cache or from the fusebox.
58
59 This is useful to change the behaviors linked to some cached fuse values,
60 either because this is needed only temporarily, or because some of the
61 fuses have already been programmed or are locked (if the SoC allows to
62 override a locked fuse).
63
64Configuration:
65
66 CONFIG_CMD_FUSE
67 Define this to enable the fuse commands.
68
README.generic-board
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2#
3# (C) Copyright 2014 Google, Inc
4# Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org>
5
6Background
7----------
8
9U-Boot traditionally had a board.c file for each architecture. This introduced
10quite a lot of duplication, with each architecture tending to do
11initialisation slightly differently. To address this, a new 'generic board
12init' feature was introduced in March 2013 (further motivation is
13provided in the cover letter below).
14
15All boards and architectures have moved to this as of mid 2016.
16
17
18What has changed?
19-----------------
20
21The main change is that the arch/<arch>/lib/board.c file is removed in
22favour of common/board_f.c (for pre-relocation init) and common/board_r.c
23(for post-relocation init).
24
25Related to this, the global_data and bd_t structures now have a core set of
26fields which are common to all architectures. Architecture-specific fields
27have been moved to separate structures.
28
29
30Further Background
31------------------
32
33The full text of the original generic board series is reproduced below.
34
35--8<-------------
36
37This series creates a generic board.c implementation which contains
38the essential functions of the major arch/xxx/lib/board.c files.
39
40What is the motivation for this change?
41
421. There is a lot of repeated code in the board.c files. Any change to
43things like setting up the baud rate requires a change in 10 separate
44places.
45
462. Since there are 10 separate files, adding a new feature which requires
47initialisation is painful since it must be independently added in 10
48places.
49
503. As time goes by the architectures naturally diverge since there is limited
51pressure to compare features or even CONFIG options against similar things
52in other board.c files.
53
544. New architectures must implement all the features all over again, and
55sometimes in subtle different ways. This places an unfair burden on getting
56a new architecture fully functional and running with U-Boot.
57
585. While it is a bit of a tricky change, I believe it is worthwhile and
59achievable. There is no requirement that all code be common, only that
60the code that is common should be located in common/board.c rather than
61arch/xxx/lib/board.c.
62
63All the functions of board_init_f() and board_init_r() are broken into
64separate function calls so that they can easily be included or excluded
65for a particular architecture. It also makes it easier to adopt Graeme's
66initcall proposal when it is ready.
67
68http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot/2012-January/114499.html
69
70This series removes the dependency on generic relocation. So relocation
71happens as one big chunk and is still completely arch-specific. See the
72relocation series for a proposed solution to this for ARM:
73
74http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot/2011-December/112928.html
75
76or Graeme's recent x86 series v2:
77
78http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot/2012-January/114467.html
79
80Instead of moving over a whole architecture, this series takes the approach
81of simply enabling generic board support for an architecture. It is then up
82to each board to opt in by defining CONFIG_SYS_GENERIC_BOARD in the board
83config file. If this is not done, then the code will be generated as
84before. This allows both sets of code to co-exist until we are comfortable
85with the generic approach, and enough boards run.
86
87ARM is a relatively large board.c file and one which I can test, therefore
88I think it is a good target for this series. On the other hand, x86 is
89relatively small and simple, but different enough that it introduces a
90few issues to be solved. So I have chosen both ARM and x86 for this series.
91After a suggestion from Wolfgang I have added PPC also. This is the
92largest and most feature-full board, so hopefully we have all bases
93covered in this RFC.
94
95A generic global_data structure is also required. This might upset a few
96people. Here is my basic reasoning: most fields are the same, all
97architectures include and need it, most global_data.h files already have
98#ifdefs to select fields for a particular SOC, so it is hard to
99see why architecures are different in this area. We can perhaps add a
100way to put architecture-specific fields into a separate header file, but
101for now I have judged that to be counter-productive.
102
103Similarly we need a generic bd_info structure, since generic code will
104be accessing it. I have done this in the same way as global_data and the
105same comments apply.
106
107There was dicussion on the list about passing gd_t around as a parameter
108to pre-relocation init functions. I think this makes sense, but it can
109be done as a separate change, and this series does not require it.
110
111While this series needs to stand on its own (as with the link script
112cleanup series and the generic relocation series) the goal is the
113unification of the board init code. So I hope we can address issues with
114this in mind, rather than focusing too narrowly on particular ARM, x86 or
115PPC issues.
116
117I have run-tested ARM on Tegra Seaboard only. To try it out, define
118CONFIG_SYS_GENERIC_BOARD in your board file and rebuild. Most likely on
119x86 and PPC at least it will hang, but if you are lucky it will print
120something first :-)
121
122I have run this though MAKEALL with CONFIG_SYS_GENERIC_BOARD on for all
123ARM, PPC and x86 boards. There are a few failures due to errors in
124the board config, which I have sent patches for. The main issue is
125just the difference between __bss_end and __bss_end__.
126
127Note: the first group of commits are required for this series to build,
128but could be separated out if required. I have included them here for
129convenience.
130
131------------->8--
132
133Simon Glass, sjg@chromium.org
134March 2014
135Updated after final removal, May 2016
136
README.generic_usb_ohci
1Notes on the the generic USB-OHCI driver
2========================================
3
4This driver (drivers/usb/usb_ohci.[ch]) is the result of the merge of
5various existing OHCI drivers that were basically identical beside
6cpu/board dependant initalization. This initalization has been moved
7into cpu/board directories and are called via the hooks below.
8
9Configuration options
10----------------------
11
12 CONFIG_USB_OHCI_NEW: enable the new OHCI driver
13
14 CONFIG_SYS_USB_OHCI_BOARD_INIT: call the board dependant hooks:
15
16 - extern int board_usb_init(void);
17 - extern int usb_board_stop(void);
18 - extern int usb_cpu_init_fail(void);
19
20 CONFIG_SYS_USB_OHCI_CPU_INIT: call the cpu dependant hooks:
21
22 - extern int usb_cpu_init(void);
23 - extern int usb_cpu_stop(void);
24 - extern int usb_cpu_init_fail(void);
25
26 CONFIG_SYS_USB_OHCI_REGS_BASE: defines the base address of the OHCI
27 registers
28
29 CONFIG_SYS_USB_OHCI_SLOT_NAME: slot name
30
31 CONFIG_SYS_USB_OHCI_MAX_ROOT_PORTS: maximal number of ports of the
32 root hub.
33
34
35Endianness issues
36------------------
37
38The USB bus operates in little endian, but unfortunately there are
39OHCI controllers that operate in big endian such as ppc4xx. For these the
40config option
41
42 CONFIG_SYS_OHCI_BE_CONTROLLER
43
44needs to be defined.
45
46
47PCI Controllers
48----------------
49
50You'll need to define
51
52 CONFIG_PCI_OHCI
53
54If you have several USB PCI controllers, define
55
56 CONFIG_PCI_OHCI_DEVNO: number of the OHCI device in PCI list
57
58If undefined, the first instance found in PCI space will be used.
59
60PCI Controllers need to do byte swapping on register accesses, so they
61should to define:
62
63 CONFIG_SYS_OHCI_SWAP_REG_ACCESS
64
README.gpio
1
2GPIO hog (CONFIG_GPIO_HOG)
3--------
4
5All the GPIO hog are initialized in gpio_hog_probe_all() function called in
6board_r.c just before board_late_init() but you can also acces directly to
7the gpio with gpio_hog_lookup_name().
8
9
10Example, for the device tree:
11
12 tca6416@20 {
13 compatible = "ti,tca6416";
14 reg = <0x20>;
15 #gpio-cells = <2>;
16 gpio-controller;
17
18 env_reset {
19 gpio-hog;
20 input;
21 gpios = <6 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
22 };
23 boot_rescue {
24 gpio-hog;
25 input;
26 line-name = "foo-bar-gpio";
27 gpios = <7 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>;
28 };
29 };
30
31You can than access the gpio in your board code with:
32
33 struct gpio_desc *desc;
34 int ret;
35
36 ret = gpio_hog_lookup_name("boot_rescue", &desc);
37 if (ret)
38 return;
39 if (dm_gpio_get_value(desc) == 1)
40 printf("\nBooting into Rescue System\n");
41 else if (dm_gpio_get_value(desc) == 0)
42 printf("\nBoot normal\n");
43
README.gpt
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2#
3# Copyright (C) 2012 Samsung Electronics
4#
5# Lukasz Majewski <l.majewski@samsung.com>
6
7Glossary:
8========
9- UUID -(Universally Unique Identifier)
10- GUID - (Globally Unique ID)
11- EFI - (Extensible Firmware Interface)
12- UEFI - (Unified EFI) - EFI evolution
13- GPT (GUID Partition Table) - it is the EFI standard part
14- partitions - lists of available partitions (defined at u-boot):
15 ./include/configs/{target}.h
16
17Introduction:
18=============
19This document describes the GPT partition table format and usage of
20the gpt command in u-boot.
21
22UUID introduction:
23====================
24
25GPT for marking disks/partitions is using the UUID. It is supposed to be a
26globally unique value. A UUID is a 16-byte (128-bit) number. The number of
27theoretically possible UUIDs is therefore about 3 x 10^38.
28More often UUID is displayed as 32 hexadecimal digits, in 5 groups,
29separated by hyphens, in the form 8-4-4-4-12 for a total of 36 characters
30(32 digits and 4 hyphens)
31
32For instance, GUID of Basic data partition: EBD0A0A2-B9E5-4433-87C0-68B6B72699C7
33and GUID of Linux filesystem data: 0FC63DAF-8483-4772-8E79-3D69D8477DE4
34
35Historically there are 5 methods to generate this number. The oldest one is
36combining machine's MAC address and timer (epoch) value.
37
38Successive versions are using MD5 hash, random numbers and SHA-1 hash. All major
39OSes and programming languages are providing libraries to compute UUID (e.g.
40uuid command line tool).
41
42GPT brief explanation:
43======================
44
45 Layout:
46 -------
47
48 --------------------------------------------------
49 LBA 0 |Protective MBR |
50 ----------------------------------------------------------
51 LBA 1 |Primary GPT Header | Primary
52 -------------------------------------------------- GPT
53 LBA 2 |Entry 1|Entry 2| Entry 3| Entry 4|
54 --------------------------------------------------
55 LBA 3 |Entries 5 - 128 |
56 | |
57 | |
58 ----------------------------------------------------------
59 LBA 34 |Partition 1 |
60 | |
61 -----------------------------------
62 |Partition 2 |
63 | |
64 -----------------------------------
65 |Partition n |
66 | |
67 ----------------------------------------------------------
68 LBA -34 |Entry 1|Entry 2| Entry 3| Entry 4| Backup
69 -------------------------------------------------- GPT
70 LBA -33 |Entries 5 - 128 |
71 | |
72 | |
73 LBA -2 | |
74 --------------------------------------------------
75 LBA -1 |Backup GPT Header |
76 ----------------------------------------------------------
77
78For a legacy reasons, GPT's LBA 0 sector has a MBR structure. It is called
79"protective MBR".
80Its first partition entry ID has 0xEE value, and disk software, which is not
81handling the GPT sees it as a storage device without free space.
82
83It is possible to define 128 linearly placed partition entries.
84
85"LBA -1" means the last addressable block (in the mmc subsystem:
86"dev_desc->lba - 1")
87
88Primary/Backup GPT header:
89----------------------------
90Offset Size Description
91
920 8 B Signature ("EFI PART", 45 46 49 20 50 41 52 54)
938 4 B Revision (For version 1.0, the value is 00 00 01 00)
9412 4 B Header size (in bytes, usually 5C 00 00 00 meaning 92 bytes)
9516 4 B CRC32 of header (0 to header size), with this field zeroed
96 during calculation
9720 4 B Reserved (ZERO);
9824 8 B Current LBA (location of this header copy)
9932 8 B Backup LBA (location of the other header copy)
10040 8 B First usable LBA for partitions (primary partition table last
101 LBA + 1)
10248 8 B Last usable LBA (secondary partition table first LBA - 1)
10356 16 B Disk GUID (also referred as UUID on UNIXes)
10472 8 B Partition entries starting LBA (always 2 in primary copy)
10580 4 B Number of partition entries
10684 4 B Size of a partition entry (usually 128)
10788 4 B CRC32 of partition array
10892 * Reserved; must be ZERO (420 bytes for a 512-byte LBA)
109
110TOTAL: 512 B
111
112
113IMPORTANT:
114
115GPT headers and partition entries are protected by CRC32 (the POSIX CRC32).
116
117Primary GPT header and Backup GPT header have swapped values of "Current LBA"
118and "Backup LBA" and therefore different CRC32 check-sum.
119
120CRC32 for GPT headers (field "CRC of header") are calculated up till
121"Header size" (92), NOT 512 bytes.
122
123CRC32 for partition entries (field "CRC32 of partition array") is calculated for
124the whole array entry ( Number_of_partition_entries *
125sizeof(partition_entry_size (usually 128)))
126
127Observe, how Backup GPT is placed in the memory. It is NOT a mirror reflect
128of the Primary.
129
130 Partition Entry Format:
131 ----------------------
132 Offset Size Description
133
134 0 16 B Partition type GUID (Big Endian)
135 16 16 B Unique partition GUID in (Big Endian)
136 32 8 B First LBA (Little Endian)
137 40 8 B Last LBA (inclusive)
138 48 8 B Attribute flags [+]
139 56 72 B Partition name (text)
140
141 Attribute flags:
142 Bit 0 - System partition
143 Bit 1 - Hide from EFI
144 Bit 2 - Legacy BIOS bootable
145 Bit 48-63 - Defined and used by the individual partition type
146 For Basic data partition :
147 Bit 60 - Read-only
148 Bit 62 - Hidden
149 Bit 63 - Not mount
150
151Creating GPT partitions in U-Boot:
152==============
153
154To restore GUID partition table one needs to:
1551. Define partition layout in the environment.
156 Format of partitions layout:
157 "uuid_disk=...;name=u-boot,size=60MiB,uuid=...;
158 name=kernel,size=60MiB,uuid=...;"
159 or
160 "uuid_disk=${uuid_gpt_disk};name=${uboot_name},
161 size=${uboot_size},uuid=${uboot_uuid};"
162
163 The fields 'name' and 'size' are mandatory for every partition.
164 The field 'start' is optional.
165
166 If field 'size' of the last partition is 0, the partition is extended
167 up to the end of the device.
168
169 The fields 'uuid' and 'uuid_disk' are optional if CONFIG_RANDOM_UUID is
170 enabled. A random uuid will be used if omitted or they point to an empty/
171 non-existent environment variable. The environment variable will be set to
172 the generated UUID. The 'gpt guid' command reads the current value of the
173 uuid_disk from the GPT.
174
175 The field 'bootable' is optional, it is used to mark the GPT partition
176 bootable (set attribute flags "Legacy BIOS bootable").
177 "name=u-boot,size=60MiB;name=boot,size=60Mib,bootable;name=rootfs,size=0"
178 It can be used to locate bootable disks with command
179 "part list <interface> <dev> -bootable <varname>",
180 please check out doc/README.distro for use.
181
1822. Define 'CONFIG_EFI_PARTITION' and 'CONFIG_CMD_GPT'
183
1843. From u-boot prompt type:
185 gpt write mmc 0 $partitions
186
187Checking (validating) GPT partitions in U-Boot:
188===============================================
189
190Procedure is the same as above. The only change is at point 3.
191
192At u-boot prompt one needs to write:
193 gpt verify mmc 0 [$partitions]
194
195where [$partitions] is an optional parameter.
196
197When it is not provided, only basic checks based on CRC32 calculation for GPT
198header and PTEs are performed.
199When provided, additionally partition data - name, size and starting
200offset (last two in LBA) - are compared with data defined in '$partitions'
201environment variable.
202
203After running this command, return code is set to 0 if no errors found in
204on non-volatile medium stored GPT.
205
206Following line can be used to assess if GPT verification has succeed:
207
208U-BOOT> gpt verify mmc 0 $partitions
209U-BOOT> if test $? = 0; then echo "GPT OK"; else echo "GPT ERR"; fi
210
211Renaming GPT partitions from U-Boot:
212====================================
213
214GPT partition names are a mechanism via which userspace and U-Boot can
215communicate about software updates and boot failure. The 'gpt guid',
216'gpt read', 'gpt rename' and 'gpt swap' commands facilitate
217programmatic renaming of partitions from bootscripts by generating and
218modifying the partitions layout string. Here is an illustration of
219employing 'swap' to exchange 'primary' and 'backup' partition names:
220
221U-BOOT> gpt swap mmc 0 primary backup
222
223Afterwards, all partitions previously named 'primary' will be named
224'backup', and vice-versa. Alternatively, single partitions may be
225renamed. In this example, mmc0's first partition will be renamed
226'primary':
227
228U-BOOT> gpt rename mmc 0 1 primary
229
230The GPT functionality may be tested with the 'sandbox' board by
231creating a disk image as described under 'Block Device Emulation' in
232doc/arch/index.rst:
233
234=>host bind 0 ./disk.raw
235=> gpt read host 0
236[ . . . ]
237=> gpt swap host 0 name othername
238[ . . . ]
239
240Partition type GUID:
241====================
242
243For created partition, the used partition type GUID is
244PARTITION_BASIC_DATA_GUID (EBD0A0A2-B9E5-4433-87C0-68B6B72699C7).
245
246If you define 'CONFIG_PARTITION_TYPE_GUID', a optionnal parameter 'type'
247can specify a other partition type guid:
248
249 "uuid_disk=...;name=u-boot,size=60MiB,uuid=...;
250 name=kernel,size=60MiB,uuid=...,
251 type=0FC63DAF-8483-4772-8E79-3D69D8477DE4;"
252
253Some strings can be also used at the place of known GUID :
254 "system" = PARTITION_SYSTEM_GUID
255 (C12A7328-F81F-11D2-BA4B-00A0C93EC93B)
256 "mbr" = LEGACY_MBR_PARTITION_GUID
257 (024DEE41-33E7-11D3-9D69-0008C781F39F)
258 "msft" = PARTITION_MSFT_RESERVED_GUID
259 (E3C9E316-0B5C-4DB8-817D-F92DF00215AE)
260 "data" = PARTITION_BASIC_DATA_GUID
261 (EBD0A0A2-B9E5-4433-87C0-68B6B72699C7)
262 "linux" = PARTITION_LINUX_FILE_SYSTEM_DATA_GUID
263 (0FC63DAF-8483-4772-8E79-3D69D8477DE4)
264 "raid" = PARTITION_LINUX_RAID_GUID
265 (A19D880F-05FC-4D3B-A006-743F0F84911E)
266 "swap" = PARTITION_LINUX_SWAP_GUID
267 (0657FD6D-A4AB-43C4-84E5-0933C84B4F4F)
268 "lvm" = PARTITION_LINUX_LVM_GUID
269 (E6D6D379-F507-44C2-A23C-238F2A3DF928)
270
271 "uuid_disk=...;name=u-boot,size=60MiB,uuid=...;
272 name=kernel,size=60MiB,uuid=...,type=linux;"
273
274They are also used to display the type of partition in "part list" command.
275
276
277Useful info:
278============
279
280Two programs, namely: 'gdisk' and 'parted' are recommended to work with GPT
281recovery. Both are able to handle GUID partitions.
282Please, pay attention at -l switch for parted.
283
284"uuid" program is recommended to generate UUID string. Moreover it can decode
285(-d switch) passed in UUID string. It can be used to generate partitions UUID
286passed to u-boot environment variables.
287If optional CONFIG_RANDOM_UUID is defined then for any partition which environment
288uuid is unset, uuid is randomly generated and stored in correspond environment
289variable.
290
291note:
292Each string block of UUID generated by program "uuid" is in big endian and it is
293also stored in big endian in disk GPT.
294Partitions layout can be printed by typing "mmc part". Note that each partition
295GUID has different byte order than UUID generated before, this is because first
296three blocks of GUID string are in Little Endian.
297
README.hwconfig
1To enable this feature just define CONFIG_HWCONFIG in your board
2config file.
3
4This implements a simple hwconfig infrastructure: an
5interface for software knobs to control hardware.
6
7This a is very simple implementation, i.e. it is implemented
8via the `hwconfig' environment variable. Later we could write
9some "hwconfig <enable|disable|list>" commands, ncurses
10interface for Award BIOS-like interface, and frame-buffer
11interface for AMI GUI[1] BIOS-like interface with mouse
12support[2].
13
14Current implementation details/limitations:
15
161. Doesn't support options dependencies and mutual exclusion.
17 We can implement this by integrating apt-get[3] into Das
18 U-Boot. But I haven't bothered yet.
19
202. Since we don't implement a hwconfig command, i.e. we're working
21 with the environment directly, there is no way to tell that
22 toggling a particular option will need a reboot to take
23 effect. So, for now it's advised to always reboot the
24 target after modifying the hwconfig variable.
25
263. We support hwconfig options with arguments. For example,
27
28 set hwconfig "dr_usb:mode=peripheral,phy_type=ulpi"
29
30 This selects three hwconfig options:
31 1. dr_usb - enable Dual-Role USB controller;
32 2. dr_usb_mode:peripheral - USB in Function mode;
33 3. dr_usb_phy_type:ulpi - USB should work with ULPI PHYs.
34
35The purpose of this simple implementation is to refine the
36internal API and then we can continue improving the user
37experience by adding more mature interfaces, like a hwconfig
38command with bells and whistles. Or not adding, if we feel
39that the current interface fits people's needs.
40
41[1] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_Megatrends
42[2] Regarding ncurses and GUI with mouse support -- I'm just
43 kidding.
44[3] The comment regarding apt-get is also a joke, meaning that
45 dependency tracking could be non-trivial. For example, for
46 enabling HW feature X we may need to disable Y, and turn Z
47 into reduced mode (like RMII-only interface for ethernet,
48 no MII).
49
50 It's quite trivial to implement simple cases though.
51
README.i2c
1I2C Bus Arbitration
2===================
3
4While I2C supports multi-master buses this is difficult to get right.
5The implementation on the master side in software is quite complex.
6Clock-stretching and the arbitrary time that an I2C transaction can take
7make it difficult to share the bus fairly in the face of high traffic.
8When one or more masters can be reset independently part-way through a
9transaction it is hard to know the state of the bus.
10
11U-Boot provides a scheme based on two 'claim' GPIOs, one driven by the
12AP (Application Processor, meaning the main CPU) and one driven by the EC
13(Embedded Controller, a small CPU aimed at handling system tasks). With
14these they can communicate and reliably share the bus. This scheme has
15minimal overhead and involves very little code. The scheme can survive
16reboots by either side without difficulty.
17
18Since U-Boot runs on the AP, the terminology used is 'our' claim GPIO,
19meaning the AP's, and 'their' claim GPIO, meaning the EC's. This terminology
20is used by the device tree bindings in Linux also.
21
22The driver is implemented as an I2C mux, as it is in Linux. See
23i2c-arb-gpio-challenge for the implementation.
24
25GPIO lines are shared between the AP and EC to manage the bus. The AP and EC
26each have a 'bus claim' line, which is an output that the other can see.
27
28- AP_CLAIM: output from AP, signalling to the EC that the AP wants the bus
29- EC_CLAIM: output from EC, signalling to the AP that the EC wants the bus
30
31The basic algorithm is to assert your line when you want the bus, then make
32sure that the other side doesn't want it also. A detailed explanation is best
33done with an example.
34
35Let's say the AP wants to claim the bus. It:
36
371. Asserts AP_CLAIM
382. Waits a little bit for the other side to notice (slew time)
393. Checks EC_CLAIM. If this is not asserted, then the AP has the bus, and we
40 are done
414. Otherwise, wait for a few milliseconds (retry time) and see if EC_CLAIM is
42 released
435. If not, back off, release the claim and wait for a few more milliseconds
44 (retry time again)
456. Go back to 1 if things don't look wedged (wait time has expired)
467. Panic. The other side is hung with the CLAIM line set.
47
48The same algorithm applies on the EC.
49
50To release the bus, just de-assert the claim line.
51
52Typical delays are:
53- slew time 10 us
54- retry time 3 ms
55- wait time - 50ms
56
57In general the traffic is fairly light, and in particular the EC wants access
58to the bus quite rarely (maybe every 10s or 30s to check the battery). This
59scheme works very nicely with very low contention. There is only a 10 us
60wait for access to the bus assuming that the other side isn't using it.
61
README.iomux
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2/*
3 * (C) Copyright 2008
4 * Gary Jennejohn, DENX Software Engineering GmbH <garyj@denx.de>
5 */
6
7U-Boot console multiplexing
8===========================
9
10HOW CONSOLE MULTIPLEXING WORKS
11------------------------------
12
13This functionality is controlled with CONFIG_CONSOLE_MUX in the board
14configuration file.
15
16Two new files, common/iomux.c and include/iomux.h, contain the heart
17(iomux_doenv()) of the environment setting implementation.
18
19iomux_doenv() is called in common/cmd_nvedit.c to handle setenv and in
20common/console.c in console_init_r() during bootup to initialize
21stdio_devices[].
22
23A user can use a comma-separated list of devices to set stdin, stdout
24and stderr. For example: "setenv stdin serial,nc". NOTE: No spaces
25are allowed around the comma(s)!
26
27The length of the list is limited by malloc(), since the array used
28is allocated and freed dynamically.
29
30It should be possible to specify any device which console_assign()
31finds acceptable, but the code has only been tested with serial and
32nc.
33
34iomux_doenv() prevents multiple use of the same device, e.g. "setenv
35stdin nc,nc,serial" will discard the second nc. iomux_doenv() is
36not able to modify the environment, however, so that "pri stdin" still
37shows "nc,nc,serial".
38
39The major change in common/console.c was to modify fgetc() to call
40the iomux_tstc() routine in a for-loop. iomux_tstc() in turn calls
41the tstc() routine for every registered device, but exits immediately
42when one of them returns true. fgetc() then calls iomux_getc(),
43which calls the corresponding getc() routine. fgetc() hangs in
44the for-loop until iomux_tstc() returns true and the input can be
45retrieved.
46
47Thus, a user can type into any device registered for stdin. No effort
48has been made to demulitplex simultaneous input from multiple stdin
49devices.
50
51fputc() and fputs() have been modified to call iomux_putc() and
52iomux_puts() respectively, which call the corresponding output
53routines for every registered device.
54
55Thus, a user can see the ouput for any device registered for stdout
56or stderr on all devices registered for stdout or stderr. As an
57example, if stdin=serial,nc and stdout=serial,nc then all output
58for serial, e.g. echos of input on serial, will appear on serial and nc.
59
60Just as with the old console code, this statement is still true:
61If not defined in the environment, the first input device is assigned
62to the 'stdin' file, the first output one to 'stdout' and 'stderr'.
63
64If CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_IS_IN_ENV is defined then multiple input/output
65devices can be set at boot time if defined in the environment.
66
67CAVEATS
68-------
69
70Note that common/iomux.c calls console_assign() for every registered
71device as it is discovered. This means that the environment settings
72for application consoles will be set to the last device in the list.
73
74On a slow machine, such as MPC852T clocked at 66MHz, the overhead associated
75with calling tstc() and then getc() means that copy&paste will normally not
76work, even when stdin=stdout=stderr=serial.
77On a faster machine, such as a sequoia, cut&paste of longer (about 80
78characters) lines works fine when serial is the only device used.
79
80Using nc as a stdin device results in even more overhead because nc_tstc()
81is quite slow. Even on a sequoia cut&paste does not work on the serial
82interface when nc is added to stdin, although there is no character loss using
83the ethernet interface for input. In this test case stdin=serial,nc and
84stdout=serial.
85
86In addition, the overhead associated with sending to two devices, when one of
87them is nc, also causes problems. Even on a sequoia cut&paste does not work
88on the serial interface (stdin=serial) when nc is added to stdout (stdout=
89serial,nc).
90
README.kconfig
1Kconfig in U-Boot
2=================
3
4This document describes the configuration infrastructure of U-Boot.
5
6The conventional configuration was replaced by Kconfig at v2014.10-rc1 release.
7
8
9Language Specification
10----------------------
11
12Kconfig originates in Linux Kernel.
13See the file "Documentation/kbuild/kconfig*.txt" in your Linux Kernel
14source directory for a basic specification of Kconfig.
15
16
17Difference from Linux's Kconfig
18-------------------------------
19
20Here are some worth-mentioning configuration targets.
21
22- silentoldconfig
23
24 This target updates .config, include/generated/autoconf.h and
25 include/configs/* as in Linux. In U-Boot, it also does the following
26 for the compatibility with the old configuration system:
27
28 * create a symbolic link "arch/${ARCH}/include/asm/arch" pointing to
29 the SoC/CPU specific header directory
30 * create include/config.h
31 * create include/autoconf.mk
32 * create spl/include/autoconf.mk (SPL and TPL only)
33 * create tpl/include/autoconf.mk (TPL only)
34
35 If we could completely switch to Kconfig in a long run
36 (i.e. remove all the include/configs/*.h), those additional processings
37 above would be removed.
38
39- defconfig
40
41 In U-Boot, "make defconfig" is a shorthand of "make sandbox_defconfig"
42
43- <board>_defconfig
44
45 Now it works as in Linux.
46 The prefixes such as "+S:" in *_defconfig are deprecated.
47 You can simply remove the prefixes. Do not add them for new boards.
48
49- <board>_config
50
51 This does not exist in Linux's Kconfig.
52 "make <board>_config" works the same as "make <board>_defconfig".
53 Prior to Kconfig, in U-Boot, "make <board>_config" was used for the
54 configuration. It is still supported for backward compatibility, so
55 we do not need to update the distro recipes.
56
57
58The other configuration targets work as in Linux Kernel.
59
60
61Migration steps to Kconfig
62--------------------------
63
64Prior to Kconfig, the C preprocessor based board configuration had been used
65in U-Boot.
66
67Although Kconfig was introduced and some configs have been moved to Kconfig,
68many of configs are still defined in C header files. It will take a very
69long term to move all of them to Kconfig. In the interim, the two different
70configuration infrastructures should coexist.
71The configuration files are generated by both Kconfig and the old preprocessor
72based configuration as follows:
73
74Configuration files for use in C sources
75 - include/generated/autoconf.h (generated by Kconfig for Normal)
76 - include/configs/<board>.h (exists for all boards)
77
78Configuration file for use in makefiles
79 - include/config/auto.conf (generated by Kconfig)
80 - include/autoconf.mk (generated by the old config for Normal)
81 - spl/include/autoconfig.mk (generated by the old config for SPL)
82 - tpl/include/autoconfig.mk (generated by the old config for TPL)
83
84When adding a new CONFIG macro, it is highly recommended to add it to Kconfig
85rather than to a header file.
86
87
88Conversion from boards.cfg to Kconfig
89-------------------------------------
90
91Prior to Kconfig, boards.cfg was a primary database that contained Arch, CPU,
92SoC, etc. of all the supported boards. It was deleted when switching to
93Kconfig. Each field of boards.cfg was converted as follows:
94
95 Status -> "S:" entry of MAINTAINERS
96 Arch -> CONFIG_SYS_ARCH defined by Kconfig
97 CPU -> CONFIG_SYS_CPU defined by Kconfig
98 SoC -> CONFIG_SYS_SOC defined by Kconfig
99 Vendor -> CONFIG_SYS_VENDOR defined by Kconfig
100 Board -> CONFIG_SYS_BOARD defined by Kconfig
101 Target -> File name of defconfig (configs/<target>_defconfig)
102 Options -> CONFIG_SYS_EXTRA_OPTIONS defined by Kconfig
103 Maintainers -> "M:" entry of MAINTAINERS
104
105
106Tips to add/remove boards
107-------------------------
108
109When adding a new board, the following steps are generally needed:
110
111 [1] Add a header file include/configs/<target>.h
112 [2] Make sure to define necessary CONFIG_SYS_* in Kconfig:
113 Define CONFIG_SYS_CPU="cpu" to compile arch/<arch>/cpu/<cpu>
114 Define CONFIG_SYS_SOC="soc" to compile arch/<arch>/cpu/<cpu>/<soc>
115 Define CONFIG_SYS_VENDOR="vendor" to compile board/<vendor>/common/*
116 and board/<vendor>/<board>/*
117 Define CONFIG_SYS_BOARD="board" to compile board/<board>/*
118 (or board/<vendor>/<board>/* if CONFIG_SYS_VENDOR is defined)
119 Define CONFIG_SYS_CONFIG_NAME="target" to include
120 include/configs/<target>.h
121 [3] Add a new entry to the board select menu in Kconfig.
122 The board select menu is located in arch/<arch>/Kconfig or
123 arch/<arch>/*/Kconfig.
124 [4] Add a MAINTAINERS file
125 It is generally placed at board/<board>/MAINTAINERS or
126 board/<vendor>/<board>/MAINTAINERS
127 [5] Add configs/<target>_defconfig
128
129When removing an obsolete board, the following steps are generally needed:
130
131 [1] Remove configs/<target>_defconfig
132 [2] Remove include/configs/<target>.h if it is not used by any other boards
133 [3] Remove board/<vendor>/<board>/* or board/<board>/* if it is not used
134 by any other boards
135 [4] Update MAINTAINERS if necessary
136 [5] Remove the unused entry from the board select menu in Kconfig
137 [6] Add an entry to doc/README.scrapyard
138
139
140TODO
141----
142
143- The option field of boards.cfg, which was used for the pre-Kconfig
144 configuration, moved to CONFIG_SYS_EXTRA_OPTIONS verbatim now.
145 Board maintainers are expected to implement proper Kconfig options
146 and switch over to them. Eventually CONFIG_SYS_EXTRA_OPTIONS will go away.
147 CONFIG_SYS_EXTRA_OPTIONS should not be used for new boards.
148
149- In the pre-Kconfig, a single board had multiple entries in the boards.cfg
150 file with differences in the option fields. The corresponding defconfig
151 files were auto-generated when switching to Kconfig. Now we have too many
152 defconfig files compared with the number of the supported boards. It is
153 recommended to have only one defconfig per board and allow users to select
154 the config options.
155
156- Move the config macros in header files to Kconfig. When we move at least
157 macros used in makefiles, we can drop include/autoconfig.mk, which makes
158 the build scripts much simpler.
159
README.kwbimage
1---------------------------------------------
2Kirkwood Boot Image generation using mkimage
3---------------------------------------------
4
5This document describes the U-Boot feature as it
6is implemented for the Kirkwood family of SoCs.
7
8The Kirkwood SoC's can boot directly from NAND FLASH,
9SPI FLASH, SATA etc. using its internal bootRom support.
10
11for more details refer section 24.2 of Kirkwood functional specifications.
12ref: www.marvell.com/products/embedded.../kirkwood/index.jsp
13
14Command syntax:
15--------------
16./tools/mkimage -l <kwboot_file>
17 to list the kwb image file details
18
19./tools/mkimage -n <board specific configuration file> \
20 -T kwbimage -a <start address> -e <execution address> \
21 -d <input_raw_binary> <output_kwboot_file>
22
23for ex.
24./tools/mkimage -n ./board/Marvell/openrd_base/kwbimage.cfg \
25 -T kwbimage -a 0x00600000 -e 0x00600000 \
26 -d u-boot.bin u-boot.kwb
27
28
29kwbimage support available with mkimage utility will generate kirkwood boot
30image that can be flashed on the board NAND/SPI flash. The make target
31which uses mkimage to produce such an image is "u-boot.kwb". For example:
32
33 export KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/build
34 make distclean
35 make yourboard_config
36 make u-boot.kwb
37
38
39Board specific configuration file specifications:
40------------------------------------------------
411. This file must present in the $(BOARDDIR). The default name is
42 kwbimage.cfg. The name can be set as part of the full path
43 to the file using CONFIG_SYS_KWD_CONFIG (probably in
44 include/configs/<yourboard>.h). The path should look like:
45 $(CONFIG_BOARDDIR)/<yourkwbimagename>.cfg
462. This file can have empty lines and lines starting with "#" as first
47 character to put comments
483. This file can have configuration command lines as mentioned below,
49 any other information in this file is treated as invalid.
50
51Configuration command line syntax:
52---------------------------------
531. Each command line is must have two strings, first one command or address
54 and second one data string
552. Following are the valid command strings and associated data strings:-
56 Command string data string
57 -------------- -----------
58 BOOT_FROM nand/spi/sata
59 NAND_ECC_MODE default/rs/hamming/disabled
60 NAND_PAGE_SIZE any uint16_t hex value
61 SATA_PIO_MODE any uint32_t hex value
62 DDR_INIT_DELAY any uint32_t hex value
63 DATA regaddr and regdara hex value
64 you can have maximum 55 such register programming commands
65
663. All commands are optional to program
67
68Typical example of kwimage.cfg file:
69-----------------------------------
70
71# Boot Media configurations
72BOOT_FROM nand
73NAND_ECC_MODE default
74NAND_PAGE_SIZE 0x0800
75
76# Configure RGMII-0 interface pad voltage to 1.8V
77DATA 0xFFD100e0 0x1b1b1b9b
78# DRAM Configuration
79DATA 0xFFD01400 0x43000c30
80DATA 0xFFD01404 0x37543000
81DATA 0xFFD01408 0x22125451
82DATA 0xFFD0140C 0x00000a33
83DATA 0xFFD01410 0x000000cc
84DATA 0xFFD01414 0x00000000
85DATA 0xFFD01418 0x00000000
86DATA 0xFFD0141C 0x00000C52
87DATA 0xFFD01420 0x00000040
88DATA 0xFFD01424 0x0000F17F
89DATA 0xFFD01428 0x00085520
90DATA 0xFFD0147C 0x00008552
91DATA 0xFFD01504 0x0FFFFFF1
92DATA 0xFFD01508 0x10000000
93DATA 0xFFD0150C 0x0FFFFFF5
94DATA 0xFFD01514 0x00000000
95DATA 0xFFD0151C 0x00000000
96DATA 0xFFD01494 0x00030000
97DATA 0xFFD01498 0x00000000
98DATA 0xFFD0149C 0x0000E803
99DATA 0xFFD01480 0x00000001
100# End of Header extension
101DATA 0x0 0x0
102
103------------------------------------------------
104Author: Prafulla Wadaskar <prafulla@marvell.com>
105
README.link-local
1------------------------------------------
2 Link-local IP address auto-configuration
3------------------------------------------
4
5Negotiate with other link-local clients on the local network
6for an address that doesn't require explicit configuration.
7This is especially useful if a DHCP server cannot be guaranteed
8to exist in all environments that the device must operate.
9
10This is an implementation of RFC3927.
11
12----------
13 Commands
14----------
15
16When CONFIG_CMD_LINK_LOCAL is defined in the board config file,
17the "linklocal" command is available. This running this will
18take approximately 5 seconds while the address is negotiated.
19
20------------------------
21 Environment interation
22------------------------
23
24The "llipaddr" variable is set with the most recently
25negotiated address and is preferred in future negotiations.
26
27The "ipaddr", "netmask", and "gatewayip" variables are set
28after successful negotiation to enable network access.
29
30-------------
31 Limitations
32-------------
33
34RFC3927 requires that addresses are continuously checked to
35avoid conflicts, however this can only happen when the net_loop
36is getting called. It is possible for a conflict to go undetected
37until a command that accesses the network is executed.
38
39Using NetConsole is one way to ensure that net_loop is always
40processing packets and monitoring for conflicts.
41
42This is also not a concern if the feature is use to connect
43directly to another machine that may not be running a DHCP server.
44
45----------------
46 Example script
47----------------
48
49This script allows use of DHCP and/or Link-local controlled
50by env variables. It depends on CONFIG_CMD_LINK_LOCAL, CONFIG_CMD_DHCP,
51and CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL.
52If both fail or are disabled, static settings are used.
53
54#define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \
55 "ipconfigcmd=if test \\\"$dhcpenabled\\\" -ne 0;" \
56 "then " \
57 "dhcpfail=0;dhcp || dhcpfail=1;" \
58 "else " \
59 "dhcpfail=-1;" \
60 "fi;" \
61 "if test \\\"$linklocalenabled\\\" -ne 0 -a " \
62 "\\\"$dhcpfail\\\" -ne 0;" \
63 "then " \
64 "linklocal;" \
65 "llfail=0;" \
66 "else " \
67 "llfail=-1;" \
68 "fi;" \
69 "if test \\\"$llfail\\\" -ne 0 -a " \
70 "\\\"$dhcpfail\\\" -ne 0; " \
71 "then " \
72 "setenv ipaddr $sipaddr; " \
73 "setenv netmask $snetmask; " \
74 "setenv gatewayip $sgatewayip; " \
75 "fi;\0" \
76
README.lynxkdi
1 LYNX KDI SUPPORT
2
3 Last Update: July 20, 2003
4=======================================================================
5
6This file describes support for LynuxWorks KDI within U-Boot. Support
7is enabled by defining CONFIG_LYNXKDI.
8
9
10LYNXOS AND BLUECAT SUPPORTED
11============================
12Both LynxOS and BlueCat linux KDIs are supported. The implementation
13automatically detects which is being booted. When you use mkimage
14you should specify "lynxos" for both (see target-specific notes).
15
16
17SUPPORTED ARCHITECTURE/TARGETS
18==============================
19The following targets have been tested:
20
21-PowerPC MPC8260ADS
22
23
24FILES TO LOOK AT
25================
26include/lynxkdi.h -defines a simple struct passed to a kdi.
27common/lynxkdi.c -implements the call to the kdi.
28common/cmd_bootm.c -top-level command implementation ("bootm").
29
30
31====================================================================
32TARGET SPECIFIC NOTES
33====================================================================
34
35MPC8260ADS
36===========
37The default LynxOS and BlueCat implementations require some
38modifications to the config file.
39
40Edit include/configs/MPC8260ADS.h to use the following:
41
42#define CONFIG_SYS_IMMR 0xFA200000
43#define CONFIG_SYS_BCSR 0xFA100000
44#define CONFIG_SYS_BR1_PRELIM 0xFA101801
45
46When creating a LynxOS or BlueCat u-boot image using mkimage,
47you must specify the following:
48
49Both: -A ppc -O lynxos -T kernel -C none
50LynxOS: -a 0x00004000 -e 0x00004020
51BlueCat: -a 0x00500000 -e 0x00507000
52
53To pass the MAC address to BlueCat you should define the
54"fcc2_ether_addr" parameter in the "bootargs" environment
55variable. E.g.:
56
57==> setenv bootargs fcc2_ether_addr=00:11:22:33:44:55:66
58
README.m54418twr
1Freescale MCF54418TWR ColdFire Development Board
2================================================
3
4TsiChung Liew(Tsi-Chung.Liew@freescale.com)
5Created Mar 22, 2012
6===========================================
7
8
9Changed files:
10==============
11
12- board/freescale/m54418twr/m54418twr.c Dram setup
13- board/freescale/m54418twr/Makefile Makefile
14- board/freescale/m54418twr/config.mk config make
15- board/freescale/m54418twr/u-boot.lds Linker description
16- board/freescale/m54418twr/sbf_dram_init.S
17 DDR/SDRAM initialization
18
19- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/cpu.c cpu specific code
20- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/cpu_init.c Flexbus ChipSelect, Mux pins setup, icache and RTC extra regs
21- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/interrupts.c cpu specific interrupt support
22- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/speed.c system, pci, flexbus, and cpu clock
23- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/Makefile Makefile
24- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/config.mk config make
25- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/start.S start up assembly code
26
27- doc/README.m54418twr This readme file
28
29- drivers/net/mcffec.c ColdFire common FEC driver
30- drivers/net/mcfmii.c ColdFire common MII driver
31- drivers/serial/mcfuart.c ColdFire common UART driver
32
33- arch/m68k/include/asm/bitops.h Bit operation function export
34- arch/m68k/include/asm/byteorder.h Byte order functions
35- arch/m68k/include/asm/fec.h FEC structure and definition
36- arch/m68k/include/asm/global_data.h Global data structure
37- arch/m68k/include/asm/immap.h ColdFire specific header file and driver macros
38- arch/m68k/include/asm/immap_5441x.h mcf5441x specific header file
39- arch/m68k/include/asm/io.h io functions
40- arch/m68k/include/asm/m5441x.h mcf5441x specific header file
41- arch/m68k/include/asm/posix_types.h Posix
42- arch/m68k/include/asm/processor.h header file
43- arch/m68k/include/asm/ptrace.h Exception structure
44- arch/m68k/include/asm/rtc.h Realtime clock header file
45- arch/m68k/include/asm/string.h String function export
46- arch/m68k/include/asm/timer.h Timer structure and definition
47- arch/m68k/include/asm/types.h Data types definition
48- arch/m68k/include/asm/uart.h Uart structure and definition
49- arch/m68k/include/asm/u-boot.h u-boot structure
50
51- include/configs/M54418TWR.h Board specific configuration file
52
53- arch/m68k/lib/board.c board init function
54- arch/m68k/lib/cache.c
55- arch/m68k/lib/interrupts.c Coldfire common interrupt functions
56- arch/m68k/lib/time.c Timer functions (Dma timer and PIT)
57- arch/m68k/lib/traps.c Exception init code
58
591 MCF5441x specific Options/Settings
60====================================
611.1 pre-loader is no longer suppoer in thie coldfire family
62
631.2 Configuration settings for M54418TWR Development Board
64CONFIG_MCF5441x -- define for all MCF5441x CPUs
65CONFIG_M54418 -- define for all Freescale MCF54418 CPUs
66
67CONFIG_MCFUART -- define to use common CF Uart driver
68CONFIG_SYS_UART_PORT -- define UART port number, start with 0, 1 and 2
69CONFIG_BAUDRATE -- define UART baudrate
70
71CONFIG_MCFFEC -- define to use common CF FEC driver
72CONFIG_MII -- enable to use MII driver
73CONFIG_SYS_DISCOVER_PHY -- enable PHY discovery
74CONFIG_SYS_RX_ETH_BUFFER -- Set FEC Receive buffer
75CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_ECHO_LINK_DOWN --
76CONFIG_SYS_FEC0_PINMUX -- Set FEC0 Pin configuration
77CONFIG_SYS_FEC1_PINMUX -- Set FEC1 Pin configuration
78CONFIG_SYS_FEC0_MIIBASE -- Set FEC0 MII base register
79CONFIG_SYS_FEC1_MIIBASE -- Set FEC0 MII base register
80MCFFEC_TOUT_LOOP -- set FEC timeout loop
81CONFIG_HAS_ETH1 -- define to enable second FEC in u-boot
82
83CONFIG_MCFTMR -- define to use DMA timer
84
85CONFIG_SYS_IMMR -- define for MBAR offset
86
87CONFIG_EXTRA_CLOCK -- Enable extra clock such as vco, flexbus, pci, etc
88
89CONFIG_SYS_MBAR -- define MBAR offset
90
91CONFIG_MONITOR_IS_IN_RAM -- Not support
92
93CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR -- defines the base address of the MCF54455 internal SRAM
94
95CONFIG_SYS_CSn_BASE -- defines the Chip Select Base register
96CONFIG_SYS_CSn_MASK -- defines the Chip Select Mask register
97CONFIG_SYS_CSn_CTRL -- defines the Chip Select Control register
98
99CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE -- defines the DRAM Base
100
1012. MEMORY MAP UNDER U-BOOT AND LINUX KERNEL
102===========================================
1032.1. System memory map:
104 MRAM: 0x00000000-0x0003FFFF (256KB)
105 DDR: 0x40000000-0x47FFFFFF (128MB)
106 SRAM: 0x80000000-0x8000FFFF (64KB)
107 IP: 0xE0000000-0xFFFFFFFF (512MB)
108
1093. COMPILATION
110==============
1113.1 To create U-Boot the gcc-4.x compiler set (ColdFire ELF version)
112from codesourcery.com was used. Download it from:
113http://www.codesourcery.com/gnu_toolchains/coldfire/download.html
114
1153.2 Compilation
116 export CROSS_COMPILE=cross-compile-prefix
117 cd u-boot
118 make distclean
119 make M54418TWR_config, or - default to spi serial flash boot, 50Mhz input clock
120 make M54418TWR_nand_mii_config, or - default to nand flash boot, mii mode, 25Mhz input clock
121 make M54418TWR_nand_rmii_config, or - default to nand flash boot, rmii mode, 50Mhz input clock
122 make M54418TWR_nand_rmii_lowfreq_config, or - default to nand flash boot, rmii mode, 50Mhz input clock
123 make M54418TWR_serial_mii_config, or - default to spi serial flash boot, 25Mhz input clock
124 make M54418TWR_serial_rmii_config, or - default to spi serial flash boot, 50Mhz input clock
125 make
126
1274. SCREEN DUMP
128==============
1294.1 M54418TWR Development board
130 Boot from NAND flash (NOTE: May not show exactly the same)
131
132U-Boot 2012.10-00209-g12ae1d8-dirty (Oct 18 2012 - 15:54:54)
133
134CPU: Freescale MCF54418 (Mask:a3 Version:1)
135 CPU CLK 250 MHz BUS CLK 125 MHz FLB CLK 125 MHz
136 INP CLK 50 MHz VCO CLK 500 MHz
137Board: Freescale MCF54418 Tower System
138SPI: ready
139DRAM: 128 MiB
140NAND: 256 MiB
141In: serial
142Out: serial
143Err: serial
144Net: FEC0, FEC1
145-> pri
146baudrate=115200
147bootargs=root=/dev/mtdblock2 rw rootfstype=jffs2 mtdparts=NAND:1M(u-boot)ro,7M(k
148ernel)ro,-(jffs2) console=ttyS0,115200
149bootdelay=2
150eth1addr=00:e0:0c:bc:e5:61
151ethact=FEC0
152ethaddr=00:e0:0c:bc:e5:60
153fileaddr=40010000
154filesize=27354
155gatewayip=192.168.1.1
156hostname=M54418TWR
157inpclk=50000000
158ipaddr=192.168.1.2
159load=tftp ${loadaddr} ${u-boot};
160loadaddr=0x40010000
161mem=129024k
162netdev=eth0
163netmask=255.255.255.0
164prog=nand device 0;nand erase 0 40000;nb_update ${loadaddr} ${filesize};save
165serverip=192.168.1.1
166stderr=serial
167stdin=serial
168stdout=serial
169u-boot=u-boot.bin
170upd=run load; run prog
171
172Environment size: 653/131068 bytes
173-> bdinfo
174memstart = 0x40000000
175memsize = 0x08000000
176flashstart = 0x00000000
177flashsize = 0x00000000
178flashoffset = 0x00000000
179sramstart = 0x80000000
180sramsize = 0x00010000
181mbar = 0xFC000000
182cpufreq = 250 MHz
183busfreq = 125 MHz
184flbfreq = 125 MHz
185inpfreq = 50 MHz
186vcofreq = 500 MHz
187ethaddr = 00:e0:0c:bc:e5:60
188eth1addr = 00:e0:0c:bc:e5:61
189ip_addr = 192.168.1.2
190baudrate = 115200 bps
191-> help
192? - alias for 'help'
193base - print or set address offset
194bdinfo - print Board Info structure
195boot - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd'
196bootd - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd'
197bootelf - Boot from an ELF image in memory
198bootm - boot application image from memory
199bootp - boot image via network using BOOTP/TFTP protocol
200bootvx - Boot vxWorks from an ELF image
201cmp - memory compare
202coninfo - print console devices and information
203cp - memory copy
204crc32 - checksum calculation
205dcache - enable or disable data cache
206dhcp - boot image via network using DHCP/TFTP protocol
207echo - echo args to console
208editenv - edit environment variable
209env - environment handling commands
210exit - exit script
211false - do nothing, unsuccessfully
212go - start application at address 'addr'
213help - print command description/usage
214icache - enable or disable instruction cache
215iminfo - print header information for application image
216imxtract- extract a part of a multi-image
217itest - return true/false on integer compare
218loop - infinite loop on address range
219md - memory display
220mdio - MDIO utility commands
221mii - MII utility commands
222mm - memory modify (auto-incrementing address)
223mtest - simple RAM read/write test
224mw - memory write (fill)
225nand - NAND sub-system
226nb_update- Nand boot update program
227nboot - boot from NAND device
228nfs - boot image via network using NFS protocol
229nm - memory modify (constant address)
230ping - send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network host
231printenv- print environment variables
232reginfo - print register information
233reset - Perform RESET of the CPU
234run - run commands in an environment variable
235saveenv - save environment variables to persistent storage
236setenv - set environment variables
237sf - SPI flash sub-system
238showvar - print local hushshell variables
239sleep - delay execution for some time
240source - run script from memory
241sspi - SPI utility command
242test - minimal test like /bin/sh
243tftpboot- boot image via network using TFTP protocol
244true - do nothing, successfully
245version - print monitor, compiler and linker version
246
README.malta
README.marvell
1Marvell U-Boot Build Instructions
2=================================
3
4This document describes how to compile the U-Boot and how to change U-Boot configuration
5
6Build Procedure
7----------------
81. Install required packages:
9
10 # sudo apt-get install libssl-dev
11 # sudo apt-get install device-tree-compiler
12 # sudo apt-get install swig libpython-dev
13
142. Set the cross compiler:
15
16 # export CROSS_COMPILE=/path/to/toolchain/aarch64-marvell-linux-gnu-
17
183. Clean-up old residuals:
19
20 # make mrproper
21
224. Configure the U-Boot:
23
24 # make <defconfig_file>
25
26 - For the Armada-70x0/80x0 DB board use "mvebu_db_armada8k_defconfig"
27 - For the Armada-80x0 MacchiatoBin use "make mvebu_mcbin-88f8040_defconfig"
28 - For the Armada-3700 DB board use "make mvebu_db-88f3720_defconfig"
29 - For the Armada-3700 EsspressoBin use "make mvebu_espressobin-88f3720_defconfig"
30
315. Configure the device-tree and build the U-Boot image:
32
33 Compile u-boot and set the required device-tree using:
34
35 # make DEVICE_TREE=<name>
36
37 NOTE:
38 Compilation with "mvebu_db_armada8k_defconfig" requires explicitly exporting DEVICE_TREE
39 for the requested board.
40 By default, u-boot is compiled with armada-8040-db device-tree.
41 Using A80x0 device-tree on A70x0 might break the device.
42 In order to prevent this, the required device-tree MUST be set during compilation.
43 All device-tree files are located in ./arch/arm/dts/ folder.
44
45 NOTE:
46 The u-boot.bin should not be used as a stand-alone image.
47 The ARM Trusted Firmware (ATF) build process uses this image to generate the
48 flash image.
49
50Configuration update
51---------------------
52 To update the U-Boot configuration, please refer to doc/README.kconfig
53
54
README.mediatek
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2#
3# Copyright (C) 2018 MediaTek Inc.
4# Ryder Lee <ryder.lee@kernel.org>
5
6
7This document describes how to compile the U-Boot and how to change U-Boot
8configuration about the MediaTek SoCs.
9
10
11Build Procedure
12===============
13 -Set the cross compiler:
14
15 # export CROSS_COMPILE=/path/to/toolchain/arm-linux-gnueabi-
16
17 -Clean-up old residuals:
18
19 # make mrproper
20
21 -Configure the U-Boot:
22
23 # make <defconfig_file>
24 # make
25
26 - For the MT7623n bananapi R2 board use "mt7623n_bpir2_defconfig"
27 - For the MT7629 reference board use "mt7629_rfb_defconfig"
28
29
30Boot sequence
31=============
32 -Bootrom -> MTK preloader -> U-Boot
33
34 - MT7623n
35
36 This version of U-Boot doesn't implement SPL. So, MTK preloader binary
37 is needed to boot up:
38
39 https://github.com/BPI-SINOVOIP/BPI-R2-bsp/tree/master/mt-pack/mtk/bpi-r2/bin
40
41
42 -Bootrom -> SPL -> U-Boot
43
44 - MT7629
45
46
47Configuration update
48====================
49 To update the U-Boot configuration, please refer to doc/README.kconfig
50
51
52MediaTek image header
53=====================
54Currently there are two image headers used for MediaTek chips:
55
56 - BootROM image header. This header is used by the first stage bootloader. It records
57 the desired compatible boot device, integrity information and its load address.
58
59 The on-chip BootROM will firstly verify integrity and compatibility of the bootloader.
60
61 If verification passed, the BootROM will then load the bootloader into on-chip SRAM,
62 and pass control to it.
63
64 Note that this header is actually a combination of three independent headers:
65 Device header, BRLYT header and GFH header.
66
67 Used by U-Boot SPL of MT7629 and preloader of MT7623.
68
69
70 - MediaTek legacy image header. This header was originally used by the legacy image. It
71 basically records the load address, image size and image name.
72
73 After all low level initializations passed, the preloader will locate the LK image and
74 load it into DRAM, and pass control to it.
75
76 Now this header is used by U-Boot of MT7623.
77
78
79To generate these two headers with mkimage:
80
81 # mkimage -T mtk_image -a <load_addr> -n <option_string> -d <input_file> <image_file>
82
83 - mtk_image means using MediaTek's header generation method.
84
85
86 - load_addr is the load address of this image.
87 For first stage bootloader like U-Boot SPL or preloader, it usually points to the
88 on-chip SRAM.
89
90 For second stage bootloader like U-Boot, it usually points to the DRAM.
91
92
93 - option_string contains options to generate the header.
94
95 The option string is using the follow format:
96 key1=value1;key2=value2;...
97
98 The following key names are valid:
99 lk: If lk=1, LK image header is used. Otherwise BootROM image header is used.
100
101 lkname: The name of the LK image header. The maximum length is 32.
102 The default value is "U-Boot".
103
104 media: Desired boot device. The valid values are:
105 nand : Parallel NAND
106 snand: Serial NAND
107 nor : Serial NOR
108 emmc : eMMC
109 sdmmc: SD
110
111 nandinfo: Desired NAND device type, a combination of page size, oob size and
112 optional device capacity. Valid types are:
113 2k+64 : for Serial NAND, 2KiB page size + 64B oob size
114 2k+120 : for Serial NAND, 2KiB page size + 120B oob size
115 2k+128 : for Serial NAND, 2KiB page size + 128B oob size
116 4k+256 : for Serial NAND, 4KiB page size + 256B oob size
117 1g:2k+64 : for Parallel NAND, 2KiB page size + 64B oob size, total 1Gbit size
118 2g:2k+64 : for Parallel NAND, 2KiB page size + 64B oob size, total 2Gbit size
119 4g:2k+64 : for Parallel NAND, 2KiB page size + 64B oob size, total 4Gbit size
120 2g:2k+128: for Parallel NAND, 2KiB page size + 128B oob size, total 2Gbit size
121 4g:2k+128: for Parallel NAND, 2KiB page size + 128B oob size, total 4Gbit size
122
123
124MT7629 partitions on Serial NOR
125===============================
126
127 Start End Size Description
128 00000000 - 0000ffff: 64KiB U-Boot SPL
129 00010000 - 0005ffff: 320KiB U-Boot
130 00060000 - 0006ffff: 64KiB U-Boot env / MediaTek NVRAM
131 00070000 - 000affff: 256KiB RF calibration data
132 000b0000 - xxxxxxxx: all left Firmware image
133
134
135BPi-R2 (MT7623N) partitions on SD
136=================================
137 Please note that the last two partitions can vary from different Linux distributions
138 depending on the MBR partition table.
139
140 Start End Size Description
141 00000000 - 000001ff: 512B Device header (with MBR partition table)
142 00000200 - 000007ff: 1536B BRLYT header
143 00000800 - 0004ffff: 318KiB Preloader (with GFH header)
144 00050000 - 000fffff: 704KiB U-Boot
145 00100000 - 063fffff: 99MiB Reserved
146 06400000 - 163fffff: 256MiB Partition 1 (FAT32)
147 16400000 - xxxxxxxx: all left Partition 2 (ext4)
148
149
150Upgrading notice on Serial NOR
151==============================
152Example: MT7629
153
154 The command sf is used to operate the Serial NOR device:
155
156 - To probe current NOR flash:
157
158 # sf probe
159
160 - To erase a region:
161
162 # sf erase <offset> <len>
163
164 - To write data to an offset:
165
166 # sf write <data_addr> <offset> <len>
167
168 - To boot kernel:
169
170 # bootm 0x300b0000
171
172 The memory address range 0x30000000 - 0x3fffffff is mapped to the NOR flash.
173 The DRAM starts at 0x40000000.
174
175 Please note that the output binary u-boot-mtk.bin is a combination of SPL and U-Boot,
176 and it should be write to beginning of the flash.
177
178 Otherwise you should use standalone files:
179
180 spl/u-boot-spl-mtk.bin for SPL,
181 u-boot.img for U-Boot.
182
183
184Upgrading notice on SD / eMMC
185=============================
186Example: MT7623
187
188 Normally only Preloader and U-Boot can be upgraded within U-Boot, and other partitions
189 should be written in PC.
190
191 - To probe current SD card / eMMC:
192
193 # mmc dev 0 for eMMC
194 # mmc dev 1 for SD
195
196 - To erase a region:
197
198 # mmc erase <blk_offset> <blk_num>
199
200 - To write data to a block offset:
201
202 # mmc write <data_addr> <blk_offset> <blk_num>
203
204 - To load kernel image from partition 1:
205
206 # fatload mmc 0:1 <load_address> <path_to_kernel_uImage> for eMMC
207 # fatload mmc 1:1 <load_address> <path_to_kernel_uImage> for SD
208
209 - To boot kernel:
210
211 # bootm <load_address>
212
213 The DRAM starts at 0x80000000.
214
215 Please note that we use block offset and block count for SD card, not the byte offset.
216 The block size is always 512 bytes for SD card.
217
218
219Documentation
220=============
221 http://wiki.banana-pi.org/Banana_Pi_BPI-R2
222
README.memory-test
1The most frequent cause of problems when porting U-Boot to new
2hardware, or when using a sloppy port on some board, is memory errors.
3In most cases these are not caused by failing hardware, but by
4incorrect initialization of the memory controller. So it appears to
5be a good idea to always test if the memory is working correctly,
6before looking for any other potential causes of any problems.
7
8U-Boot implements 3 different approaches to perform memory tests:
9
101. The get_ram_size() function (see "common/memsize.c").
11
12 This function is supposed to be used in each and every U-Boot port
13 determine the presence and actual size of each of the potential
14 memory banks on this piece of hardware. The code is supposed to be
15 very fast, so running it for each reboot does not hurt. It is a
16 little known and generally underrated fact that this code will also
17 catch 99% of hardware related (i. e. reliably reproducible) memory
18 errors. It is strongly recommended to always use this function, in
19 each and every port of U-Boot.
20
212. The "mtest" command.
22
23 This is probably the best known memory test utility in U-Boot.
24 Unfortunately, it is also the most problematic, and the most
25 useless one.
26
27 There are a number of serious problems with this command:
28
29 - It is terribly slow. Running "mtest" on the whole system RAM
30 takes a _long_ time before there is any significance in the fact
31 that no errors have been found so far.
32
33 - It is difficult to configure, and to use. And any errors here
34 will reliably crash or hang your system. "mtest" is dumb and has
35 no knowledge about memory ranges that may be in use for other
36 purposes, like exception code, U-Boot code and data, stack,
37 malloc arena, video buffer, log buffer, etc. If you let it, it
38 will happily "test" all such areas, which of course will cause
39 some problems.
40
41 - It is not easy to configure and use, and a large number of
42 systems are seriously misconfigured. The original idea was to
43 test basically the whole system RAM, with only exempting the
44 areas used by U-Boot itself - on most systems these are the areas
45 used for the exception vectors (usually at the very lower end of
46 system memory) and for U-Boot (code, data, etc. - see above;
47 these are usually at the very upper end of system memory). But
48 experience has shown that a very large number of ports use
49 pretty much bogus settings of CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_START and
50 CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_END; this results in useless tests (because
51 the ranges is too small and/or badly located) or in critical
52 failures (system crashes).
53
54 Because of these issues, the "mtest" command is considered depre-
55 cated. It should not be enabled in most normal ports of U-Boot,
56 especially not in production. If you really need a memory test,
57 then see 1. and 3. above resp. below.
58
593. The most thorough memory test facility is available as part of the
60 POST (Power-On Self Test) sub-system, see "post/drivers/memory.c".
61
62 If you really need to perform memory tests (for example, because
63 it is mandatory part of your requirement specification), then
64 enable this test which is generic and should work on all archi-
65 tectures.
66
67WARNING:
68
69It should pointed out that _all_ these memory tests have one
70fundamental, unfixable design flaw: they are based on the assumption
71that memory errors can be found by writing to and reading from memory.
72Unfortunately, this is only true for the relatively harmless, usually
73static errors like shorts between data or address lines, unconnected
74pins, etc. All the really nasty errors which will first turn your
75hair gray, only to make you tear it out later, are dynamical errors,
76which usually happen not with simple read or write cycles on the bus,
77but when performing back-to-back data transfers in burst mode. Such
78accesses usually happen only for certain DMA operations, or for heavy
79cache use (instruction fetching, cache flushing). So far I am not
80aware of any freely available code that implements a generic, and
81efficient, memory test like that. The best known test case to stress
82a system like that is to boot Linux with root file system mounted over
83NFS, and then build some larger software package natively (say,
84compile a Linux kernel on the system) - this will cause enough context
85switches, network traffic (and thus DMA transfers from the network
86controller), varying RAM use, etc. to trigger any weak spots in this
87area.
88
89Note: An attempt was made once to implement such a test to catch
90memory problems on a specific board. The code is pretty much board
91specific (for example, it includes setting specific GPIO signals to
92provide triggers for an attached logic analyzer), but you can get an
93idea how it works: see "examples/standalone/test_burst*".
94
95Note 2: Ironically enough, the "test_burst" did not catch any RAM
96errors, not a single one ever. The problems this code was supposed
97to catch did not happen when accessing the RAM, but when reading from
98NOR flash.
99
README.menu
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2/*
3 * Copyright 2010-2011 Calxeda, Inc.
4 */
5
6U-Boot provides a set of interfaces for creating and using simple, text
7based menus. Menus are displayed as lists of labeled entries on the
8console, and an entry can be selected by entering its label.
9
10To use the menu code, enable CONFIG_MENU, and include "menu.h" where
11the interfaces should be available.
12
13Menus are composed of items. Each item has a key used to identify it in
14the menu, and an opaque pointer to data controlled by the consumer.
15
16If you want to show a menu, instead starting the shell, define
17CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_MENU_SHOW. You have to code the int menu_show(int bootdelay)
18function, which handle your menu. This function returns the remaining
19bootdelay.
20
21Interfaces
22----------
23#include "menu.h"
24
25/*
26 * Consumers of the menu interfaces will use a struct menu * as the
27 * handle for a menu. struct menu is only fully defined in menu.c,
28 * preventing consumers of the menu interfaces from accessing its
29 * contents directly.
30 */
31struct menu;
32
33/*
34 * NOTE: See comments in common/menu.c for more detailed documentation on
35 * these interfaces.
36 */
37
38/*
39 * menu_create() - Creates a menu handle with default settings
40 */
41struct menu *menu_create(char *title, int timeout, int prompt,
42 void (*item_data_print)(void *),
43 char *(*item_choice)(void *),
44 void *item_choice_data);
45
46/*
47 * menu_item_add() - Adds or replaces a menu item
48 */
49int menu_item_add(struct menu *m, char *item_key, void *item_data);
50
51/*
52 * menu_default_set() - Sets the default choice for the menu
53 */
54int menu_default_set(struct menu *m, char *item_key);
55
56/*
57 * menu_default_choice() - Set *choice to point to the default item's data
58 */
59int menu_default_choice(struct menu *m, void **choice);
60
61/*
62 * menu_get_choice() - Returns the user's selected menu entry, or the
63 * default if the menu is set to not prompt or the timeout expires.
64 */
65int menu_get_choice(struct menu *m, void **choice);
66
67/*
68 * menu_destroy() - frees the memory used by a menu and its items.
69 */
70int menu_destroy(struct menu *m);
71
72/*
73 * menu_display_statusline(struct menu *m);
74 * shows a statusline for every menu_display call.
75 */
76void menu_display_statusline(struct menu *m);
77
78Example Code
79------------
80This example creates a menu that always prompts, and allows the user
81to pick from a list of tools. The item key and data are the same.
82
83#include "menu.h"
84
85char *tools[] = {
86 "Hammer",
87 "Screwdriver",
88 "Nail gun",
89 NULL
90};
91
92char *pick_a_tool(void)
93{
94 struct menu *m;
95 int i;
96 char *tool = NULL;
97
98 m = menu_create("Tools", 0, 1, NULL);
99
100 for(i = 0; tools[i]; i++) {
101 if (menu_item_add(m, tools[i], tools[i]) != 1) {
102 printf("failed to add item!");
103 menu_destroy(m);
104 return NULL;
105 }
106 }
107
108 if (menu_get_choice(m, (void **)&tool) != 1)
109 printf("Problem picking tool!\n");
110
111 menu_destroy(m);
112
113 return tool;
114}
115
116void caller(void)
117{
118 char *tool = pick_a_tool();
119
120 if (tool) {
121 printf("picked a tool: %s\n", tool);
122 use_tool(tool);
123 }
124}
125
README.mpc74xx
1This file contains status information for the port of U-Boot to the
2Motorola mpc74xx series of CPUs.
3
4Author: Josh Huber <huber@mclx.com>
5 Mission Critical Linux, Inc.
6
7Currently the support for these CPUs is pretty minimal, but enough to
8get things going. (much like the support for the Galileo Eval Board)
9
10There is a framework in place to enable the L2 cache, and to program
11the BATs. Currently, there are still problems with the code which
12sets up the L2 cache, so it's not enabled. (IMHO, it shouldn't be
13anyway). Additionally, there is support for enabling the MMU, which
14we also don't do. The BATs are programmed just for the benefit of
15jumping into Linux in a sane configuration.
16
17Most of the code was based on other cpus supported by U-Boot.
18
19If you find any errors in the CPU setup code, please send us a note.
20
21Thanks,
22Josh
23
README.mpc83xx.ddrecc
1Overview
2========
3
4The overall usage pattern for ECC diagnostic commands is the following:
5
6 * (injecting errors is initially disabled)
7
8 * define inject mask (which tells the DDR controller what type of errors
9 we'll be injecting: single/multiple bit etc.)
10
11 * enable injecting errors - from now on the controller injects errors as
12 indicated in the inject mask
13
14IMPORTANT NOTICE: enabling injecting multiple-bit errors is potentially
15dangerous as such errors are NOT corrected by the controller. Therefore caution
16should be taken when enabling the injection of multiple-bit errors: it is only
17safe when used on a carefully selected memory area and used under control of
18the 'ecc testdw' 'ecc testword' command (see example 'Injecting Multiple-Bit
19Errors' below). In particular, when you simply set the multiple-bit errors in
20inject mask and enable injection, U-Boot is very likely to hang quickly as the
21errors will be injected when it accesses its code, data etc.
22
23
24Use cases for DDR 'ecc' command:
25================================
26
27Before executing particular tests reset target board or clear status registers:
28
29=> ecc captureclear
30=> ecc errdetectclr all
31=> ecc sbecnt 0
32
33
34Injecting Single-Bit Errors
35---------------------------
36
371. Set 1 bit in Data Path Error Inject Mask
38
39=> ecc injectdatahi 1
40
412. Run test over some memory region
42
43=> ecc testdw 200000 10
44
453. Check ECC status
46
47=> ecc status
48...
49Memory Data Path Error Injection Mask High/Low: 00000001 00000000
50...
51Memory Single-Bit Error Management (0..255):
52 Single-Bit Error Threshold: 255
53 Single Bit Error Counter: 16
54...
55Memory Error Detect:
56 Multiple Memory Errors: 0
57 Multiple-Bit Error: 0
58 Single-Bit Error: 0
59...
60
6116 errors were generated, Single-Bit Error flag was not set as Single Bit Error
62Counter did not reach Single-Bit Error Threshold.
63
644. Make sure used memory region got re-initialized with 0x0123456789abcdef
65
66=> md 200000
6700200000: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
6800200010: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
6900200020: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
7000200030: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
7100200040: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
7200200050: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
7300200060: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
7400200070: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
7500200080: deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef ................
7600200090: deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef ................
77
78Injecting Multiple-Bit Errors
79-----------------------------
80
811. Set more than 1 bit in Data Path Error Inject Mask
82
83=> ecc injectdatahi 1
84=> ecc injectdatalo 1
85
862. Run test over some memory region
87
88=> ecc testword 200000 1
89
903. Check ECC status
91
92=> ecc status
93...
94Memory Data Path Error Injection Mask High/Low: 00000001 00000001
95...
96Memory Error Detect:
97 Multiple Memory Errors: 0
98 Multiple-Bit Error: 1
99 Single-Bit Error: 0
100...
101
102The Multiple Memory Errors flags not set and Multiple-Bit Error flags are set.
103
1044. Make sure used memory region got re-initialized with 0x0123456789abcdef
105
106=> md 200000
10700200000: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
10800200010: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
10900200020: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
11000200030: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
11100200040: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
11200200050: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
11300200060: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
11400200070: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg....
11500200080: deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef ................
11600200090: deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef ................
117
118
119Test Single-Bit Error Counter and Threshold
120-------------------------------------------
121
1221. Set 1 bit in Data Path Error Inject Mask
123
124=> ecc injectdatahi 1
125
1262. Enable error injection
127
128=> ecc inject en
129
1303. Let u-boot run for a with Single-Bit error injection enabled
131
1324. Disable error injection
133
134=> ecc inject dis
135
1364. Check status
137
138=> ecc status
139
140...
141Memory Single-Bit Error Management (0..255):
142 Single-Bit Error Threshold: 255
143 Single Bit Error Counter: 199
144
145Memory Error Detect:
146 Multiple Memory Errors: 1
147 Multiple-Bit Error: 0
148 Single-Bit Error: 1
149...
150
151Observe that Single-Bit Error is 'on' which means that Single-Bit Error Counter
152reached Single-Bit Error Threshold. Multiple Memory Errors bit is also 'on', that
153is Counter reached Threshold more than one time (it wraps back after reaching
154Threshold).
155
README.mpc83xxads
1Freescale MPC83xx ADS Boards
2-----------------------------------------
3
40. Toolchain / Building
5
6 $ PATH=$PATH:/usr/powerpc/bin
7 $ CROSS_COMPILE=powerpc-linux-
8 $ export PATH CROSS_COMPILE
9
10 $ powerpc-linux-gcc -v
11 Reading specs from /usr/powerpc/lib/gcc/powerpc-linux/3.4.3/specs
12 Configured with: ../configure --prefix=/usr/powerpc
13 --exec-prefix=/usr/powerpc --target=powerpc-linux --enable-shared
14 --disable-nls --disable-multilib --enable-languages=c,c++,ada,f77,objc
15 Thread model: posix
16 gcc version 3.4.3 (Debian)
17
18 $ powerpc-linux-as -v
19 GNU assembler version 2.15 (powerpc-linux) using BFD version 2.15
20
21
22 $ make MPC8349ADS_config
23 Configuring for MPC8349ADS board...
24
25 $ make
26
27
281. Board Switches and Jumpers
29
30
312. Memory Map
32
332.1. The memory map should look pretty much like this:
34
35 0x0000_0000 0x7fff_ffff DDR 2G
36 0x8000_0000 0x9fff_ffff PCI MEM 512M
37 0xc000_0000 0xdfff_ffff Rapid IO 512M
38 0xe000_0000 0xe00f_ffff CCSR 1M
39 0xe200_0000 0xe2ff_ffff PCI IO 16M
40 0xf000_0000 0xf7ff_ffff SDRAM 128M
41 0xf800_0000 0xf80f_ffff BCSR 1M
42 0xfe00_0000 0xffff_ffff FLASH (boot bank) 16M
43
44
453. Definitions
46
473.1 Explanation of NEW definitions in:
48
49 include/configs/MPC8349ADS.h
50
51 CONFIG_MPC83xx MPC83xx family
52 CONFIG_MPC8349 MPC8349 specific
53 CONFIG_TSEC_ENET Use on-chip 10/100/1000 ethernet
54
55
564. Compilation
57
58 Assuming you're using BASH shell:
59
60 export CROSS_COMPILE=your-cross-compile-prefix
61 cd u-boot
62 make distclean
63 make MPC8349ADS_config
64 make
65
665. Downloading and Flashing Images
67
685.0 Download over serial line using Kermit:
69
70 loadb
71 [Drop to kermit:
72 ^\c
73 send <u-boot-bin-image>
74 c
75 ]
76
77
78 Or via tftp:
79
80 tftp 10000 u-boot.bin
81
825.1 Reflash U-Boot Image using U-Boot
83
84 tftp 10000 u-boot.bin
85 protect off fe000000 fe09ffff
86 erase fe000000 fe09ffff
87
88 cp.b 10000 fe000000 xxxx
89or
90 cp.b 10000 fe000000 a0000
91
92You might have to supply the correct byte count for 'xxxx' from
93the TFTP. Maybe a0000 will work too, that corresponds to the
94erased sectors.
95
96
976. Notes
98
README.mpc85xx
1External Debug Support
2----------------------
3
4Freescale's e500v1 and e500v2 cores (used in mpc85xx chips) have some
5restrictions on external debugging (JTAG). In particular, for the debugger to
6be able to receive control after a single step or breakpoint:
7 - MSR[DE] must be set
8 - A valid opcode must be fetchable, through the MMU, from the debug
9 exception vector (IVPR + IVOR15).
10
11To maximize the time during which this requirement is met, U-Boot sets MSR[DE]
12immediately on entry and keeps it set. It also uses a temporary TLB to keep a
13mapping to a valid opcode at the debug exception vector, even if we normally
14don't support exception vectors being used that early, and that's not the area
15where U-Boot currently executes from.
16
17Note that there may still be some small windows where debugging will not work,
18such as in between updating IVPR and IVOR15.
19
20Config Switches:
21----------------
22
23Please refer README section "MPC85xx External Debug Support"
24
25Major Config Switches during various boot Modes
26----------------------------------------------
27
28NOR boot
29 !defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT) && !defined(CONFIG_SPL)
30NOR boot Secure
31 !defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT) && defined(CONFIG_NXP_ESBC)
32RAMBOOT(SD, SPI & NAND boot)
33 defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT)
34RAMBOOT Secure (SD, SPI & NAND)
35 defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT) && defined(CONFIG_NXP_ESBC)
36NAND SPL BOOT
37 defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT) && defined(CONFIG_NAND_SPL)
38
39
40TLB Entries during u-boot execution
41-----------------------------------
42
43Note: Sequence number is in order of execution
44
45A) defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT) i.e. SD, SPI, NAND RAMBOOT & NAND_SPL boot
46
47 1) TLB entry to overcome e500 v1/v2 debug restriction
48 Location : Label "_start_e500"
49 TLB Entry : CONFIG_SYS_PPC_E500_DEBUG_TLB
50 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE --> CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE
51 Properties : 256K, AS0, I, IPROT
52
53 2) TLB entry for working in AS1
54 Location : Label "create_init_ram_area"
55 TLB Entry : 15
56 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE --> CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE
57 Properties : 1M, AS1, I, G, IPROT
58
59 3) TLB entry for the stack during AS1
60 Location : Lable "create_init_ram_area"
61 TLB Entry : 14
62 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR --> CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR
63 Properties : 16K, AS1, IPROT
64
65 4) TLB entry for CCSRBAR during AS1 execution
66 Location : cpu_init_early_f
67 TLB Entry : 13
68 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR --> CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR
69 Properties : 1M, AS1, I, G
70
71 5) Invalidate unproctected TLB Entries
72 Location : cpu_init_early_f
73 Invalidated: 13
74
75 6) Create TLB entries as per boards/freescale/<board>/tlb.c
76 Location : cpu_init_early_f --> init_tlbs()
77 Properties : ..., AS0, ...
78 Please note It can overwrites previous TLB Entries.
79
80 7) Disable TLB Entries of AS1
81 Location : cpu_init_f --> disable_tlb()
82 Disable : 15, 14
83
84 8) Update Flash's TLB entry
85 Location : Board_init_r
86 TLB entry : Search from TLB entries
87 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE --> CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE_PHYS
88 Properties : Board specific size, AS0, I, G, IPROT
89
90
91B) !defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT) i.e. NOR boot
92
93 1) TLB entry to overcome e500 v1/v2 debug restriction
94 Location : Label "_start_e500"
95 TLB Entry : CONFIG_SYS_PPC_E500_DEBUG_TLB
96#if defined(CONFIG_NXP_ESBC)
97 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE --> CONFIG_SYS_PBI_FLASH_WINDOW
98 Properties : 1M, AS1, I, G, IPROT
99#else
100 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE & 0xffc00000 --> 0xffc00000
101 Properties : 4M, AS0, I, G, IPROT
102#endif
103
104 2) TLB entry for working in AS1
105 Location : Label "create_init_ram_area"
106 TLB Entry : 15
107#if defined(CONFIG_NXP_ESBC)
108 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE --> CONFIG_SYS_PBI_FLASH_WINDOW
109 Properties : 1M, AS1, I, G, IPROT
110#else
111 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE & 0xffc00000 --> 0xffc00000
112 Properties : 4M, AS1, I, G, IPROT
113#endif
114
115 3) TLB entry for the stack during AS1
116 Location : Lable "create_init_ram_area"
117 TLB Entry : 14
118 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR --> CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR
119 Properties : 16K, AS1, IPROT
120
121 4) TLB entry for CCSRBAR during AS1 execution
122 Location : cpu_init_early_f
123 TLB Entry : 13
124 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR --> CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR
125 Properties : 1M, AS1, I, G
126
127 5) TLB entry for Errata workaround CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_IFC_A003399
128 Location : cpu_init_early_f
129 TLB Entry : 9
130 EPN -->RPN : SRAM_BASE_ADDR --> SRAM_BASE_ADDR
131 Properties : 1M, AS1, I
132
133 6) CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_IFC_A003399 Adjust flash's phys addr
134 Location : cpu_init_early_f --> setup_ifc
135 TLB Entry : Get Flash TLB
136 EPN -->RPN : Adjusted flash_phys --> Adjusted flash_phys
137 Properties : 4M, AS1, I, G, IPROT
138
139 7) CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_IFC_A003399: E500 v1,v2 debug restriction
140 Location : cpu_init_early_f --> setup_ifc
141 TLB Entry : CONFIG_SYS_PPC_E500_DEBUG_TLB
142 EPN -->RPN : Adjusted flash_phys --> Adjusted flash_phys
143 Properties : 4M, AS0, I, G, IPROT
144
145 8) Invalidate unproctected TLB Entries
146 Location : cpu_init_early_f
147 Invalidated: 13, 9
148
149 9) Create TLB entries as per boards/freescale/<board>/tlb.c
150 Location : cpu_init_early_f --> init_tlbs()
151 Properties : ..., AS0, ...
152 Note: It can overwrites previous TLB Entries
153
154 10) Disable TLB Entries of AS1
155 Location : cpu_init_f --> disable_tlb()
156 Disable : 15, 14
157
158 11) Create DDR's TLB entriy
159 Location : Board_init_f -> dram_init
160 TLB entry : Search free TLB entry
161
162 12) Update Flash's TLB entry
163 Location : Board_init_r
164 TLB entry : Search from TLB entries
165 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE --> CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE_PHYS
166 Properties : Board specific size, AS0, I, G, IPROT
167
README.mpc85xx-sd-spi-boot
README.mpc85xx-spin-table
1Spin table in cache
2=====================================
3As specified by ePAPR v1.1, the spin table needs to be in cached memory. After
4DDR is initialized and U-Boot relocates itself into DDR, the spin table is
5accessible for core 0. It is part of release.S, within 4KB range after
6__secondary_start_page. For other cores to use the spin table, the booting
7process is described below:
8
9Core 0 sets up the reset page on the top 4K of memory (or 4GB if total memory
10is more than 4GB), and creates a TLB to map it to 0xffff_f000, regardless of
11the physical address of this page, with WIMGE=0b01010. Core 0 also enables boot
12page translation for secondary cores to use this page of memory. Then 4KB
13memory is copied from __secondary_start_page to the boot page, after flusing
14cache because this page is mapped as normal DDR. Before copying the reset page,
15core 0 puts the physical address of the spin table (which is in release.S and
16relocated to the top of mapped memory) into a variable __spin_table_addr so
17that secondary cores can see it.
18
19When secondary cores boot up from 0xffff_f000 page, they only have one default
20TLB. While booting, they set up another TLB in AS=1 space and jump into
21the new space. The new TLB covers the physical address of the spin table page,
22with WIMGE =0b00100. Now secondary cores can keep polling the spin table
23without stress DDR bus because both the code and the spin table is in cache.
24
25For the above to work, DDR has to set the 'M' bit of WIMGE, in order to keep
26cache coherence.
27
README.mpc85xxcds
1Motorola MPC85xxCDS boards
2--------------------------
3
4The CDS family of boards consists of a PCI backplane called the
5"Arcadia", a PCI-form-factor carrier card that plugs into a PCI slot,
6and a CPU daughter card that bolts onto the daughter card.
7
8Much of the content of the README.mpc85xxads for the 85xx ADS boards
9applies to the 85xx CDS boards as well. In particular the toolchain,
10the switch nomenclature, and the basis for the memory map. There are
11some differences, though.
12
13
14Building U-Boot
15---------------
16
17The Binutils in current ELDK toolchain will not support MPC85xx
18chip. You need to use binutils-2.14.tar.bz2 (or newer) from
19 http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/binutils.
20
21The 85xx CDS code base is known to compile using:
22 gcc (GCC) 3.2.2 20030217 (Yellow Dog Linux 3.0 3.2.2-2a)
23
24
25Memory Map
26----------
27
28The memory map for U-Boot and linux has been extended w.r.t. the ADS
29platform to allow for utilization of all 85xx CDS devices. The memory
30map is setup for linux to operate properly. The linux source when
31configured for MPC85xx CDS has been updated to reflect the new memory
32map.
33
34The mapping is:
35
36 0x0000_0000 0x7fff_ffff DDR 2G
37 0x8000_0000 0x9fff_ffff PCI1 MEM 512M
38 0xa000_0000 0xbfff_ffff PCI2 MEM 512M
39 0xe000_0000 0xe00f_ffff CCSR 1M
40 0xe200_0000 0xe2ff_ffff PCI1 IO 16M
41 0xe300_0000 0xe3ff_ffff PCI2 IO 16M
42 0xf000_0000 0xf7ff_ffff SDRAM 128M
43 0xf800_0000 0xf80f_ffff NVRAM/CADMUS (*) 1M
44 0xff00_0000 0xff7f_ffff FLASH (2nd bank) 8M
45 0xff80_0000 0xffff_ffff FLASH (boot bank) 8M
46
47 (*) The system control registers (CADMUS) start at offset 0xfdb0_4000
48 within the NVRAM/CADMUS region of memory.
49
50
51Using Flash
52-----------
53
54The CDS board has two flash banks, each 8MB in size (2^23 = 0x00800000).
55There is a switch which allows the boot-bank to be selected. The switch
56settings for updating flash are given below.
57
58The U-Boot commands for copying the boot-bank into the secondary bank are
59as follows:
60
61 erase ff780000 ff7fffff
62 cp.b fff80000 ff780000 80000
63
64
65U-Boot/kermit commands for downloading an image, then copying
66it into the secondary bank:
67
68 loadb
69 [Drop to kermit:
70 ^\c
71 send <u-boot-bin-image>
72 c
73 ]
74
75 erase ff780000 ff7fffff
76 cp.b $loadaddr ff780000 80000
77
78
79U-Boot commands for downloading an image via tftp and flashing
80it into the second bank:
81
82 tftp 10000 <u-boot.bin.image>
83 erase ff780000 ff7fffff
84 cp.b 10000 ff780000 80000
85
86
87After copying the image into the second bank of flash, be sure to toggle
88SW2[2] on the carrier card before resetting the board in order to set the
89secondary bank as the boot-bank.
90
91
92Carrier Board Switches
93----------------------
94
95As a reminder, you should read the README.mpc85xxads too.
96
97Most switches on the carrier board should not be changed. The only
98user-settable switches on the carrier board are used to configure
99the flash banks and determining the PCI slot.
100
101The first two bits of SW2 control how flash is used on the board:
102
103 12345678
104 --------
105 SW2=00XXXXXX FLASH: Boot bank 1, bank 2 available.
106 01XXXXXX FLASH: Boot bank 2, bank 1 available (swapped).
107 10XXXXXX FLASH: Boot promjet, bank 1 available
108 11XXXXXX FLASH: Boot promjet, bank 2 available
109
110The boot bank is always mapped to FF80_0000 and listed first by
111the "flinfo" command. The secondary bank is always FF00_0000.
112
113When using PCI, linux needs to know to which slot the CDS carrier is
114connected.. By convention, the user-specific bits of SW2 are used to
115convey this information:
116
117 12345678
118 --------
119 SW2=xxxxxx00 PCI SLOT INFORM: The CDS carrier is in slot0 of the Arcadia
120 xxxxxx01 PCI SLOT INFORM: The CDS carrier is in slot1 of the Arcadia
121 xxxxxx10 PCI SLOT INFORM: The CDS carrier is in slot2 of the Arcadia
122 xxxxxx11 PCI SLOT INFORM: The CDS carrier is in slot3 of the Arcadia
123
124These are cleverly, er, clearly silkscreened as Slot 1 through 4,
125respectively, on the Arcadia near the support posts.
126
127
128The default setting of all switches on the carrier board is:
129
130 12345678
131 --------
132 SW1=01101100
133 SW2=0x1111yy x=Flash bank, yy=PCI slot
134 SW3=11101111
135 SW4=10001000
136
137
1388555/41 CPU Card Switches
139-------------------------
140
141Most switches on the CPU Card should not be changed. However, the
142frequency can be changed by setting SW3:
143
144 12345678
145 --------
146 SW3=XX00XXXX == CORE:CCB 2:1
147 XX01XXXX == CORE:CCB 5:2
148 XX10XXXX == CORE:CCB 3:1
149 XX11XXXX == CORE:CCB 7:2
150 XXXX1000 == CCB:SYSCLK 8:1
151 XXXX1010 == CCB:SYSCLK 10:1
152
153A safe default setting for all switches on the CPU board is:
154
155 12345678
156 --------
157 SW1=10001111
158 SW2=01000111
159 SW3=00001000
160 SW4=11111110
161
162
1638548 CPU Card Switches
164----------------------
165And, just to be confusing, in this set of switches:
166
167 ON = 1
168 OFF = 0
169
170Default
171 SW1=11111101
172 SW2=10011111
173 SW3=11001000 (8X) (2:1)
174 SW4=11110011
175
176 SW3=X000XXXX == CORE:CCB 4:1
177 X001XXXX == CORE:CCB 9:2
178 X010XXXX == CORE:CCB 1:1
179 X011XXXX == CORE:CCB 3:2
180 X100XXXX == CORE:CCB 2:1
181 X101XXXX == CORE:CCB 5:2
182 X110XXXX == CORE:CCB 3:1
183 X111XXXX == CORE:CCB 7:2
184 XXXX0000 == CCB:SYSCLK 16:1
185 XXXX0001 == RESERVED
186 XXXX0010 == CCB:SYSCLK 2:1
187 XXXX0011 == CCB:SYSCLK 3:1
188 XXXX0100 == CCB:SYSCLK 4:1
189 XXXX0101 == CCB:SYSCLK 5:1
190 XXXX0110 == CCB:SYSCLK 6:1
191 XXXX0111 == RESERVED
192 XXXX1000 == CCB:SYSCLK 8:1
193 XXXX1001 == CCB:SYSCLK 9:1
194 XXXX1010 == CCB:SYSCLK 10:1
195 XXXX1011 == RESERVED
196 XXXX1100 == CCB:SYSCLK 12:1
197 XXXX1101 == CCB:SYSCLK 20:1
198 XXXX1110 == RESERVED
199 XXXX1111 == RESERVED
200
201
202eDINK Info
203----------
204
205One bank of flash may contain an eDINK image.
206
207Memory Map:
208
209 CCSRBAR @ 0xe0000000
210 Flash Bank 1 @ 0xfe000000
211 Flash Bank 2 @ 0xff000000
212 Ram @ 0
213
214Commands for downloading a U-Boot image to memory from edink:
215
216 env -c
217 time -s 4/8/2004 4:30p
218 dl -k -b -o 100000
219 [Drop to kermit:
220 ^\c
221 transmit /binary <u-boot-bin-image>
222 c
223 ]
224
225 fu -l 100000 fe780000 80000
226
README.multi-dtb-fit
1MULTI DTB FIT and SPL_MULTI_DTB_FIT
2
3The purpose of this feature is to enable U-Boot or the SPL to select its DTB
4from a FIT appended at the end of the binary.
5It comes in two flavors: U-Boot (CONFIG_MULTI_DTB_FIT) and SPL
6(CONFIG_SPL_MULTI_DTB_FIT).
7
8U-Boot flavor:
9Usually the DTB is selected by the SPL and passed down to U-Boot. But some
10platforms don't use the SPL. In this case MULTI_DTB_FIT can used to provide
11U-Boot with a choice of DTBs.
12The relevant DTBs are packed into a FIT (list provided by CONFIG__OF_LIST). The
13FIT is automatically generated at the end of the compilation and appended to
14u-boot.bin so that U-Boot can locate it and select the correct DTB from inside
15the FIT.
16The selection is done using board_fit_config_name_match() (same as what the SPL
17uses to select the DTB for U-Boot). The selection happens during fdtdec_setup()
18which is called during before relocation by board_init_f().
19
20SPL flavor:
21the SPL uses only a small subset of the DTB and it usually depends more
22on the SOC than on the board. So it's usually fine to include a DTB in the
23SPL that doesn't exactly match the board. There are howerver some cases
24where it's not possible. In the later case, in order to support multiple
25boards (or board revisions) with the same SPL binary, SPL_MULTI_DTB_FIT
26can be used.
27The relevant DTBs are packed into a FIT. This FIT is automatically generated
28at the end of the compilation, compressed and appended to u-boot-spl.bin, so
29that SPL can locate it and select the correct DTB from inside the FIT.
30CONFIG_SPL__OF_LIST is used to list the relevant DTBs.
31The compression stage is optional but reduces the impact on the size of the
32SPL. LZO and GZIP compressions are supported. By default, the area where the
33FIT is uncompressed is dynamicaly allocated but this behaviour can be changed
34for platforms that don't provide a HEAP big enough to contain the uncompressed
35FIT.
36The SPL uses board_fit_config_name_match() to find the correct DTB within the
37FIT (same as what the SPL uses to select the DTB for U-Boot).
38Uncompression and selection stages happen in fdtdec_setup() which is called
39during the early initialization stage of the SPL (spl_early_init() or
40spl_init())
41
42Impacts and performances (SPL flavor):
43The impact of this option is relatively small. Here are some numbers measured
44for a TI DRA72 platform:
45
46 +----------+------------+-----------+------------+
47 | size | size delta | SPL boot | boot time |
48 | (bytes) | (bytes) | time (s) | delta (s) |
49+---------------------------+----------+------------+-----------+------------+
50| 1 DTB | | | | |
51+---------------------------+----------+------------+-----------+------------+
52| reference | 125305 | 0 | 1.389 | 0 |
53| LZO (dynamic allocation) | 125391 | 86 | 1.381 | -0.008 |
54+---------------------------+----------+------------+-----------+------------+
55| 4 DTBs (DRA7, DRA71, | | | | |
56| DRA72, DRA72 revC) | | | | |
57+---------------------------+----------+------------+-----------+------------+
58| LZO (dynamic allocation) | 125991 | 686 | 1.39 | 0.001 |
59| LZO (user defined area) | 125927 | 622 | 1.403 | 0.014 |
60| GZIP (user defined area) | 133880 | 8575 | 1.421 | 0.032 |
61| No compression (in place) | 137472 | 12167 | 1.412 | 0.023 |
62+---------------------------+----------+------------+-----------+------------+
63
64Note: SPL boot time is the time elapsed between the 'reset' command is entered
65and the time when the first U-Boot (not SPL) version string is displayed.
66
README.mxc_ocotp
1Driver implementing the fuse API for Freescale's On-Chip OTP Controller (OCOTP)
2on MXC
3
4This IP can be found on the following SoCs:
5 - Vybrid VF610,
6 - i.MX6.
7
8Note that this IP is different from albeit similar to the IPs of the same name
9that can be found on the following SoCs:
10 - i.MX23,
11 - i.MX28,
12 - i.MX50.
13
14The section numbers in this file refer to the i.MX6 Reference Manual.
15
16A fuse word contains 32 fuse bit slots, as explained in 46.2.1.
17
18A bank contains 8 fuse word slots, as explained in 46.2.1 and shown by the
19memory map in 46.4.
20
21Some fuse bit or word slots may not have the corresponding fuses actually
22implemented in the fusebox.
23
24See the README files of the SoCs using this driver in order to know the
25conventions used by U-Boot to store some specific data in the fuses, e.g. MAC
26addresses.
27
28Fuse operations:
29
30 Read
31 Read operations are implemented as read accesses to the shadow registers,
32 using "Bankx Wordy" from the memory map in 46.4. This is explained in
33 detail by the first two paragraphs in 46.2.1.2.
34
35 Sense
36 Sense operations are implemented as the direct fusebox read explained by
37 the steps in 46.2.1.2.
38
39 Program
40 Program operations are implemented as explained by the steps in 46.2.1.3.
41 Following this operation, the shadow registers are not reloaded by the
42 hardware.
43
44 Override
45 Override operations are implemented as write accesses to the shadow
46 registers, as explained by the first paragraph in 46.2.1.3.
47
48Configuration:
49
50 CONFIG_MXC_OCOTP
51 Define this to enable the mxc_ocotp driver.
52
README.nand
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2NAND FLASH commands and notes
3
4See NOTE below!!!
5
6# (C) Copyright 2003
7# Dave Ellis, SIXNET, dge@sixnetio.com
8#
9
10Commands:
11
12 nand bad
13 Print a list of all of the bad blocks in the current device.
14
15 nand device
16 Print information about the current NAND device.
17
18 nand device num
19 Make device `num' the current device and print information about it.
20
21 nand erase off|partition size
22 nand erase clean [off|partition size]
23 Erase `size' bytes starting at offset `off'. Alternatively partition
24 name can be specified, in this case size will be eventually limited
25 to not exceed partition size (this behaviour applies also to read
26 and write commands). Only complete erase blocks can be erased.
27
28 If `erase' is specified without an offset or size, the entire flash
29 is erased. If `erase' is specified with partition but without an
30 size, the entire partition is erased.
31
32 If `clean' is specified, a JFFS2-style clean marker is written to
33 each block after it is erased.
34
35 This command will not erase blocks that are marked bad. There is
36 a debug option in cmd_nand.c to allow bad blocks to be erased.
37 Please read the warning there before using it, as blocks marked
38 bad by the manufacturer must _NEVER_ be erased.
39
40 nand info
41 Print information about all of the NAND devices found.
42
43 nand read addr ofs|partition size
44 Read `size' bytes from `ofs' in NAND flash to `addr'. Blocks that
45 are marked bad are skipped. If a page cannot be read because an
46 uncorrectable data error is found, the command stops with an error.
47
48 nand read.oob addr ofs|partition size
49 Read `size' bytes from the out-of-band data area corresponding to
50 `ofs' in NAND flash to `addr'. This is limited to the 16 bytes of
51 data for one 512-byte page or 2 256-byte pages. There is no check
52 for bad blocks or ECC errors.
53
54 nand write addr ofs|partition size
55 Write `size' bytes from `addr' to `ofs' in NAND flash. Blocks that
56 are marked bad are skipped. If a page cannot be read because an
57 uncorrectable data error is found, the command stops with an error.
58
59 As JFFS2 skips blocks similarly, this allows writing a JFFS2 image,
60 as long as the image is short enough to fit even after skipping the
61 bad blocks. Compact images, such as those produced by mkfs.jffs2
62 should work well, but loading an image copied from another flash is
63 going to be trouble if there are any bad blocks.
64
65 nand write.trimffs addr ofs|partition size
66 Enabled by the CONFIG_CMD_NAND_TRIMFFS macro. This command will write to
67 the NAND flash in a manner identical to the 'nand write' command
68 described above -- with the additional check that all pages at the end
69 of eraseblocks which contain only 0xff data will not be written to the
70 NAND flash. This behaviour is required when flashing UBI images
71 containing UBIFS volumes as per the UBI FAQ[1].
72
73 [1] http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/doc/ubi.html#L_flasher_algo
74
75 nand write.oob addr ofs|partition size
76 Write `size' bytes from `addr' to the out-of-band data area
77 corresponding to `ofs' in NAND flash. This is limited to the 16 bytes
78 of data for one 512-byte page or 2 256-byte pages. There is no check
79 for bad blocks.
80
81 nand read.raw addr ofs|partition [count]
82 nand write.raw addr ofs|partition [count]
83 Read or write one or more pages at "ofs" in NAND flash, from or to
84 "addr" in memory. This is a raw access, so ECC is avoided and the
85 OOB area is transferred as well. If count is absent, it is assumed
86 to be one page. As with .yaffs2 accesses, the data is formatted as
87 a packed sequence of "data, oob, data, oob, ..." -- no alignment of
88 individual pages is maintained.
89
90Configuration Options:
91
92 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS
93 NAND Offset from where SPL will read u-boot image. This is the starting
94 address of u-boot MTD partition in NAND.
95
96 CONFIG_CMD_NAND
97 Enables NAND support and commands.
98
99 CONFIG_CMD_NAND_TORTURE
100 Enables the torture command (see description of this command below).
101
102 CONFIG_SYS_MAX_NAND_DEVICE
103 The maximum number of NAND devices you want to support.
104
105 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_MAX_ECCPOS
106 If specified, overrides the maximum number of ECC bytes
107 supported. Useful for reducing image size, especially with SPL.
108 This must be at least 48 if nand_base.c is used.
109
110 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_MAX_OOBFREE
111 If specified, overrides the maximum number of free OOB regions
112 supported. Useful for reducing image size, especially with SPL.
113 This must be at least 2 if nand_base.c is used.
114
115 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_MAX_CHIPS
116 The maximum number of NAND chips per device to be supported.
117
118 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_SELF_INIT
119 Traditionally, glue code in drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand.c has driven
120 the initialization process -- it provides the mtd and nand
121 structs, calls a board init function for a specific device,
122 calls nand_scan(), and registers with mtd.
123
124 This arrangement does not provide drivers with the flexibility to
125 run code between nand_scan_ident() and nand_scan_tail(), or other
126 deviations from the "normal" flow.
127
128 If a board defines CONFIG_SYS_NAND_SELF_INIT, drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand.c
129 will make one call to board_nand_init(), with no arguments. That
130 function is responsible for calling a driver init function for
131 each NAND device on the board, that performs all initialization
132 tasks except setting mtd->name, and registering with the rest of
133 U-Boot. Those last tasks are accomplished by calling nand_register()
134 on the new mtd device.
135
136 Example of new init to be added to the end of an existing driver
137 init:
138
139 /* chip is struct nand_chip, and is now provided by the driver. */
140 mtd = nand_to_mtd(&chip);
141
142 /*
143 * Fill in appropriate values if this driver uses these fields,
144 * or uses the standard read_byte/write_buf/etc. functions from
145 * nand_base.c that use these fields.
146 */
147 chip.IO_ADDR_R = ...;
148 chip.IO_ADDR_W = ...;
149
150 if (nand_scan_ident(mtd, CONFIG_SYS_MAX_NAND_CHIPS, NULL))
151 error out
152
153 /*
154 * Insert here any code you wish to run after the chip has been
155 * identified, but before any other I/O is done.
156 */
157
158 if (nand_scan_tail(mtd))
159 error out
160
161 /*
162 * devnum is the device number to be used in nand commands
163 * and in mtd->name. Must be less than CONFIG_SYS_MAX_NAND_DEVICE.
164 */
165 if (nand_register(devnum, mtd))
166 error out
167
168 In addition to providing more flexibility to the driver, it reduces
169 the difference between a U-Boot driver and its Linux counterpart.
170 nand_init() is now reduced to calling board_nand_init() once, and
171 printing a size summary. This should also make it easier to
172 transition to delayed NAND initialization.
173
174 Please convert your driver even if you don't need the extra
175 flexibility, so that one day we can eliminate the old mechanism.
176
177
178 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ONFI_DETECTION
179 Enables detection of ONFI compliant devices during probe.
180 And fetching device parameters flashed on device, by parsing
181 ONFI parameter page.
182
183Platform specific options
184=========================
185 CONFIG_NAND_OMAP_GPMC
186 Enables omap_gpmc.c driver for OMAPx and AMxxxx platforms.
187 GPMC controller is used for parallel NAND flash devices, and can
188 do ECC calculation (not ECC error detection) for HAM1, BCH4, BCH8
189 and BCH16 ECC algorithms.
190
191 CONFIG_NAND_OMAP_ELM
192 Enables omap_elm.c driver for OMAPx and AMxxxx platforms.
193 ELM controller is used for ECC error detection (not ECC calculation)
194 of BCH4, BCH8 and BCH16 ECC algorithms.
195 Some legacy platforms like OMAP3xx do not have in-built ELM h/w engine,
196 thus such SoC platforms need to depend on software library for ECC error
197 detection. However ECC calculation on such plaforms would still be
198 done by GPMC controller.
199
200 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_AM33XX_BCH
201 Enables SPL-NAND driver (am335x_spl_bch.c) which supports ELM based
202 hardware ECC correction. This is useful for platforms which have ELM
203 hardware engine and use NAND boot mode.
204 Some legacy platforms like OMAP3xx do not have in-built ELM h/w engine,
205 so those platforms should use CONFIG_SPL_NAND_SIMPLE for enabling
206 SPL-NAND driver with software ECC correction support.
207
208 CONFIG_NAND_OMAP_ECCSCHEME
209 On OMAP platforms, this CONFIG specifies NAND ECC scheme.
210 It can take following values:
211 OMAP_ECC_HAM1_CODE_SW
212 1-bit Hamming code using software lib.
213 (for legacy devices only)
214 OMAP_ECC_HAM1_CODE_HW
215 1-bit Hamming code using GPMC hardware.
216 (for legacy devices only)
217 OMAP_ECC_BCH4_CODE_HW_DETECTION_SW
218 4-bit BCH code (unsupported)
219 OMAP_ECC_BCH4_CODE_HW
220 4-bit BCH code (unsupported)
221 OMAP_ECC_BCH8_CODE_HW_DETECTION_SW
222 8-bit BCH code with
223 - ecc calculation using GPMC hardware engine,
224 - error detection using software library.
225 - requires CONFIG_BCH to enable software BCH library
226 (For legacy device which do not have ELM h/w engine)
227 OMAP_ECC_BCH8_CODE_HW
228 8-bit BCH code with
229 - ecc calculation using GPMC hardware engine,
230 - error detection using ELM hardware engine.
231 OMAP_ECC_BCH16_CODE_HW
232 16-bit BCH code with
233 - ecc calculation using GPMC hardware engine,
234 - error detection using ELM hardware engine.
235
236 How to select ECC scheme on OMAP and AMxx platforms ?
237 -----------------------------------------------------
238 Though higher ECC schemes have more capability to detect and correct
239 bit-flips, but still selection of ECC scheme is dependent on following
240 - hardware engines present in SoC.
241 Some legacy OMAP SoC do not have ELM h/w engine thus such
242 SoC cannot support BCHx_HW ECC schemes.
243 - size of OOB/Spare region
244 With higher ECC schemes, more OOB/Spare area is required to
245 store ECC. So choice of ECC scheme is limited by NAND oobsize.
246
247 In general following expression can help:
248 NAND_OOBSIZE >= 2 + (NAND_PAGESIZE / 512) * ECC_BYTES
249 where
250 NAND_OOBSIZE = number of bytes available in
251 OOB/spare area per NAND page.
252 NAND_PAGESIZE = bytes in main-area of NAND page.
253 ECC_BYTES = number of ECC bytes generated to
254 protect 512 bytes of data, which is:
255 3 for HAM1_xx ecc schemes
256 7 for BCH4_xx ecc schemes
257 14 for BCH8_xx ecc schemes
258 26 for BCH16_xx ecc schemes
259
260 example to check for BCH16 on 2K page NAND
261 NAND_PAGESIZE = 2048
262 NAND_OOBSIZE = 64
263 2 + (2048 / 512) * 26 = 106 > NAND_OOBSIZE
264 Thus BCH16 cannot be supported on 2K page NAND.
265
266 However, for 4K pagesize NAND
267 NAND_PAGESIZE = 4096
268 NAND_OOBSIZE = 224
269 ECC_BYTES = 26
270 2 + (4096 / 512) * 26 = 210 < NAND_OOBSIZE
271 Thus BCH16 can be supported on 4K page NAND.
272
273
274 CONFIG_NAND_OMAP_GPMC_PREFETCH
275 On OMAP platforms that use the GPMC controller
276 (CONFIG_NAND_OMAP_GPMC_PREFETCH), this options enables the code that
277 uses the prefetch mode to speed up read operations.
278
279NOTE:
280=====
281
282The Disk On Chip driver is currently broken and has been for some time.
283There is a driver in drivers/mtd/nand/raw, taken from Linux, that works with
284the current NAND system but has not yet been adapted to the u-boot
285environment.
286
287Additional improvements to the NAND subsystem by Guido Classen, 10-10-2006
288
289JFFS2 related commands:
290
291 implement "nand erase clean" and old "nand erase"
292 using both the new code which is able to skip bad blocks
293 "nand erase clean" additionally writes JFFS2-cleanmarkers in the oob.
294
295Miscellaneous and testing commands:
296 "markbad [offset]"
297 create an artificial bad block (for testing bad block handling)
298
299 "scrub [offset length]"
300 like "erase" but don't skip bad block. Instead erase them.
301 DANGEROUS!!! Factory set bad blocks will be lost. Use only
302 to remove artificial bad blocks created with the "markbad" command.
303
304 "torture offset [size]"
305 Torture block to determine if it is still reliable.
306 Enabled by the CONFIG_CMD_NAND_TORTURE configuration option.
307 This command returns 0 if the block is still reliable, else 1.
308 If the block is detected as unreliable, it is up to the user to decide to
309 mark this block as bad.
310 The analyzed block is put through 3 erase / write cycles (or less if the block
311 is detected as unreliable earlier).
312 This command can be used in scripts, e.g. together with the markbad command to
313 automate retries and handling of possibly newly detected bad blocks if the
314 nand write command fails.
315 It can also be used manually by users having seen some NAND errors in logs to
316 search the root cause of these errors.
317 The underlying nand_torture() function is also useful for code willing to
318 automate actions following a nand->write() error. This would e.g. be required
319 in order to program or update safely firmware to NAND, especially for the UBI
320 part of such firmware.
321 Optionally, a second parameter size can be given to test multiple blocks with
322 one call. If size is not a multiple of the NAND's erase size, then the block
323 that contains offset + size will be tested in full. If used with size, this
324 command returns 0 if all tested blocks have been found reliable, else 1.
325
326
327NAND locking command (for chips with active LOCKPRE pin)
328
329 "nand lock"
330 set NAND chip to lock state (all pages locked)
331
332 "nand lock tight"
333 set NAND chip to lock tight state (software can't change locking anymore)
334
335 "nand lock status"
336 displays current locking status of all pages
337
338 "nand unlock [offset] [size]"
339 unlock consecutive area (can be called multiple times for different areas)
340
341 "nand unlock.allexcept [offset] [size]"
342 unlock all except specified consecutive area
343
344I have tested the code with board containing 128MiB NAND large page chips
345and 32MiB small page chips.
346
README.nand-boot-ppc440
1-----------------------------
2NAND boot on PPC440 platforms
3-----------------------------
4
5This document describes the U-Boot NAND boot feature as it
6is implemented for the AMCC Sequoia (PPC440EPx) board.
7
8The PPC440EP(x)/GR(x) cpu's can boot directly from NAND FLASH,
9completely without NOR FLASH. This can be done by using the NAND
10boot feature of the 440 NAND flash controller (NDFC).
11
12Here a short description of the different boot stages:
13
14a) IPL (Initial Program Loader, integrated inside CPU)
15------------------------------------------------------
16Will load first 4k from NAND (SPL) into cache and execute it from there.
17
18b) SPL (Secondary Program Loader)
19---------------------------------
20Will load special U-Boot version (NUB) from NAND and execute it. This SPL
21has to fit into 4kByte. It sets up the CPU and configures the SDRAM
22controller and the NAND controller so that the special U-Boot image can be
23loaded from NAND to SDRAM.
24This special image is build in the directory "nand_spl".
25
26c) NUB (NAND U-Boot)
27--------------------
28This NAND U-Boot (NUB) is a special U-Boot version which can be started
29from RAM. Therefore it mustn't (re-)configure the SDRAM controller.
30
31On 440EPx the SPL is copied to internal SRAM before the NAND controller
32is set up. While still running from cache, I experienced problems accessing
33the NAND controller.
34
35
36Example: Build and install NAND boot image for Sequoia (440EPx):
37
38a) Configure for sequoia with NAND boot support:
39# make sequoia_nand_config
40
41b) Build image(s)
42# make
43
44This will generate the SPL image in the "nand_spl" directory:
45nand_spl/u-boot-spl.bin
46Also another image is created spanning a whole NAND block (16kBytes):
47nand_spl/u-boot-spl-16k.bin
48The main NAND U-Boot image is generated in the toplevel directory:
49u-boot.bin
50A combined image of u-boot-spl-16k.bin and u-boot.bin is also created:
51u-boot-nand.bin
52
53This image should be programmed at offset 0 in the NAND flash:
54
55# tftp 100000 /tftpboot/sequoia/u-boot-nand.bin
56# nand erase 0 60000
57# nand write 100000 0 60000
58
59
60September 07 2006, Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>
61
README.ne2000
1This driver supports NE2000 compatible cards (those based on DP8390,
2DP83902 and similar). It can be used with PCMCIA/CF cards provided
3that the CCR is correctly initialized.
4
5The code is based on sources from the Linux kernel (pcnet_cs.c,
68390.h) and eCOS(if_dp83902a.c, if_dp83902a.h). Both of these 2
7wonderful world are GPL, so this is, of course, GPL.
8
9I developed and tested this driver on a custom PXA255 based system and
10with a billionton CF network card connected to the PCMCIA interface of
11the micro (have a look at README.PXA_CF for the support of this port).
12
13The options you have to specify in the config file are (with the
14value for my board as an example):
15
16#define CONFIG_DRIVER_NE2000
17
18- Enables the driver
19
20#define CONFIG_DRIVER_NE2000_BASE (0x20000000+0x300)
21
22- Address where the board is mapped
23
24
25Enjoy!
26
27Christian Pellegrin <chri@ascensit.com>
28
README.nokia_rx51
1Board: Nokia RX-51 aka N900
2
3This board definition results in a u-boot.bin which can be chainloaded
4from NOLO in qemu or on a real N900. It does very little hardware config
5because NOLO has already configured the board. Only needed is enabling
6internal eMMC memory via twl4030 regulator which is not enabled by NOLO.
7
8NOLO is expecting a kernel image and will treat any image it finds in
9onenand as such. This u-boot is intended to be flashed to the N900 like
10a kernel. In order to transparently boot the original kernel, it will be
11appended to u-boot.bin at 0x40000. NOLO will load the entire image into
12(random) memory and execute u-boot, which saves hw revision, boot reason
13and boot mode ATAGs set by NOLO. Then the bootscripts will attempt to load
14uImage or boot.scr from a fat, ext2/ext3 or ext4 filesystem in external
15SD card or internal eMMC memory. If this fails or keyboard is closed then
16the appended kernel image will be booted using some generated and some
17stored ATAGs (see boot order).
18
19There is support for hardware watchdog. Hardware watchdog is started by
20NOLO so u-boot must kick watchdog to prevent reboot device (but not very
21often, max every 2 seconds). There is also support for framebuffer display
22output with ANSI escape codes and the N900 HW keyboard input. USB tty works
23but is disabled because it prevents the current Maemo kernel from booting.
24
25When U-Boot is starting it enable IBE bit in Auxiliary Control Register,
26which is needed for Thumb-2 ISA support. It is workaround for errata 430973.
27
28Default boot order:
29
30 * 0. if keyboard is closed boot automatically attached kernel image
31 * 1. try boot from external SD card
32 * 2. try boot from internal eMMC memory
33 * 3. try boot from attached kernel image
34
35Boot from SD or eMMC in this order:
36
37 * 1.
38 * 1.1 find boot.scr on first fat partition
39 * 1.2 find uImage on first fat partition
40 * 1.3 same order for 2. - 4. fat partition
41 * 2. same as 1. but for ext2/3 partition
42 * 3. same as 1. but for ext4 partition
43
44
45Available additional commands/variables:
46
47 * run sercon - Use serial port for control
48 * run usbcon - Use usbtty for control
49 * run vgacon - Use framebuffer and HW keyboard for control (default)
50
51 * run sdboot - Boot from external SD card (see boot order)
52 * run emmcboot - Boot from internal eMMC memory (see boot order)
53 * run attachboot - Boot attached kernel image (attached to U-Boot binary)
54
55 * run scriptload - Load boot script ${mmcscriptfile}
56 * run scriptboot - Run loaded boot script
57 * run kernload - Load kernel image ${mmckernfile}
58 * run initrdload - Load initrd image ${mmcinitrdfile}
59 * run kernboot - Boot loaded kernel image
60 * run kerninitrdboot - Boot loaded kernel image with loaded initrd image
61
62 * run trymmcscriptboot - Try to load and boot script ${mmcscriptfile}
63 * run trymmckernboot - Try to load and boot kernel image ${mmckernfile}
64 * run trymmckerninitrdboot - Try to load and boot kernel image ${mmckernfile}
65 with initrd image ${mmcinitrdfile}
66
67Additional variables for loading files from mmc:
68
69 * mmc ${mmcnum} (0 - external, 1 - internal)
70 * partition number ${mmcpart} (1 - 4)
71 * parition type ${mmctype} (fat, ext2, ext4)
72
73Additional variables for booting kernel:
74
75 * setup_omap_atag - Add OMAP table into atags structure (needs maemo kernel)
76 * setup_console_atag - Enable serial console in OMAP table
77 * setup_boot_reason_atag - Change boot reason in OMAP table
78 * setup_boot_mode_atag - Change boot mode in OMAP table
79
80 Variable setup_omap_atag is automatically set when booting attached kernel.
81 When variable setup_omap_atag is set, variable setup_console_atag is unset
82 and u-boot standard output is set to serial then setup_console_atag is
83 automatically set to 1. So output from Maemo kernel would go to serial port.
84
85USB TTY:
86
87 Maemo kernel 2.6.28 will crash if u-boot enable usb tty. So USB TTY is disabled.
88 For enabling USB TTY just add this line to file include/configs/nokia_rx51.h
89
90 #define CONFIG_USB_TTY
91
92
93UBIFS support:
94
95 UBIFS support is disabled, because U-Boot image is too big and cannot be
96 flashed with attached zImage to RX-51 kernel nand area. For enabling UBIFS
97 support add following lines into file configs/nokia_rx51_defconfig
98
99 CONFIG_CMD_UBI=y
100 CONFIG_CMD_UBIFS=y
101 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP=y
102 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT=1
103
README.nvme
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2#
3# Copyright (C) 2017 NXP Semiconductors
4# Copyright (C) 2017 Bin Meng <bmeng.cn@gmail.com>
5
6What is NVMe
7============
8
9NVM Express (NVMe) is a register level interface that allows host software to
10communicate with a non-volatile memory subsystem. This interface is optimized
11for enterprise and client solid state drives, typically attached to the PCI
12express interface. It is a scalable host controller interface designed to
13address the needs of enterprise and client systems that utilize PCI express
14based solid state drives (SSD). The interface provides optimized command
15submission and completion paths. It includes support for parallel operation by
16supporting up to 64K I/O queues with up to 64K commands per I/O queue.
17
18The device is comprised of some number of controllers, where each controller
19is comprised of some number of namespaces, where each namespace is comprised
20of some number of logical blocks. A namespace is a quantity of non-volatile
21memory that is formatted into logical blocks. An NVMe namespace is equivalent
22to a SCSI LUN. Each namespace is operated as an independent "device".
23
24How it works
25------------
26There is an NVMe uclass driver (driver name "nvme"), an NVMe host controller
27driver (driver name "nvme") and an NVMe namespace block driver (driver name
28"nvme-blk"). The host controller driver is supposed to probe the hardware and
29do necessary initialization to put the controller into a ready state at which
30it is able to scan all available namespaces attached to it. Scanning namespace
31is triggered by the NVMe uclass driver and the actual work is done in the NVMe
32namespace block driver.
33
34Status
35------
36It only support basic block read/write functions in the NVMe driver.
37
38Config options
39--------------
40CONFIG_NVME Enable NVMe device support
41CONFIG_CMD_NVME Enable basic NVMe commands
42
43Usage in U-Boot
44---------------
45To use an NVMe hard disk from U-Boot shell, a 'nvme scan' command needs to
46be executed for all NVMe hard disks attached to the NVMe controller to be
47identified.
48
49To list all of the NVMe hard disks, try:
50
51 => nvme info
52 Device 0: Vendor: 0x8086 Rev: 8DV10131 Prod: CVFT535600LS400BGN
53 Type: Hard Disk
54 Capacity: 381554.0 MB = 372.6 GB (781422768 x 512)
55
56and print out detailed information for controller and namespaces via:
57
58 => nvme detail
59
60Raw block read/write to can be done via the 'nvme read/write' commands:
61
62 => nvme read a0000000 0 11000
63
64 => tftp 80000000 /tftpboot/kernel.itb
65 => nvme write 80000000 0 11000
66
67Of course, file system command can be used on the NVMe hard disk as well:
68
69 => fatls nvme 0:1
70 32376967 kernel.itb
71 22929408 100m
72
73 2 file(s), 0 dir(s)
74
75 => fatload nvme 0:1 a0000000 /kernel.itb
76 => bootm a0000000
77
78Testing NVMe with QEMU x86
79--------------------------
80QEMU supports NVMe emulation and we can test NVMe driver with QEMU x86 running
81U-Boot. Please see README.x86 for how to build u-boot.rom image for QEMU x86.
82
83Example command line to call QEMU x86 below with emulated NVMe device:
84$ ./qemu-system-i386 -drive file=nvme.img,if=none,id=drv0 -device nvme,drive=drv0,serial=QEMUNVME0001 -bios u-boot.rom
85
README.odroid
1 U-Boot for Odroid X2/U3/XU3/XU4/HC1
2========================
3
41. Summary
5==========
6This is a quick instruction for setup Odroid boards.
7Board config: odroid_config for X2/U3
8Board config: odroid-xu3_config for XU3/XU4/HC1
9
102. Supported devices
11====================
12This U-BOOT config can be used on three boards:
13- Odroid U3
14- Odroid X2
15with CPU Exynos 4412 rev 2.0 and 2GB of RAM
16- Odroid XU3
17- Odroid XU4
18- Odroid HC1
19with CPU Exynos5422 and 2GB of RAM
20
213. Boot sequence
22================
23iROM->BL1->(BL2 + TrustZone)->U-BOOT
24
25This version of U-BOOT doesn't implement SPL. So, BL1, BL2, and TrustZone
26binaries are needed to boot up.
27
28<< X2/U3 >>
29It can be found in "boot.tar.gz" from here:
30http://dev.odroid.com/projects/4412boot/wiki/FrontPage?action=download&value=boot.tar.gz
31or here:
32http://odroid.in/guides/ubuntu-lfs/boot.tar.gz
33
34<< XU3/XU4 >>
35It can be downloaded from:
36https://github.com/hardkernel/u-boot/tree/odroidxu3-v2012.07/sd_fuse/hardkernel_1mb_uboot
37
38
394. Boot media layout
40====================
41The table below shows SD/eMMC cards layout for U-Boot.
42The block offset is starting from 0 and the block size is 512B.
43 -------------------------------------
44| Binary | Block offset| part type |
45| name | SD | eMMC |(eMMC only)|
46 -------------------------------------
47| Bl1 | 1 | 0 | 1 (boot) |
48| Bl2 | 31 | 30 | 1 (boot) |
49| U-Boot | 63 | 62 | 1 (boot) |
50| Tzsw | 2111 | 2110 | 1 (boot) |
51| Uboot Env | 2560 | 2560 | 0 (user) |
52 -------------------------------------
53
545. Prepare the SD boot card - with SD card reader
55=================================================
56To prepare bootable media you need boot binaries provided by hardkernel.
57From the downloaded files, You can find:
58- bl1.bin
59- tzsw.bin
60- bl2.bin
61- sd_fusing.sh
62- u-boot.bin
63(The file names can be slightly different, but you can distinguish what they are
64without problem)
65
66This is all you need to boot this board. But if you want to use your custom
67U-Boot then you need to change u-boot.bin with your own U-Boot binary*
68and run the script "sd_fusing.sh" - this script is valid only for SD card.
69
70*note:
71The proper binary file of current U-Boot is u-boot-dtb.bin.
72
73quick steps for Linux:
74- Download all files from the link at point 3 and extract it if needed.
75- put any SD card into the SD reader
76- check the device with "dmesg"
77- run ./sd_fusing.sh /dev/sdX - where X is SD card device (but not a partition)
78Check if Hardkernel U-Boot is booting, and next do the same with your U-Boot.
79
806. Prepare the eMMC boot card
81 with a eMMC card reader (boot from eMMC card slot)
82=====================================================
83To boot the device from the eMMC slot you should use a special card reader
84which supports eMMC partition switch. All of the boot binaries are stored
85on the eMMC boot partition which is normally hidden.
86
87The "sd_fusing.sh" script can be used after updating offsets of binaries
88according to the table from point 4. Be sure that you are working on the right
89eMMC partition - its size is usually very small, about 1-4 MiB.
90
917. Prepare the eMMC boot card
92 with a SD card reader (boot from SD card slot)
93=================================================
94If you have an eMMC->microSD adapter you can prepare the card as in point 5.
95But then the device can boot only from the SD card slot.
96
978. Prepare the boot media using Hardkernel U-Boot
98=================================================
99You can update the U-Boot to the custom one if you have a working bootloader
100delivered with the board on the eMMC/SD card. Then follow the steps:
101- install the android fastboot tool
102- connect a micro usb cable to the board
103- on the U-Boot prompt, run command: fastboot (as a root)
104- on the host, run command: "fastboot flash bootloader u-boot-dtb.bin"
105- the custom U-Boot should start after the board resets.
106
1079. Partition layout
108====================
109Default U-Boot environment is setup for fixed partition layout.
110
111Partition table: MSDOS. Disk layout and files as listed in the table below.
112 ----- ------ ------ ------ -------- ---------------------------------
113| Num | Name | FS | Size | Offset | Reguired files |
114| | | Type | MiB | MiB | |
115 ----- ------ ------ ------ -------- ---------------------------------
116| 1 | BOOT | fat | 100 | 2 | kernel, fdt** |
117| 2 | ROOT | ext4 | - | | any Linux system |
118 ----- ------ ------ ------ -------- ---------------------------------
119
120**note:
121Supported fdt files are:
122- exynos4412-odroidx2.dtb
123- exynos4412-odroidu3.dtb
124- exynos5422-odroidxu3.dtb
125- exynos5422-odroidxu3-lite.dtb
126- exynos5422-odroidxu4.dtb
127- exynos5422-odroidhc1.dtb
128
129Supported kernel files are:
130- Image.itb
131- zImage
132- uImage
133
134The default environmental variable "dfu_alt_info" is set* for above layout.
135Each partition size is just an example, dfu_alt_info tries init two partitions.
136The size of each is not important.
137
138*note:
139$dfu_alt_info is set on a boot time and it is concatenated using two variables:
140- $dfu_alt_boot(set dynamically)
141- $dfu_alt_system(from current env).
142
143To add any changes to dfu_alt_info - please modify $dfu_alt_system only.
144Changes are visible after board reset.
145
14610. The environment and booting the kernel
147==========================================
148There are three macros defined in config for various boot options:
149Two for both, kernel with device tree support and also without it:
150- boot_uimg - load uImage
151- boot_zimg - load zImage
152If proper fdt file exists then it will be automatically loaded,
153so for old kernel types, please remove fdt file from boot partition.
154
155The third boot option for multi image support (more info: doc/uImage.FIT/)
156- boot_fit - for binary file: "Image.itb"
157
158Default boot command: "autoboot"
159And the boot sequence is:
160- boot_fit - if "Image.itb" exists
161- boot_zimg - if "zImage" exists
162- boot_uimg - if "uImage" exists
163
16411. USB host support
165====================
166NOTE: This section is only for Odroid X2/U3.
167
168The ethernet can be accessed after starting the USB subsystem in U-Boot.
169The adapter does not come with a preconfigured MAC address, and hence it needs
170to be set before starting USB.
171setenv usbethaddr 02:DE:AD:BE:EF:FF
172
173Note that in this example a locally managed MAC address is chosen. Care should
174be taken to make these MAC addresses unique within the same subnet.
175
176Start the USB subsystem:
177Odroid # setenv usbethaddr 02:DE:AD:BE:EF:FF
178Odroid # usb start
179(Re)start USB...
180USB0: USB EHCI 1.00
181scanning bus 0 for devices... 4 USB Device(s) found
182 scanning usb for storage devices... 1 Storage Device(s) found
183 scanning usb for ethernet devices... 1 Ethernet Device(s) found
184Odroid #
185
186Automatic IP assignment:
187------------------------
188If the ethernet is connected to a DHCP server (router maybe with DHCP enabled),
189then the below will automatically assign an ip address through DHCP.
190setenv autoload no
191dhcp
192
193Odroid # setenv autoload no
194Odroid # dhcp
195Waiting for Ethernet connection... done.
196BOOTP broadcast 1
197DHCP client bound to address 192.168.1.10 (524 ms)
198Odroid #
199
200Note that this automatically sets the many IP address related variables in
201U-Boot that is obtained from the DHCP server.
202
203Odroid # printenv ipaddr netmask gatewayip dnsip
204ipaddr=192.168.1.10
205netmask=255.255.255.0
206gatewayip=192.168.1.1
207dnsip=192.168.1.1
208
209Ping example:
210The ping command can be used a test to check connectivity. In this example,
211192.168.1.27 is a pingable server in the network.
212Odroid # ping 192.168.1.27
213Waiting for Ethernet connection... done.
214Using sms0 device
215host 192.168.1.27 is alive
216Odroid #
217
218Static IP assignment:
219---------------------
220In the case where there are no DHCP servers in the network, or you want to
221set the IP address statically, it can be done by:
222Odroid # setenv ipaddr 192.168.1.10
223Odroid # ping 192.168.1.27
224Waiting for Ethernet connection... done.
225Using sms0 device
226host 192.168.1.27 is alive
227
228TFTP booting:
229-------------
230Say there exists a tftp server in the network with address 192.168.1.27 and
231it serves a kernel image (zImage.3.17) and a DTB blob (exynos4412-odroidu3.dtb)
232that needs to be loaded and booted. It can be accomplished as below:
233(Assumes that you have setenv usbethaddr, and have not set autoload to no)
234
235Odroid # setenv serverip 192.168.1.27
236Odroid # tftpboot 0x40080000 zImage.3.17
237Waiting for Ethernet connection... done.
238Using sms0 device
239TFTP from server 192.168.1.27; our IP address is 192.168.1.10
240Filename 'zImage.3.17'.
241Load address: 0x40080000
242Loading: #################################################################
243 #################################################################
244 #################################################################
245 #######################
246 52.7 KiB/s
247done
248Bytes transferred = 3194200 (30bd58 hex)
249Odroid # tftpboot 0x42000000 exynos4412-odroidu3.dtb
250Waiting for Ethernet connection... done.
251Using sms0 device
252TFTP from server 192.168.1.27; our IP address is 192.168.1.10
253Filename 'exynos4412-odroidu3.dtb'.
254Load address: 0x42000000
255Loading: ####
256 40 KiB/s
257done
258Bytes transferred = 46935 (b757 hex)
259Odroid # printenv bootargs
260bootargs=Please use defined boot
261Odroid # setenv bootargs console=ttySAC1,115200n8 root=/dev/mmcblk0p2 rootwait
262Odroid # bootz 40080000 - 42000000
263Kernel image @ 0x40080000 [ 0x000000 - 0x30bd58 ]
264## Flattened Device Tree blob at 42000000
265 Booting using the fdt blob at 0x42000000
266 Loading Device Tree to 4fff1000, end 4ffff756 ... OK
267
268Starting kernel ...
269
270[ 0.000000] Booting Linux on physical CPU 0xa00
271... etc ...
272
273In the above example you can substitute 'dhcp' for 'tftpboot' as well.
274
275USB Storage booting:
276--------------------
277Similarly we can use the USB storage to load the kernel image/initrd/fdt etc
278and boot. For this example, there is a USB drive plugged in. It has a FAT
2791st partition and an EXT 2nd partition. Using the generic FS (ls/load) makes
280it even easier to work with FAT/EXT file systems.
281For this example the second EXT partition is used for booting and as rootfs.
282The boot files - kernel and the dtb are present in the /boot directory of the
283second partition.
284
285Odroid # usb start
286(Re)start USB...
287USB0: USB EHCI 1.00
288scanning bus 0 for devices... 4 USB Device(s) found
289 scanning usb for storage devices... 1 Storage Device(s) found
290 scanning usb for ethernet devices...
291Error: sms0 address not set. <----- Note the error as usbethaddr
292Warning: failed to set MAC address <----- is not set.
2931 Ethernet Device(s) found
294Odroid # usb part 0
295
296Partition Map for USB device 0 -- Partition Type: DOS
297
298Part Start Sector Num Sectors UUID Type
299 1 3072 263168 000c4046-01 06
300 2 266240 13457408 000c4046-02 83
301
302Odroid # ls usb 0:2 /boot
303<DIR> 4096 .
304<DIR> 4096 ..
305 353 boot.scr
306 281 boot.txt
307 101420 config-3.8.13.23
308 2127254 initrd.img-3.8.13.23
309 2194825 uInitrd
310 2194825 uInitrd-3.8.13.23
311 2453112 zImage
312 101448 config-3.8.13.26
313 2127670 uInitrd-3.8.13.26
314 2127606 initrd.img-3.8.13.26
315 3194200 zImage.3.17 <--- Kernel
316 46935 exynos4412-odroidu3.dtb <--- DTB
317Odroid # load usb 0:2 40080000 /boot/zImage.3.17
3183194200 bytes read in 471 ms (6.5 MiB/s)
319Odroid # load usb 0:2 42000000 /boot/exynos4412-odroidu3.dtb
32046935 bytes read in 233 ms (196.3 KiB/s)
321Odroid # setenv bootargs console=ttySAC1,115200n8 root=/dev/sda2 rootwait
322Odroid # bootz 40080000 - 42000000
323Kernel image @ 0x40080000 [ 0x000000 - 0x30bd58 ]
324## Flattened Device Tree blob at 42000000
325 Booting using the fdt blob at 0x42000000
326 Loading Device Tree to 4fff1000, end 4ffff756 ... OK
327
328Starting kernel ...
329
330[ 0.000000] Booting Linux on physical CPU 0xa00
331
332Please refer to README.usb for additional information.
333
README.omap-ulpi-viewport
1Reference code ""drivers/usb/ulpi/omap-ulpi-viewport.c"
2
3Contains the ulpi read write api's to perform
4any ulpi phy port access on omap platform.
5
6On omap ehci reg map contains INSNREG05_ULPI
7register which offers the ulpi phy access so
8any ulpi phy commands should be passsed using this
9register.
10
11omap-ulpi-viewport.c is a low level function
12implementation of "drivers/usb/ulpi/ulpi.c"
13
14To enable and use omap-ulpi-viewport.c
15we require CONFIG_USB_ULPI_VIEWPORT_OMAP and
16CONFIG_USB_ULPI be enabled in config file.
17
18Any ulpi ops request can be done with ulpi.c
19and soc specific binding and usage is done with
20omap-ulpi-viewport implementation.
21
22Ex: scenario:
23omap-ehci driver code requests for ulpi phy reset if
24ehci is used in phy mode, which will call ulpi phy reset
25the ulpi phy reset does ulpi_read/write from viewport
26implementation which will do ulpi reset using the
27INSNREG05_ULPI register.
28
README.omap3
1
2Summary
3=======
4
5This README is about U-Boot support for TI's ARM Cortex-A8 based OMAP3 [1]
6family of SoCs. TI's OMAP3 SoC family contains an ARM Cortex-A8. Additionally,
7some family members contain a TMS320C64x+ DSP and/or an Imagination SGX 2D/3D
8graphics processor and various other standard peripherals.
9
10Currently the following boards are supported:
11
12* OMAP3530 BeagleBoard [2]
13
14* Gumstix Overo [3]
15
16* TI EVM [4]
17
18* OpenPandora Ltd. Pandora [5]
19
20* TI/Logic PD Zoom MDK [6]
21
22* TI/Logic PD Zoom 2 [7]
23
24* CompuLab Ltd. CM-T35 [8]
25
26Build
27=====
28
29* BeagleBoard:
30
31make omap3_beagle_config
32make
33
34* Gumstix Overo:
35
36make omap3_overo_config
37make
38
39* TI EVM:
40
41make omap3_evm_config
42make
43
44* Zoom MDK:
45
46make omap3_zoom1_config
47make
48
49* Zoom 2:
50
51make omap3_zoom2_config
52make
53
54* CM-T35:
55
56make cm_t35_config
57make
58
59
60Custom commands
61===============
62
63To make U-Boot for OMAP3 support NAND device SW or HW ECC calculation, U-Boot
64for OMAP3 supports custom user command
65
66nandecc hw/sw
67
68To be compatible with NAND drivers using SW ECC (e.g. kernel code)
69
70nandecc sw
71
72enables SW ECC calculation. HW ECC enabled with
73
74nandecc hw
75
76is typically used to write 2nd stage bootloader (known as 'x-loader') which is
77executed by OMAP3's boot rom and therefore has to be written with HW ECC.
78
79For all other commands see
80
81help
82
83Interfaces
84==========
85
86gpio
87----
88
89To set a bit :
90
91 if (!gpio_request(N, "")) {
92 gpio_direction_output(N, 0);
93 gpio_set_value(N, 1);
94 }
95
96To clear a bit :
97
98 if (!gpio_request(N, "")) {
99 gpio_direction_output(N, 0);
100 gpio_set_value(N, 0);
101 }
102
103To read a bit :
104
105 if (!gpio_request(N, "")) {
106 gpio_direction_input(N);
107 val = gpio_get_value(N);
108 gpio_free(N);
109 }
110 if (val)
111 printf("GPIO N is set\n");
112 else
113 printf("GPIO N is clear\n");
114
115dma
116---
117void omap3_dma_init(void)
118 Init the DMA module
119int omap3_dma_get_conf_chan(uint32_t chan, struct dma4_chan *config);
120 Read config of the channel
121int omap3_dma_conf_chan(uint32_t chan, struct dma4_chan *config);
122 Write config to the channel
123int omap3_dma_conf_transfer(uint32_t chan, uint32_t *src, uint32_t *dst,
124 uint32_t sze)
125 Config source, destination and size of a transfer
126int omap3_dma_wait_for_transfer(uint32_t chan)
127 Wait for a transfer to end - this hast to be called before a channel
128 or the data the channel transferd are used.
129int omap3_dma_get_revision(uint32_t *minor, uint32_t *major)
130 Read silicon Revision of the DMA module
131
132NAND
133====
134
135There are some OMAP3 devices out there with NAND attached. Due to the fact that
136OMAP3 ROM code can only handle 1-bit hamming ECC for accessing first page
137(place where SPL lives) we require this setup for u-boot at least when reading
138the second progam within SPL. A lot of newer NAND chips however require more
139than 1-bit ECC for the pages, some can live with 1-bit for the first page. To
140handle this we can switch to another ECC algorithm after reading the payload
141within SPL.
142
143BCH8
144----
145
146To enable hardware assisted BCH8 (8-bit BCH [Bose, Chaudhuri, Hocquenghem]) on
147OMAP3 devices we can use the BCH library in lib/bch.c. To do so add CONFIG_BCH
148and set CONFIG_NAND_OMAP_ECCSCHEME=5 (refer README.nand) for selecting BCH8_SW.
149The NAND OOB layout is the same as in linux kernel, if the linux kernel BCH8
150implementation for OMAP3 works for you so the u-boot version should also.
151When you require the SPL to read with BCH8 there are two more configs to
152change:
153
154 * CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCPOS (must be the same as .eccpos in
155 GPMC_NAND_HW_BCH8_ECC_LAYOUT defined in
156 arch/arm/include/asm/arch-omap3/omap_gpmc.h)
157 * CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCSIZE must be 512
158 * CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCBYTES must be 13 for this BCH8 setup
159
160Acknowledgements
161================
162
163OMAP3 U-Boot is based on U-Boot tar ball [9] for BeagleBoard and EVM done by
164several TI employees.
165
166Links
167=====
168
169[1] OMAP3:
170
171http://www.ti.com/omap3 (high volume) and
172http://www.ti.com/omap35x (broad market)
173
174[2] OMAP3530 BeagleBoard:
175
176http://beagleboard.org/
177
178[3] Gumstix Overo:
179
180http://www.gumstix.net/Overo/
181
182[4] TI EVM:
183
184http://focus.ti.com/docs/toolsw/folders/print/tmdxevm3503.html
185
186[5] OpenPandora Ltd. Pandora:
187
188http://openpandora.org/
189
190[6] TI/Logic PD Zoom MDK:
191
192http://www.logicpd.com/products/devkit/ti/zoom_mobile_development_kit
193
194[7] TI/Logic PD Zoom 2
195
196http://www.logicpd.com/sites/default/files/1012659A_Zoom_OMAP34x-II_MDP_Brief.pdf
197
198[8] CompuLab Ltd. CM-T35:
199
200http://www.compulab.co.il/t3530/html/t3530-cm-datasheet.htm
201
202[9] TI OMAP3 U-Boot:
203
204http://beagleboard.googlecode.com/files/u-boot_beagle_revb.tar.gz
205
README.pblimage
1------------------------------------------------------------------
2Freescale PBL(pre-boot loader) Boot Image generation using mkimage
3------------------------------------------------------------------
4
5The CoreNet SoC's can boot directly from eSPI FLASH, SD/MMC and
6NAND, etc. These SoCs use PBL to load RCW and/or pre-initialization
7instructions. For more details refer section 5 Pre-boot loader
8specifications of reference manual P3041RM/P4080RM/P5020RM at link:
9http://www.freescale.com/webapp/search/Serp.jsp?Reference+Manuals
10
11Building PBL Boot Image and boot steps
12--------------------------------------
13
141. Building PBL Boot Image.
15 The default Image is u-boot.pbl.
16
17 For eSPI boot(available on P2041/P3041/P4080/P5020/P5040/T4240):
18 To build the eSPI boot image:
19 make <board_name>_SPIFLASH
20
21 For SD boot(available on P2041/P3041/P4080/P5020/P5040/T4240):
22 To build the SD boot image:
23 make <board_name>_SDCARD
24
25 For Nand boot(available on P2041/P3041/P5020/P5040):
26 To build the NAND boot image:
27 make <board_name>_NAND
28
29
302. pblimage support available with mkimage utility will generate Freescale PBL
31boot image that can be flashed on the board eSPI flash, SD/MMC and NAND.
32Following steps describe it in detail.
33
34 1). Boot from eSPI flash
35 Write u-boot.pbl to eSPI flash from offset 0x0.
36 for ex in u-boot:
37 =>tftp 100000 u-boot.pbl
38 =>sf probe 0
39 =>sf erase 0 100000
40 =>sf write 100000 0 $filesize
41 Change SW1[1:5] = off off on off on.
42
43 2). Boot from SD/MMC
44 Write u-boot.pbl to SD/MMC from offset 0x1000.
45 for ex in u-boot:
46 =>tftp 100000 u-boot.pbl
47 =>mmcinfo
48 =>mmc write 100000 8 441
49 Change SW1[1:5] = off off on on off.
50
51 3). Boot from Nand
52 Write u-boot.pbl to Nand from offset 0x0.
53 for ex in u-boot:
54 =>tftp 100000 u-boot.pbl
55 =>nand info
56 =>nand erase 0 100000
57 =>nand write 100000 0 $filesize
58 Change SW1[1:5] = off on off off on
59 Change SW7[1:4] = on off off on
60
61Board specific configuration file specifications:
62------------------------------------------------
631. Configuration files rcw.cfg and pbi.cfg must present in the
64board/freescale/corenet_ds/, rcw.cfg is for RCW, pbi.cfg is for
65PBI instructions. File name must not be changed since they are used
66in Makefile.
672. These files can have empty lines and lines starting with "#" as first
68character to put comments
69
70Typical example of rcw.cfg file:
71-----------------------------------
72
73#PBL preamble and RCW header
74aa55aa55 010e0100
75#64 bytes RCW data
764c580000 00000000 18185218 0000cccc
7740464000 3c3c2000 58000000 61000000
7800000000 00000000 00000000 008b6000
7900000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
80
81Typical example of pbi.cfg file:
82-----------------------------------
83
84#PBI commands
85#Initialize CPC1
8609010000 00200400
8709138000 00000000
88091380c0 00000100
8909010100 00000000
9009010104 fff0000b
9109010f00 08000000
9209010000 80000000
93#Configure LAW for CPC1
9409000d00 00000000
9509000d04 fff00000
9609000d08 81000013
9709000010 00000000
9809000014 ff000000
9909000018 81000000
100#Initialize eSPI controller
10109110000 80000403
10209110020 2d170008
10309110024 00100008
10409110028 00100008
1050911002c 00100008
106#Flush PBL data
10709138000 00000000
108091380c0 00000000
109
110------------------------------------------------
111Author: Shaohui Xie<Shaohui.Xie@freescale.com>
112
README.pcap
1PCAP:
2
3U-boot supports live Ethernet packet capture in PCAP(2.4) format.
4This is enabled by CONFIG_CMD_PCAP.
5
6The capture is stored on physical memory, and should be copied to
7a machine capable of parsing and displaying PCAP files (IE. wireshark)
8If networking works properly one can copy the capture file from physical memory
9using tftpput, or save it to local storage with (sf write, mmc write, fatwrite, etc)
10
11the pcap capturing requires maximum buffer size.
12when the buffer is full an error message will be displayed and then packets
13will silently drop.
14the actual capture file size is populate in the environment variable "pcapsize".
15
16Usage example:
17
18# Initialize pcap capture to physical address (0x100000) with maximum size of
19# 100000 bytes.
20
21# Start capture
22pcap start
23
24# Initialize network activity
25env set ipaddr 10.0.2.15; env set serverip 10.0.2.2; tftp uImage64
26
27# Stop capture
28pcap stop
29
30# pcap init 0x100000 100000
31PCAP capture initialized: addr: 0xffffffff80100000 max length: 100000
32
33# pcap start
34# env set ipaddr 10.0.2.15; env set serverip 10.0.2.2; tftp uImage64
35eth0@10000000: PHY present at 0
36eth0@10000000: link up, 1000Mbps full-duplex (lpa: 0x7c00)
37Using eth0@10000000 device
38TFTP from server 10.0.2.2; our IP address is 10.0.2.15
39Filename 'uImage64'.
40Load address: 0xffffffff88000000
41Loading: #################################################################
42 #################################################################
43 #################################################################
44 #################################################################
45!!! Buffer is full, consider increasing buffer size !!!
46 #################################################################
47 #################################################################
48 #################################################################
49 #################################################################
50 #################################################################
51 #
52 18.2 MiB/s
53done
54Bytes transferred = 8359376 (7f8dd0 hex)
55PCAP status:
56 Initialized addr: 0xffffffff80100000 max length: 100000
57 Status: Active. file size: 99991
58 Incoming packets: 66 Outgoing packets: 67
59
60# pcap stop
61# tftpput 0xffffffff80100000 $pcapsize 10.0.2.2:capture.pcap
62
63
README.plan9
1Plan 9 from Bell Labs kernel images require additional setup to pass
2configuration information to the kernel. An environment variable named
3confaddr must be defined with the same value as CONFADDR (see mem.h).
4Use of this facility is optional, but should be preferable to manual
5configuration.
6
7When booting an image, arguments supplied to the bootm command will be
8copied to CONFADDR. If no arguments are specified, the contents of the
9bootargs environment variable will be copied.
10
11If no command line arguments or bootargs are defined, CONFADDR is left
12uninitialized to permit manual configuration. For example, PC-style
13configuration could be simulated by issuing a fatload in bootcmd:
14
15 # setenv bootcmd fatload mmc 0 $confaddr plan9.ini; ...; bootm
16
17Steven Stallion
18June 2013
19
README.power-framework
1#
2# (C) Copyright 2014 Samsung Electronics
3# Lukasz Majewski <l.majewski@samsung.com>
4#
5# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
6#
7
8Introduction
9------------
10
11This document describes the second version of the u-boot's PMIC (Power
12Management IC) framework. As a reference boards please consider Samsungs' Trats
13and Trats2.
14
15Background
16----------
17
18Boards supported by u-boot are getting increasingly complex. Developers and
19designers strive to cut down power consumption. Hence several different types of
20devices are now available on the board - namely power managers (PMIC), fuel
21gauges (FG), micro USB interface controllers (MUIC), batteries, multi-function
22devices (MFD).
23
24Explanation of key design decisions
25-----------------------------------
26
27One package can integrate PMIC and MUIC with different addresses on the I2C bus.
28The same device - e.g. MAX8997 uses two different I2C busses and addresses.
29
30Power devices use not only I2C for communication, but SPI as well. Additionally
31different ICs use different endianess. For this reason struct pmic holds
32information about I2C/SPI transmission, which is used with generic
33pmic_req_write() function.
34
35The "flat" hierarchy for power devices works well when each device performs only
36one operation - e.g. PMIC enables LDO.
37
38The problem emerges when we have a device (battery) which conceptually shall be
39the master and uses methods exported by other devices. We need to control MUIC
40to start charging the battery, use PMIC to reduce board's overall power
41consumption (by disabling not needed LDOs, BUCKs) and get current state of
42energy on the battery from FG.
43Up till now u-boot doesn't support device model, so a simple one had to be
44added.
45
46The directory hierarchy has following structure:
47./include/power/<device_name>_<device_function>.h
48e.g. ./include/power/max8997_pmic.h
49
50./drivers/power/pmic/power_{core files}.c
51e.g. ./drivers/power/pmic/power_core.c
52
53./drivers/power/pmic/<device_function>/<device_function>_<device_name>.c
54e.g. ./drivers/power/pmic/pmic_max8997.c
55e.g. ./drivers/power/battery/trats/bat_trats.c
56e.g. ./drivers/power/fuel_gauge/fg_max17042.c
57
58The framework classifies devices by their function - separate directories should
59be maintained for different classes of devices.
60
61Current design
62--------------
63
64Everything is a power device described by struct pmic. Even battery is
65considered as a valid power device. This helps for better management of those
66devices.
67
68- Block diagram of the hierarchy:
69 -----------------
70 --------| BAT |------------
71 | | | |
72 | ----------------- |
73 | | |
74 \|/ \|/ \|/
75 ----------- ----------------- ---------
76 |FG | |MUIC | |CHRG |
77 | | | | | |
78 ----------- ----------------- ---------
79
80
811. When hierarchy is not needed (no complex battery charge):
82
83Definition of the struct pmic is only required with proper name and parameters
84for communication. This is enough to use the "pmic" command in the u-boot
85prompt to change values of device's register (enable/disable LDO, BUCK).
86
87The PG, MUIC and CHRG above are regarded to be in the same level in the
88hierarchy.
89
902. Complex battery charging.
91
92To charge a battery, information from several "abstract" power devices is
93needed (defined at ./include/power/pmic.h):
94- FG device (struct power_fg):
95 -- *fg_battery_check - check if battery is not above its limits
96 -- *fg_battery_update - update the pmic framework with current
97 battery state(voltage and current capacity)
98
99- Charger device (struct power_chrq):
100 -- *chrg_type - type/capacity of the charger (including information
101 about USB cable disconnection)
102 -- *chrg_bat_present - detection if battery to be charged is
103 present
104 -- *chrg_state - status of the charger - if it is enabled or
105 disabled
106
107- Battery device (struct power_battery):
108 -- *battery_init - assign proper callbacks to be used by top
109 hierarchy battery device
110 -- *battery_charge - called from "pmic" command, responsible
111 for performing the charging
112
113Now two batteries are supported; trats and trats2 [*]. Those differ in the way
114how they handle the exact charging. Trats uses polling (MAX8997) and trats2
115relies on the PMIC/MUIC HW completely (MAX77693).
116
117__Example for trats (this can be very different for other board):__
118 -- *fg_battery_check -> FG device (fg_max17042.c)
119 -- *fg_battery_update -> FG device (fg_max17042.c)
120 -- *chrg_type -> MUIC device (muic_max8997.c)
121 -- *chrg_bat_present -> PMIC device (pmic_max8997.c)
122 -- *chrg_state -> PMIC device (pmic_max8997.c)
123 -- *battery_init -> BAT device (bat_trats.c)
124 -- *battery_charge -> BAT device (bat_trats.c)
125
126Also the struct pmic holds method (*low_power_mode) for reducing board's
127power consumption when one calls "pmic BAT_TRATS bat charge" command.
128
129How to add a new power device
130-----------------------------
131
1321. Simple device should be added with creation of file
133<pmic_function>_<pmic_name>.c, <pmic_name>_<pmic_function>.h according to the
134proposed and described above scheme.
135
136Then "pmic" command supports reading/writing/dump of device's internal
137registers.
138
1392. Charging battery with hierarchy
140Define devices as listed at 1.
141
142Define battery file (bat_<board>.c). Please also note that one might need a
143corresponding battery model description for FG.
144
145For points 1 and 2 use a generic function power_init_board() to initialise the
146power framework on your board.
147
148For reference, please look into the trats/trats2 boards.
149
150TO DO list (for PMICv3) - up till v2014.04
151------------------------------------------
152
1531. Description of the devices related to power via device tree is not available.
154This is the main problem when a developer tries to build a multi-boot u-boot
155binary. The best would be to parse the DTS from Linux kernel.
156
1572. To support many instances of the same IC, like two MAX8997, one needs to
158copy the corresponding pmic_max8997.c file with changed name to "MAX8997_PMICX",
159where X is the device number. This problem will be addressed when extended
160pmic_core.c will support storing available devices in a list.
161
1623. Definition of batteries [*] (for trats/trats2) should be excluded from the
163code responsible for charging them and since it in fact describes the charging
164profile it should be put to a separate file.
165
1664. Adjust the framework to work with the device model.
167
README.pxe
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2/*
3 * Copyright 2010-2011 Calxeda, Inc.
4 */
5
6The 'pxe' commands provide a near subset of the functionality provided by
7the PXELINUX boot loader. This allows U-Boot based systems to be controlled
8remotely using the same PXE based techniques that many non U-Boot based servers
9use.
10
11Commands
12========
13
14pxe get
15-------
16 syntax: pxe get
17
18 follows PXELINUX's rules for retrieving configuration files from a tftp
19 server, and supports a subset of PXELINUX's config file syntax.
20
21 Environment
22 -----------
23 'pxe get' requires two environment variables to be set:
24
25 pxefile_addr_r - should be set to a location in RAM large enough to hold
26 pxe files while they're being processed. Up to 16 config files may be
27 held in memory at once. The exact number and size of the files varies with
28 how the system is being used. A typical config file is a few hundred bytes
29 long.
30
31 bootfile,serverip - these two are typically set in the DHCP response
32 handler, and correspond to fields in the DHCP response.
33
34 'pxe get' optionally supports these two environment variables being set:
35
36 ethaddr - this is the standard MAC address for the ethernet adapter in use.
37 'pxe get' uses it to look for a configuration file specific to a system's
38 MAC address.
39
40 pxeuuid - this is a UUID in standard form using lower case hexadecimal
41 digits, for example, 550e8400-e29b-41d4-a716-446655440000. 'pxe get' uses
42 it to look for a configuration file based on the system's UUID.
43
44 File Paths
45 ----------
46 'pxe get' repeatedly tries to download config files until it either
47 successfully downloads one or runs out of paths to try. The order and
48 contents of paths it tries mirrors exactly that of PXELINUX - you can
49 read in more detail about it at:
50
51 http://syslinux.zytor.com/wiki/index.php/Doc/pxelinux
52
53pxe boot
54--------
55 syntax: pxe boot [pxefile_addr_r]
56
57 Interprets a pxe file stored in memory.
58
59 pxefile_addr_r is an optional argument giving the location of the pxe file.
60 The file must be terminated with a NUL byte.
61
62 Environment
63 -----------
64 There are some environment variables that may need to be set, depending
65 on conditions.
66
67 pxefile_addr_r - if the optional argument pxefile_addr_r is not supplied,
68 an environment variable named pxefile_addr_r must be supplied. This is
69 typically the same value as is used for the 'pxe get' command.
70
71 bootfile - typically set in the DHCP response handler based on the
72 same field in the DHCP respone, this path is used to generate the base
73 directory that all other paths to files retrieved by 'pxe boot' will use.
74 If no bootfile is specified, paths used in pxe files will be used as is.
75
76 serverip - typically set in the DHCP response handler, this is the IP
77 address of the tftp server from which other files will be retrieved.
78
79 kernel_addr_r, initrd_addr_r - locations in RAM at which 'pxe boot' will
80 store the kernel(or FIT image) and initrd it retrieves from tftp. These
81 locations will be passed to the bootm command to boot the kernel. These
82 environment variables are required to be set.
83
84 fdt_addr_r - location in RAM at which 'pxe boot' will store the fdt blob it
85 retrieves from tftp. The retrieval is possible if 'fdt' label is defined in
86 pxe file and 'fdt_addr_r' is set. If retrieval is possible, 'fdt_addr_r'
87 will be passed to bootm command to boot the kernel.
88
89 fdt_addr - the location of a fdt blob. 'fdt_addr' will be passed to bootm
90 command if it is set and 'fdt_addr_r' is not passed to bootm command.
91
92pxe file format
93===============
94The pxe file format is nearly a subset of the PXELINUX file format; see
95http://syslinux.zytor.com/wiki/index.php/PXELINUX. It's composed of one line
96commands - global commands, and commands specific to labels. Lines begining
97with # are treated as comments. White space between and at the beginning of
98lines is ignored.
99
100The size of pxe files and the number of labels is only limited by the amount
101of RAM available to U-Boot. Memory for labels is dynamically allocated as
102they're parsed, and memory for pxe files is statically allocated, and its
103location is given by the pxefile_addr_r environment variable. The pxe code is
104not aware of the size of the pxefile memory and will outgrow it if pxe files
105are too large.
106
107Supported global commands
108-------------------------
109Unrecognized commands are ignored.
110
111default <label> - the label named here is treated as the default and is
112 the first label 'pxe boot' attempts to boot.
113
114menu title <string> - sets a title for the menu of labels being displayed.
115
116menu include <path> - use tftp to retrieve the pxe file at <path>, which
117 is then immediately parsed as if the start of its
118 contents were the next line in the current file. nesting
119 of include up to 16 files deep is supported.
120
121prompt <flag> - if 1, always prompt the user to enter a label to boot
122 from. if 0, only prompt the user if timeout expires.
123
124timeout <num> - wait for user input for <num>/10 seconds before
125 auto-booting a node.
126
127label <name> - begin a label definition. labels continue until
128 a command not recognized as a label command is seen,
129 or EOF is reached.
130
131Supported label commands
132------------------------
133labels end when a command not recognized as a label command is reached, or EOF.
134
135menu default - set this label as the default label to boot; this is
136 the same behavior as the global default command but
137 specified in a different way
138
139kernel <path> - if this label is chosen, use tftp to retrieve the kernel
140 (or FIT image) at <path>. it will be stored at the address
141 indicated in the kernel_addr_r environment variable, and
142 that address will be passed to bootm to boot this kernel.
143 For FIT image, The configuration specification can be
144 appended to the file name, with the format:
145 <path>#<conf>[#<extra-conf[#...]]
146 It will passed to bootm with that address.
147 (see: doc/uImage.FIT/command_syntax_extensions.txt)
148 It useful for overlay selection in pxe file
149 (see: doc/uImage.FIT/overlay-fdt-boot.txt)
150
151append <string> - use <string> as the kernel command line when booting this
152 label.
153
154initrd <path> - if this label is chosen, use tftp to retrieve the initrd
155 at <path>. it will be stored at the address indicated in
156 the initrd_addr_r environment variable, and that address
157 will be passed to bootm.
158
159fdt <path> - if this label is chosen, use tftp to retrieve the fdt blob
160 at <path>. it will be stored at the address indicated in
161 the fdt_addr_r environment variable, and that address will
162 be passed to bootm.
163
164fdtdir <path> - if this label is chosen, use tftp to retrieve a fdt blob
165 relative to <path>. If the fdtfile environment variable
166 is set, <path>/<fdtfile> is retrieved. Otherwise, the
167 filename is generated from the soc and board environment
168 variables, i.e. <path>/<soc>-<board>.dtb is retrieved.
169 If the fdt command is specified, fdtdir is ignored.
170
171localboot <flag> - Run the command defined by "localcmd" in the environment.
172 <flag> is ignored and is only here to match the syntax of
173 PXELINUX config files.
174
175Example
176-------
177Here's a couple of example files to show how this works.
178
179------------/tftpboot/pxelinux.cfg/menus/base.menu-----------
180menu title Linux selections
181
182# This is the default label
183label install
184 menu label Default Install Image
185 kernel kernels/install.bin
186 append console=ttyAMA0,38400 debug earlyprintk
187 initrd initrds/uzInitrdDebInstall
188
189# Just another label
190label linux-2.6.38
191 kernel kernels/linux-2.6.38.bin
192 append root=/dev/sdb1
193
194# The locally installed kernel
195label local
196 menu label Locally installed kernel
197 append root=/dev/sdb1
198 localboot 1
199-------------------------------------------------------------
200
201------------/tftpboot/pxelinux.cfg/default-------------------
202menu include pxelinux.cfg/menus/base.menu
203timeout 500
204
205default linux-2.6.38
206-------------------------------------------------------------
207
208When a pxe client retrieves and boots the default pxe file,
209'pxe boot' will wait for user input for 5 seconds before booting
210the linux-2.6.38 label, which will cause /tftpboot/kernels/linux-2.6.38.bin
211to be downloaded, and boot with the command line "root=/dev/sdb1"
212
213Differences with PXELINUX
214=========================
215The biggest difference between U-Boot's pxe and PXELINUX is that since
216U-Boot's pxe support is written entirely in C, it can run on any platform
217with network support in U-Boot. Here are some other differences between
218PXELINUX and U-Boot's pxe support.
219
220- U-Boot's pxe does not support the PXELINUX DHCP option codes specified
221 in RFC 5071, but could be extended to do so.
222
223- when U-Boot's pxe fails to boot, it will return control to U-Boot,
224 allowing another command to run, other U-Boot command, instead of resetting
225 the machine like PXELINUX.
226
227- U-Boot's pxe doesn't rely on or provide an UNDI/PXE stack in memory, it
228 only uses U-Boot.
229
230- U-Boot's pxe doesn't provide the full menu implementation that PXELINUX
231 does, only a simple text based menu using the commands described in
232 this README. With PXELINUX, it's possible to have a graphical boot
233 menu, submenus, passwords, etc. U-Boot's pxe could be extended to support
234 a more robust menuing system like that of PXELINUX's.
235
236- U-Boot's pxe expects U-Boot uimg's as kernels. Anything that would work
237 with the 'bootm' command in U-Boot could work with the 'pxe boot' command.
238
239- U-Boot's pxe only recognizes a single file on the initrd command line. It
240 could be extended to support multiple.
241
242- in U-Boot's pxe, the localboot command doesn't necessarily cause a local
243 disk boot - it will do whatever is defined in the 'localcmd' env
244 variable. And since it doesn't support a full UNDI/PXE stack, the
245 type field is ignored.
246
247- the interactive prompt in U-Boot's pxe only allows you to choose a label
248 from the menu. If you want to boot something not listed, you can ctrl+c
249 out of 'pxe boot' and use existing U-Boot commands to accomplish it.
250
README.ramboot-ppc85xx
1 RAMBOOT for MPC85xx Platforms
2 ==============================
3
4RAMBOOT literally means boot from DDR. But since DDR is volatile memory some
5pre-mechanism is required to load the DDR with the bootloader binary.
6- In case of SD and SPI boot this is done by BootROM code inside the chip
7 itself.
8- In case of NAND boot FCM supports loading initial 4K code from NAND flash
9 which can initialize the DDR and get the complete bootloader copied to DDR.
10
11In addition to the above there could be some more methods to initialize the DDR
12and load it manually.
13Two of them are described below.There is also an explanation as to where these
14methods could be handy.
151. Load the RAM based bootloader onto DDR via JTAG/BDI interface. And then
16 execute the bootloader from DDR.
17 This may be handy in the following cases:
18 - In very early stage of platform bringup where other boot options are not
19 functional because of various reasons.
20 - In case the support to program the flashes on the board is not available.
21
222. Load the RAM based bootloader onto DDR using already existing bootloader on
23 the board.And then execute the bootloader from DDR.
24 Some usecases where this may be used:
25 - While developing some new feature of u-boot, for example USB driver or
26 SPI driver.
27 Suppose the board already has a working bootloader on it. And you would
28 prefer to keep it intact, at the same time want to test your bootloader.
29 In this case you can get your test bootloader binary into DDR via tftp
30 for example. Then execute the test bootloader.
31 - Suppose a platform already has a propreitery bootloader which does not
32 support for example AMP boot. In this case also RAM boot loader can be
33 utilized.
34
35 So basically when the original bootloader is required to be kept intact
36 RAM based bootloader can offer an updated bootloader on the system.
37
38Both the above Bootloaders are slight variants of SDcard or SPI Flash
39bootloader or for that matter even NAND bootloader.
40All of them define CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT.
41The main difference among all of them is the way the pre-environment is getting
42configured and who is doing that.
43- In case of SD card and SPI flash bootloader this is done by On Chip BootROM inside the Si itself.
44- In case of NAND boot SPL/TPL code does it with some support from Si itself.
45- In case of the pure RAM based bootloaders we have to do it by JTAG manually or already existing bootloader.
46
47How to use them:
481. Using JTAG
49 Boot up in core hold off mode or stop the core after reset using JTAG
50 interface.
51 Preconfigure DDR/L2SRAM through JTAG interface.
52 - setup DDR controller registers.
53 - setup DDR LAWs
54 - setup DDR TLB
55 Load the RAM based boot loader to the proper location in DDR/L2SRAM.
56 set up IAR (Instruction counter properly)
57 Enable the core to execute.
58
592. Using already existing bootloader.
60 get the rambased boot loader binary into DDR/L2SRAM via tftp.
61 execute the RAM based bootloader.
62 => tftp 11000000 u-boot-ram.bin
63 => go 1107f000
64
65Please note that L2SRAM can also be used instead of DDR if the SOC has
66sufficient size of L2SRAM.
67
68Necessary Code changes Required:
69=====================================
70Please note that below mentioned changes are for 85xx platforms.
71They have been tested on P1020/P2020/P1010 RDB.
72
73The main difference between the above two methods from technical perspective is
74that in 1st case SOC is just out of reset so it is in default configuration.
75(CCSRBAR is at 0xff700000).
76In the 2nd case bootloader has already re-located CCSRBAR to 0xffe00000
77
781. File name-> boards.cfg
79 There can be added specific Make options for RAMBoot. We can keep different
80 options for the two cases mentioned above.
81 for example
82 P1020RDB_JTAG_RAMBOOT and P1020RDB_GO_RAMBOOT.
83
842. platform config file
85 for example include/configs/P1_P2_RDB.h
86
87 #ifdef CONFIG_RAMBOOT
88 #define CONFIG_SDCARD
89 #endif
90
91 This will finally use the CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT.
92
933. Change CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT in menuconfig accordingly.
94 In the section of the particular SOC, for example P1020, pseudo code
95
96 #if defined(CONFIG_GO)
97 #define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT 0xffe00000
98 #else
99 #define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT 0xff700000
100 #endif
101
102For JTAG RAMBOOT this is not required because CCSRBAR is at ff700000.
103
README.rmobile
1Summary
2=======
3
4This README is about U-Boot support for Renesas's ARM Cortex-A9 based RMOBILE[1]
5and Cortex-A9/A53/A57 based R-Car[2] family of SoCs. Renesas's RMOBILE/R-Car SoC
6family contains an ARM Cortex-A9/A53/A57.
7
8Currently the following boards are supported:
9
10| SoC | Board | defconfig
11|===============+========================================+===================
12| R8A73A0 | KMC KZM-A9-GT [3] | kzm9g_config
13| R8A7734 | Atmark-Techno Armadillo-800-EVA [4] | armadillo-800eva_config
14|===============+========================================+===================
15| R8A7790 H2 | Renesas Electronics Lager | lager_defconfig
16| | Renesas Electronics Stout | stout_defconfig
17|---------------+----------------------------------------+-------------------
18| R8A7791 M2-W | Renesas Electronics Koelsch | koelsch_defconfig
19| | Renesas Electronics Porter | porter_defconfig
20|---------------+----------------------------------------+-------------------
21| R8A7792 V2H | Renesas Electronics Blanche | blanche_defconfig
22|---------------+----------------------------------------+-------------------
23| R8A7793 M2-N | Renesas Electronics Gose | gose_defconfig
24|---------------+----------------------------------------+-------------------
25| R8A7794 E2 | Renesas Electronics Alt | alt_defconfig
26| | Renesas Electronics Silk | silk_defconfig
27|===============+========================================+===================
28| R8A7795 H3 | Renesas Electronics Salvator-XS ES2.0+ | r8a7795_salvator-x_defconfig
29| R8A7795 H3 | Renesas Electronics ULCB ES2.0+ | r8a7795_ulcb
30|---------------+----------------------------------------+-------------------
31| R8A7796 M3-W | Renesas Electronics Salvator-X | r8a7796_salvator-x_defconfig
32| R8A7796 M3-W | Renesas Electronics ULCB | r8a7796_ulcb
33|---------------+----------------------------------------+-------------------
34| R8A77965 M3-N | Renesas Electronics Salvator-XS | r8a77965_salvator-x_defconfig
35| R8A77965 M3-N | Renesas Electronics ULCB | r8a77965_ulcb
36|---------------+----------------------------------------+-------------------
37| R8A77970 V3M | Renesas Electronics Eagle | r8a77970_eagle_defconfig
38|---------------+----------------------------------------+-------------------
39| R8A77995 D3 | Renesas Electronics Draak | r8a77995_draak_defconfig
40'===============+========================================+===================
41
42Toolchain
43=========
44
45Either ARMv7 toolchain for 32bit Cortex-A9 systems or ARMv8 (aarch64)
46toolchain for 64bit Cortex-A53/A57 systems. Currently we compile the
4732bit systems with -march=armv5 to allow more compilers to work. (For
48U-Boot code this has no performance impact.)
49
50Currently, ELDK[5], Linaro[6], CodeSourcery[7] and Emdebian[8] supports
51ARMv7. Modern distributions also contain ARMv7 and ARMv8 crosstoolchains
52in their package feeds.
53
54Build
55=====
56
57Locate defconfig in the table above. Then apply standard build procedure:
58
59 make <board>_defconfig
60 make
61
62 Note: Armadillo-800-EVA's U-Boot supports booting from SDcard only.
63 Please see "B.2 Appendix B Boot Specifications" in hardware manual.
64
65Links
66=====
67
68[1] Renesas RMOBILE:
69
70http://am.renesas.com/products/soc/assp/mobile/r_mobile/index.jsp
71
72[2] Renesas R-Car:
73
74http://am.renesas.com/products/soc/assp/automotive/index.jsp
75
76[3] KZM-A9-GT
77
78http://www.kmckk.co.jp/kzma9-gt/index.html
79
80[4] Armadillo-800-EVA
81
82http://armadillo.atmark-techno.com/armadillo-800-EVA
83
84[5] ELDK
85
86http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/ELDK-5/WebHome#Section_1.6.
87
88[6] Linaro
89
90http://www.linaro.org/downloads/
91
92[7] CodeSourcey
93
94http://www.mentor.com/embedded-software/codesourcery
95
96[8] Emdebian
97
98http://www.emdebian.org/crosstools.html
99
README.rockchip
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2#
3# Copyright (C) 2015 Google. Inc
4# Written by Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org>
5
6U-Boot on Rockchip
7==================
8
9A wide range of Rockchip SoCs are supported in mainline U-Boot
10
11Warning
12=======
13This document is being moved to doc/board/rockchip, so information on it
14might be incomplete or outdated.
15
16Prerequisites
17=============
18
19You will need:
20
21 - Firefly RK3288 board or something else with a supported RockChip SoC
22 - Power connection to 5V using the supplied micro-USB power cable
23 - Separate USB serial cable attached to your computer and the Firefly
24 (connect to the micro-USB connector below the logo)
25 - rkflashtool [3]
26 - openssl (sudo apt-get install openssl)
27 - Serial UART connection [4]
28 - Suitable ARM cross compiler, e.g.:
29 sudo apt-get install gcc-4.7-arm-linux-gnueabi
30
31Building
32========
33
341. To build RK3288 board:
35
36 CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-gnueabi- make O=firefly firefly-rk3288_defconfig all
37
38 (or you can use another cross compiler if you prefer)
39
402. To build RK3308 board:
41 - Get the rkbin
42 => git clone https://github.com/rockchip-linux/rkbin.git
43
44 - Compile U-Boot
45 => cd /path/to/u-boot
46 => export BL31=/path/to/rkbin/bin/rk33/rk3308_bl31_v2.22.elf
47 => make roc-cc-rk3308_defconfig
48 => make CROSS_COMPILE=aarch64-linux-gnu- all
49 => ./tools/mkimage -n rk3308 -T rksd -d /path/to/rkbin/bin/rk33/rk3308_ddr_589MHz_uart2_m0_v1.26.bin idbloader.img
50 => cat spl/u-boot-spl.bin >> idbloader.img
51
523. To build RK3399 board:
53
54 Option 1: Package the image with Rockchip miniloader:
55
56 - Compile U-Boot
57
58 => cd /path/to/u-boot
59 => make nanopi-neo4-rk3399_defconfig
60 => make
61
62 - Get the rkbin
63
64 => git clone https://github.com/rockchip-linux/rkbin.git
65
66 - Create trust.img
67
68 => cd /path/to/rkbin
69 => ./tools/trust_merger RKTRUST/RK3399TRUST.ini
70
71 - Create uboot.img
72
73 => cd /path/to/rkbin
74 => ./tools/loaderimage --pack --uboot /path/to/u-boot/u-boot-dtb.bin uboot.img
75
76 (Get trust.img and uboot.img)
77
78 Option 2: Package the image with SPL:
79
80 - Export cross compiler path for aarch64
81
82 - Compile ATF
83
84 For Puma board.
85
86 => git clone git://git.theobroma-systems.com/arm-trusted-firmware.git
87 => cd arm-trusted-firmware
88 => make CROSS_COMPILE=aarch64-linux-gnu- PLAT=rk3399 bl31
89
90 (export bl31.bin)
91 => export BL31=/path/to/arm-trusted-firmware/build/rk3399/release/bl31/bl31.bin
92
93 For rest of rk3399 boards.
94
95 => git clone https://github.com/ARM-software/arm-trusted-firmware.git
96 => cd arm-trusted-firmware
97
98 (export cross compiler path for Cortex-M0 MCU likely arm-none-eabi-)
99 => make realclean
100 => make CROSS_COMPILE=aarch64-linux-gnu- PLAT=rk3399
101
102 (export bl31.elf)
103 => export BL31=/path/to/arm-trusted-firmware/build/rk3399/release/bl31/bl31.elf
104
105 - Compile PMU M0 firmware
106
107 This is optional for most of the rk3399 boards and required only for Puma board.
108
109 => git clone git://git.theobroma-systems.com/rk3399-cortex-m0.git
110 => cd rk3399-cortex-m0
111
112 (export cross compiler path for Cortex-M0 PMU)
113 => make CROSS_COMPILE=arm-cortex_m0-eabi-
114
115 (export rk3399m0.bin)
116 => export PMUM0=/path/to/rk3399-cortex-m0/rk3399m0.bin
117
118 - Compile U-Boot
119
120 => cd /path/to/u-boot
121 => make orangepi-rk3399_defconfig
122 => make
123
124 (Get spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin, u-boot.itb images and some boards would get
125 spl/u-boot-spl.bin since it doesn't enable CONFIG_SPL_OF_CONTROL
126
127 If TPL enabled on the target, get tpl/u-boot-tpl-dtb.bin or tpl/u-boot-tpl.bin
128 if CONFIG_TPL_OF_CONTROL not enabled)
129
130Writing to the board with USB
131=============================
132
133For USB to work you must get your board into ROM boot mode, either by erasing
134your MMC or (perhaps) holding the recovery button when you boot the board.
135To erase your MMC, you can boot into Linux and type (as root)
136
137 dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/mmcblk0 bs=1M
138
139Connect your board's OTG port to your computer.
140
141To create a suitable image and write it to the board:
142
143 ./firefly-rk3288/tools/mkimage -n rk3288 -T rkimage -d \
144 ./firefly-rk3288/spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin out && \
145 cat out | openssl rc4 -K 7c4e0304550509072d2c7b38170d1711 | rkflashtool l
146
147If all goes well you should something like:
148
149 U-Boot SPL 2015.07-rc1-00383-ge345740-dirty (Jun 03 2015 - 10:06:49)
150 Card did not respond to voltage select!
151 spl: mmc init failed with error: -17
152 ### ERROR ### Please RESET the board ###
153
154You will need to reset the board before each time you try. Yes, that's all
155it does so far. If support for the Rockchip USB protocol or DFU were added
156in SPL then we could in principle load U-Boot and boot to a prompt from USB
157as several other platforms do. However it does not seem to be possible to
158use the existing boot ROM code from SPL.
159
160
161Writing to the eMMC with USB on ROC-RK3308-CC
162=============================================
163For USB to work you must get your board into Bootrom mode,
164either by erasing the eMMC or short circuit the GND and D0
165on core board.
166
167Connect the board to your computer via tyepc.
168=> rkdeveloptool db rk3308_loader_v1.26.117.bin
169=> rkdeveloptool wl 0x40 idbloader.img
170=> rkdeveloptool wl 0x4000 u-boot.itb
171=> rkdeveloptool rd
172
173Then you will see the boot log from Debug UART at baud rate 1500000:
174DDR Version V1.26
175REGFB: 0x00000032, 0x00000032
176In
177589MHz
178DDR3
179 Col=10 Bank=8 Row=14 Size=256MB
180msch:1
181Returning to boot ROM...
182
183U-Boot SPL 2020.01-rc1-00225-g34b681327f (Nov 14 2019 - 10:58:04 +0800)
184Trying to boot from MMC1
185INFO: Preloader serial: 2
186NOTICE: BL31: v1.3(release):30f1405
187NOTICE: BL31: Built : 17:08:28, Sep 23 2019
188INFO: Lastlog: last=0x100000, realtime=0x102000, size=0x2000
189INFO: ARM GICv2 driver initialized
190INFO: Using opteed sec cpu_context!
191INFO: boot cpu mask: 1
192INFO: plat_rockchip_pmu_init: pd status 0xe b
193INFO: BL31: Initializing runtime services
194WARNING: No OPTEE provided by BL2 boot loader, Booting device without OPTEE initialization. SMC`s destined for OPTEE will rK
195ERROR: Error initializing runtime service opteed_fast
196INFO: BL31: Preparing for EL3 exit to normal world
197INFO: Entry point address = 0x600000
198INFO: SPSR = 0x3c9
199
200
201U-Boot 2020.01-rc1-00225-g34b681327f (Nov 14 2019 - 10:58:47 +0800)
202
203Model: Firefly ROC-RK3308-CC board
204DRAM: 254 MiB
205MMC: dwmmc@ff480000: 0, dwmmc@ff490000: 1
206rockchip_dnl_key_pressed read adc key val failed
207Net: No ethernet found.
208Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
209Card did not respond to voltage select!
210switch to partitions #0, OK
211mmc1(part 0) is current device
212Scanning mmc 1:4...
213Found /extlinux/extlinux.conf
214Retrieving file: /extlinux/extlinux.conf
215151 bytes read in 3 ms (48.8 KiB/s)
2161: kernel-mainline
217Retrieving file: /Image
21814737920 bytes read in 377 ms (37.3 MiB/s)
219append: earlycon=uart8250,mmio32,0xff0c0000 console=ttyS2,1500000n8
220Retrieving file: /rk3308-roc-cc.dtb
22128954 bytes read in 4 ms (6.9 MiB/s)
222Flattened Device Tree blob at 01f00000
223Booting using the fdt blob at 0x1f00000
224## Loading Device Tree to 000000000df3a000, end 000000000df44119 ... OK
225
226Starting kernel ...
227[ 0.000000] Booting Linux on physical CPU 0x0000000000 [0x410fd042]
228[ 0.000000] Linux version 5.4.0-rc1-00040-g4dc2d508fa47-dirty (andy@B150) (gcc version 6.3.1 20170404 (Linaro GCC 6.3-209
229[ 0.000000] Machine model: Firefly ROC-RK3308-CC board
230[ 0.000000] earlycon: uart8250 at MMIO32 0x00000000ff0c0000 (options '')
231[ 0.000000] printk: bootconsole [uart8250] enabled
232
233Booting from an SD card
234=======================
235
236To write an image that boots from an SD card (assumed to be /dev/sdc):
237
238 ./firefly-rk3288/tools/mkimage -n rk3288 -T rksd -d \
239 firefly-rk3288/spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin out && \
240 sudo dd if=out of=/dev/sdc seek=64 && \
241 sudo dd if=firefly-rk3288/u-boot-dtb.img of=/dev/sdc seek=16384
242
243This puts the Rockchip header and SPL image first and then places the U-Boot
244image at block 16384 (i.e. 8MB from the start of the SD card). This
245corresponds with this setting in U-Boot:
246
247 #define CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_SECTOR 0x4000
248
249Put this SD (or micro-SD) card into your board and reset it. You should see
250something like:
251
252 U-Boot 2016.01-rc2-00309-ge5bad3b-dirty (Jan 02 2016 - 23:41:59 -0700)
253
254 Model: Radxa Rock 2 Square
255 DRAM: 2 GiB
256 MMC: dwmmc@ff0f0000: 0, dwmmc@ff0c0000: 1
257 *** Warning - bad CRC, using default environment
258
259 In: serial
260 Out: vop@ff940000.vidconsole
261 Err: serial
262 Net: Net Initialization Skipped
263 No ethernet found.
264 Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
265 =>
266
267The rockchip bootrom can load and boot an initial spl, then continue to
268load a second-stage bootloader (ie. U-Boot) as soon as the control is returned
269to the bootrom. Both the RK3288 and the RK3036 use this special boot sequence.
270The configuration option enabling this is:
271
272 CONFIG_SPL_ROCKCHIP_BACK_TO_BROM=y
273
274You can create the image via the following operations:
275
276 ./firefly-rk3288/tools/mkimage -n rk3288 -T rksd -d \
277 firefly-rk3288/spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin out && \
278 cat firefly-rk3288/u-boot-dtb.bin >> out && \
279 sudo dd if=out of=/dev/sdc seek=64
280
281Or:
282 ./firefly-rk3288/tools/mkimage -n rk3288 -T rksd -d \
283 firefly-rk3288/spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin:firefly-rk3288/u-boot-dtb.bin \
284 out && \
285 sudo dd if=out of=/dev/sdc seek=64
286
287If you have an HDMI cable attached you should see a video console.
288
289For evb_rk3036 board:
290 ./evb-rk3036/tools/mkimage -n rk3036 -T rksd -d evb-rk3036/spl/u-boot-spl.bin out && \
291 cat evb-rk3036/u-boot-dtb.bin >> out && \
292 sudo dd if=out of=/dev/sdc seek=64
293
294Or:
295 ./evb-rk3036/tools/mkimage -n rk3036 -T rksd -d \
296 evb-rk3036/spl/u-boot-spl.bin:evb-rk3036/u-boot-dtb.bin out && \
297 sudo dd if=out of=/dev/sdc seek=64
298
299Note: rk3036 SDMMC and debug uart use the same iomux, so if you boot from SD, the
300 debug uart must be disabled
301
302
303Booting from an SD card on RK3288 with TPL
304==========================================
305
306Since the size of SPL can't be exceeded 0x8000 bytes in RK3288, it is not possible add
307new SPL features like Falcon mode or etc.
308
309So introduce TPL so-that adding new features to SPL is possible because now TPL should
310run minimal with code like DDR, clock etc and rest of new features in SPL.
311
312As of now TPL is added on Vyasa-RK3288 board.
313
314To write an image that boots from an SD card (assumed to be /dev/mmcblk0):
315
316 sudo dd if=idbloader.img of=/dev/mmcblk0 seek=64 &&
317 sudo dd if=u-boot-dtb.img of=/dev/mmcblk0 seek=16384
318
319Booting from an SD card on RK3188
320=================================
321
322For rk3188 boards the general storage onto the card stays the same as
323described above, but the image creation needs a bit more care.
324
325The bootrom of rk3188 expects to find a small 1kb loader which returns
326control to the bootrom, after which it will load the real loader, which
327can then be up to 29kb in size and does the regular ddr init. This is
328handled by a single image (built as the SPL stage) that tests whether
329it is handled for the first or second time via code executed from the
330boot0-hook.
331
332Additionally the rk3188 requires everything the bootrom loads to be
333rc4-encrypted. Except for the very first stage the bootrom always reads
334and decodes 2kb pages, so files should be sized accordingly.
335
336# copy tpl, pad to 1020 bytes and append spl
337tools/mkimage -n rk3188 -T rksd -d spl/u-boot-spl.bin out
338
339# truncate, encode and append u-boot.bin
340truncate -s %2048 u-boot.bin
341cat u-boot.bin | split -b 512 --filter='openssl rc4 -K 7C4E0304550509072D2C7B38170D1711' >> out
342
343Booting from an SD card on Pine64 Rock64 (RK3328)
344=================================================
345
346For Rock64 rk3328 board the following three parts are required:
347TPL, SPL, and the u-boot image tree blob.
348
349 - Write TPL/SPL image at 64 sector
350
351 => sudo dd if=idbloader.img of=/dev/mmcblk0 seek=64
352
353 - Write u-boot image tree blob at 16384 sector
354
355 => sudo dd if=u-boot.itb of=/dev/mmcblk0 seek=16384
356
357Booting from an SD card on RK3399
358=================================
359
360To write an image that boots from an SD card (assumed to be /dev/sdc):
361
362Option 1: Package the image with Rockchip miniloader:
363
364 - Create idbloader.img
365
366 => cd /path/to/u-boot
367 => ./tools/mkimage -n rk3399 -T rksd -d /path/to/rkbin/bin/rk33/rk3399_ddr_800MHz_v1.20.bin idbloader.img
368 => cat /path/to/rkbin/bin/rk33/rk3399_miniloader_v1.19.bin >> idbloader.img
369
370 - Write idbloader.img at 64 sector
371
372 => sudo dd if=idbloader.img of=/dev/sdc seek=64
373
374 - Write trust.img at 24576
375
376 => sudo dd if=trust.img of=/dev/sdc seek=24576
377
378 - Write uboot.img at 16384 sector
379
380 => sudo dd if=uboot.img of=/dev/sdc seek=16384
381 => sync
382
383Put this SD (or micro-SD) card into your board and reset it. You should see
384something like:
385
386DDR Version 1.20 20190314
387In
388Channel 0: DDR3, 933MHz
389Bus Width=32 Col=10 Bank=8 Row=15 CS=1 Die Bus-Width=16 Size=1024MB
390no stride
391ch 0 ddrconfig = 0x101, ddrsize = 0x20
392pmugrf_os_reg[2] = 0x10006281, stride = 0x17
393OUT
394Boot1: 2019-03-14, version: 1.19
395CPUId = 0x0
396ChipType = 0x10, 239
397mmc: ERROR: SDHCI ERR:cmd:0x102,stat:0x18000
398mmc: ERROR: Card did not respond to voltage select!
399emmc reinit
400mmc: ERROR: SDHCI ERR:cmd:0x102,stat:0x18000
401mmc: ERROR: Card did not respond to voltage select!
402emmc reinit
403mmc: ERROR: SDHCI ERR:cmd:0x102,stat:0x18000
404mmc: ERROR: Card did not respond to voltage select!
405SdmmcInit=2 1
406mmc0:cmd5,20
407SdmmcInit=0 0
408BootCapSize=0
409UserCapSize=60543MB
410FwPartOffset=2000 , 0
411StorageInit ok = 45266
412SecureMode = 0
413SecureInit read PBA: 0x4
414SecureInit read PBA: 0x404
415SecureInit read PBA: 0x804
416SecureInit read PBA: 0xc04
417SecureInit read PBA: 0x1004
418SecureInit read PBA: 0x1404
419SecureInit read PBA: 0x1804
420SecureInit read PBA: 0x1c04
421SecureInit ret = 0, SecureMode = 0
422atags_set_bootdev: ret:(0)
423GPT 0x3380ec0 signature is wrong
424recovery gpt...
425GPT 0x3380ec0 signature is wrong
426recovery gpt fail!
427LoadTrust Addr:0x4000
428No find bl30.bin
429Load uboot, ReadLba = 2000
430hdr 0000000003380880 + 0x0:0x88,0x41,0x3e,0x97,0xe6,0x61,0x54,0x23,0xe9,0x5a,0xd1,0x2b,0xdc,0x2f,0xf9,0x35,
431
432Load OK, addr=0x200000, size=0x9c9c0
433RunBL31 0x10000
434NOTICE: BL31: v1.3(debug):370ab80
435NOTICE: BL31: Built : 09:23:41, Mar 4 2019
436NOTICE: BL31: Rockchip release version: v1.1
437INFO: GICv3 with legacy support detected. ARM GICV3 driver initialized in EL3
438INFO: Using opteed sec cpu_context!
439INFO: boot cpu mask: 0
440INFO: plat_rockchip_pmu_init(1181): pd status 3e
441INFO: BL31: Initializing runtime services
442INFO: BL31: Initializing BL32
443INF [0x0] TEE-CORE:init_primary_helper:337: Initializing (1.1.0-195-g8f090d20 #6 Fri Dec 7 06:11:20 UTC 2018 aarch64)
444
445INF [0x0] TEE-CORE:init_primary_helper:338: Release version: 1.2
446
447INF [0x0] TEE-CORE:init_teecore:83: teecore inits done
448INFO: BL31: Preparing for EL3 exit to normal world
449INFO: Entry point address = 0x200000
450INFO: SPSR = 0x3c9
451
452
453U-Boot 2019.04-rc4-00136-gfd121f9641-dirty (Apr 16 2019 - 14:02:47 +0530)
454
455Model: FriendlyARM NanoPi NEO4
456DRAM: 1022 MiB
457MMC: dwmmc@fe310000: 2, dwmmc@fe320000: 1, sdhci@fe330000: 0
458Loading Environment from MMC... *** Warning - bad CRC, using default environment
459
460In: serial@ff1a0000
461Out: serial@ff1a0000
462Err: serial@ff1a0000
463Model: FriendlyARM NanoPi NEO4
464Net: eth0: ethernet@fe300000
465Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
466=>
467
468Option 2: Package the image with SPL:
469
470 - Prefix rk3399 header to SPL image
471
472 => cd /path/to/u-boot
473 => ./tools/mkimage -n rk3399 -T rksd -d spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin out
474
475 - Write prefixed SPL at 64th sector
476
477 => sudo dd if=out of=/dev/sdc seek=64
478
479 - Write U-Boot proper at 16384 sector
480
481 => sudo dd if=u-boot.itb of=/dev/sdc seek=16384
482 => sync
483
484Put this SD (or micro-SD) card into your board and reset it. You should see
485something like:
486
487U-Boot SPL board init
488Trying to boot from MMC1
489
490
491U-Boot 2019.01-00004-g14db5ee998 (Mar 11 2019 - 13:18:41 +0530)
492
493Model: Orange Pi RK3399 Board
494DRAM: 2 GiB
495MMC: dwmmc@fe310000: 2, dwmmc@fe320000: 1, sdhci@fe330000: 0
496Loading Environment from MMC... OK
497In: serial@ff1a0000
498Out: serial@ff1a0000
499Err: serial@ff1a0000
500Model: Orange Pi RK3399 Board
501Net: eth0: ethernet@fe300000
502Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
503=>
504
505Option 3: Package the image with TPL:
506
507 - Write tpl+spl at 64th sector
508
509 => sudo dd if=idbloader.img of=/dev/sdc seek=64
510
511 - Write U-Boot proper at 16384 sector
512
513 => sudo dd if=u-boot.itb of=/dev/sdc seek=16384
514 => sync
515
516Put this SD (or micro-SD) card into your board and reset it. You should see
517something like:
518
519U-Boot TPL board init
520Trying to boot from BOOTROM
521Returning to boot ROM...
522
523U-Boot SPL board init
524Trying to boot from MMC1
525
526
527U-Boot 2019.07-rc1-00241-g5b3244767a (May 08 2019 - 10:51:06 +0530)
528
529Model: Orange Pi RK3399 Board
530DRAM: 2 GiB
531MMC: dwmmc@fe310000: 2, dwmmc@fe320000: 1, sdhci@fe330000: 0
532Loading Environment from MMC... OK
533In: serial@ff1a0000
534Out: serial@ff1a0000
535Err: serial@ff1a0000
536Model: Orange Pi RK3399 Board
537Net: eth0: ethernet@fe300000
538Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
539=>
540
541Using fastboot on rk3288
542========================
543- Write GPT partition layout to mmc device which fastboot want to use it to
544store the image
545
546 => gpt write mmc 1 $partitions
547
548- Invoke fastboot command to prepare
549
550 => fastboot 1
551
552- Start fastboot request on PC
553
554 fastboot -i 0x2207 flash loader evb-rk3288/spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin
555
556You should see something like:
557
558 => fastboot 1
559 WARNING: unknown variable: partition-type:loader
560 Starting download of 357796 bytes
561 ..
562 downloading of 357796 bytes finished
563 Flashing Raw Image
564 ........ wrote 357888 bytes to 'loader'
565
566Booting from SPI
567================
568
569To write an image that boots from SPI flash (e.g. for the Haier Chromebook or
570Bob):
571
572 ./chromebook_jerry/tools/mkimage -n rk3288 -T rkspi \
573 -d chromebook_jerry/spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin spl.bin && \
574 dd if=spl.bin of=spl-out.bin bs=128K conv=sync && \
575 cat spl-out.bin chromebook_jerry/u-boot-dtb.img >out.bin && \
576 dd if=out.bin of=out.bin.pad bs=4M conv=sync
577
578This converts the SPL image to the required SPI format by adding the Rockchip
579header and skipping every second 2KB block. Then the U-Boot image is written at
580offset 128KB and the whole image is padded to 4MB which is the SPI flash size.
581The position of U-Boot is controlled with this setting in U-Boot:
582
583 #define CONFIG_SYS_SPI_U_BOOT_OFFS 0x20000
584
585If you have a Dediprog em100pro connected then you can write the image with:
586
587 sudo em100 -s -c GD25LQ32 -d out.bin.pad -r
588
589When booting you should see something like:
590
591 U-Boot SPL 2015.07-rc2-00215-g9a58220-dirty (Jun 23 2015 - 12:11:32)
592
593
594 U-Boot 2015.07-rc2-00215-g9a58220-dirty (Jun 23 2015 - 12:11:32 -0600)
595
596 Model: Google Jerry
597 DRAM: 2 GiB
598 MMC:
599 Using default environment
600
601 In: serial@ff690000
602 Out: serial@ff690000
603 Err: serial@ff690000
604 =>
605
606Future work
607===========
608
609Immediate priorities are:
610
611- USB host
612- USB device
613- Run CPU at full speed (code exists but we only see ~60 DMIPS maximum)
614- NAND flash
615- Boot U-Boot proper over USB OTG (at present only SPL works)
616
617
618Development Notes
619=================
620
621There are plenty of patches in the links below to help with this work.
622
623[1] https://github.com/rkchrome/uboot.git
624[2] https://github.com/linux-rockchip/u-boot-rockchip.git branch u-boot-rk3288
625[3] https://github.com/linux-rockchip/rkflashtool.git
626[4] http://wiki.t-firefly.com/index.php/Firefly-RK3288/Serial_debug/en
627
628rkimage
629-------
630
631rkimage.c produces an SPL image suitable for sending directly to the boot ROM
632over USB OTG. This is a very simple format - just the string RK32 (as 4 bytes)
633followed by u-boot-spl-dtb.bin.
634
635The boot ROM loads image to 0xff704000 which is in the internal SRAM. The SRAM
636starts at 0xff700000 and extends to 0xff718000 where we put the stack.
637
638rksd
639----
640
641rksd.c produces an image consisting of 32KB of empty space, a header and
642u-boot-spl-dtb.bin. The header is defined by 'struct header0_info' although
643most of the fields are unused by U-Boot. We just need to specify the
644signature, a flag and the block offset and size of the SPL image.
645
646The header occupies a single block but we pad it out to 4 blocks. The header
647is encoding using RC4 with the key 7c4e0304550509072d2c7b38170d1711. The SPL
648image can be encoded too but we don't do that.
649
650The maximum size of u-boot-spl-dtb.bin which the boot ROM will read is 32KB,
651or 0x40 blocks. This is a severe and annoying limitation. There may be a way
652around this limitation, since there is plenty of SRAM, but at present the
653board refuses to boot if this limit is exceeded.
654
655The image produced is padded up to a block boundary (512 bytes). It should be
656written to the start of an SD card using dd.
657
658Since this image is set to load U-Boot from the SD card at block offset,
659CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_SECTOR, dd should be used to write
660u-boot-dtb.img to the SD card at that offset. See above for instructions.
661
662rkspi
663-----
664
665rkspi.c produces an image consisting of a header and u-boot-spl-dtb.bin. The
666resulting image is then spread out so that only the first 2KB of each 4KB
667sector is used. The header is the same as with rksd and the maximum size is
668also 32KB (before spreading). The image should be written to the start of
669SPI flash.
670
671See above for instructions on how to write a SPI image.
672
673rkmux.py
674--------
675
676You can use this script to create #defines for SoC register access. See the
677script for usage.
678
679
680Device tree and driver model
681----------------------------
682
683Where possible driver model is used to provide a structure to the
684functionality. Device tree is used for configuration. However these have an
685overhead and in SPL with a 32KB size limit some shortcuts have been taken.
686In general all Rockchip drivers should use these features, with SPL-specific
687modifications where required.
688
689GPT partition layout
690----------------------------
691
692Rockchip use a unified GPT partition layout in open source support.
693With this GPT partition layout, uboot can be compatilbe with other components,
694like miniloader, trusted-os, arm-trust-firmware.
695
696There are some documents about partitions in the links below.
697http://rockchip.wikidot.com/partitions
698
699--
700Jagan Teki <jagan@amarulasolutions.com>
70127 Mar 2019
702Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org>
70324 June 2015
704
README.rockusb
1Rockusb (Rockchip USB protocol)
2=====================================================
3
4Overview
5--------
6
7Rockusb protocol is widely used by Rockchip SoC based devices. It can
8read/write info, image to/from devices. This document briefly describes how to
9use Rockusb for upgrading firmware (e.g. kernel, u-boot, rootfs, etc.).
10
11Tools
12--------
13There are many tools can support Rockusb protocol. rkdeveloptool
14(https://github.com/rockchip-linux/rkdeveloptool) is open source,
15It is maintained by Rockchip. People don't want to build from source
16can download from here
17(https://github.com/rockchip-linux/rkbin/blob/master/tools/rkdeveloptool)
18
19Usage
20--------
21The Usage of Rockusb command is:
22
23rockusb <USB_controller> <devtype> <dev[:part]>
24
25e.g. rockusb 0 mmc 0
26
27On your U-Boot console, type this command to enter rockusb mode.
28On your host PC. use lsusb command. you should see a usb device
29using 0x2207 as its USB verdor id.
30
31for more detail about the rkdeveloptool. please read the usage.
32
33rkdeveloptool -h
34
35use rkdeveloptool wl command to write lba. BeginSec is the lba on device
36you want to write.
37
38sudo rkdeveloptool wl <BeginSec> <File>
39
40to flash U-Boot image use below command. U-Boot binary is made by mkimage.
41see doc/README.rockchip for more detail about how to get U-Boot binary.
42
43sudo rkdeveloptool wl 64 <U-Boot binary>
44
45Current set of rkdeveloptool commands supported:
46- rci: Read Chip Info
47- rfi: Read Flash Id
48- rd : Reset Device
49- td : Test Device Ready
50- rl : Read blocks using LBA
51- wl : Write blocks using LBA
52- wlx: Write partition
53
54To do
55-----
56* Fully support Rockusb protocol
57
README.s5pc1xx
1
2Summary
3=======
4
5This README is about U-Boot support for SAMSUNG's ARM Cortex-A8 based S5PC1xx
6family of SoCs (S5PC100 [1] and S5PC110).
7
8Currently the following board is supported:
9
10* SMDKC100 [2]
11
12Toolchain
13=========
14
15While ARM Cortex-A8 support ARM v7 instruction set (-march=armv7a) we compile
16with -march=armv5 to allow more compilers to work. For U-Boot code this has
17no performance impact.
18
19Build
20=====
21
22* SMDKC100
23
24make smdkc100_config
25make
26
27
28Interfaces
29==========
30
31cpu
32
33To check SoC:
34
35 if (cpu_is_s5pc100())
36 printf("cpu is s5pc100\n");
37
38 or
39
40 if (cpu_is_s5pc110())
41 printf("cpu is s5pc110\n");
42
43gpio
44
45 struct s5pc100_gpio *gpio = (struct s5pc100_gpio*)S5PC100_GPIO_BASE;
46
47 /* GPA[0] pin set to irq */
48 gpio_cfg_pin(&gpio->gpio_a, 0, GPIO_IRQ);
49
50 /* GPA[0] pin set to input */
51 gpio_direction_input(&gpio->gpio_a, 0);
52
53 /* GPA[0] pin set to output/high */
54 gpio_direction_output(&gpio->gpio_a, 0, 1);
55
56 /* GPA[0] value set to low */
57 gpio_set_value(&gpio->gpio_a, 0, 0);
58
59 /* get GPA[0] value */
60 value = gpio_get_value(&gpio->gpio_a, 0);
61
62Links
63=====
64
65[1] S5PC100:
66
67http://www.samsung.com/global/business/semiconductor/productInfo.do?
68fmly_id=229&partnum=S5PC100
69
70[2] SMDKC100:
71
72http://meritech.co.kr/eng/products/product_view.php?num=28
73
README.sata
11. SATA usage in U-Boot
2
3 There are two ways to operate the hard disk
4
5 * Read/write raw blocks from/to SATA hard disk
6 * ext2load to read a file from ext2 file system
7
81.0 How to read the SATA hard disk's information?
9
10 => sata info
11
12SATA device 0: Model: ST3320620AS Firm: 3.AAD Ser#: 4QF01ZTN
13 Type: Hard Disk
14 Supports 48-bit addressing
15 Capacity: 305245.3 MB = 298.0 GB (625142448 x 512)
16
171.1 How to raw write the kernel, file system, dtb to a SATA hard disk?
18
19 Notes: Hard disk sectors are normally 512 bytes, so
20 0x1000 sectors = 2 MBytes
21
22 write kernel
23 => tftp 40000 /tftpboot/uImage.837x
24 => sata write 40000 0 2000
25
26 write ramdisk
27 => tftp 40000 /tftpboot/ramdisk.837x
28 => sata write 40000 2000 8000
29
30 write dtb
31 => tftp 40000 /tftpboot/mpc837xemds.dtb
32 => sata write 40000 a000 1000
33
341.2 How to raw read the kernel, file system, dtb from a SATA hard disk?
35
36 load kernel
37 => sata read 200000 0 2000
38
39 load ramdisk
40 => sata read 1000000 2000 8000
41
42 load dtb
43 => sata read 2000000 a000 1000
44
45 boot
46 => bootm 200000 1000000 2000000
47
481.3 How to load an image from an ext2 file system in U-Boot?
49
50 U-Boot doesn't support writing to an ext2 file system, so the
51 files must be written by other means (e.g. linux).
52
53 => ext2ls sata 0:1 /
54 <DIR> 4096 .
55 <DIR> 4096 ..
56 <DIR> 16384 lost+found
57 1352023 uImage.837x
58 3646377 ramdisk.837x
59 12288 mpc837xemds.dtb
60 12 hello.txt
61
62 => ext2load sata 0:1 200000 /uImage.837x
63
64 => ext2load sata 0:1 1000000 /ramdisk.837x
65
66 => ext2load sata 0:1 2000000 /mpc837xemds.dtb
67
68 => bootm 200000 1000000 2000000
69
README.sched
1Notes on the scheduler in sched.c:
2~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3
4 'sched.c' provides an very simplistic multi-threading scheduler.
5 See the example, function 'sched(...)', in the same file for its
6 API usage.
7
8 Until an exhaustive testing can be done, the implementation cannot
9 qualify as that of production quality. It works with the example
10 in 'sched.c', it may or may not work in other cases.
11
12
13Limitations:
14~~~~~~~~~~~~
15
16 - There are NO primitives for thread synchronization (locking,
17 notify etc).
18
19 - Only the GPRs and FPRs context is saved during a thread context
20 switch. Other registers on the PowerPC processor (60x, 7xx, 7xxx
21 etc) are NOT saved.
22
23 - The scheduler is NOT transparent to the user. The user
24 applications must invoke thread_yield() to allow other threads to
25 scheduler.
26
27 - There are NO priorities, and the scheduling policy is round-robin
28 based.
29
30 - There are NO capabilities to collect thread CPU usage, scheduler
31 stats, thread status etc.
32
33 - The semantics are somewhat based on those of pthreads, but NOT
34 the same.
35
36 - Only seven threads are allowed. These can be easily increased by
37 changing "#define MAX_THREADS" depending on the available memory.
38
39 - The stack size of each thread is 8KBytes. This can be easily
40 increased depending on the requirement and the available memory,
41 by increasing "#define STK_SIZE".
42
43 - Only one master/parent thread is allowed, and it cannot be
44 stopped or deleted. Any given thread is NOT allowed to stop or
45 delete itself.
46
47 - There NOT enough safety checks as are probably in the other
48 threads implementations.
49
50 - There is no parent-child relationship between threads. Only one
51 thread may thread_join, preferably the master/parent thread.
52
53(C) 2003 Arun Dharankar <ADharankar@ATTBI.Com>
54
README.scrapyard
1Over time, support for more and more boards gets added to U-Boot -
2while other board support code dies a silent death caused by
3negligence in combination with ordinary bitrot. Sometimes this goes
4by unnoticed, but often build errors will result. If nobody cares any
5more to resolve such problems, then the code is really dead and will
6be removed from the U-Boot source tree. The remainders rest in peace
7in the imperishable depths of the git history. Please use the tools
8git provides to read through this history. A common example would be:
9$ git log -p --follow -- board/technexion/twister
10to see the history and changes made to the Technexion "twister" board
11from introduction to removal.
12
README.semihosting
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2/*
3 * Copyright 2014 Broadcom Corporation.
4 */
5
6Semihosting is ARM's way of having a real or virtual target communicate
7with a host or host debugger for basic operations such as file I/O,
8console I/O, etc. Please see
9http://infocenter.arm.com/help/index.jsp?topic=/com.arm.doc.dui0471c/Bgbjjgij.html for more information.
10
11For developing on armv8 virtual fastmodel platforms, semihosting is a
12valuable tool since it allows access to image/configuration files before
13eMMC or other NV media are available.
14
15There are two main ARM virtual Fixed Virtual Platform (FVP) models,
16Versatile Express (VE) FVP and BASE FVP (See
17http://www.arm.com/products/tools/models/fast-models/foundation-model.php)
18The initial vexpress64 u-boot board created here runs on the VE virtual
19platform using the license-free Foundation_v8 simulator. Fortunately,
20the Foundation_v8 simulator also supports the BASE_FVP model which
21companies can purchase licenses for and contain much more functionality.
22So we can, in u-boot, run either model by either using the VE FVP (default),
23or turning on CONFIG_BASE_FVP for the more full featured model.
24
25Rather than create a new armv8 board similar to armltd/vexpress64, add
26semihosting calls to the existing one, enabled with CONFIG_SEMIHOSTING
27and CONFIG_BASE_FVP both set. Also reuse the existing board config file
28vexpress_aemv8a.h but differentiate the two models by the presence or
29absence of CONFIG_BASE_FVP. This change is tested and works on both the
30Foundation and Base fastmodel simulators.
31
32The semihosting code adds a command:
33
34 smhload <image> <address> [env var]
35
36That will load an image from the host filesystem into RAM at the specified
37address and optionally store the load end address in the specified
38environment variable.
39
README.serial_multi
1The support for multiple serial interfaces as implemented is mainly
2intended to allow for modem dial-in / dial-out while still being able
3to use a serial console on a (different) serial port.
4
5MPC8XX Specific
6===============
7At the moment, the ports must be split on a SMC and a SCC port on a
88xx processor; other configurations are not (yet) supported.
9
10Support for hardware handshake has not been implemented yet (but is
11in the works).
12
13*) The default console depends on the keys pressed:
14 - SMC if keys not pressed (modem not enabled)
15 - SCC if keys pressed (modem enabled)
16
17*) The console can be switched to SCC by any of the following commands:
18
19 setenv stdout serial_scc
20 setenv stdin serial_scc
21 setenv stderr serial_scc
22
23*) The console can be switched to SMC by any of the following commands:
24
25 setenv stdout serial_smc
26 setenv stdin serial_smc
27 setenv stderr serial_smc
28
29*) If a file descriptor is set to "serial" then the current serial device
30will be used which, in turn, can be switched by above commands.
31
32*) The baudrate is the same for all serial devices. But it can be switched
33just after switching the console:
34
35 setenv sout serial_scc; setenv baudrate 38400
36
37After that press 'enter' at the SCC console. Note that baudrates <38400
38are not allowed on LWMON with watchdog enabled (see CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE in
39include/configs/lwmon.h).
40
41
42PPC4XX Specific
43===============
44*) The default console is UART0
45
46*) The console can be switched to UART1 by any of the following commands:
47 setenv stdout serial1
48 setenv stderr serial1
49 setenv stdin serial1
50
51*) The console can be switched to UART0 by any of the following commands:
52 setenv stdout serial0
53 setenv stderr serial0
54 setenv stdin serial0
55
README.sha1
1SHA1 usage:
2-----------
3
4In the U-Boot Image for the pcs440ep board is a SHA1 checksum integrated.
5This SHA1 sum is used, to check, if the U-Boot Image in Flash is not
6corrupted.
7
8The following command is available:
9
10=> help sha1
11sha1 address len [addr] calculate the SHA1 sum [save at addr]
12 -p calculate the SHA1 sum from the U-Boot image in flash and print
13 -c check the U-Boot image in flash
14
15"sha1 -p"
16 calculates and prints the SHA1 sum, from the Image stored in Flash
17
18"sha1 -c"
19 check, if the SHA1 sum from the Image stored in Flash is correct
20
21
22It is possible to calculate a SHA1 checksum from a memoryrange with:
23
24"sha1 address len"
25
26If you want to store a new Image in Flash for the pcs440ep board,
27which has no SHA1 sum, you can do the following:
28
29a) cp the new Image on a position in RAM (here 0x300000)
30 (for this example we use the Image from Flash, stored at 0xfffa0000 and
31 0x60000 Bytes long)
32
33"cp.b fffa0000 300000 60000"
34
35b) Initialize the SHA1 sum in the Image with 0x00
36 The SHA1 sum is stored in Flash at:
37 CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE + CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_LEN + SHA1_SUM_POS
38 for the pcs440ep Flash: 0xfffa0000 + 0x60000 + -0x20
39 = 0xffffffe0
40 for the example in RAM: 0x300000 + 0x60000 + -0x20
41 = 0x35ffe0
42
43 note: a SHA1 checksum is 20 bytes long.
44
45"mw.b 35ffe0 0 14"
46
47c) now calculate the SHA1 sum from the memoryrange and write
48 the calculated checksum at the right place:
49
50"sha1 300000 60000 35ffe0"
51
52Now you have a U-Boot-Image for the pcs440ep board with the correct SHA1 sum.
53
54If you do a "buildman -k pcs440ep" or a "make all" to get the U-Boot image,
55which will be found in ../current/ipam390/ - the correct SHA1 sum will be
56automagically included in the U-Boot image.
57
58Heiko Schocher, 11 Jul 2007
59
README.silent
1The config option CONFIG_SILENT_CONSOLE can be used to quiet messages
2on the console. If the option has been enabled, the output can be
3silenced by setting the environment variable "silent".
4
5- CONFIG_SILENT_CONSOLE_UPDATE_ON_SET
6 When the "silent" variable is changed with env set, the change
7 will take effect immediately.
8
9- CONFIG_SILENT_CONSOLE_UPDATE_ON_RELOC
10 Some environments are not available until relocation (e.g. NAND)
11 so this will make the value in the flash env take effect at
12 relocation.
13
14The following actions are taken if "silent" is set at boot time:
15
16 - Until the console devices have been initialized, output has to be
17 suppressed by testing for the flag "GD_FLG_SILENT" in "gd->flags".
18
19 - When the console devices have been initialized, "stdout" and
20 "stderr" are set to "nulldev", so subsequent messages are
21 suppressed automatically. Make sure to enable "nulldev" by
22 #defining CONFIG_SYS_DEVICE_NULLDEV in your board config file.
23
24 - When booting a linux kernel, the "bootargs" are fixed up so that
25 the argument "console=" will be in the command line, no matter how
26 it was set in "bootargs" before. If you don't want the linux command
27 line to be affected, define CONFIG_SILENT_U_BOOT_ONLY in your board
28 config file as well, and this part of the feature will be disabled.
29
README.socfpga
1----------------------------------------
2SOCFPGA Documentation for U-Boot and SPL
3----------------------------------------
4
5This README is about U-Boot and SPL support for Altera's ARM Cortex-A9MPCore
6based SOCFPGA. To know more about the hardware itself, please refer to
7www.altera.com.
8
9
10socfpga_dw_mmc
11--------------
12
13Here are macro and detailed configuration required to enable DesignWare SDMMC
14controller support within SOCFPGA
15
16#define CONFIG_SYS_MMC_MAX_BLK_COUNT 256
17-> Using smaller max blk cnt to avoid flooding the limited stack in OCRAM
18
19--------------------------------------------------
20Generating the handoff header files for U-Boot SPL
21--------------------------------------------------
22
23This text is assuming quartus 16.1, but newer versions will probably work just fine too;
24verified with DE1_SOC_Linux_FB demo project (https://github.com/VCTLabs/DE1_SOC_Linux_FB).
25Updated/working projects should build using either process below.
26
27Note: it *should* work from Quartus 14.0.200 onwards, however, the current vendor demo
28projects must have the IP cores updated as shown below.
29
30Rebuilding your Quartus project
31-------------------------------
32
33Choose one of the follwing methods, either command line or GUI.
34
35Using the comaand line
36~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
37
38First run the embedded command shell, using your path to the Quartus install:
39
40 $ /path/to/intelFPGA/16.1/embedded/embedded_command_shell.sh
41
42Then (if necessary) update the IP cores in the project, generate HDL code, and
43build the project:
44
45 $ cd path/to/project/dir
46 $ qsys-generate soc_system.qsys --upgrade-ip-cores
47 $ qsys-generate soc_system.qsys --synthesis=[VERILOG|VHDL]
48 $ quartus_sh --flow compile <project name>
49
50Convert the resulting .sof file (SRAM object file) to .rbf file (Raw bit file):
51
52 $ quartus_cpf -c <project_name>.sof soc_system.rbf
53
54
55Generate BSP handoff files
56~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
57
58You can run the bsp editor GUI below, or run the following command from the
59project directory:
60
61 $ /path/to/bsb/tools/bsp-create-settings --type spl --bsp-dir build \
62 --preloader-settings-dir hps_isw_handoff/soc_system_hps_0/ \
63 --settings build/settings.bsp
64
65You should use the bsp "build" directory above (ie, where the settings.bsp file is)
66in the following u-boot command to update the board headers. Once these headers
67are updated for a given project build, u-boot should be configured for the
68project board (eg, de0-nano-sockit) and then build the normal spl build.
69
70Now you can skip the GUI section.
71
72
73Using the Qsys GUI
74~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
75
761. Navigate to your project directory
772. Run Quartus II
783. Open Project (Ctrl+J), select <project_name>.qpf
794. Run QSys [Tools->QSys]
80 4.1 In the Open dialog, select '<project_name>.qsys'
81 4.2 In the Open System dialog, wait until completion and press 'Close'
82 4.3 In the Qsys window, click on 'Generate HDL...' in bottom right corner
83 4.3.1 In the 'Generation' window, click 'Generate'
84 4.3.2 In the 'Generate' dialog, wait until completion and click 'Close'
85 4.4 In the QSys window, click 'Finish'
86 4.4.1 In the 'Quartus II' pop up window, click 'OK'
875. Back in Quartus II main window, do the following
88 5.1 Use Processing -> Start -> Start Analysis & Synthesis (Ctrl+K)
89 5.2 Use Processing -> Start Compilation (Ctrl+L)
90
91 ... this may take some time, have patience ...
92
936. Start the embedded command shell as shown in the previous section
94 6.1 Change directory to 'software/spl_bsp'
95 6.2 Prepare BSP by launching the BSP editor from ECS
96 => bsp-editor
97 6.3 In BSP editor
98 6.3.1 Use File -> Open
99 6.3.2 Select 'settings.bsp' file
100 6.3.3 Click Generate
101 6.3.4 Click Exit
102
103
104Post handoff generation
105~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
106
107Now that the handoff files are generated, U-Boot can be used to process
108the handoff files generated by the bsp-editor. For this, please use the
109following script from the u-boot source tree:
110
111 $ ./arch/arm/mach-socfpga/qts-filter.sh \
112 <soc_type> \
113 <input_qts_dir> \
114 <input_bsp_dir> \
115 <output_dir>
116
117Process QTS-generated files into U-Boot compatible ones.
118
119 soc_type - Type of SoC, either 'cyclone5' or 'arria5'.
120 input_qts_dir - Directory with compiled Quartus project
121 and containing the Quartus project file (QPF).
122 input_bsp_dir - Directory with generated bsp containing
123 the settings.bsp file.
124 output_dir - Directory to store the U-Boot compatible
125 headers.
126
127This will generate (or update) the following 4 files:
128
129 iocsr_config.h
130 pinmux_config.h
131 pll_config.h
132 sdram_config.h
133
134These files should be copied into "qts" directory in the board directory
135(see output argument of qts-filter.sh command above).
136
137Here is an example for the DE-0 Nano SoC after the above rebuild process:
138
139 $ ll board/terasic/de0-nano-soc/qts/
140 total 36
141 -rw-r--r-- 1 sarnold sarnold 8826 Mar 21 18:11 iocsr_config.h
142 -rw-r--r-- 1 sarnold sarnold 4398 Mar 21 18:11 pinmux_config.h
143 -rw-r--r-- 1 sarnold sarnold 3190 Mar 21 18:11 pll_config.h
144 -rw-r--r-- 1 sarnold sarnold 9022 Mar 21 18:11 sdram_config.h
145
146Note: file sizes will differ slightly depending on the selected board.
147
148Now your board is ready for full mainline support including U-Boot SPL.
149The Preloader will not be needed any more.
150
README.spear
1
2SPEAr (Structured Processor Enhanced Architecture).
3
4SPEAr600 is also known as SPEArPlus and SPEAr300 is also known as SPEArBasic
5
6The SPEAr SoC family embeds a customizable logic that can be programmed
7one-time by a customer at silicon mask level (i.e. not at runtime!).
8
9U-Boot supports four SoCs: SPEAr600, SPEAr3xx
10
11All 4 SoCs (SPEAr3xx and SPEAr600) share common peripherals. SPEAr300 and
12SPEAr600 do not have EMI.
13
141. ARM926ejs core based (sp600 has two cores, the 2nd handled only in Linux)
152. FastEthernet (sp600 has Gbit version, but same controller - GMAC)
163. USB Host
174. USB Device
185. NAND controller (FSMC)
196. Serial NOR ctrl
207. I2C
218. SPI
229. CLCD
2310. others ..
24
25Everything is supported in Linux.
26u-boot is currently not supporting all peripeharls (just a few as listed below).
271. USB Device
282. NAND controller (FSMC)
293. Serial Memory Interface
304. EMI (Parallel NOR interface)
314. I2C
325. UART
33
34Build options
35 make spear320_config
36 spear320 build with environment variables placed at default
37 location i.e. Serial NOR device
38 make spear320_pnor_config
39 This option generates a uboot image that supports emi controller
40 for CFI compliant parallel NOR flash. Environment variables are
41 placed in Parallel NOR device
42 make spear320_nand_config
43 spear320 build with environment variables placed in NAND device
44 make spear320_usbtty_config
45 spear320 build with usbtty terminal as default and environment
46 placed at default location
47 make spear320_usbtty_pnor_config
48 spear320 build with usbtty terminal as default and environment
49 placed in pnor device
50 make spear320_usbtty_nand_config
51 Build with usbtty terminal as default and environment placed in
52 NAND device
53 make spear300_config
54 make spear300_nand_config
55 make spear300_usbtty_config
56 make spear300_usbtty_nand_config
57 make spear310_config
58 make spear310_pnor_config
59 make spear310_nand_config
60 make spear310_usbtty_config
61 make spear310_usbtty_pnor_config
62 make spear310_usbtty_nand_config
63 make spear600_config
64 make spear600_nand_config
65 make spear600_usbtty_config
66 make spear600_usbtty_nand_config
67
68Mac id storage and retrieval in spear platforms
69
70Please read doc/README.enetaddr for the implementation guidelines for mac id
71usage. Basically, environment has precedence over board specific storage. The
72ethaddr beeing used for the network interface is always taken only from
73environment variables. Although, we can check the mac id programmed in i2c
74memory by using chip_config command
75
README.splashprepare
1---------------------------------------------------------------------
2Splash Screen
3---------------------------------------------------------------------
4The splash_screen_prepare() function is a weak function defined in
5common/splash.c. It is called as part of the splash screen display
6sequence. It gives the board an opportunity to prepare the splash
7image data before it is processed and sent to the frame buffer by
8U-Boot. Define your own version to use this feature.
9
10CONFIG_SPLASH_SOURCE
11
12Use the splash_source.c library. This library provides facilities to declare
13board specific splash image locations, routines for loading splash image from
14supported locations, and a way of controlling the selected splash location
15using the "splashsource" environment variable.
16
17splashsource works as follows:
18- If splashsource is set to a supported location name as defined by board code,
19 use that splash location.
20- If splashsource is undefined, use the first splash location as default.
21- If splashsource is set to an unsupported value, do not load a splash screen.
22
23A splash source location can describe either storage with raw data, a storage
24formatted with a file system or a FIT image. In case of a filesystem, the splash
25screen data is loaded as a file. The name of the splash screen file can be
26controlled with the environment variable "splashfile".
27
28To enable loading the splash image from a FIT image, CONFIG_FIT must be
29enabled. The FIT image has to start at the 'offset' field address in the
30selected splash location. The name of splash image within the FIT shall be
31specified by the environment variable "splashfile".
32
33In case the environment variable "splashfile" is not defined the default name
34'splash.bmp' will be used.
35
README.srio-pcie-boot-corenet
1---------------------------------------
2SRIO and PCIE Boot on Corenet Platforms
3---------------------------------------
4
5For some PowerPC processors with SRIO or PCIE interface, boot location can be
6configured to SRIO or PCIE by RCW. The processor booting from SRIO or PCIE can
7do without flash for u-boot image, ucode and ENV. All the images can be fetched
8from another processor's memory space by SRIO or PCIE link connected between
9them.
10
11This document describes the processes based on an example implemented on P4080DS
12platforms and a RCW example with boot from SRIO or PCIE configuration.
13
14Environment of the SRIO or PCIE boot:
15 a) Master and slave can be SOCs in one board or SOCs in separate boards.
16 b) They are connected with SRIO or PCIE links, whether 1x, 2x or 4x, and
17 directly or through switch system.
18 c) Only Master has NorFlash for booting, and all the Master's and Slave's
19 U-Boot images, UCodes will be stored in this flash.
20 d) Slave has its own EEPROM for RCW and PBI.
21 e) Slave's RCW should configure the SerDes for SRIO or PCIE boot port, set
22 the boot location to SRIO or PCIE, and holdoff all the cores.
23
24 ----------- ----------- -----------
25 | | | | | |
26 | | | | | |
27 | NorFlash|<----->| Master |SRIO or PCIE | Slave |<---->[EEPROM]
28 | | | |<===========>| |
29 | | | | | |
30 ----------- ----------- -----------
31
32The example based on P4080DS platform:
33 Two P4080DS platforms can be used to implement the boot from SRIO or PCIE.
34 Their SRIO or PCIE ports 1 will be connected directly and will be used for
35 the boot from SRIO or PCIE.
36
37 1. Slave's RCW example for boot from SRIO port 1 and all cores in holdoff.
38 00000000: aa55 aa55 010e 0100 0c58 0000 0000 0000
39 00000010: 1818 1818 0000 8888 7440 4000 0000 2000
40 00000020: f440 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
41 00000030: 0000 0000 0083 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
42 00000040: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0813 8040 063c 778f
43
44 2. Slave's RCW example for boot from PCIE port 1 and all cores in holdoff.
45 00000000: aa55 aa55 010e 0100 0c58 0000 0000 0000
46 00000010: 1818 1818 0000 8888 1440 4000 0000 2000
47 00000020: f040 0000 0100 0000 0020 0000 0000 0000
48 00000030: 0000 0000 0083 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
49 00000040: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0813 8040 547e ffc9
50
51 3. Sequence in Step by Step.
52 a) Update RCW for slave with boot from SRIO or PCIE port 1 configuration.
53 b) Program slave's U-Boot image, UCode, and ENV parameters into master's
54 NorFlash.
55 c) Set environment variable "bootmaster" to "SRIO1" or "PCIE1" and save
56 environment for master.
57 setenv bootmaster SRIO1
58 or
59 setenv bootmaster PCIE1
60 saveenv
61 d) Restart up master and it will boot up normally from its NorFlash.
62 Then, it will finish necessary configurations for slave's boot from
63 SRIO or PCIE port 1.
64 e) Master will set inbound SRIO or PCIE windows covered slave's U-Boot
65 image stored in master's NorFlash.
66 f) Master will set an inbound SRIO or PCIE window covered slave's UCode
67 and ENV stored in master's NorFlash.
68 g) Master will set outbound SRIO or PCIE windows in order to configure
69 slave's registers for the core's releasing.
70 h) Since all cores of slave in holdoff, slave should be powered on before
71 all the above master's steps, and wait to be released by master. In the
72 startup phase of the slave from SRIO or PCIE, it will finish some
73 necessary configurations.
74 i) Slave will set a specific TLB entry for the boot process.
75 j) Slave will set a LAW entry with the TargetID SRIO or PCIE port 1 for
76 the boot.
77 k) Slave will set a specific TLB entry in order to fetch UCode and ENV
78 from master.
79 l) Slave will set a LAW entry with the TargetID SRIO or PCIE port 1 for
80 UCode and ENV.
81
82How to use this feature:
83 To use this feature, you need to focus those points.
84
85 1. Slave's RCW with SRIO or PCIE boot configurations, and all cores in holdoff
86 configurations.
87 Please refer to the examples given above.
88
89 2. U-Boot image's compilation.
90 For master, U-Boot image should be generated normally.
91
92 For example, master U-Boot image used on P4080DS should be compiled with
93
94 make P4080DS_config.
95
96 For slave, U-Boot image should be generated specifically by
97
98 make xxxx_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_config.
99
100 For example, slave U-Boot image used on P4080DS should be compiled with
101
102 make P4080DS_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_config.
103
104 3. Necessary modifications based on a specific environment.
105 For a specific environment, the addresses of the slave's U-Boot image,
106 UCode, ENV stored in master's NorFlash, and any other configurations
107 can be modified in the file:
108 include/configs/corenet_ds.h.
109
110 4. Set and save the environment variable "bootmaster" with "SRIO1", "SRIO2"
111 or "PCIE1", "PCIE2", "PCIE3" for master, and then restart it in order to
112 perform the role as a master for boot from SRIO or PCIE.
113
114NOTE: When the Slave's ENV parameters are stored in Master's NorFlash,
115 it can fetch them through PCIE or SRIO interface. But the ENV
116 parameters can not be modified by "saveenv" or other commands under
117 the Slave's u-boot environment, because the Slave can not erase,
118 write Master's NorFlash by PCIE or SRIO link.
119
README.standalone
1Design Notes on Exporting U-Boot Functions to Standalone Applications:
2======================================================================
3
41. The functions are exported by U-Boot via a jump table. The jump
5 table is allocated and initialized in the jumptable_init() routine
6 (common/exports.c). Other routines may also modify the jump table,
7 however. The jump table can be accessed as the 'jt' field of the
8 'global_data' structure. The struct members for the jump table are
9 defined in the <include/exports.h> header. E.g., to substitute the
10 malloc() and free() functions that will be available to standalone
11 applications, one should do the following:
12
13 DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR;
14
15 gd->jt->malloc = my_malloc;
16 gd->jt->free = my_free;
17
18 Note that the pointers to the functions are real function pointers
19 so the compiler can perform type checks on these assignments.
20
212. The pointer to the jump table is passed to the application in a
22 machine-dependent way. PowerPC, ARM, MIPS, Blackfin and Nios II
23 architectures use a dedicated register to hold the pointer to the
24 'global_data' structure: r2 on PowerPC, r9 on ARM, k0 on MIPS,
25 P3 on Blackfin and gp on Nios II. The x86 architecture does not
26 use such a register; instead, the pointer to the 'global_data'
27 structure is passed as 'argv[-1]' pointer.
28
29 The application can access the 'global_data' structure in the same
30 way as U-Boot does:
31
32 DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR;
33
34 printf("U-Boot relocation offset: %x\n", gd->reloc_off);
35
363. The application should call the app_startup() function before any
37 call to the exported functions. Also, implementor of the
38 application may want to check the version of the ABI provided by
39 U-Boot. To facilitate this, a get_version() function is exported
40 that returns the ABI version of the running U-Boot. I.e., a
41 typical application startup may look like this:
42
43 int my_app (int argc, char *const argv[])
44 {
45 app_startup (argv);
46 if (get_version () != XF_VERSION)
47 return 1;
48 }
49
504. The default load and start addresses of the applications are as
51 follows:
52
53 Load address Start address
54 x86 0x00040000 0x00040000
55 PowerPC 0x00040000 0x00040004
56 ARM 0x0c100000 0x0c100000
57 MIPS 0x80200000 0x80200000
58 Blackfin 0x00001000 0x00001000
59 NDS32 0x00300000 0x00300000
60 Nios II 0x02000000 0x02000000
61 RISC-V 0x00600000 0x00600000
62
63 For example, the "hello world" application may be loaded and
64 executed on a PowerPC board with the following commands:
65
66 => tftp 0x40000 hello_world.bin
67 => go 0x40004
68
695. To export some additional function long foobar(int i,char c), the following steps
70 should be undertaken:
71
72 - Append the following line at the end of the include/_exports.h
73 file:
74
75 EXPORT_FUNC(foobar, long, foobar, int, char)
76
77 Parameters to EXPORT_FUNC:
78 - the first parameter is the function that is exported (default implementation)
79 - the second parameter is the return value type
80 - the third parameter is the name of the member in struct jt_funcs
81 this is also the name that the standalone application will used.
82 the rest of the parameters are the function arguments
83
84 - Add the prototype for this function to the include/exports.h
85 file:
86
87 long foobar(int i, char c);
88
89 Initialization with the default implementation is done in jumptable_init()
90
91 You can override the default implementation using:
92
93 gd->jt->foobar = another_foobar;
94
95 The signature of another_foobar must then match the declaration of foobar.
96
97 - Increase the XF_VERSION value by one in the include/exports.h
98 file
99
100 - If you want to export a function which depends on a CONFIG_XXX
101 use 2 lines like this:
102 #ifdef CONFIG_FOOBAR
103 EXPORT_FUNC(foobar, long, foobar, int, char)
104 #else
105 EXPORT_FUNC(dummy, void, foobar, void)
106 #endif
107
108
1096. The code for exporting the U-Boot functions to applications is
110 mostly machine-independent. The only places written in assembly
111 language are stub functions that perform the jump through the jump
112 table. That said, to port this code to a new architecture, the
113 only thing to be provided is the code in the examples/stubs.c
114 file. If this architecture, however, uses some uncommon method of
115 passing the 'global_data' pointer (like x86 does), one should add
116 the respective code to the app_startup() function in that file.
117
118 Note that these functions may only use call-clobbered registers;
119 those registers that are used to pass the function's arguments,
120 the stack contents and the return address should be left intact.
121
README.t1040-l2switch
1This file contains information for VSC9953, a Vitesse L2 Switch IP
2which is integrated in the T1040/T1020 Freescale SoCs.
3
4About Device:
5=============
6VSC9953 is an 8-port Gigabit Ethernet switch supports the following features:
7 - 8192 MAC addresses
8 - Static Address provisioning
9 - Dynamic learning of MAC addresses and aging
10 - 4096 VLANs
11 - Independent and shared VLAN learning (IVL, SVL)
12 - Policing with storm control and MC/BC protection
13 - IPv4 and IPv6 multicast
14 - Jumbo frames (9.6 KB)
15 - Access Control List
16 - VLAN editing, translation and remarking
17 - RMON counters per port
18
19Switch interfaces:
20 - 8 Gigabit switch ports (ports 0 to 7) are external and are connected to external PHYs
21 - 2 switch ports (ports 8 and 9) of 2.5 G are connected (fixed links)
22 to FMan ports (FM1@DTSEC1 and FM1@DTSEC2)
23
24Commands Overview:
25=============
26Commands supported
27 - enable/disable a port or show its configuration (speed, duplexity, status, etc.)
28 - port statistics
29 - MAC learning
30 - add/remove FDB entries
31 - Port-based VLAN
32 - Private/Shared VLAN learning
33 - VLAN ingress filtering
34 - Port LAG
35
36Commands syntax
37ethsw [port <port_no>] { enable | disable | show } - enable/disable a port; show a port's configuration
38ethsw [port <port_no>] statistics { [help] | [clear] } - show an l2 switch port's statistics
39ethsw [port <port_no>] learning { [help] | show | auto | disable } - enable/disable/show learning configuration on a port
40ethsw [port <port_no>] [vlan <vid>] fdb { [help] | show | flush | { add | del } <mac> } - add/delete a mac entry in FDB; use show to see FDB entries;
41 if [vlan <vid>] is missing, VID 1 will be used
42ethsw [port <port_no>] pvid { [help] | show | <pvid> } - set/show PVID (ingress and egress VLAN tagging) for a port
43ethsw [port <port_no>] vlan { [help] | show | add <vid> | del <vid> } - add a VLAN to a port (VLAN members)
44ethsw [port <port_no>] untagged { [help] | show | all | none | pvid } - set egress tagging mode for a port
45ethsw [port <port_no>] egress tag { [help] | show | pvid | classified } - configure VID source for egress tag.
46 Tag's VID could be the frame's classified VID or the PVID of the port
47ethsw vlan fdb { [help] | show | shared | private } - make VLAN learning shared or private
48ethsw [port <port_no>] ingress filtering { [help] | show | enable | disable } - enable/disable VLAN ingress filtering on port
49ethsw [port <port_no>] aggr { [help] | show | <lag_group_no> } - get/set LAG group for a port
50
51=> ethsw show
52 Port Status Link Speed Duplex
53 0 enabled down 10 half
54 1 enabled down 10 half
55 2 enabled down 10 half
56 3 enabled up 1000 full
57 4 disabled down - half
58 5 disabled down - half
59 6 disabled down - half
60 7 disabled down - half
61 8 enabled up 2500 full
62 9 enabled up 2500 full
63=>
64
README.tee
1=============
2TEE uclass
3=============
4
5This document describes the TEE uclass in U-Boot
6
7A TEE (Trusted Execution Environment) is a trusted OS running in some
8secure environment, for example, TrustZone on ARM CPUs, or a separate
9secure co-processor etc. A TEE driver handles the details needed to
10communicate with the TEE.
11
12This uclass deals with:
13
14- Registration of TEE drivers
15
16- Managing shared memory between U-Boot and the TEE
17
18- Providing a generic API to the TEE
19
20The TEE interface
21=================
22
23include/tee.h defines the generic interface to a TEE.
24
25A client finds the TEE device via tee_find_device(). Other important functions
26when interfacing with a TEE are:
27
28- tee_shm_alloc(), tee_shm_register() and tee_shm_free() to manage shared
29 memory objects often needed when communicating with the TEE.
30
31- tee_get_version() lets the client know which the capabilities of the TEE
32 device.
33
34- tee_open_session() opens a session to a Trusted Application
35
36- tee_invoke_func() invokes a function in a Trusted Application
37
38- tee_close_session() closes a session to a Trusted Application
39
40Much of the communication between clients and the TEE is opaque to the
41driver. The main job for the driver is to receive requests from the
42clients, forward them to the TEE and send back the results.
43
44OP-TEE driver
45=============
46
47The OP-TEE driver handles OP-TEE [1] based TEEs. Currently it is only the ARM
48TrustZone based OP-TEE solution that is supported.
49
50Lowest level of communication with OP-TEE builds on ARM SMC Calling
51Convention (SMCCC) [2], which is the foundation for OP-TEE's SMC interface
52[3] used internally by the driver. Stacked on top of that is OP-TEE Message
53Protocol [4].
54
55OP-TEE SMC interface provides the basic functions required by SMCCC and some
56additional functions specific for OP-TEE. The most interesting functions are:
57
58- OPTEE_SMC_FUNCID_CALLS_UID (part of SMCCC) returns the version information
59 which is then returned by TEE_IOC_VERSION
60
61- OPTEE_SMC_CALL_GET_OS_UUID returns the particular OP-TEE implementation, used
62 to tell, for instance, a TrustZone OP-TEE apart from an OP-TEE running on a
63 separate secure co-processor.
64
65- OPTEE_SMC_CALL_WITH_ARG drives the OP-TEE message protocol
66
67- OPTEE_SMC_GET_SHM_CONFIG lets the driver and OP-TEE agree on which memory
68 range to used for shared memory between Linux and OP-TEE.
69
70The GlobalPlatform TEE Client API [5] is implemented on top of the generic
71TEE API.
72
73Picture of the relationship between the different components in the
74OP-TEE architecture:
75
76 U-Boot Secure world
77 ~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~
78 +------------+ +-------------+
79 | Client | | Trusted |
80 | | | Application |
81 +------------+ +-------------+
82 /\ /\
83 || ||
84 \/ \/
85 +------------+ +-------------+
86 | TEE | | TEE Internal|
87 | uclass | | API |
88 +------------+ +-------------+
89 | OP-TEE | | OP-TEE |
90 | driver | | Trusted OS |
91 +------------+-----------+-------------+
92 | OP-TEE MSG |
93 | SMCCC (OPTEE_SMC_CALL_*) |
94 +--------------------------------------+
95
96RPC (Remote Procedure Call) are requests from secure world to the driver.
97An RPC is identified by a special range of SMCCC return values from
98OPTEE_SMC_CALL_WITH_ARG.
99
100References
101==========
102
103[1] https://github.com/OP-TEE/optee_os
104
105[2] http://infocenter.arm.com/help/topic/com.arm.doc.den0028a/index.html
106
107[3] drivers/tee/optee/optee_smc.h
108
109[4] drivers/tee/optee/optee_msg.h
110
111[5] http://www.globalplatform.org/specificationsdevice.asp look for
112 "TEE Client API Specification v1.0" and click download.
113
README.ti-secure
1README on how boot images are created for secure TI devices
2
3CONFIG_TI_SECURE_DEVICE:
4Secure TI devices require a boot image that is authenticated by ROM
5code to function. Without this, even JTAG remains locked and the
6device is essentially useless. In order to create a valid boot image for
7a secure device from TI, the initial public software image must be signed
8and combined with various headers, certificates, and other binary images.
9
10Information on the details on the complete boot image format can be obtained
11from Texas Instruments. The tools used to generate boot images for secure
12devices are part of a secure development package (SECDEV) that can be
13downloaded from:
14
15 http://www.ti.com/mysecuresoftware (login required)
16
17The secure development package is access controlled due to NDA and export
18control restrictions. Access must be requested and granted by TI before the
19package is viewable and downloadable. Contact TI, either online or by way
20of a local TI representative, to request access.
21
22Booting of U-Boot SPL
23=====================
24
25 When CONFIG_TI_SECURE_DEVICE is set, the U-Boot SPL build process
26 requires the presence and use of these tools in order to create a
27 viable boot image. The build process will look for the environment
28 variable TI_SECURE_DEV_PKG, which should be the path of the installed
29 SECDEV package. If the TI_SECURE_DEV_PKG variable is not defined or
30 if it is defined but doesn't point to a valid SECDEV package, a
31 warning is issued during the build to indicate that a final secure
32 bootable image was not created.
33
34 Within the SECDEV package exists an image creation script:
35
36 ${TI_SECURE_DEV_PKG}/scripts/create-boot-image.sh
37
38 This is called as part of the SPL/u-boot build process. As the secure
39 boot image formats and requirements differ between secure SOC from TI,
40 the purpose of this script is to abstract these details as much as
41 possible.
42
43 The script is basically the only required interface to the TI SECDEV
44 package for creating a bootable SPL image for secure TI devices.
45
46 Invoking the script for AM33xx Secure Devices
47 =============================================
48
49 create-boot-image.sh \
50 <IMAGE_FLAG> <INPUT_FILE> <OUTPUT_FILE> <SPL_LOAD_ADDR>
51
52 <IMAGE_FLAG> is a value that specifies the type of the image to
53 generate OR the action the image generation tool will take. Valid
54 values are:
55 SPI_X-LOADER - Generates an image for SPI flash (byte swapped)
56 X-LOADER - Generates an image for non-XIP flash
57 MLO - Generates an image for SD/MMC/eMMC media
58 2ND - Generates an image for USB, UART and Ethernet
59 XIP_X-LOADER - Generates a single stage u-boot for NOR/QSPI XiP
60
61 <INPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the public world boot
62 loaderbinary file (depending on the boot media, this is usually
63 either u-boot-spl.bin or u-boot.bin).
64
65 <OUTPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the final secure
66 image. The output binary images should be used in place of the standard
67 non-secure binary images (see the platform-specific user's guides and
68 releases notes for how the non-secure images are typically used)
69 u-boot-spl_HS_SPI_X-LOADER - byte swapped boot image for SPI flash
70 u-boot-spl_HS_X-LOADER - boot image for NAND or SD/MMC/eMMC rawmode
71 u-boot-spl_HS_MLO - boot image for SD/MMC/eMMC media
72 u-boot-spl_HS_2ND - boot image for USB, UART and Ethernet
73 u-boot_HS_XIP_X-LOADER - boot image for NOR or QSPI Xip flash
74
75 <SPL_LOAD_ADDR> is the address at which SOC ROM should load the
76 <INPUT_FILE>
77
78 Invoking the script for AM43xx Secure Devices
79 =============================================
80
81 create-boot-image.sh \
82 <IMAGE_FLAG> <INPUT_FILE> <OUTPUT_FILE> <SPL_LOAD_ADDR>
83
84 <IMAGE_FLAG> is a value that specifies the type of the image to
85 generate OR the action the image generation tool will take. Valid
86 values are:
87 SPI_X-LOADER - Generates an image for SPI flash (byte
88 swapped)
89 XIP_X-LOADER - Generates a single stage u-boot for
90 NOR/QSPI XiP
91 ISSW - Generates an image for all other boot modes
92
93 <INPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the public world boot
94 loaderbinary file (depending on the boot media, this is usually
95 either u-boot-spl.bin or u-boot.bin).
96
97 <OUTPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the final secure
98 image. The output binary images should be used in place of the standard
99 non-secure binary images (see the platform-specific user's guides and
100 releases notes for how the non-secure images are typically used)
101 u-boot-spl_HS_SPI_X-LOADER - byte swapped boot image for SPI flash
102 u-boot_HS_XIP_X-LOADER - boot image for NOR or QSPI flash
103 u-boot-spl_HS_ISSW - boot image for all other boot media
104
105 <SPL_LOAD_ADDR> is the address at which SOC ROM should load the
106 <INPUT_FILE>
107
108 Invoking the script for DRA7xx/AM57xx Secure Devices
109 ====================================================
110
111 create-boot-image.sh \
112 <IMAGE_TYPE> <INPUT_FILE> <OUTPUT_FILE> <SPL_LOAD_ADDR>
113
114 <IMAGE_TYPE> is a value that specifies the type of the image to
115 generate OR the action the image generation tool will take. Valid
116 values are:
117 X-LOADER - Generates an image for NOR or QSPI boot modes
118 MLO - Generates an image for SD/MMC/eMMC boot modes
119 ULO - Generates an image for USB/UART peripheral boot modes
120
121 <INPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the public world boot
122 loader binary file (for this platform, this is always u-boot-spl.bin).
123
124 <OUTPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the final secure image.
125 The output binary images should be used in place of the standard
126 non-secure binary images (see the platform-specific user's guides
127 and releases notes for how the non-secure images are typically used)
128 u-boot-spl_HS_MLO - boot image for SD/MMC/eMMC. This image is
129 copied to a file named MLO, which is the name that
130 the device ROM bootloader requires for loading from
131 the FAT partition of an SD card (same as on
132 non-secure devices)
133 u-boot-spl_HS_ULO - boot image for USB/UART peripheral boot modes
134 u-boot-spl_HS_X-LOADER - boot image for all other flash memories
135 including QSPI and NOR flash
136
137 <SPL_LOAD_ADDR> is the address at which SOC ROM should load the
138 <INPUT_FILE>
139
140 Invoking the script for Keystone2 Secure Devices
141 ================================================
142
143 create-boot-image.sh \
144 <UNUSED> <INPUT_FILE> <OUTPUT_FILE> <UNUSED>
145
146 <UNUSED> is currently ignored and reserved for future use.
147
148 <INPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the public world boot
149 loader binary file (only u-boot.bin is currently supported on
150 Keystone2 devices, u-boot-spl.bin is not currently supported).
151
152 <OUTPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the final secure image.
153 The output binary images should be used in place of the standard
154 non-secure binary images (see the platform-specific user's guides
155 and releases notes for how the non-secure images are typically used)
156 u-boot_HS_MLO - signed and encrypted boot image that can be used to
157 boot from all media. Secure boot from SPI NOR flash is not
158 currently supported.
159
160 Invoking the script for K3 Secure Devices
161 =========================================
162
163 The signing steps required to produce a bootable SPL image on secure
164 K3 TI devices are the same as those performed on non-secure devices.
165 The only difference is the key is not checked on non-secure devices so
166 a dummy key is used when building U-Boot for those devices. For secure
167 K3 TI devices simply use the real hardware key for your device. This
168 real key can be set with the Kconfig option "K3_KEY". The environment
169 variable TI_SECURE_DEV_PKG is also searched for real keys when the
170 build targets secure devices.
171
172Booting of Primary U-Boot (u-boot.img)
173======================================
174
175 The SPL image is responsible for loading the next stage boot loader,
176 which is the main u-boot image. For secure TI devices, the SPL will
177 be authenticated, as described above, as part of the particular
178 device's ROM boot process. In order to continue the secure boot
179 process, the authenticated SPL must authenticate the main u-boot
180 image that it loads.
181
182 The configurations for secure TI platforms are written to make the boot
183 process use the FIT image format for the u-boot.img (CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK
184 and CONFIG_SPL_LOAD_FIT). With these configurations the binary
185 components that the SPL loads include a specific DTB image and u-boot
186 image. These DTB image may be one of many available to the boot
187 process. In order to secure these components so that they can be
188 authenticated by the SPL as they are loaded from the FIT image, the
189 build procedure for secure TI devices will secure these images before
190 they are integrated into the FIT image. When those images are extracted
191 from the FIT image at boot time, they are post-processed to verify that
192 they are still secure. The outlined security-related SPL post-processing
193 is enabled through the CONFIG_SPL_FIT_IMAGE_POST_PROCESS option which
194 must be enabled for the secure boot scheme to work. In order to allow
195 verifying proper operation of the secure boot chain in case of successful
196 authentication messages like "Authentication passed" are output by the
197 SPL to the console for each blob that got extracted from the FIT image.
198
199 The exact details of the how the images are secured is handled by the
200 SECDEV package. Within the SECDEV package exists a script to process
201 an input binary image:
202
203 ${TI_SECURE_DEV_PKG}/scripts/secure-binary-image.sh
204
205 This is called as part of the u-boot build process. As the secure
206 image formats and requirements can differ between the various secure
207 SOCs from TI, this script in the SECDEV package abstracts these
208 details. This script is essentially the only required interface to the
209 TI SECDEV package for creating a u-boot.img image for secure TI
210 devices.
211
212 The SPL/u-boot code contains calls to dedicated secure ROM functions
213 to perform the validation on the secured images. The details of the
214 interface to those functions is shown in the code. The summary
215 is that they are accessed by invoking an ARM secure monitor call to
216 the device's secure ROM (fixed read-only-memory that is secure and
217 only accessible when the ARM core is operating in the secure mode).
218
219 Invoking the secure-binary-image script for Secure Devices
220 ==========================================================
221
222 secure-binary-image.sh <INPUT_FILE> <OUTPUT_FILE>
223
224 <INPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the input binary image
225
226 <OUTPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the output secure image.
227
README.trace
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2#
3# Copyright (c) 2013 The Chromium OS Authors.
4
5Tracing in U-Boot
6=================
7
8U-Boot supports a simple tracing feature which allows a record of excecution
9to be collected and sent to a host machine for analysis. At present the
10main use for this is to profile boot time.
11
12
13Overview
14--------
15
16The trace feature uses GCC's instrument-functions feature to trace all
17function entry/exit points. These are then recorded in a memory buffer.
18The memory buffer can be saved to the host over a network link using
19tftpput or by writing to an attached memory device such as MMC.
20
21On the host, the file is first converted with a tool called 'proftool',
22which extracts useful information from it. The resulting trace output
23resembles that emitted by Linux's ftrace feature, so can be visually
24displayed by pytimechart.
25
26
27Quick-start using Sandbox
28-------------------------
29
30Sandbox is a build of U-Boot that can run under Linux so it is a convenient
31way of trying out tracing before you use it on your actual board. To do
32this, follow these steps:
33
34Add the following to include/configs/sandbox.h (if not already there)
35
36#define CONFIG_TRACE
37#define CONFIG_CMD_TRACE
38#define CONFIG_TRACE_BUFFER_SIZE (16 << 20)
39#define CONFIG_TRACE_EARLY_SIZE (8 << 20)
40#define CONFIG_TRACE_EARLY
41#define CONFIG_TRACE_EARLY_ADDR 0x00100000
42
43Build sandbox U-Boot with tracing enabled:
44
45$ make FTRACE=1 O=sandbox sandbox_config
46$ make FTRACE=1 O=sandbox
47
48Run sandbox, wait for a bit of trace information to appear, and then capture
49a trace:
50
51$ ./sandbox/u-boot
52
53
54U-Boot 2013.04-rc2-00100-ga72fcef (Apr 17 2013 - 19:25:24)
55
56DRAM: 128 MiB
57trace: enabled
58Using default environment
59
60In: serial
61Out: serial
62Err: serial
63=>trace stats
64 671,406 function sites
65 69,712 function calls
66 0 untracked function calls
67 73,373 traced function calls
68 16 maximum observed call depth
69 15 call depth limit
70 66,491 calls not traced due to depth
71=>trace stats
72 671,406 function sites
73 1,279,450 function calls
74 0 untracked function calls
75 950,490 traced function calls (333217 dropped due to overflow)
76 16 maximum observed call depth
77 15 call depth limit
78 1,275,767 calls not traced due to depth
79=>trace calls 0 e00000
80Call list dumped to 00000000, size 0xae0a40
81=>print
82baudrate=115200
83profbase=0
84profoffset=ae0a40
85profsize=e00000
86stderr=serial
87stdin=serial
88stdout=serial
89
90Environment size: 117/8188 bytes
91=>host save host 0 trace 0 ${profoffset}
9211405888 bytes written in 10 ms (1.1 GiB/s)
93=>reset
94
95
96Then run proftool to convert the trace information to ftrace format.
97
98$ ./sandbox/tools/proftool -m sandbox/System.map -p trace dump-ftrace >trace.txt
99
100Finally run pytimechart to display it:
101
102$ pytimechart trace.txt
103
104Using this tool you can zoom and pan across the trace, with the function
105calls on the left and little marks representing the start and end of each
106function.
107
108
109CONFIG Options
110--------------
111
112- CONFIG_TRACE
113 Enables the trace feature in U-Boot.
114
115- CONFIG_CMD_TRACE
116 Enables the trace command.
117
118- CONFIG_TRACE_BUFFER_SIZE
119 Size of trace buffer to allocate for U-Boot. This buffer is
120 used after relocation, as a place to put function tracing
121 information. The address of the buffer is determined by
122 the relocation code.
123
124- CONFIG_TRACE_EARLY
125 Define this to start tracing early, before relocation.
126
127- CONFIG_TRACE_EARLY_SIZE
128 Size of 'early' trace buffer. Before U-Boot has relocated
129 it doesn't have a proper trace buffer. On many boards
130 you can define an area of memory to use for the trace
131 buffer until the 'real' trace buffer is available after
132 relocation. The contents of this buffer are then copied to
133 the real buffer.
134
135- CONFIG_TRACE_EARLY_ADDR
136 Address of early trace buffer
137
138
139Building U-Boot with Tracing Enabled
140------------------------------------
141
142Pass 'FTRACE=1' to the U-Boot Makefile to actually instrument the code.
143This is kept as a separate option so that it is easy to enable/disable
144instrumenting from the command line instead of having to change board
145config files.
146
147
148Collecting Trace Data
149---------------------
150
151When you run U-Boot on your board it will collect trace data up to the
152limit of the trace buffer size you have specified. Once that is exhausted
153no more data will be collected.
154
155Collecting trace data has an affect on execution time/performance. You
156will notice this particularly with trvial functions - the overhead of
157recording their execution may even exceed their normal execution time.
158In practice this doesn't matter much so long as you are aware of the
159effect. Once you have done your optimisations, turn off tracing before
160doing end-to-end timing.
161
162The best time to start tracing is right at the beginning of U-Boot. The
163best time to stop tracing is right at the end. In practice it is hard
164to achieve these ideals.
165
166This implementation enables tracing early in board_init_f(). This means
167that it captures most of the board init process, missing only the
168early architecture-specific init. However, it also misses the entire
169SPL stage if there is one.
170
171U-Boot typically ends with a 'bootm' command which loads and runs an
172OS. There is useful trace data in the execution of that bootm
173command. Therefore this implementation provides a way to collect trace
174data after bootm has finished processing, but just before it jumps to
175the OS. In practical terms, U-Boot runs the 'fakegocmd' environment
176variable at this point. This variable should have a short script which
177collects the trace data and writes it somewhere.
178
179Trace data collection relies on a microsecond timer, accesed through
180timer_get_us(). So the first think you should do is make sure that
181this produces sensible results for your board. Suitable sources for
182this timer include high resolution timers, PWMs or profile timers if
183available. Most modern SOCs have a suitable timer for this. Make sure
184that you mark this timer (and anything it calls) with
185__attribute__((no_instrument_function)) so that the trace library can
186use it without causing an infinite loop.
187
188
189Commands
190--------
191
192The trace command has variable sub-commands:
193
194- stats
195 Display tracing statistics
196
197- pause
198 Pause tracing
199
200- resume
201 Resume tracing
202
203- funclist [<addr> <size>]
204 Dump a list of functions into the buffer
205
206- calls [<addr> <size>]
207 Dump function call trace into buffer
208
209If the address and size are not given, these are obtained from environment
210variables (see below). In any case the environment variables are updated
211after the command runs.
212
213
214Environment Variables
215---------------------
216
217The following are used:
218
219- profbase
220 Base address of trace output buffer
221
222- profoffset
223 Offset of first unwritten byte in trace output buffer
224
225- profsize
226 Size of trace output buffer
227
228All of these are set by the 'trace calls' command.
229
230These variables keep track of the amount of data written to the trace
231output buffer by the 'trace' command. The trace commands which write data
232to the output buffer can use these to specify the buffer to write to, and
233update profoffset each time. This allows successive commands to append data
234to the same buffer, for example:
235
236 trace funclist 10000 e00000
237 trace calls
238
239(the latter command appends more data to the buffer).
240
241
242- fakegocmd
243 Specifies commands to run just before booting the OS. This
244 is a useful time to write the trace data to the host for
245 processing.
246
247
248Writing Out Trace Data
249----------------------
250
251Once the trace data is in an output buffer in memory there are various ways
252to transmit it to the host. Notably you can use tftput to send the data
253over a network link:
254
255fakegocmd=trace pause; usb start; set autoload n; bootp;
256 trace calls 10000000 1000000;
257 tftpput ${profbase} ${profoffset} 192.168.1.4:/tftpboot/calls
258
259This starts up USB (to talk to an attached USB Ethernet dongle), writes
260a trace log to address 10000000 and sends it to a host machine using
261TFTP. After this, U-Boot will boot the OS normally, albeit a little
262later.
263
264
265Converting Trace Output Data
266----------------------------
267
268The trace output data is kept in a binary format which is not documented
269here. To convert it into something useful, you can use proftool.
270
271This tool must be given the U-Boot map file and the trace data received
272from running that U-Boot. It produces a text output file.
273
274Options
275 -m <map_file>
276 Specify U-Boot map file
277
278 -p <trace_file>
279 Specifiy profile/trace file
280
281Commands:
282
283- dump-ftrace
284 Write a text dump of the file in Linux ftrace format to stdout
285
286
287Viewing the Trace Data
288----------------------
289
290You can use pytimechart for this (sudo apt-get pytimechart might work on
291your Debian-style machine, and use your favourite search engine to obtain
292documentation). It expects the file to have a .txt extension. The program
293has terse user interface but is very convenient for viewing U-Boot
294profile information.
295
296
297Workflow Suggestions
298--------------------
299
300The following suggestions may be helpful if you are trying to reduce boot
301time:
302
3031. Enable CONFIG_BOOTSTAGE and CONFIG_BOOTSTAGE_REPORT. This should get
304you are helpful overall snapshot of the boot time.
305
3062. Build U-Boot with tracing and run it. Note the difference in boot time
307(it is common for tracing to add 10% to the time)
308
3093. Collect the trace information as descibed above. Use this to find where
310all the time is being spent.
311
3124. Take a look at that code and see if you can optimise it. Perhaps it is
313possible to speed up the initialisation of a device, or remove an unused
314feature.
315
3165. Rebuild, run and collect again. Compare your results.
317
3186. Keep going until you run out of steam, or your boot is fast enough.
319
320
321Configuring Trace
322-----------------
323
324There are a few parameters in the code that you may want to consider.
325There is a function call depth limit (set to 15 by default). When the
326stack depth goes above this then no tracing information is recorded.
327The maximum depth reached is recorded and displayed by the 'trace stats'
328command.
329
330
331Future Work
332-----------
333
334Tracing could be a little tidier in some areas, for example providing
335run-time configuration options for trace.
336
337Some other features that might be useful:
338
339- Trace filter to select which functions are recorded
340- Sample-based profiling using a timer interrupt
341- Better control over trace depth
342- Compression of trace information
343
344
345Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org>
346April 2013
347
README.ubi
1-------------------
2UBI usage in U-Boot
3-------------------
4
5UBI support in U-Boot is broken down into five separate commands.
6The first is the ubi command, which has six subcommands:
7
8=> help ubi
9ubi - ubi commands
10
11Usage:
12ubi part [part] [offset]
13 - Show or set current partition (with optional VID header offset)
14ubi info [l[ayout]] - Display volume and ubi layout information
15ubi create[vol] volume [size] [type] - create volume name with size
16ubi write[vol] address volume size - Write volume from address with size
17ubi write.part address volume size [fullsize]
18 - Write part of a volume from address
19ubi read[vol] address volume [size] - Read volume to address with size
20ubi remove[vol] volume - Remove volume
21[Legends]
22 volume: character name
23 size: specified in bytes
24 type: s[tatic] or d[ynamic] (default=dynamic)
25
26
27The first command that is needed to be issues is "ubi part" to connect
28one mtd partition to the UBI subsystem. This command will either create
29a new UBI device on the requested MTD partition. Or it will attach a
30previously created UBI device. The other UBI commands will only work
31when such a UBI device is attached (via "ubi part"). Here an example:
32
33=> mtdparts
34
35device nor0 <1fc000000.nor_flash>, # parts = 6
36 #: name size offset mask_flags
37 0: kernel 0x00200000 0x00000000 0
38 1: dtb 0x00040000 0x00200000 0
39 2: root 0x00200000 0x00240000 0
40 3: user 0x01ac0000 0x00440000 0
41 4: env 0x00080000 0x01f00000 0
42 5: u-boot 0x00080000 0x01f80000 0
43
44active partition: nor0,0 - (kernel) 0x00200000 @ 0x00000000
45
46defaults:
47mtdids : nor0=1fc000000.nor_flash
48mtdparts: mtdparts=1fc000000.nor_flash:2m(kernel),256k(dtb),2m(root),27392k(user),512k(env),512k(u-boot)
49
50=> ubi part root
51Creating 1 MTD partitions on "nor0":
520x000000240000-0x000000440000 : "mtd=2"
53UBI: attaching mtd1 to ubi0
54UBI: physical eraseblock size: 262144 bytes (256 KiB)
55UBI: logical eraseblock size: 262016 bytes
56UBI: smallest flash I/O unit: 1
57UBI: VID header offset: 64 (aligned 64)
58UBI: data offset: 128
59UBI: attached mtd1 to ubi0
60UBI: MTD device name: "mtd=2"
61UBI: MTD device size: 2 MiB
62UBI: number of good PEBs: 8
63UBI: number of bad PEBs: 0
64UBI: max. allowed volumes: 128
65UBI: wear-leveling threshold: 4096
66UBI: number of internal volumes: 1
67UBI: number of user volumes: 1
68UBI: available PEBs: 0
69UBI: total number of reserved PEBs: 8
70UBI: number of PEBs reserved for bad PEB handling: 0
71UBI: max/mean erase counter: 2/1
72
73
74Now that the UBI device is attached, this device can be modified
75using the following commands:
76
77ubi info Display volume and ubi layout information
78ubi createvol Create UBI volume on UBI device
79ubi removevol Remove UBI volume from UBI device
80ubi read Read data from UBI volume to memory
81ubi write Write data from memory to UBI volume
82ubi write.part Write data from memory to UBI volume, in parts
83
84
85Here a few examples on the usage:
86
87=> ubi create testvol
88Creating dynamic volume testvol of size 1048064
89
90=> ubi info l
91UBI: volume information dump:
92UBI: vol_id 0
93UBI: reserved_pebs 4
94UBI: alignment 1
95UBI: data_pad 0
96UBI: vol_type 3
97UBI: name_len 7
98UBI: usable_leb_size 262016
99UBI: used_ebs 4
100UBI: used_bytes 1048064
101UBI: last_eb_bytes 262016
102UBI: corrupted 0
103UBI: upd_marker 0
104UBI: name testvol
105
106UBI: volume information dump:
107UBI: vol_id 2147479551
108UBI: reserved_pebs 2
109UBI: alignment 1
110UBI: data_pad 0
111UBI: vol_type 3
112UBI: name_len 13
113UBI: usable_leb_size 262016
114UBI: used_ebs 2
115UBI: used_bytes 524032
116UBI: last_eb_bytes 2
117UBI: corrupted 0
118UBI: upd_marker 0
119UBI: name layout volume
120
121=> ubi info
122UBI: MTD device name: "mtd=2"
123UBI: MTD device size: 2 MiB
124UBI: physical eraseblock size: 262144 bytes (256 KiB)
125UBI: logical eraseblock size: 262016 bytes
126UBI: number of good PEBs: 8
127UBI: number of bad PEBs: 0
128UBI: smallest flash I/O unit: 1
129UBI: VID header offset: 64 (aligned 64)
130UBI: data offset: 128
131UBI: max. allowed volumes: 128
132UBI: wear-leveling threshold: 4096
133UBI: number of internal volumes: 1
134UBI: number of user volumes: 1
135UBI: available PEBs: 0
136UBI: total number of reserved PEBs: 8
137UBI: number of PEBs reserved for bad PEB handling: 0
138UBI: max/mean erase counter: 4/1
139
140=> ubi write 800000 testvol 80000
141Volume "testvol" found at volume id 0
142
143=> ubi read 900000 testvol 80000
144Volume testvol found at volume id 0
145read 524288 bytes from volume 0 to 900000(buf address)
146
147=> cmp.b 800000 900000 80000
148Total of 524288 bytes were the same
149
150
151Next, the ubifsmount command allows you to access filesystems on the
152UBI partition which has been attached with the ubi part command:
153
154=> help ubifsmount
155ubifsmount - mount UBIFS volume
156
157Usage:
158ubifsmount <volume-name>
159 - mount 'volume-name' volume
160
161For example:
162
163=> ubifsmount ubi0:recovery
164UBIFS: mounted UBI device 0, volume 0, name "recovery"
165UBIFS: mounted read-only
166UBIFS: file system size: 46473216 bytes (45384 KiB, 44 MiB, 366 LEBs)
167UBIFS: journal size: 6348800 bytes (6200 KiB, 6 MiB, 50 LEBs)
168UBIFS: media format: w4/r0 (latest is w4/r0)
169UBIFS: default compressor: LZO
170UBIFS: reserved for root: 0 bytes (0 KiB)
171
172Note that unlike Linux, U-Boot can only have one active UBI partition
173at a time, which can be referred to as ubi0, and must be supplied along
174with the name of the filesystem you are mounting.
175
176
177Once a UBI filesystem has been mounted, the ubifsls command allows you
178to list the contents of a directory in the filesystem:
179
180
181=> help ubifsls
182ubifsls - list files in a directory
183
184Usage:
185ubifsls [directory]
186 - list files in a 'directory' (default '/')
187
188For example:
189
190=> ubifsls
191 17442 Thu Jan 01 02:57:38 1970 imx28-evk.dtb
192 2998146 Thu Jan 01 02:57:43 1970 zImage
193
194
195And the ubifsload command allows you to load a file from a UBI
196filesystem:
197
198
199=> help ubifsload
200ubifsload - load file from an UBIFS filesystem
201
202Usage:
203ubifsload <addr> <filename> [bytes]
204 - load file 'filename' to address 'addr'
205
206For example:
207
208=> ubifsload ${loadaddr} zImage
209Loading file 'zImage' to addr 0x42000000 with size 2998146 (0x002dbf82)...
210Done
211
212
213Finally, you can unmount the UBI filesystem with the ubifsumount
214command:
215
216=> help ubifsumount
217ubifsumount - unmount UBIFS volume
218
219Usage:
220ubifsumount - unmount current volume
221
222For example:
223
224=> ubifsumount
225Unmounting UBIFS volume recovery!
226
227
228Usage of the UBI CRC skip-check flag of static volumes:
229-------------------------------------------------------
230Some users of static UBI volumes implement their own integrity check,
231thus making the volume CRC check done at open time useless. For
232instance, this is the case when one use the ubiblock + dm-verity +
233squashfs combination, where dm-verity already checks integrity of the
234block device but this time at the block granularity instead of verifying
235the whole volume.
236
237Skipping this test drastically improves the boot-time.
238
239U-Boot now supports the "skip_check" flag to optionally skip the CRC
240check at open time.
241
242Usage: Case A - Upon UBI volume creation:
243You can optionally add "--skipcheck" to the "ubi create" command:
244
245ubi create[vol] volume [size] [type] [id] [--skipcheck]
246 - create volume name with size ('-' for maximum available size)
247
248Usage: Case B - With an already existing UBI volume:
249Use the "ubi skipcheck" command:
250
251ubi skipcheck volume on/off - Set or clear skip_check flag in volume header
252
253Example:
254=> ubi skipcheck rootfs0 on
255Setting skip_check on volume rootfs0
256
257BTW: This saves approx. 10 seconds Linux bootup time on a MT7688 based
258target with 128MiB of SPI NAND.
259
README.ubispl
1Lightweight UBI and UBI fastmap support
2
3# Copyright (C) Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
4#
5# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL 2.0+ BSD-3-Clause
6
7Scans the UBI information and loads the requested static volumes into
8memory.
9
10Configuration Options:
11
12 CONFIG_SPL_UBI
13 Enables the SPL UBI support
14
15 CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_VOL_LEBS
16 The maximum number of logical eraseblocks which a static volume
17 to load can contain. Used for sizing the scan data structure
18
19 CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_PEB_SIZE
20 The maximum physical erase block size. Either a compile time
21 constant or runtime detection. Used for sizing the scan data
22 structure
23
24 CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_PEBS
25 The maximum physical erase block count. Either a compile time
26 constant or runtime detection. Used for sizing the scan data
27 structure
28
29 CONFIG_SPL_UBI_VOL_IDS
30 The maximum volume ids which can be loaded. Used for sizing the
31 scan data structure.
32
33Usage notes:
34
35In the board config file define for example:
36
37#define CONFIG_SPL_UBI
38#define CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_VOL_LEBS 256
39#define CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_PEB_SIZE (256*1024)
40#define CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_PEBS 4096
41#define CONFIG_SPL_UBI_VOL_IDS 8
42
43The size requirement is roughly as follows:
44
45 2k for the basic data structure
46 + CONFIG_SPL_UBI_VOL_IDS * CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_VOL_LEBS * 8
47 + CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_PEBS * 64
48 + CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_PEB_SIZE * UBI_FM_MAX_BLOCKS
49
50The last one is big, but I really don't care in that stage. Real world
51implementations only use the first couple of blocks, but the code
52handles up to UBI_FM_MAX_BLOCKS.
53
54Given the above configuration example the requirement is about 5M
55which is usually not a problem to reserve in the RAM along with the
56other areas like the kernel/dts load address.
57
58So something like this will do the trick:
59
60#define SPL_FINFO_ADDR 0x80800000
61#define SPL_DTB_LOAD_ADDR 0x81800000
62#define SPL_KERNEL_LOAD_ADDR 0x82000000
63
64In the board file, implement the following:
65
66static struct ubispl_load myvolumes[] = {
67 {
68 .vol_id = 0, /* kernel volume */
69 .load_addr = (void *)SPL_KERNEL_LOAD_ADDR,
70 },
71 {
72 .vol_id = 1, /* DT blob */
73 .load_addr = (void *)SPL_DTB_LOAD_ADDR,
74 }
75};
76
77int spl_start_uboot(void)
78{
79 struct ubispl_info info;
80
81 info.ubi = (struct ubi_scan_info *) SPL_FINFO_ADDR;
82 info.fastmap = 1;
83 info.read = nand_spl_read_flash;
84
85#if COMPILE_TIME_DEFINED
86 /*
87 * MY_NAND_NR_SPL_PEBS is the number of physical erase blocks
88 * in the FLASH which are reserved for the SPL. Think about
89 * mtd partitions:
90 *
91 * part_spl { .start = 0, .end = 4 }
92 * part_ubi { .start = 4, .end = NR_PEBS }
93 */
94 info.peb_offset = MY_NAND_NR_SPL_PEBS;
95 info.peb_size = CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE;
96 info.vid_offset = MY_NAND_UBI_VID_OFFS;
97 info.leb_start = MY_NAND_UBI_DATA_OFFS;
98 info.peb_count = MY_NAND_UBI_NUM_PEBS;
99#else
100 get_flash_info(&flash_info);
101 info.peb_offset = MY_NAND_NR_SPL_PEBS;
102 info.peb_size = flash_info.peb_size;
103
104 /*
105 * The VID and Data offset depend on the capability of the
106 * FLASH chip to do subpage writes.
107 *
108 * If the flash chip supports subpage writes, then the VID
109 * header starts at the second subpage. So for 2k pages size
110 * with 4 subpages the VID offset is 512. The DATA offset is 2k.
111 *
112 * If the flash chip does not support subpage writes then the
113 * VID offset is FLASH_PAGE_SIZE and the DATA offset
114 * 2 * FLASH_PAGE_SIZE
115 */
116 info.vid_offset = flash_info.vid_offset;
117 info.leb_start = flash_info.data_offset;
118
119 /*
120 * The flash reports the total number of erase blocks, so
121 * we need to subtract the number of blocks which are reserved
122 * for the SPL itself and not managed by UBI.
123 */
124 info.peb_count = flash_info.peb_count - MY_NAND_NR_SPL_PEBS;
125#endif
126
127 ret = ubispl_load_volumes(&info, myvolumes, ARRAY_SIZE(myvolumes);
128
129 ....
130
131}
132
133Note: you can load any payload that way. You can even load u-boot from
134UBI, so the only non UBI managed FLASH area is the one which is
135reserved for the SPL itself and read from the SoC ROM.
136
137And you can do fallback scenarios:
138
139 if (ubispl_load_volumes(&info, volumes0, ARRAY_SIZE(volumes0)))
140 if (ubispl_load_volumes(&info, volumes1, ARRAY_SIZE(volumes1)))
141 ubispl_load_volumes(&info, vol_uboot, ARRAY_SIZE(vol_uboot));
142
README.ublimage
1---------------------------------------------
2UBL image Boot Image generation using mkimage
3---------------------------------------------
4
5This document describes how to set up an U-Boot image that can be directly
6booted by a DaVinci processor via NAND boot mode, using an UBL header,
7but without need for UBL.
8
9For more details see section 11.2 "ARM ROM Boot Modes" of
10http://focus.ti.com/lit/ug/sprufg5a/sprufg5a.pdf
11
12Command syntax:
13--------------
14./tools/mkimage -l <u-boot_file>
15 to list the UBL image file details
16
17./tools/mkimage -T ublimage \
18 -n <board specific configuration file> \
19 -d <u-boot binary> <output image file>
20
21For example, for the davinci dm365evm board:
22./tools/mkimage -n ./board/davinci/dm365evm/ublimage.cfg \
23 -T ublimage \
24 -d u-boot-nand.bin u-boot.ubl
25
26You can generate the image directly when you compile u-boot with:
27
28$ make u-boot.ubl
29
30The output image can be flashed into the NAND.
31
32Please check the DaVinci documentation for further details.
33
34Board specific configuration file specifications:
35-------------------------------------------------
361. This file must present in the $(BOARDDIR) and the name should be
37 ublimage.cfg (since this is used in Makefile).
382. This file can have empty lines and lines starting with "#" as first
39 character to put comments.
403. This file can have configuration command lines as mentioned below,
41 any other information in this file is treated as invalid.
42
43Configuration command line syntax:
44---------------------------------
451. Each command line must have two strings, first one command or address
46 and second one data string
472. Following are the valid command strings and associated data strings:-
48 Command string data string
49 -------------- -----------
50 MODE UBL special mode, on of:
51 safe
52 Example:
53 MODE safe
54
55 ENTRY Entry point address for the user
56 bootloader (absolute address) = TEXT_BASE
57 nand_spl loader.
58 Example:
59 ENTRY 0x00000020
60
61 PAGES Number of pages (size of user bootloader
62 in number of pages)
63 Example:
64 PAGES 27
65
66 START_BLOCK Block number where user bootloader is present
67 Example:
68 START_BLOCK 5
69
70 START_PAGE Page number where user bootloader is present
71 (for RBL always 0)
72 Example:
73 START_PAGE 0
74
75------------------------------------------------
76
77Structure of the u-boot.ubl binary:
78
79compile steps:
80
811) nand_spl code compile, with pad_to = (TEXT_BASE +
82 (CONFIG_SYS_NROF_PAGES_NAND_SPL * pagesize))
83 Example: cam_enc_4xx pad_to = 0x20 + (6 * 0x800) = 0x3020 = 12320
84 -> u-boot-spl-16k.bin
85
86 !! TEXT_BASE = 0x20, as the RBL starts at 0x20
87
882) compile u-boot.bin ("normal" u-boot)
89 -> u-boot.bin
90
913) create u-boot-nand.bin = u-boot-spl-16k.bin + u-boot.bin
92
934) create u-boot.ubl, size = 1 page size NAND
94 create UBL header and paste it before u-boot.bin
95
96This steps are done automagically if you do a "make all"
97
98-> You get an u-boot.ubl binary, which you can flash
99 into your NAND.
100
101Structure of this binary (Example for the cam_enc_4xx board with a NAND
102page size = 0x800):
103
104offset : 0x00000 | 0x800 | 0x3800
105content: UBL | nand_spl | u-boot code
106 Header | code |
107
108The NAND layout looks for example like this:
109
110(Example for the cam_enc_4xx board with a NAND page size = 0x800, block
111size = 0x20000 and CONFIG_SYS_NROF_UBL_HEADER 5):
112
113offset : 0x80000 | 0xa0000 | 0xa3000
114content: UBL | nand_spl | u-boot code
115 Header | code |
116 ^ ^
117 ^ 0xa0000 = CONFIG_SYS_NROF_UBL_HEADER * 0x20000
118 ^
119 0x80000 = Block 4 * 0x20000
120
121If the cpu starts in NAND boot mode, it checks the UBL descriptor
122starting with block 1 (page 0). When a valid UBL signature is found,
123the corresponding block number (from 1 to 24) is written to the last 32
124bits of ARM internal memory (0x7ffc-0x8000). This feature is provided
125as a basic debug mechanism. If not found, it continues with block 2
126... last possible block is 24
127
128If a valid UBL descriptor is found, the UBL descriptor is read and
129processed. The descriptor gives the information required for loading
130and control transfer to the nand_spl code. The nand_spl code is then
131read and processed.
132
133Once the user-specified start-up conditions are set, the RBL copies the
134nand_spl into ARM internal RAM, starting at address 0x0000: 0020.
135 ^^^^
136
137The nand_spl code itself now does necessary intializations, and at least,
138copies the u-boot code from NAND into RAM, and jumps to it ...
139
140------------------------------------------------
141Author: Heiko Schocher <hs@denx.de>
142
README.uniphier
1U-Boot for UniPhier SoC family
2==============================
3
4
5Recommended toolchains
6----------------------
7
8The UniPhier platform is well tested with Linaro toolchains.
9You can download pre-built toolchains from:
10
11 http://www.linaro.org/downloads/
12
13
14Compile the source
15------------------
16
17The source can be configured and built with the following commands:
18
19 $ make <defconfig>
20 $ make CROSS_COMPILE=<toolchain-prefix> DEVICE_TREE=<device-tree>
21
22The recommended <toolchain-prefix> is `arm-linux-gnueabihf-` for 32bit SoCs,
23`aarch64-linux-gnu-` for 64bit SoCs, but you may wish to change it to use your
24favorite compiler.
25
26The following tables show <defconfig> and <device-tree> for each board.
27
2832bit SoC boards:
29
30 Board | <defconfig> | <device-tree>
31---------------|-----------------------------|------------------------------
32LD4 reference | uniphier_ld4_sld8_defconfig | uniphier-ld4-ref (default)
33sld8 reference | uniphier_ld4_sld8_defconfig | uniphier-sld8-def
34Pro4 reference | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-pro4-ref
35Pro4 Ace | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-pro4-ace
36Pro4 Sanji | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-pro4-sanji
37Pro5 4KBOX | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-pro5-4kbox
38PXs2 Gentil | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-pxs2-gentil
39PXs2 Vodka | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-pxs2-vodka (default)
40LD6b reference | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-ld6b-ref
41
4264bit SoC boards:
43
44 Board | <defconfig> | <device-tree>
45---------------|-----------------------|----------------------------
46LD11 reference | uniphier_v8_defconfig | uniphier-ld11-ref
47LD11 Global | uniphier_v8_defconfig | uniphier-ld11-global
48LD20 reference | uniphier_v8_defconfig | uniphier-ld20-ref (default)
49LD20 Global | uniphier_v8_defconfig | uniphier-ld20-global
50PXs3 reference | uniphier_v8_defconfig | uniphier-pxs3-ref
51
52For example, to compile the source for PXs2 Vodka board, run the following:
53
54 $ make uniphier_v7_defconfig
55 $ make CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-gnueabihf- DEVICE_TREE=uniphier-pxs2-vodka
56
57The device tree marked as (default) can be omitted. `uniphier-pxs2-vodka` is
58the default device tree for the configuration `uniphier_v7_defconfig`, so the
59following gives the same result.
60
61 $ make uniphier_v7_defconfig
62 $ make CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-gnueabihf-
63
64
65Booting 32bit SoC boards
66------------------------
67
68The build command will generate the following:
69- u-boot.bin
70- spl/u-boot.bin
71
72U-Boot can boot UniPhier 32bit SoC boards by itself. Flash the generated images
73to the storage device (NAND or eMMC) on your board.
74
75 - spl/u-boot-spl.bin at the offset address 0x00000000
76 - u-boot.bin at the offset address 0x00020000
77
78The `u-boot-with-spl.bin` is the concatenation of the two (with appropriate
79padding), so you can also do:
80
81 - u-boot-with-spl.bin at the offset address 0x00000000
82
83If a TFTP server is available, the images can be easily updated.
84Just copy the u-boot-spl.bin and u-boot.bin to the TFTP public directory,
85and run the following command at the U-Boot command line:
86
87To update the images in NAND:
88
89 => run nandupdate
90
91To update the images in eMMC:
92
93 => run emmcupdate
94
95
96Booting 64bit SoC boards
97------------------------
98
99The build command will generate the following:
100- u-boot.bin
101
102However, U-Boot is not the first stage loader for UniPhier 64bit SoC boards.
103U-Boot serves as a non-secure boot loader loaded by [ARM Trusted Firmware],
104so you need to provide the `u-boot.bin` to the build command of ARM Trusted
105Firmware.
106
107[ARM Trusted Firmware]: https://github.com/ARM-software/arm-trusted-firmware
108
109
110Verified Boot
111-------------
112
113U-Boot supports an image verification method called "Verified Boot".
114This is a brief tutorial to utilize this feature for the UniPhier platform.
115You will find details documents in the doc/uImage.FIT directory.
116
117Here, we take LD20 reference board for example, but it should work for any
118other boards including 32 bit SoCs.
119
1201. Generate key to sign with
121
122 $ mkdir keys
123 $ openssl genpkey -algorithm RSA -out keys/dev.key \
124 -pkeyopt rsa_keygen_bits:2048 -pkeyopt rsa_keygen_pubexp:65537
125 $ openssl req -batch -new -x509 -key keys/dev.key -out keys/dev.crt
126
127Two files "dev.key" and "dev.crt" will be created. The base name is arbitrary,
128but need to match to the "key-name-hint" property described below.
129
1302. Describe FIT source
131
132You need to write an FIT (Flattened Image Tree) source file to describe the
133structure of the image container.
134
135The following is an example for a simple usecase:
136
137---------------------------------------->8----------------------------------------
138/dts-v1/;
139
140/ {
141 description = "Kernel, DTB and Ramdisk for UniPhier LD20 Reference Board";
142 #address-cells = <1>;
143
144 images {
145 kernel {
146 description = "linux";
147 data = /incbin/("PATH/TO/YOUR/LINUX/DIR/arch/arm64/boot/Image.gz");
148 type = "kernel";
149 arch = "arm64";
150 os = "linux";
151 compression = "gzip";
152 load = <0x82080000>;
153 entry = <0x82080000>;
154 hash-1 {
155 algo = "sha256";
156 };
157 };
158
159 fdt-1 {
160 description = "fdt";
161 data = /incbin/("PATH/TO/YOUR/LINUX/DIR/arch/arm64/boot/dts/socionext/uniphier-ld20-ref.dtb");
162 type = "flat_dt";
163 arch = "arm64";
164 compression = "none";
165 hash-1 {
166 algo = "sha256";
167 };
168 };
169
170 ramdisk {
171 description = "ramdisk";
172 data = /incbin/("PATH/TO/YOUR/ROOTFS/DIR/rootfs.cpio");
173 type = "ramdisk";
174 arch = "arm64";
175 os = "linux";
176 compression = "none";
177 hash-1 {
178 algo = "sha256";
179 };
180 };
181 };
182
183 configurations {
184 default = "config-1";
185
186 config-1 {
187 description = "Configuration0";
188 kernel = "kernel";
189 fdt = "fdt-1";
190 ramdisk = "ramdisk";
191 signature-1 {
192 algo = "sha256,rsa2048";
193 key-name-hint = "dev";
194 sign-images = "kernel", "fdt", "ramdisk";
195 };
196 };
197 };
198};
199---------------------------------------->8----------------------------------------
200
201You need to change the three '/incbin/' lines, depending on the location of
202your kernel image, device tree blob, and init ramdisk. The "load" and "entry"
203properties also need to be adjusted if you want to change the physical placement
204of the kernel.
205
206The "key-name-hint" must specify the key name you have created in the step 1.
207
208The FIT file name is arbitrary. Let's say you saved it into "fit.its".
209
2103. Compile U-Boot with FIT and signature enabled
211
212To use the Verified Boot, you need to enable the following two options:
213 CONFIG_FIT
214 CONFIG_FIT_SIGNATURE
215
216They are disabled by default for UniPhier defconfig files. So, you need to
217tweak the configuration from "make menuconfig" or friends.
218
219 $ make uniphier_v8_defconfig
220 $ make menuconfig
221 [ enable CONFIG_FIT and CONFIG_FIT_SIGNATURE ]
222 $ make CROSS_COMPILE=aarch64-linux-gnu-
223
2244. Build the image tree blob
225
226After building U-Boot, you will see tools/mkimage. With this tool, you can
227create an image tree blob as follows:
228
229 $ tools/mkimage -f fit.its -k keys -K dts/dt.dtb -r -F fitImage
230
231The -k option must specify the key directory you have created in step 1.
232
233A file "fitImage" will be created. This includes kernel, DTB, Init-ramdisk,
234hash data for each of the three, and signature data.
235
236The public key needed for the run-time verification is stored in "dts/dt.dtb".
237
2385. Compile U-Boot again
239
240Since the "dt.dtb" has been updated in step 4, you need to re-compile the
241U-Boot.
242
243 $ make CROSS_COMPILE=aarch64-linux-gnu-
244
245The re-compiled "u-boot.bin" is appended with DTB that contains the public key.
246
2476. Flash the image
248
249Flash the "fitImage" to a storage device (NAND, eMMC, or whatever) on your
250board.
251
252Please note the "u-boot.bin" must be signed, and verified by someone when it is
253loaded. For ARMv8 SoCs, the "someone" is generally ARM Trusted Firmware BL2.
254ARM Trusted Firmware supports an image authentication mechanism called Trusted
255Board Boot (TBB). The verification process must be chained from the moment of
256the system reset. If the Chain of Trust has a breakage somewhere, the verified
257boot process is entirely pointless.
258
2597. Boot verified kernel
260
261Load the fitImage to memory and run the following from the U-Boot command line.
262
263 > bootm <addr>
264
265Here, <addr> is the base address of the fitImage.
266
267If it is successful, you will see messages like follows:
268
269---------------------------------------->8----------------------------------------
270## Loading kernel from FIT Image at 84100000 ...
271 Using 'config-1' configuration
272 Verifying Hash Integrity ... sha256,rsa2048:dev+ OK
273 Trying 'kernel' kernel subimage
274 Description: linux
275 Created: 2017-10-20 14:32:29 UTC
276 Type: Kernel Image
277 Compression: gzip compressed
278 Data Start: 0x841000c8
279 Data Size: 6957818 Bytes = 6.6 MiB
280 Architecture: AArch64
281 OS: Linux
282 Load Address: 0x82080000
283 Entry Point: 0x82080000
284 Hash algo: sha256
285 Hash value: 82a37b7f11ae55f4e07aa25bf77e4067cb9dc1014d52d6cd4d588f92eee3aaad
286 Verifying Hash Integrity ... sha256+ OK
287## Loading ramdisk from FIT Image at 84100000 ...
288 Using 'config-1' configuration
289 Trying 'ramdisk' ramdisk subimage
290 Description: ramdisk
291 Created: 2017-10-20 14:32:29 UTC
292 Type: RAMDisk Image
293 Compression: uncompressed
294 Data Start: 0x847a5cc0
295 Data Size: 5264365 Bytes = 5 MiB
296 Architecture: AArch64
297 OS: Linux
298 Load Address: unavailable
299 Entry Point: unavailable
300 Hash algo: sha256
301 Hash value: 44980a2874154a2e31ed59222c9f8ea968867637f35c81e4107a984de7014deb
302 Verifying Hash Integrity ... sha256+ OK
303## Loading fdt from FIT Image at 84100000 ...
304 Using 'config-1' configuration
305 Trying 'fdt-1' fdt subimage
306 Description: fdt
307 Created: 2017-10-20 14:32:29 UTC
308 Type: Flat Device Tree
309 Compression: uncompressed
310 Data Start: 0x847a2cb0
311 Data Size: 12111 Bytes = 11.8 KiB
312 Architecture: AArch64
313 Hash algo: sha256
314 Hash value: c517099db537f6d325e6be46b25c871a41331ad5af0283883fd29d40bfc14e1d
315 Verifying Hash Integrity ... sha256+ OK
316 Booting using the fdt blob at 0x847a2cb0
317 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
318 reserving fdt memory region: addr=80000000 size=2000000
319 Loading Device Tree to 000000009fffa000, end 000000009fffff4e ... OK
320
321Starting kernel ...
322---------------------------------------->8----------------------------------------
323
324Please pay attention to the lines that start with "Verifying Hash Integrity".
325
326"Verifying Hash Integrity ... sha256,rsa2048:dev+ OK" means the signature check
327passed.
328
329"Verifying Hash Integrity ... sha256+ OK" (3 times) means the hash check passed
330for kernel, DTB, and Init ramdisk.
331
332If they are not displayed, the Verified Boot is not working.
333
334
335Deployment for Distro Boot
336--------------------------
337
338UniPhier SoC family boot the kernel in a generic manner as described in
339doc/README.distro .
340
341To boot the kernel, you need to deploy necesssary components to a file
342system on one of your block devices (eMMC, NAND, USB drive, etc.).
343
344The components depend on the kernel image format.
345
346[1] Bare images
347
348 - kernel
349 - init ramdisk
350 - device tree blob
351 - boot configuration file (extlinux.conf)
352
353Here is an exmple of the configuration file.
354
355-------------------->8--------------------
356menu title UniPhier Boot Options.
357
358timeout 50
359default UniPhier
360
361label UniPhier
362 kernel ../Image
363 initrd ../rootfs.cpio.gz
364 fdtdir ..
365-------------------->8--------------------
366
367Then, write 'Image', 'rootfs.cpio.gz', 'uniphier-ld20-ref.dtb' (DTB depends on
368your board), and 'extlinux/extlinux.conf' to the file system.
369
370[2] FIT
371
372 - FIT blob
373 - boot configuration file (extlinux.conf)
374
375-------------------->8--------------------
376menu title UniPhier Boot Options.
377
378timeout 50
379default UniPhier
380
381label UniPhier
382 kernel ../fitImage
383-------------------->8--------------------
384
385Since the init ramdisk and DTB are contained in the FIT blob,
386you do not need to describe them in the configuration file.
387Write 'fitImage' and 'extlinux/extlinux.conf' to the file system.
388
389
390UniPhier specific commands
391--------------------------
392
393 - pinmon (enabled by CONFIG_CMD_PINMON)
394 shows the boot mode pins that has been latched at the power-on reset
395
396 - ddrphy (enabled by CONFIG_CMD_DDRPHY_DUMP)
397 shows the DDR PHY parameters set by the PHY training
398
399 - ddrmphy (enabled by CONFIG_CMD_DDRMPHY_DUMP)
400 shows the DDR Multi PHY parameters set by the PHY training
401
402
403Supported devices
404-----------------
405
406 - UART (on-chip)
407 - NAND
408 - SD/eMMC
409 - USB 2.0 (EHCI)
410 - USB 3.0 (xHCI)
411 - GPIO
412 - LAN (on-board SMSC9118)
413 - I2C
414 - EEPROM (connected to the on-board I2C bus)
415 - Support card (SRAM, NOR flash, some peripherals)
416
417
418Micro Support Card
419------------------
420
421The recommended bit switch settings are as follows:
422
423 SW2 OFF(1)/ON(0) Description
424 ------------------------------------------
425 bit 1 <---- BKSZ[0]
426 bit 2 ----> BKSZ[1]
427 bit 3 <---- SoC Bus Width 16/32
428 bit 4 <---- SERIAL_SEL[0]
429 bit 5 ----> SERIAL_SEL[1]
430 bit 6 ----> BOOTSWAP_EN
431 bit 7 <---- CS1/CS5
432 bit 8 <---- SOC_SERIAL_DISABLE
433
434 SW8 OFF(1)/ON(0) Description
435 ------------------------------------------
436 bit 1 <---- CS1_SPLIT
437 bit 2 <---- CASE9_ON
438 bit 3 <---- CASE10_ON
439 bit 4 Don't Care Reserve
440 bit 5 Don't Care Reserve
441 bit 6 Don't Care Reserve
442 bit 7 ----> BURST_EN
443 bit 8 ----> FLASHBUS32_16
444
445The BKSZ[1:0] specifies the address range of memory slot and peripherals
446as follows:
447
448 BKSZ Description RAM slot Peripherals
449 --------------------------------------------------------------------
450 0b00 15MB RAM / 1MB Peri 00000000-00efffff 00f00000-00ffffff
451 0b01 31MB RAM / 1MB Peri 00000000-01efffff 01f00000-01ffffff
452 0b10 64MB RAM / 1MB Peri 00000000-03efffff 03f00000-03ffffff
453 0b11 127MB RAM / 1MB Peri 00000000-07efffff 07f00000-07ffffff
454
455Set BSKZ[1:0] to 0b01 for U-Boot.
456This mode is the most handy because EA[24] is always supported by the save pin
457mode of the system bus. On the other hand, EA[25] is not supported for some
458newer SoCs. Even if it is, EA[25] is not connected on most of the boards.
459
460--
461Masahiro Yamada <yamada.masahiro@socionext.com>
462Oct. 2017
463
README.update
1Automatic software update from a TFTP server
2============================================
3
4Overview
5--------
6
7This feature allows to automatically store software updates present on a TFTP
8server in NOR Flash. In more detail: a TFTP transfer of a file given in
9environment variable 'updatefile' from server 'serverip' is attempted during
10boot. The update file should be a FIT file, and can contain one or more
11updates. Each update in the update file has an address in NOR Flash where it
12should be placed, updates are also protected with a SHA-1 checksum. If the
13TFTP transfer is successful, the hash of each update is verified, and if the
14verification is positive, the update is stored in Flash.
15
16The auto-update feature is enabled by the CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP macro:
17
18#define CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP 1
19
20
21Note that when enabling auto-update, Flash support must be turned on. Also,
22one must enable FIT and LIBFDT support:
23
24#define CONFIG_FIT 1
25#define CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT 1
26
27The auto-update feature uses the following configuration knobs:
28
29- CONFIG_UPDATE_LOAD_ADDR
30
31 Normally, TFTP transfer of the update file is done to the address specified
32 in environment variable 'loadaddr'. If this variable is not present, the
33 transfer is made to the address given in CONFIG_UPDATE_LOAD_ADDR (0x100000
34 by default).
35
36- CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX
37 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX
38
39 These knobs control the timeouts during initial connection to the TFTP
40 server. Since a transfer is attempted during each boot, it is undesirable to
41 have a long delay when a TFTP server is not present.
42 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX specifies the number of milliseconds to wait for
43 the server to respond to initial connection, and CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX
44 gives the number of such connection retries. CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX must
45 be non-negative and is 0 by default, CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX must be
46 positive and is 100 by default.
47
48Since the update file is in FIT format, it is created from an *.its file using
49the mkimage tool. dtc tool with support for binary includes, e.g. in version
501.2.0 or later, must also be available on the system where the update file is
51to be prepared. Refer to the doc/uImage.FIT/ directory for more details on FIT
52images.
53
54This mechanism can be also triggered by the command "fitupd".
55If an optional, non-zero address is provided as argument, the TFTP transfer
56is skipped and the image at this address is used.
57The fitupd command is enabled by CONFIG_CMD_FITUPD.
58
59
60Example .its files
61------------------
62
63- doc/uImage.FIT/update_uboot.its
64
65 A simple example that can be used to create an update file for automatically
66 replacing U-Boot image on a system.
67
68 Assuming that an U-Boot image u-boot.bin is present in the current working
69 directory, and that the address given in the 'load' property in the
70 'update_uboot.its' file is where the U-Boot is stored in Flash, the
71 following command will create the actual update file 'update_uboot.itb':
72
73 mkimage -f update_uboot.its update_uboot.itb
74
75 Place 'update_uboot.itb' on a TFTP server, for example as
76 '/tftpboot/update_uboot.itb', and set the 'updatefile' variable
77 appropriately, for example in the U-Boot prompt:
78
79 setenv updatefile /tftpboot/update_uboot.itb
80 saveenv
81
82 Now, when the system boots up and the update TFTP server specified in the
83 'serverip' environment variable is accessible, the new U-Boot image will be
84 automatically stored in Flash.
85
86 NOTE: do make sure that the 'u-boot.bin' image used to create the update
87 file is a good, working image. Also make sure that the address in Flash
88 where the update will be placed is correct. Making mistake here and
89 attempting the auto-update can render the system unusable.
90
91- doc/uImage.FIT/update3.its
92
93 An example containing three updates. It can be used to update Linux kernel,
94 ramdisk and FDT blob stored in Flash. The procedure for preparing the update
95 file is similar to the example above.
96
97TFTP update via DFU
98-------------------
99
100- It is now possible to update firmware (bootloader, kernel, rootfs, etc.) via
101 TFTP by using DFU (Device Firmware Upgrade). More information can be found in
102 ./doc/README.dfutftp documentation entry.
103
README.usb
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2/*
3 * (C) Copyright 2001
4 * Denis Peter, MPL AG Switzerland
5 */
6
7USB Support
8===========
9
10The USB support is implemented on the base of the UHCI Host
11controller.
12
13Currently supported are USB Hubs, USB Keyboards, USB Floppys, USB
14flash sticks and USB network adaptors.
15Tested with a TEAC Floppy TEAC FD-05PUB and Chicony KU-8933 Keyboard.
16
17How it works:
18-------------
19
20The USB (at least the USB UHCI) needs a frame list (4k), transfer
21descripor and queue headers which are all located in the main memory.
22The UHCI allocates every milisecond the PCI bus and reads the current
23frame pointer. This may cause to crash the OS during boot. So the USB
24_MUST_ be stopped during OS boot. This is the reason, why the USB is
25NOT automatically started during start-up. If someone needs the USB
26he has to start it and should therefore be aware that he had to stop
27it before booting the OS.
28
29For USB keyboards this can be done by a script which is automatically
30started after the U-Boot is up and running. To boot an OS with a an
31USB keyboard another script is necessary, which first disables the
32USB and then executes the boot command. If the boot command fails,
33the script can reenable the USB kbd.
34
35Common USB Commands:
36- usb start:
37- usb reset: (re)starts the USB. All USB devices will be
38 initialized and a device tree is build for them.
39- usb tree: shows all USB devices in a tree like display
40- usb info [dev]: shows all USB infos of the device dev, or of all
41 the devices
42- usb stop [f]: stops the USB. If f==1 the USB will also stop if
43 an USB keyboard is assigned as stdin. The stdin
44 is then switched to serial input.
45Storage USB Commands:
46- usb scan: scans the USB for storage devices.The USB must be
47 running for this command (usb start)
48- usb device [dev]: show or set current USB storage device
49- usb part [dev]: print partition table of one or all USB storage
50 devices
51- usb read addr blk# cnt:
52 read `cnt' blocks starting at block `blk#'to
53 memory address `addr'
54- usbboot addr dev:part:
55 boot from USB device
56
57Config Switches:
58----------------
59CONFIG_CMD_USB enables basic USB support and the usb command
60CONFIG_USB_UHCI defines the lowlevel part.A lowlevel part must be defined
61 if using CONFIG_CMD_USB
62CONFIG_USB_KEYBOARD enables the USB Keyboard
63CONFIG_USB_STORAGE enables the USB storage devices
64CONFIG_USB_HOST_ETHER enables USB ethernet adapter support
65
66
67USB Host Networking
68===================
69
70If you have a supported USB Ethernet adapter you can use it in U-Boot
71to obtain an IP address and load a kernel from a network server.
72
73Note: USB Host Networking is not the same as making your board act as a USB
74client. In that case your board is pretending to be an Ethernet adapter
75and will appear as a network interface to an attached computer. In that
76case the connection is via a USB cable with the computer acting as the host.
77
78With USB Host Networking, your board is the USB host. It controls the
79Ethernet adapter to which it is directly connected and the connection to
80the outside world is your adapter's Ethernet cable. Your board becomes an
81independent network device, able to connect and perform network operations
82independently of your computer.
83
84
85Device support
86--------------
87
88Currently supported devices are listed in the drivers according to
89their vendor and product IDs. You can check your device by connecting it
90to a Linux machine and typing 'lsusb'. The drivers are in
91drivers/usb/eth.
92
93For example this lsusb output line shows a device with Vendor ID 0x0x95
94and product ID 0x7720:
95
96Bus 002 Device 010: ID 0b95:7720 ASIX Electronics Corp. AX88772
97
98If you look at drivers/usb/eth/asix.c you will see this line within the
99supported device list, so we know this adapter is supported.
100
101 { 0x0b95, 0x7720 }, /* Trendnet TU2-ET100 V3.0R */
102
103If your adapter is not listed there is a still a chance that it will
104work. Try looking up the manufacturer of the chip inside your adapter.
105or take the adapter apart and look for chip markings. Then add a line
106for your vendor/product ID into the table of the appropriate driver,
107build U-Boot and see if it works. If not then there might be differences
108between the chip in your adapter and the driver. You could try to get a
109datasheet for your device and add support for it to U-Boot. This is not
110particularly difficult - you only need to provide support for four basic
111functions: init, halt, send and recv.
112
113
114Enabling USB Host Networking
115----------------------------
116
117The normal U-Boot commands are used with USB networking, but you must
118start USB first. For example:
119
120usb start
121setenv bootfile /tftpboot/uImage
122bootp
123
124
125To enable USB Host Ethernet in U-Boot, your platform must of course
126support USB with CONFIG_CMD_USB enabled and working. You will need to
127add some config settings to your board config:
128
129CONFIG_CMD_USB=y /* the 'usb' interactive command */
130CONFIG_USB_HOST_ETHER=y /* Enable USB Ethernet adapters */
131
132and one or more of the following for individual adapter hardware:
133
134CONFIG_USB_ETHER_ASIX=y
135CONFIG_USB_ETHER_ASIX88179=y
136CONFIG_USB_ETHER_LAN75XX=y
137CONFIG_USB_ETHER_LAN78XX=y
138CONFIG_USB_ETHER_MCS7830=y
139CONFIG_USB_ETHER_RTL8152=y
140CONFIG_USB_ETHER_SMSC95XX=y
141
142As with built-in networking, you will also want to enable some network
143commands, for example:
144
145CONFIG_CMD_NET=y
146CONFIG_CMD_PING=y
147CONFIG_CMD_DHCP=y
148
149and some bootp options, which tell your board to obtain its subnet,
150gateway IP, host name and boot path from the bootp/dhcp server. These
151settings should start you off:
152
153#define CONFIG_BOOTP_SUBNETMASK
154#define CONFIG_BOOTP_GATEWAY
155#define CONFIG_BOOTP_HOSTNAME
156#define CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTPATH
157
158You can also set the default IP address of your board and the server
159as well as the default file to load when a 'bootp' command is issued.
160However note that encoding these individual network settings into a
161common exectuable is discouraged, as it leads to potential conflicts,
162and all the parameters can either get stored in the board's external
163environment, or get obtained from the bootp server if not set.
164
165#define CONFIG_IPADDR 10.0.0.2 (replace with your value)
166#define CONFIG_SERVERIP 10.0.0.1 (replace with your value)
167#define CONFIG_BOOTFILE "uImage"
168
169
170The 'usb start' command should identify the adapter something like this:
171
172CrOS> usb start
173(Re)start USB...
174USB EHCI 1.00
175scanning bus for devices... 3 USB Device(s) found
176 scanning bus for storage devices... 0 Storage Device(s) found
177 scanning bus for ethernet devices... 1 Ethernet Device(s) found
178CrOS> print ethact
179ethact=asx0
180
181You can see that it found an ethernet device and we can print out the
182device name (asx0 in this case).
183
184Then 'bootp' or 'dhcp' should use it to obtain an IP address from DHCP,
185perhaps something like this:
186
187CrOS> bootp
188Waiting for Ethernet connection... done.
189BOOTP broadcast 1
190BOOTP broadcast 2
191DHCP client bound to address 172.22.73.81
192Using asx0 device
193TFTP from server 172.22.72.144; our IP address is 172.22.73.81
194Filename '/tftpboot/uImage-sjg-seaboard-261347'.
195Load address: 0x40c000
196Loading: #################################################################
197 #################################################################
198 #################################################################
199 ################################################
200done
201Bytes transferred = 3557464 (364858 hex)
202CrOS>
203
204
205Another way of doing this is to issue a tftp command, which will cause the
206bootp to happen automatically.
207
208
209MAC Addresses
210-------------
211
212Most Ethernet dongles have a built-in MAC address which is unique in the
213world. This is important so that devices on the network can be
214distinguised from each other. MAC address conflicts are evil and
215generally result in strange and eratic behaviour.
216
217Some boards have USB Ethernet chips on-board, and these sometimes do not
218have an assigned MAC address. In this case it is up to you to assign
219one which is unique. You should obtain a valid MAC address from a range
220assigned to you before you ship the product.
221
222Built-in Ethernet adapters support setting the MAC address by means of
223an ethaddr environment variable for each interface (ethaddr, eth1addr,
224eth2addr). There is similar support on the USB network side, using the
225names usbethaddr, usbeth1addr, etc. They are kept separate since we
226don't want a USB device taking the MAC address of a built-in device or
227vice versa.
228
229So if your USB Ethernet chip doesn't have a MAC address available then
230you must set usbethaddr to a suitable MAC address. At the time of
231writing this functionality is only supported by the SMSC driver.
232
README.vf610
1U-Boot for Freescale Vybrid VF610
2
3This file contains information for the port of U-Boot to the Freescale Vybrid
4VF610 SoC.
5
61. CONVENTIONS FOR FUSE ASSIGNMENTS
7-----------------------------------
8
91.1 MAC Address: It is stored in fuse bank 4, with the 16 msbs in word 2 and the
10 32 lsbs in word 3.
11
README.video
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2/*
3 * (C) Copyright 2000
4 * Paolo Scaffardi, AIRVENT SAM s.p.a - RIMINI(ITALY), arsenio@tin.it
5 */
6
7"video-mode" environment variable
8=================================
9
10The 'video-mode' environment variable can be used to enable and configure
11some video drivers. The format matches the video= command-line option used
12for Linux:
13
14 video-mode=<driver>:<xres>x<yres>-<depth>@<freq><,option=string>
15
16 <driver> The video driver name, ignored by U-Boot
17 <xres> The X resolution (in pixels) to use.
18 <yres> The Y resolution (in pixels) to use.
19 <depth> The color depth (in bits) to use.
20 <freq> The frequency (in Hz) to use.
21 <options> A comma-separated list of device-specific options
22
23
24U-Boot MPC8xx video controller driver
25=====================================
26
27The driver has been tested with the following configurations:
28
29- MPC823FADS with AD7176 on a PAL TV (YCbYCr) - arsenio@tin.it
30
31Example: video-mode=fslfb:1280x1024-32@60,monitor=dvi
32
33
34U-Boot sunxi video controller driver
35====================================
36
37U-Boot supports hdmi and lcd output on Allwinner sunxi SoCs, lcd output
38requires the CONFIG_VIDEO_LCD_MODE Kconfig value to be set.
39
40The sunxi U-Boot driver supports the following video-mode options:
41
42- monitor=[none|dvi|hdmi|lcd|vga|composite-*] - Select the video output to use
43 none: Disable video output.
44 dvi/hdmi: Selects output over the hdmi connector with dvi resp. hdmi output
45 format, if edid is used the format is automatically selected.
46 lcd: Selects video output to a LCD screen.
47 vga: Selects video output over the VGA connector.
48 composite-pal/composite-ntsc/composite-pal-m/composite-pal-nc:
49 Selects composite video output, note the specified resolution is
50 ignored with composite video output.
51 Defaults to monitor=dvi.
52
53- hpd=[0|1] - Enable use of the hdmi HotPlug Detect feature
54 0: Disabled. Configure dvi/hdmi output even if no cable is detected
55 1: Enabled. Fallback to the lcd / vga / none in that order (if available)
56 Defaults to hpd=1.
57
58- hpd_delay=<int> - How long to wait for the hdmi HPD signal in milliseconds
59 When the monitor and the board power up at the same time, it may take some
60 time for the monitor to assert the HPD signal. This configures how long to
61 wait for the HPD signal before assuming no cable is connected.
62 Defaults to hpd_delay=500.
63
64- edid=[0|1] - Enable use of DDC + EDID to get monitor info
65 0: Disabled.
66 1: Enabled. If valid EDID info was read from the monitor the EDID info will
67 overrides the xres, yres and refresh from the video-mode env. variable.
68 Defaults to edid=1.
69
70- overscan_x/overscan_y=<int> - Set x/y overscan value
71 This configures a black border on the left and right resp. top and bottom
72 to deal with overscanning displays. Defaults to overscan_x=32 and
73 overscan_y=20 for composite monitors, 0 for other monitors.
74
75For example to always use the hdmi connector, even if no cable is inserted,
76using edid info when available and otherwise initalizing it at 1024x768@60Hz,
77use: "setenv video-mode sunxi:1024x768-24@60,monitor=dvi,hpd=0,edid=1".
78
79
80TrueType fonts
81--------------
82
83U-Boot supports the use of antialiased TrueType fonts on some platforms. This
84has been tested in x86, ARMv7 and sandbox.
85
86To enable this, select CONFIG_CONSOLE_TRUETYPE. You can choose between several
87fonts, with CONSOLE_TRUETYPE_NIMBUS being the default.
88
89TrueType support requires floating point at present. On ARMv7 platforms you
90need to disable use of the private libgcc. You can do this by disabling
91CONFIG_USE_PRIVATE_LIBGCC. See chromebook_jerry for an example. Note that this
92increases U-Boot's size by about 70KB at present.
93
94On ARM you should also make sure your toolchain supports hardfp. This is
95normally given in the name of your toolchain, e.g. arm-linux-gnueabihf (hf
96means hardware floating point). You can also run gcc with -v to see if it has
97this option.
98
README.virtio
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2#
3# Copyright (C) 2018, Bin Meng <bmeng.cn@gmail.com>
4
5VirtIO Support
6==============
7
8This document describes the information about U-Boot support for VirtIO [1]
9devices, including supported boards, build instructions, driver details etc.
10
11What's VirtIO?
12--------------
13VirtIO is a virtualization standard for network and disk device drivers where
14just the guest's device driver "knows" it is running in a virtual environment,
15and cooperates with the hypervisor. This enables guests to get high performance
16network and disk operations, and gives most of the performance benefits of
17paravirtualization. In the U-Boot case, the guest is U-Boot itself, while the
18virtual environment are normally QEMU [2] targets like ARM, RISC-V and x86.
19
20Status
21------
22VirtIO can use various different buses, aka transports as described in the
23spec. While VirtIO devices are commonly implemented as PCI devices on x86,
24embedded devices models like ARM/RISC-V, which does not normally come with
25PCI support might use simple memory mapped device (MMIO) instead of the PCI
26device. The memory mapped virtio device behaviour is based on the PCI device
27specification. Therefore most operations including device initialization,
28queues configuration and buffer transfers are nearly identical. Both MMIO
29and PCI transport options are supported in U-Boot.
30
31The VirtIO spec defines a lots of VirtIO device types, however at present only
32network and block device, the most two commonly used devices, are supported.
33
34The following QEMU targets are supported.
35
36 - qemu_arm_defconfig
37 - qemu_arm64_defconfig
38 - qemu-riscv32_defconfig
39 - qemu-riscv64_defconfig
40 - qemu-x86_defconfig
41 - qemu-x86_64_defconfig
42
43Note ARM and RISC-V targets are configured with VirtIO MMIO transport driver,
44and on x86 it's the PCI transport driver.
45
46Build Instructions
47------------------
48Building U-Boot for pre-configured QEMU targets is no different from others.
49For example, we can do the following with the CROSS_COMPILE environment
50variable being properly set to a working toolchain for ARM:
51
52 $ make qemu_arm_defconfig
53 $ make
54
55You can even create a QEMU ARM target with VirtIO devices showing up on both
56MMIO and PCI buses. In this case, you can enable the PCI transport driver
57from 'make menuconfig':
58
59Device Drivers --->
60 ...
61 VirtIO Drivers --->
62 ...
63 [*] PCI driver for virtio devices
64
65Other drivers are at the same location and can be tuned to suit the needs.
66
67Requirements
68------------
69It is required that QEMU v2.5.0+ should be used to test U-Boot VirtIO support
70on QEMU ARM and x86, and v2.12.0+ on QEMU RISC-V.
71
72Testing
73-------
74The following QEMU command line is used to get U-Boot up and running with
75VirtIO net and block devices on ARM.
76
77 $ qemu-system-arm -nographic -machine virt -bios u-boot.bin \
78 -netdev tap,ifname=tap0,id=net0 \
79 -device virtio-net-device,netdev=net0 \
80 -drive if=none,file=test.img,format=raw,id=hd0 \
81 -device virtio-blk-device,drive=hd0
82
83On x86, command is slightly different to create PCI VirtIO devices.
84
85 $ qemu-system-i386 -nographic -bios u-boot.rom \
86 -netdev tap,ifname=tap0,id=net0 \
87 -device virtio-net-pci,netdev=net0 \
88 -drive if=none,file=test.img,format=raw,id=hd0 \
89 -device virtio-blk-pci,drive=hd0
90
91Additional net and block devices can be created by appending more '-device'
92parameters. It is also possible to specify both MMIO and PCI VirtIO devices.
93For example, the following commnad creates 3 VirtIO devices, with 1 on MMIO
94and 2 on PCI bus.
95
96 $ qemu-system-arm -nographic -machine virt -bios u-boot.bin \
97 -netdev tap,ifname=tap0,id=net0 \
98 -device virtio-net-pci,netdev=net0 \
99 -drive if=none,file=test0.img,format=raw,id=hd0 \
100 -device virtio-blk-device,drive=hd0 \
101 -drive if=none,file=test1.img,format=raw,id=hd1 \
102 -device virtio-blk-pci,drive=hd1
103
104By default QEMU creates VirtIO legacy devices by default. To create non-legacy
105(aka modern) devices, pass additional device property/value pairs like below:
106
107 $ qemu-system-i386 -nographic -bios u-boot.rom \
108 -netdev tap,ifname=tap0,id=net0 \
109 -device virtio-net-pci,netdev=net0,disable-legacy=true,disable-modern=false \
110 -drive if=none,file=test.img,format=raw,id=hd0 \
111 -device virtio-blk-pci,drive=hd0,disable-legacy=true,disable-modern=false
112
113A 'virtio' command is provided in U-Boot shell.
114
115 => virtio
116 virtio - virtio block devices sub-system
117
118 Usage:
119 virtio scan - initialize virtio bus
120 virtio info - show all available virtio block devices
121 virtio device [dev] - show or set current virtio block device
122 virtio part [dev] - print partition table of one or all virtio block devices
123 virtio read addr blk# cnt - read `cnt' blocks starting at block
124 `blk#' to memory address `addr'
125 virtio write addr blk# cnt - write `cnt' blocks starting at block
126 `blk#' from memory address `addr'
127
128To probe all the VirtIO devices, type:
129
130 => virtio scan
131
132Then we can show the connected block device details by:
133
134 => virtio info
135 Device 0: QEMU VirtIO Block Device
136 Type: Hard Disk
137 Capacity: 4096.0 MB = 4.0 GB (8388608 x 512)
138
139And list the directories and files on the disk by:
140
141 => ls virtio 0 /
142 <DIR> 4096 .
143 <DIR> 4096 ..
144 <DIR> 16384 lost+found
145 <DIR> 4096 dev
146 <DIR> 4096 proc
147 <DIR> 4096 sys
148 <DIR> 4096 var
149 <DIR> 4096 etc
150 <DIR> 4096 usr
151 <SYM> 7 bin
152 <SYM> 8 sbin
153 <SYM> 7 lib
154 <SYM> 9 lib64
155 <DIR> 4096 run
156 <DIR> 4096 boot
157 <DIR> 4096 home
158 <DIR> 4096 media
159 <DIR> 4096 mnt
160 <DIR> 4096 opt
161 <DIR> 4096 root
162 <DIR> 4096 srv
163 <DIR> 4096 tmp
164 0 .autorelabel
165
166Driver Internals
167----------------
168There are 3 level of drivers in the VirtIO driver family.
169
170 +---------------------------------------+
171 | virtio device drivers |
172 | +-------------+ +------------+ |
173 | | virtio-net | | virtio-blk | |
174 | +-------------+ +------------+ |
175 +---------------------------------------+
176 +---------------------------------------+
177 | virtio transport drivers |
178 | +-------------+ +------------+ |
179 | | virtio-mmio | | virtio-pci | |
180 | +-------------+ +------------+ |
181 +---------------------------------------+
182 +----------------------+
183 | virtio uclass driver |
184 +----------------------+
185
186The root one is the virtio uclass driver (virtio-uclass.c), which does lots of
187common stuff for the transport drivers (virtio_mmio.c, virtio_pci.c). The real
188virtio device is discovered in the transport driver's probe() method, and its
189device ID is saved in the virtio uclass's private data of the transport device.
190Then in the virtio uclass's post_probe() method, the real virtio device driver
191(virtio_net.c, virtio_blk.c) is bound if there is a match on the device ID.
192
193The child_post_bind(), child_pre_probe() and child_post_probe() methods of the
194virtio uclass driver help bring the virtio device driver online. They do things
195like acknowledging device, feature negotiation, etc, which are really common
196for all virtio devices.
197
198The transport drivers provide a set of ops (struct dm_virtio_ops) for the real
199virtio device driver to call. These ops APIs's parameter is designed to remind
200the caller to pass the correct 'struct udevice' id of the virtio device, eg:
201
202int virtio_get_status(struct udevice *vdev, u8 *status)
203
204So the parameter 'vdev' indicates the device should be the real virtio device.
205But we also have an API like:
206
207struct virtqueue *vring_create_virtqueue(unsigned int index, unsigned int num,
208 unsigned int vring_align,
209 struct udevice *udev)
210
211Here the parameter 'udev' indicates the device should be the transport device.
212Similar naming is applied in other functions that are even not APIs, eg:
213
214static int virtio_uclass_post_probe(struct udevice *udev)
215static int virtio_uclass_child_pre_probe(struct udevice *vdev)
216
217So it's easy to tell which device these functions are operating on.
218
219Development Flow
220----------------
221At present only VirtIO network card (device ID 1) and block device (device
222ID 2) are supported. If you want to develop new driver for new devices,
223please follow the guideline below.
224
2251. add new device ID in virtio.h
226#define VIRTIO_ID_XXX X
227
2282. update VIRTIO_ID_MAX_NUM to be the largest device ID plus 1
229
2303. add new driver name string in virtio.h
231#define VIRTIO_XXX_DRV_NAME "virtio-xxx"
232
2334. create a new driver with name set to the name string above
234U_BOOT_DRIVER(virtio_xxx) = {
235 .name = VIRTIO_XXX_DRV_NAME,
236 ...
237 .remove = virtio_reset,
238 .flags = DM_FLAG_ACTIVE_DMA,
239}
240
241Note the driver needs to provide the remove method and normally this can be
242hooked to virtio_reset(). The driver flags should contain DM_FLAG_ACTIVE_DMA
243for the remove method to be called before jumping to OS.
244
2455. provide bind() method in the driver, where virtio_driver_features_init()
246 should be called for driver to negotiate feature support with the device.
247
2486. do funny stuff with the driver
249
250References
251----------
252[1] http://docs.oasis-open.org/virtio/virtio/v1.0/virtio-v1.0.pdf
253[2] https://www.qemu.org
254
README.vxworks
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
2#
3# Copyright (C) 2013, Miao Yan <miao.yan@windriver.com>
4# Copyright (C) 2015-2018, Bin Meng <bmeng.cn@gmail.com>
5# Copyright (C) 2019, Lihua Zhao <lihua.zhao@windriver.com>
6
7VxWorks Support
8===============
9
10This document describes the information about U-Boot loading VxWorks kernel.
11
12Status
13------
14U-Boot supports loading VxWorks kernels via 'bootvx' and 'bootm' commands.
15For booting old kernels (6.9.x) on PowerPC and ARM, and all kernel versions
16on other architectures, 'bootvx' shall be used. For booting VxWorks 7 kernels
17on PowerPC and ARM, 'bootm' shall be used.
18
19With CONFIG_EFI_LOADER option, it's possible to chain load a VxWorks x86 kernel
20via the UEFI boot loader application for VxWorks loaded by 'bootefi' command.
21
22VxWorks 7 on PowerPC and ARM
23---------------------------
24From VxWorks 7, VxWorks starts adopting device tree as its hardware description
25mechanism (for PowerPC and ARM), thus requiring boot interface changes.
26This section will describe the new interface.
27
28Since VxWorks 7 SR0640 release, VxWorks starts using Linux compatible standard
29DTB for some boards. With that, the exact same bootm flow as used by Linux is
30used, which includes board-specific DTB fix up. To keep backward compatibility,
31only when the least significant bit of flags in bootargs is set, the standard
32DTB will be used. Otherwise it falls back to the legacy bootm flow.
33
34For legacy bootm flow, make sure the least significant bit of flags in bootargs
35is cleared. The calling convention is described below:
36
37For PowerPC, the calling convention of the new VxWorks entry point conforms to
38the ePAPR standard, which is shown below (see ePAPR for more details):
39
40 void (*kernel_entry)(fdt_addr, 0, 0, EPAPR_MAGIC, boot_IMA, 0, 0)
41
42For ARM, the calling convention is shown below:
43
44 void (*kernel_entry)(void *fdt_addr)
45
46When using the Linux compatible standard DTB, the calling convention of VxWorks
47entry point is exactly the same as the Linux kernel.
48
49When booting a VxWorks 7 kernel (uImage format), the parameters passed to bootm
50is like below:
51
52 bootm <kernel image address> - <device tree address>
53
54VxWorks bootline
55----------------
56When using 'bootvx', the kernel bootline must be prepared by U-Boot at a
57board-specific address before loading VxWorks. U-Boot supplies its address
58via "bootaddr" environment variable. To check where the bootline should be
59for a specific board, go to the VxWorks BSP for that board, and look for a
60parameter called BOOT_LINE_ADRS. Assign its value to "bootaddr". A typical
61value for "bootaddr" on an x86 board is 0x101200.
62
63If a "bootargs" variable is defined, its content will be copied to the memory
64location pointed by "bootaddr" as the kernel bootline. If "bootargs" is not
65there, command 'bootvx' can construct a valid bootline using the following
66environments variables: bootdev, bootfile, ipaddr, netmask, serverip,
67gatewayip, hostname, othbootargs.
68
69When using 'bootm', just define "bootargs" in the environment and U-Boot will
70handle bootline fix up for the kernel dtb automatically.
71
72When using 'bootefi' to chain load an x86 kernel, the UEFI boot loader
73application for VxWorks takes care of the kernel bootline preparation.
74
75Serial console
76--------------
77It's very common that VxWorks BSPs configure a different baud rate for the
78serial console from what is being used by U-Boot. For example, VxWorks tends
79to use 9600 as the default baud rate on all x86 BSPs while U-Boot uses 115200.
80Please configure both U-Boot and VxWorks to use the same baud rate, or it may
81look like VxWorks hangs somewhere as nothing outputs on the serial console.
82
83x86-specific information
84------------------------
85Before direct loading an x86 kernel via 'bootvx', one additional environment
86variable need to be provided. This is "vx_phys_mem_base", which represent the
87physical memory base address of VxWorks.
88
89Check VxWorks kernel configuration to look for LOCAL_MEM_LOCAL_ADRS. For
90VxWorks 7, this is normally a virtual address and you need find out its
91corresponding physical address and assign its value to "vx_phys_mem_base".
92
93For boards on which ACPI is not supported by U-Boot yet, VxWorks kernel must
94be configured to use MP table and virtual wire interrupt mode. This requires
95INCLUDE_MPTABLE_BOOT_OP and INCLUDE_VIRTUAL_WIRE_MODE to be included in a
96VxWorks kernel configuration.
97
98Both 32-bit x86 and 64-bit x64 kernels can be loaded.
99
100There are two types of graphics console drivers in VxWorks. One is the 80x25
101VGA text mode driver. The other one is the EFI console bitmapped graphics mode
102driver. To make these drivers function, U-Boot needs to load and run the VGA
103BIOS of the graphics card first.
104
105 - If the kernel is configured with 80x25 VGA text mode driver,
106 CONFIG_FRAMEBUFFER_SET_VESA_MODE must be unset in U-Boot.
107 - If the kernel is configured with bitmapped graphics mode driver,
108 CONFIG_FRAMEBUFFER_SET_VESA_MODE need remain set but care must be taken
109 at which VESA mode is to be set. The supported pixel format is 32-bit
110 RGBA, hence the available VESA mode can only be one of the following:
111 * FRAMEBUFFER_VESA_MODE_10F
112 * FRAMEBUFFER_VESA_MODE_112
113 * FRAMEBUFFER_VESA_MODE_115
114 * FRAMEBUFFER_VESA_MODE_118
115 * FRAMEBUFFER_VESA_MODE_11B
116
README.watchdog
1Watchdog driver general info
2
3CONFIG_HW_WATCHDOG
4 This enables hw_watchdog_reset to be called during various loops,
5 including waiting for a character on a serial port. But it
6 does not also call hw_watchdog_init. Boards which want this
7 enabled must call this function in their board file. This split
8 is useful because some rom's enable the watchdog when downloading
9 new code, so it must be serviced, but the board would rather it
10 was off. And, it cannot always be turned off once on.
11
12CONFIG_WATCHDOG_TIMEOUT_MSECS
13 Can be used to change the timeout for i.mx31/35/5x/6x.
14 If not given, will default to maximum timeout. This would
15 be 128000 msec for i.mx31/35/5x/6x.
16
17CONFIG_WDT_AT91
18 Available for AT91SAM9 to service the watchdog.
19
20CONFIG_FTWDT010_WATCHDOG
21 Available for FTWDT010 to service the watchdog.
22
23CONFIG_FTWDT010_HW_TIMEOUT
24 Can be used to change the timeout for FTWDT010.
25
26CONFIG_IMX_WATCHDOG
27 Available for i.mx31/35/5x/6x to service the watchdog. This is not
28 automatically set because some boards (vision2) still need to define
29 their own hw_watchdog_reset routine.
30 TODO: vision2 is removed now, so perhaps this can be changed.
31
32CONFIG_XILINX_TB_WATCHDOG
33 Available for Xilinx Axi platforms to service timebase watchdog timer.
34
README.zfs
1This patch series adds support for ZFS listing and load to u-boot.
2
3To Enable zfs ls and load commands, modify the board specific config file with
4#define CONFIG_CMD_ZFS
5
6Steps to test:
7
81. After applying the patch, zfs specific commands can be seen
9 in the boot loader prompt using
10 UBOOT #help
11
12 zfsload- load binary file from a ZFS file system
13 zfsls - list files in a directory (default /)
14
152. To list the files in zfs pool, device or partition, execute
16 zfsls <interface> <dev[:part]> [POOL/@/dir/file]
17 For example:
18 UBOOT #zfsls mmc 0:5 /rpool/@/usr/bin/
19
203. To read and load a file from an ZFS formatted partition to RAM, execute
21 zfsload <interface> <dev[:part]> [addr] [filename] [bytes]
22 For example:
23 UBOOT #zfsload mmc 2:2 0x30007fc0 /rpool/@/boot/uImage
24
25References :
26 -- ZFS GRUB sources from Solaris GRUB-0.97
27 -- GRUB Bazaar repository
28
29Jorgen Lundman <lundman at lundman.net> 2012.
30